Home

Expert ExpertViews

1. visible invisible visiblestepx value visiblestepy value fs pergrioa nosupergrid sgridstepx value sgridstepy value autogrid noautogrid autonormal autodense autosparse dott edaria T solvdg ria LO LO E ME OO Simucad grid similarly to 17 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Arguments None Named Arguments layer layername type STRING Specifies the layer for which grid settings will be applied goes with layergrid switch only minstep value type INTEGER Specifies the minimal grid step in nanometers snapstepx value type INTEGER Specifies the snap grid step in minimal grid units snapstepy value type INTEGER Specifies the snap grid step in minimal grid units along Y direction if different from the snap grid along X direction snapratiox value type INTEGER Specifies the ratio between visual and snap grid now supported ratio 1 1 1 2 1 2 5 1 5 and 10 1 10 snapratioy value type INTEGER Specifies the ratio between visual and snap grid along Y direction if different from the ratio along X direction visiblestepx value type INTEGER Specifies the visual grid step in minimal grid units visiblestepy value type INTEGER Specifies the visual grid step in minimal grid units along Y direction if different from the visual grid step in X direction sgridstepx value type INTEGER Specifies the
2. File Gell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help MES 6 8 sBaQn ab A Ph E Ht ew x Feoo000 Y 14247000 um x jae B Ur o x z SOO5T999 ST ci k ae oh MS DE Wd Bex iG O F b dh 1d rr ix Hi EII a a a a a a a a a PR PIP a RE RP PPP a a RP PP Selected Objects YZZZIZZZZZ IZ AAA AA AAA AAA AAA AAAs DER EBR E E E E E AAA AAA E AAA AAA E Hans if 45 NS AY NY Y x i VPZZZZLL LLL LLL LLL LCL LLL LLL ELL CRORE CCL LOLOL LLL LLL AS Property Value VIJIZZALALILLLLILLILLALILLLLELLLLEALILLABVU LELCHEVZZZLEALELLLLLLLLLALLLLLLALL LL REY Layer ShortPath Vertices points Width 1 End Extend HA n ALLE ZI a a hihi EEE a a a hee a ANAL I a E EN 5 Join Extend JIZIILLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLELLELELELLELELLLELLLRBLARN A AAA AA BE BE AE E E AE AAA VA N et N a NENE NE SE SE SE SETE EE E ES EE E E AAA AAA AAA ls Pin VIJLLLLLALELLLLELLLLLLLELLLLELLLLL zzz ZW Custom 0 proper A ge Sg eee SY deselect all wire 57 7 1383 6 162 5 1381 5 162 5 1378 5 111 1377 111 1413 56 4 1412 7 Awidth 1 fextend extjoint layer ShortPath find select zoom all zoom inwindow 320 256 1041 81 492 767 263 982 zoom inwindow 213 854 1281 41 248 406 130 272 zoom inwindow 174 9 1352 26 132 157 61 5917 El gt display node_get_nameO v
3. Substrate ulk BulkConnect Lay15 li Stipple Color ww wireframe Default Solid Stipple Figure 9 6 Individual filling mode selection Viewing the Layout A more advanced way to set change individual filling modes is described in Chapter 11 Setup Section Layer Plans Filling Selectivity Visibility and Inclusion 9 2 2 Individual Filling Modes for the Active Layer The View gt Filling gt Active Layer Mode submenu is used to assign the filling mode for the active layer One of the four values may be selected wireframe solid stipple and no change This setting defines the filling mode of the active layer When the layer is activated its filling is controlled by this setting When the layer is deactivated its filling mode is restored to the previous one For example it is sometimes convenient to see all layers in wireframe and the active layer is always highlighted by being drawn filled This setting is repeated in the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Viewing form Simucad 9 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 9 3 Panning Commands Purpose Shifts the image inside the current window It permits you to make visible the required neighborhood of the edited area or to roam across the layout There are several ways of panning in the View Pan submenu see Figure 9 7 View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window H x 38 0000 Next view
4. criteria criterion criterion criterion is a sequence of search criterion type SEARCHCRITERION Use SEARCH CRITERION_CREATE on page 17 111 for creating search criterion search_rect rect type RECT Specifies the search region If the named argument is not specified then a search in the whole cell will be performed Switches 17 70 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell cross inside Cluster of switches to locate Valid only if the search region is specified e cross switch means that search will be performed among layout objects intersecting the search region e inside switch means that search will be executed inside search region selected If specified then a search will be performed among selected objects only visible If specified then a search will be performed among visible objects only hierarchy If specified then a search through the cell hierarchy will be performed seq_output If specified then search results will be returned rather in the form of a sequence of layout objects type SEQUENCE then as a container of layout objects type OBJECTCONTAINER Return Value objs type OBJECTCONTAINER SEQUENCE Searched layout objects that satisfy all search criteria in the form of container of layout objects type OBJECTCONTAINER or sequence of layout objects type SEQUENCE depending from seq_output switch See the description for the OBJECTCONTAINER data type in
5. 17 78 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Cluster of switches defines scaling type total is the default switch EAlstetop ACONTEPLOD l rirgheton FLetemia eCenrormre fragntmic leftbottom centerbottom rightbottom nearest Cluster of switches defines the location of scaling reference point not valid for total scaling both dimension and placement scaling type centerbottom is the default switch selected If specified then only selected objects will be scaled The whole layout will be scaled otherwise SNAP GRID Snaps selected objects or whole layout to the specified grid Format SNAP GRID snap minimal visual custom stepx value stepy value shiftx value shifty value nearest northeast outwards inwards refpointx value refpointy value savesquare save45 cutspikes selected Named Arguments stepx type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies custom grid step in X direction stepy type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies custom grid step in Y direction shiftx type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the shift of custom grid step in X direction with respect to origin shifty type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the shift of custom grid step in Y direction with respect to origin Note Named arguments stepx stepy shiftx and shifty are used only for custom grid switch c
6. Clear all Recent Files Deletes the list of Recent Files This option is located under the Recent Files option Exit Terminates execution of EXPERT Simucad 4 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual New Opens a window allowing the creation of a new cell or parameterized cell Pcell See Chapter 15 Plotting for more information about Printing commands File Cell Edit View Select 4 New Ctrl Open Cho x Close E Save Chris Save 45 Save Cells Import Export Reload Compress Info Page Setup En Print Previews r Print Print Status Recent Files IE Exit Figure 4 1 File Submenu The functions activated from the Cell submenu allow you to manipulate with whole cells see Figure 4 2 Open Opens an existing cell Cell Edit view Select Y Mew mi Open Descend Create 7 Delete Copy 5 Rename Import Export Save Save Cell As Discard Changes Read Only Info Selection Info Figure 4 2 Cell Submenu Descend Opens the cell for the selected or preselected cell instance in another Layout window Simucad Project Cell Commands Create Creates a new cell from the selected objects TDelete Deletes selected cells Copy Duplicates cells with new names Rename Renames cells tImport Import a cell from one of many format ELD SLD GDSII CIF APL OASIS LEF DEF in your curr
7. Modified For non shared libraries this column shows the date and time of the last modification of the library or any its cells For shared libraries it shows the last modification date and time for the library technology only Add Button Library Setup It is used to add libraries into the setup When you click this button the Add Library dialog shown in Figure 16 16 2 appears Expert 4 0 7 build 863d 05t999 SO05T999_ST _ File Cell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help IBSRB 4BRQglSaR RAOAY PRE Erase Wh loss als HA FA A OO E l x 2876 9000 Y 2012 3000 um y Library List ETT Project file ar Scan Active Look in aom O BM z m E3 lt 05t999 gt N Demo 05t999 eld Exclusive Add Library 2 x Logical name Exclusive Exclusive Exclusive Exclusive File name 05t999_Leld Sa Il Files of type Expert Files eld E l Exclusive Exclusive Figure 16 2 Adding a library to setup You can type the logical name and pathname however the file must exist Therefore the easiest way is to click at the file browser button the one with three dots on the right side in the Add library dialog box You will see an ordinary file browser dialog If you select a eld or s1d file and click the Open button the selected file selected path will be shown in the Add Library dialog box as shown in Figure 16 16 3 16 4 Simucad Libraries and Ve
8. This submenu contains commands to perform simple editing of the layout in terms of selected highlighted objects e cut copy paste using clipboard e geometrical transformations as well as e access to user defined object properties e search according to various criteria e stretch operation etc The Tools submenu of EXPERT contains still other complex editing operations described in Chapter 12 Tools Note The shape of the cursor is usually indicative of the current editing operation of EXPERT Note When EXPERT is not running editing operations it is said that the Void Tool is running It is advisable to set this mode to prevent inadvertent editing during browsing of the layout Set EXPERT in this mode by using the Tools Void Tool menu command Note When you exit from any editing mode e g by hitting the lt Esc gt key the editing state of EXPERT is switched to the Default tool The latter one can be either the Void tool or the Select tool The choice depends on the Selection tool as default setting in the Setup Editor Viewer Editing form see Chapter 11 Setup Simucad 8 1 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Expert Clipboard Paste Ctrl Paste Ibo Layer Y U Figure 8 1 Edit Submenu Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 2 Expert Clipboard The EXPERT Clipboard is the editing buffer designed for temporary storage of layout objects It may be used in the same way as
9. with the switch get or FIND OBJECTS procedure Section 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures to obtain layout objects Example gt Xbox 0 0 5 5 fereare ger gt select object bb First command creates box on the active layer with specified attributes and returns it as variable bb Second command selects specified box SELECT TYPE Selects objects of the specified type in the current cell Format SELECT TYPE object_type Arguments object_type predefined constants Specifies the type of layout objects for selecting The following predefined constants are applicable LOT _ANY OBJECT Selects all objects equivalently SELECT ALL commands LOT _ANY SHAPE Selects all but instance and arrays LOT BOX Selects only boxes LOT ELLIPSE Selects only ellipces LOT_REGION Selects regions LOT_WIRE Selects wires LO BEST Selects texts GOT INSTANCE Selects instances and arrays LOT_ARRAY Selects arrays Example gt select object LOT BOX Selects all boxes in the current cell 17 64 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 10 Edit Commands COPY LAYER Copies the set of selected objects into the layer Format COPY LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name type STRING The name of a layer optional parameter if it is absent objects are copied into the active layer in the edited cell Example gt copy layer Metal21 Selected objects are copied to layer Metall COPY
10. 8 7 Stretch Operation 8 7 1 Overview This operation allows you to modify several sides of several regions and several wires at the same time Most time Stretch operation will consist of two steps e Picking several region sides and or several wire segments possibly from different regions boxes and wires They will move during the stretch e Specifying the amount of the stretch stretching shift All picked parts of objects will be moved stretched on that vector Sometimes you will also need to change some options which affect how Stretch works This option will be described further During the stretch the segments will be classified as movable fixed or stretchable e The picked segments will be moved as a whole so they are called movable e The segments with both ends shared with some picked segments will move as a whole so they are movable as well e The segments with no ends shared with movable segments will rest in place so they are fixed e The segments with one end shared with a movable segment and the other one by a fixed segment will stretch to accommodate the shift of the picked segments so they are stretchable These segment types may also be seen in Figure 8 7 The left sides of boxes are fixed right sides are movable and the horizontal sides are stretchable Figure 8 7 Stretch operation During cursor movement you will see preselected object segments If you will click the left mouse button at th
11. Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e selected switch means that selected wires and ellipses will be converted e wire switch means that all wires in the current project will be converted to polygons e ellipse switch means that all ellipses in the current project will be converted to polygons Example gt polygonize wire All wires in the current project are converted to polygons RESIZE SELECTION Expands or shrinks the selected objects of the edited cell Format RESIZE SELECTION value over under savegrid Arguments size type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The amount of resizing in the current user units Switches over under e over defines the operation Oversize default operation e under defines the operation Undersize operation default operation savegrid If specified then region vertices will remain on the grid Example STesize s lection 2 Jover ogrid SCALE Rescales the set of selected objects or whole layout according to scale parameters Format SCALE x y factor total dimension placement F lLerttop 7ecentertop l Ergattob gt ALleftmid cenvermia Y Eighemio leftbottom centerbottom rightbottom nearest selected Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y 1s a center of scale operation Factor type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies a scale value Switches total dimension placement
12. Layer Operation Dialog When you define the derivation macro of several layers use the commands of the Derivation menu of the Layer Derivation Editor These commands which help to check syntax and coherence of macros and allow temporary changes are described below All other generic menus of the Layer Derivation Editor are described in the SEDIT user s manual Note When the Layer Derivation Editor is opened the Layer Setup dialog can be still accessed lt allows you to open several scripts of layer derivation thanks to the Derivation button of the Layer Setup panel It is then possible to spread any modifications on these opened scripts thanks to the Accept all derivation commands which are described below Syntax checking The Layer Derivation Editor allows checking the syntax of the macros defining derived layers This function can be accessed through the menu Derivation Syntax It will check the current macro in regards to the syntax and the coherence of the layer names and to available names in the technology Save the macros In order to save the defined macro in the technology the menu Derivation Save to layer setup must be used Show full derivation This feature allows you to build and watch whole derivation scripts for a particular layer Usually you describe a derived layer by writing several commands but these commands can contain other derived layer s and so on If you start show full derivation you receive de
13. None 18 58 Simucad Expert API Example HOBJECT hObject some object ExpApiRefreshObject hObject 18 13 5 Get Error Code DWORD ExpApiGetErrorCode Purpose Retrieves API Error Code see table API Error Codes and Messages Parameters None Return DWORD API Error Code Example DWORD dwErrorCode ExpApiGetErrorCode 18 13 6 Get Error Message LPCTSTR ExpApiGetErrorMessage Purpose Retrieves API Error Message see table API Error Codes and Messages Parameters None Return LPCTSTR API Error Message Example LPCTSTR szErrorMessage ExpApiGetErrorMessage 18 14 Script Language LISA 18 14 1 XI Initialization voce ROA Ola mai Purpose Initializes LISA scripting tool Loads predefined Expert commands Parameters None Return None Simucad 18 59 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Example EXPAPIXTINICGI 18 14 2 XI Run BOOD EXPAPLXILRUN LPCTSIR SZJ Purpose Runs LISA script or command Parameters LPCTSTR script string to execute Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example EXPAPILXIRUNA BULA SCript RTS EXPAPIXIRUN bos 0 0 100 100 18 15 User Interface Ul 18 15 1 Get Mouse Point BOOL ExpApiGetMousePoint CEAPoint amp pt RCEAPoint ptPrev EA_MAX POINT Purpose Reads out mouse cursor coordinates Parameters RCEAPoint ptPrev Previous point If this parameter is given and not equal to EA_
14. Returns a string containing the parameters of rect DOUBLE Sets the value of x dimension Simucad 17 105 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 20 3 LAYOUTOBJECT Type Type object constant LAYOUTOBJECT The LAYOUTOBJECT type is the handle of a layout object of an EXPERT database To obtain a variable of LAYOUTOBJECT type use the functions from Section 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures Table 17 5 LayoutObject Basic Operation Basic Operation equal EQL LAYOUTOBJECT Returns TRUE if two objects represent the same layout object of EXPERT data base returns FALSE otherwise Operator Second Operand Behavior not equal NEQ LAYOUTOBJECT Returns TRUE if two objects do not repre sent the same layout object of EXPERT data base returns FALSE otherwise to_string amp none Returns a string containing the parameters of the layout object Table 17 6 LayoutObject Common Components et ioe we Bi LAYER get STRING Returns name of layer not valid for instance layout objects LAYER put STRING Places objects on the new layer not valid for instance layout objects PERIMETER DOUBLE Returns a perimeter of layout object POSITION get POINT Returns a position of layout object not valid for poly gons and wires POSITION put POINT Sets a new position of layout object not valid for poly gons and wires PROPERTY get ATTRIBUTE_ Returns the user defined properties if the object has SET ones and N
15. Section 11 4 3 Layer Wire Setup 9 9 1 Ordering Layer View gt Ordering e Technology Order e Alphabetical e GDSII number e Inverse order These options are duplicated in the layer bar context menu 9 14 Simucad Viewing the Layout 9 9 2 Layer Plan The Layer View gt layer Plan menu is used to invoke the Layer Plan Setup window or to Fix the Layer Plan This Setup window allows you to set the following properties for each layer e Individual filling settings e Visible Invisible in the layout e Selectable nonselectable 1 e elements of this layer may be selectable or not Note that invisible layers are non selectable as well e Included not included into the layer list of the Layer bar This command is also accessible by pressing the Plan button located at the top of the layer bar More on Layer Plan Setup can be found in Chapter 11 Setup 9 10 Temporary Reference Point With this feature it is possible to see the cursor position at the Metric bar with respect to a selectable reference point In addition if a temporary reference point is active the distance of the current cursor from the reference point is displayed in polar form Distance and Angle are in the bottom right of the EXPERT S window 9 10 1 Toggle Reference Point The View gt Toggle Reference Point menu command allows you to set remove toggle a reference point It is useful only when a shortcut is assigned to it The default sho
16. This operation preserves cell hierarchy whenever possible i e for instances that fall completely within the clipped box Object layer visibility settings are ignored Clipping is performed over all geometry Execution Select the menu command Tools gt Clip Out The cursor assumes the ClipOut shape seen in Figure 12 31 Select the rectangular area to be clipped out by clicking at any two of its opposite corners X Y Y Y Y Y X oo Bo Tea bu ta Tk pe ea a a Mar AMARA AA AA AAA RN ESTANCA RIGA RACIAL k Y a a 1050110505 SOI WIE 110505 33050 Oo E a a WALA Figure 12 31 Clipping an Area Out After the clip out box is selected the Cell Name Selection dialog box appears with the caption Clipped cell name prompting you to select the cell name and to store the clipped piece of layout This dialog proposes a unique default name for the cell You can replace it e Pressing Cancel stops the current clip out operation You can then select another clip out box or other editing operations e If you press OK and you select an existing cell name a warning box will appear You must then press OK and repeat name selection e Otherwise 1 e the cell name was new the clipping process begins It may be that the clipping box contains no objects The corresponding warning appears and the clipping box selec
17. dialogs to filter the file list in the File Browser Ignore layers undefined in technology 11 36 Simucad Setup GDSII Input setup page has the check box Ignore layers undefined in technology If this option is on only layers defined in the selected technology file will be read from the GDSII file Otherwise all layers with GDSII numbers and DataTypes in the 0 255 range will be read Ignore DATATYPE Use technology files to assign layer names to GDSII layers as well as the Ignore DATATYPE option If the setting Ignore DATATYPE at the setup Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Input panel is on then the Data Type value for all geometry layers will be set to 0 Note The TEXTTYPE field of GDSII file is mapped into DataType value of EXPERT S layers Therefore you may see some layers with non zero DataType even if the Ignore DATATYPE setting is on These layers contain only text Ignore Magnification for Instances Arrays This option is added for compatibility with some other ECAD systems that ignore the MAG record of GDSII format for cell instances arrays and may write undefined values into this record Use Database Units from GDSII File If the Use Database Units form GDSII File option of the GDSII input setup menu Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Input is on then EXPERT S Database Unit value is taken from the GDSII file database units part of GDSII UNITS record if it is one of 0 000lum 0 001um 0 0lum or 0 1um Otherwi
18. Generate Active Derived Layer invokes generation of the active derived layer Generate All Derived Layers invokes generation of all derived layers This command cleverly rebuilds all derived layers The layers are generated according to the logical order of their derivation Clean Derived Layers This submenu has commands to remove all geometry from derived layers in the top level of the current cell in the whole hierarchy of the current cell or in the whole current project Save Full Derivation Script This command allows you to store the DRC script that generates all derived layers according to the current technology into a dsf file The file name is selectable by the file browser The result of the execution of this script is the same as for Tools gt Derived Layers gt Rebuild All command with derivation settings same as in the DRC setup Derivation Bar This command shows hides the Layer Derivation bar described in Figure Often running DRC scripts produces many new layers and afterwards it is desirable to delete all geometry from these insignificant layers One way is as follows e save layout before running DRC e run DRC e inspect report e close project without saving e reload the project However these extra layers may be useful while inspecting and fixing DRC violations and the inspect report step is in fact inspect and fix so quitting without saving would not be desirable Therefore you may do t
19. Integer Met I Pin End Style Figure 8 15 Search criteria for wire As a rule each criterion consist of three parts Name Applicable condition and Value In addition for user defined property criterion it is necessary to select Type for proper processing of the condition comparison or substring For some criterion for example Pin it is needed to check or uncheck the corresponding option With the exception of user defined properties the Name part is predefined Layer width etc The Condition is selectable from the drop down list and its meaning is usually clear with one explanation The filter condition may be applied to textual attributes such as layer and cell names text strings and string values of user defined properties In the current version of EXPERT a simple version of filter is implemented the same as in cell selectors the star character replaces a substring of any length and the question mark replaces a single character For example the condition Cell name filter _v 01 will search for instances of all cells with names ending with _v 01 The condition Layer filter Met will search for objects in layers Met1 Met2 etc but not in Metal Note 1 You may add a criterion with Property Name given without Property Value In this case all objects with any value of the given property will be found 8 16 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations Not
20. Note The last vertex of each wire must coincide with the first vertex of next wire Return Value None Example 1 gt Darhsterucr 7 0 Uy 203 0 METALL Lay EUS END BALE DONT gt 10 0 10 10 METAL2 2 0 FLUSH_END EXT_JOINT gt 10 10 0 10 METAL1 3 0 FLUSH END EXT_JOINT gt mu ultipath Oat ast Puce Creates a multiwire from wires running in the layers METAL1 and METAL2 and appropriate contact instances Example 2 Dak NSC UCE A1030 207 07 METALL da UD PLUSH END EXT JOINI y LLO 10 METAL2 2 0 FLUSH END EXT JOINT S140 LO YH METALI 320 PLUSH END EXT JOINT I gt m ltipathi patastruet s Creates the same multiwire as in Example 1 Note the last vertices of wires do not coincide with the first vertices of next wires In this case the last vertex of the wire is added to the next wire as the first vertex Example 3 gt wl wire 0 0 0 20 width 1 flushend extjoint gt layer METAL1 create get Simucad 17 57 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual gt w2 wire 0 20 20 20 width 4 flushend extjoint gt layer METAL2 create get gt multipath w1 w2 Creates the same multiwire as in Example 1 Each wire is presented by layout object wire Example 4 gt multipath Cl wire 10y O Ds 20 width T FfElushend extjo1ne gt layer METAL1 create get gt wire 0 20 20 20 width 4 flushend extjo
21. SIMUCAD Expert Layout Editor ExpertViews Layout Viewer User s Manual Simucad 4701 Patrick Henry Drive Bldg 2 May 8 2008 Santa Clara CA 95054 Telephone 408 567 1000 Internet http Awww simucad com Expert Layout Editor and ExpertViews Layout Viewer User s Manual Copyright 2008 Simucad 4701 Patrick Henry Drive Building 2 santa Clara CA 95054 Phone 408 567 1000 Simucad Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice SIMUCAD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Simucad shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without the prior written consent of Simucad GUARDIAN GUARDIAN DRC REALTIME DRC GUARDIAN LVS GUARDIAN NET EXPERT EXPERTVIEWS GATEWAY HARMONY SMARTSPICE SMARTSPICERF SMARTSPICESEE SMARTVIEW SMARTLIB SDDL TWISTER SPRINT HARMONY SILOS HYPERFAULT TURBOLINT LISA QUEST EXACT CLEVER STELLAR HIPEX C HIPEX CRC HIPEX NET HIPEX RC NOMAD SCOUT EDA OMNI UTMOST UTMOST III UTMOST IV SPAYN ACCUC
22. Sets view mode for XI command line If this mode is on then the results of subsequent xi commands executed from the EXPERT command line will be immediately displayed by EXPERT Format VIEW MODE on off Switches Fon tt FOr Example gt view mode on Simucad 17 27 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 6 5 Edit Settings Commands CELL ACTIVATE Assigns a cell for subsequent commands for placing cell instances arrays Format CELL ACTIVATE cell name Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the required cell CELL ACTIVATE command without a parameter displays the name of the current activated cell Example gt cel ll activate nand2 gt instance 0 O Instance of the cell nand2 will be placed at position 0 0 CELL OPEN See CELL OPEN on page 17 12 CUT MODE Sets a mode for CUT LINE command Format CUT MODE selected active all savewire nosavewire Arguments None Switches The switches correspond to menu settings Tools gt Cut by Line Mode selected vactive l fall e selected switch means that only selected objects are cut e active switch allows to cut object lying on the active layer e all switch means that all objects are cut savewire nosavewire e savewire switch means that cut by line operation does not convert wires into polygon e nosavewire is opposite mode to savewire Example gt Cut mode all LAYER Sets the active lay
23. The sizing information resulting from the selected settings is shown in the Info group of this sheet Customizable Title The Left and Right fields of the Title group defines the custom title line on plot pages Part of the title is right aligned These fields are patterns that can contain any user text together with control symbols The latter ones are substituted by actual values taken from the layout data The following control symbols are possible ao Z Current cell name left coordinate of data plotted on the current page DOT EO Poe is SIS top lice plot density page width page height page number total count of pages name of units of measurement for size on chip A A oP oP WH oP Aa Aa A Ae OP ZL CS et O Ea A a UW et name of units of measurement for size on paper name of units of measurement in the current Expert s window ao Ci Simucad 15 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Example Left part Cell SN density SD C M Plotted by Nakk Right part Pd P 0f A The Font button selects the font type size style color etc for the plotted title from fonts supplied by your system The Title overlaps drawing option is self explanatory Other Skip details less than lt Size gt Where lt Size gt is the minimum feature size on the plot The objects with height and width less than lt Size gt will not be plotted Page overlap width The amount defined in the Overl
24. value alignstyle slope value slant FAmirror Named Arguments text string type STRING Single line text Sets a specific single line text label for text object if specified height value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of a text height Sets the specific height for text if specified width value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Simucad 17 73 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The value of text width Sets a specific width for text if specified alignstyle predefined constants Sets the new text alignment style if specified Text alignment with respect to its origin is defined by the following predefined constants TA TOPLERFT TA TOPCENTER TA TOPRIGHT TA_MIDDLELEFT TA_MIDDLELEFT TA _MIDDLERIGHI TA_BOTTOMLEFT TA _BOTTOMCENTER TA BOTTOMRIGHT slope value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of the text slope in degree Sets the new text slope angle if specified slant type BOOLEAN Changes text slant mode if specified text will be slanted if named argument is set to TRUE and slant mode will be OFF if named argument is set to FALSE mirror type BOOLEAN Changes text mirroring mode if specified text will be mirrored if named argument is set to TRUE and mirroring mode will be OFF if the named argument is set to FALSE See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments MODIFY WIRE Chan
25. Example gt cell_ name get_edited_cell_name GET_PCELL_PARAMETER_NAMES Returns sequence of parameter names for specified cell Syntax param_names GET_PCELL PARAMETER_NAMES cell name Parameters cell name type STRING The name of the parameterized cell Return Value param_names type SEQUENCE Sequence of parameter names for a specified parameterized cell If the cell does not exist or is not parameterized then NIL value is returned Example gt param_names get_pcell_parameter_names INV GET_PCELL_PARAMETER_DEFAULTS Returns a sequence of default parameter values for a specified cell Syntax param_defs GET_PCELL PARAMETER DEFAULTS cell_name Parameters cell name type STRING The name of the parameterized cell Return Value param_defs type SEQUENCE Sequence of default parameter values for a specified parameterized cell If the cell does not exist or is not parameterized then NIL value is returned Example gt param_defs get_pcell_parameter_defaults INV GET_SELECTED_OBJECT_COUNT Returns the number of selected objects in the specified cell Syntax num GET CELL OBJECT COUNT cell name 17 18 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Parameters cell name type STRING The name of the cell Return Value num type INTEGER The number of selected objects in the cell cell_name Example gt num get_selected_object_count gates INVERTER 17 5 Cell View
26. Extend Ka Offset vvire METAL 0 0 1 0 center Type Box y Layer vial Begin Offset IS Offset fo End Offset IS Justification center y Ww icith Poo Enclosure NE Length hr Space EM Begin Corner Offset O00 Distribution even gt End Corner Offset A Cancel REN Delete Figure 11 14 Pwire Templates Setup Page Use the New button to add a new template and Delete to remove a selected template from the technology A detailed description of each Pwire template parameter and all subparts parameters is provided in Section 5 6 Parametric Wire Removing Pwire templates from the technology does not delete Pwires from the layouts To add a Pwire template to the technology you can also use the Xi command PWIRE_TEMPLATE or export a Pwire template definition from the EXPERT external ASCII tcn technology file 11 32 Simucad Setup 11 4 8 Contact Setup This page is to add remove or modify the contact templates in the technology section of the EXPERT database see Figure 11 15 Contact Setup Ely M1 hlz leita METAL Cell Delete Mame a Layer 1 AMETAL Contact Cell P aaa O Layer 2 p APOLY q Contact Layer FL ZACONT Width f Justification Middle Center R f Length f ig Columns Poo OE Layer Margin Jas Row Delta R5 Layer Margin o5 Column Delta R5 Opt Layer NOT SELECTEO Oot Layere NOT SELECTED Margin fo Margin fo Figure 11 15 Contact Setup Pag
27. Parameters LPCTSTR szLibLogName Library logical name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApilibDeactivate libraryl1 18 16 6 Delete Library BOOL ExpApiLibDelete LPCTSTR szLibLogName Purpose Deletes Library with specified logical name from the Library Name Table Parameters LPCTSTR szLibLogName Library logical name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiLibDelete libraryl 18 16 7 Delete All Libraries BOOL ExpApiLibDeleteAll Purpose Deletes All Libraries from the Library Name Table Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiLibDeleteAll Simucad 18 63 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 16 8 Get library Path Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetLibraryPathName LPCTSTR szLogName NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szLogName Logical library name If szLogName is NULL of empty then this function gets the pathname for the current project file Return LPCTSTR Full path to library 18 16 9 Get library Directory Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetLibraryDirName LPCTSTR szLogName NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szLogName Library name If szLogName is NULL of empty then this function gets the pathname for the current project file Return LPCTSTR Directory name of library 18 64 Simucad A AEAEE E E T 3 6 5 9 ACUVIAO a da 11 11 Activity Lo
28. Project Tree tools for navigation through the chip hierarchy and for display of cell instances within the hierarchy tree Note If you are in the cell or layer list you can type the first letter of the name of the cell or layer and the list will scroll to the next element of the list starting with this letter The same is valid for an expanded Project Tree Moreover you may type in several first letters of the name with sufficiently short delay between the keystrokes This narrows the selection further 10 2 1 Project Tree The Project Tree window can be activated by the menu command Hierarchy Explorer Project Tree Simucad 10 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Project Tree is a tool for navigating through the hierarchy of the chip design represented in the form of a tree In addition to the hierarchy tree navigation Project Tree provides a convenient visual supplement for other layout editing and navigation operations that are somehow related to chip hierarchy There are two available options on the toolbar of the Project Tree window The option Show all projects shows the hierarchy for all projects The option Show active cell always displays the hierarchy of active cell Chip hierarchy can contain a huge number of elements that s why the actual displayed number of elements in any expanded node is restricted to 500 If this amount is exceeded a warning message will be displayed in the beginning of list Double click
29. Run REP Sel 1 0 Hier 6 6 RAW Silvaco 2004 4 Figure 14 9 Short Locator after Node Probing The created shortest pass depends on option Verification gt Node Probing Short Locator Options The Verification gt Node Probing Short Locator gt Find Short command automatically run the Short Loacator tool between text labels in selected nodes and shows where the short most likely accured 14 12 Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools 14 5 3 Node Probing Submenu The Verification gt Node Probing submenu contains commands to navigate through the node and to display it Pick Node Described above If you hold Shift during the Pick Node operation the previously shown node remains and a new node added Show Node Shows hides the marker that covers the last probed node Zoom to Node Shows the node to fit the window Zoom to Object Zooms to the current object of the node highlighted by node navigation commands Object Descriptors If this option is checked the current node object is supplied with a bubble containing its description First Next Previous Last Object These commands highlight the consecutive objects of the node EIP Object This command edits in place the cell that contains the highlighted object of the node View in Cell This command opens a new window with the cell that contains the highlighted object of the node Reextract Connectivity This command rebuilds node connectivity data Usua
30. The File submenu includes the following commands see Figure 4 1 New Initializes a new project of ELD Expert Layout Data format or SLD Shared Layout Data format type Open Loads project from file in internal ELD SLD or foriegn GDSII formats CIF Applicon LEF DEF or OASIS formats Close Unloads current project Save Writes the current state of the project to file on disk Save As Writes the current state of the project to new file on disk possibly in a different format Save Cells Writes selected cells to file on disk Imports Import a project from a different format GDSII CIF APL LEF DEF OASIS Exports Export your current project to a different format GDSII CIF APL LEF DEF OASIS Reload Reloads the current project from disk Info Displays various characteristics of the project Compress Decreases the size the current project data file by performing garbage collection Page Setup Allows you to customize the printing operation to your specific requirements You may be asked to select the printer to use Print Preview Displays a preview of the printing operation with the current Page Setup option Print Print a copy of the layout in accordance to the Page Setup option Print Status Displays information on the print job Recent Files Displays the most recently opened files This allows you to launch a previously opened file without having to go through File gt Open
31. The last Spacing check command will be used to perform a single geometrical check spacing distance etc on any existing layer drawing layer derived layer or scratch layer generated by a previous interactive DRC command The available options of the Built in DRC Command Setup panel allow following DRC operations setup e Check tolerance parameter allows you to modify error reporting reduce the number of reported errors for DRC Spacing checks of types LT GT RANGE and NE e The Report at most lt xxx gt errors per check option and the associated parameter allows you to restrict the number of errors reported by DRC checks If this option is checked the associated parameter defines the maximum number of errors to be reported by a DRC check command This limit is introduced for DRC check commands because they can report a huge number of errors the reasons may be various and analyzing this number of errors becomes meaningless e The Write log file option is used for the generation of a log file containing information about the last DRC command which has been run statistics about the amount of processed polygons the amount of resulting errors and resulting scratch layer polygons The format name of this log file is lt active_cell_name gt log and it is generated in the project directory If the Append option is checked the DRC log file is appended to the existing file Otherwise the existing file is overwritten The Brief option all
32. The last vertex must be clicked by the right mouse button A click of the right mouse button means that the region is complete You can then start creating a new one or change the tool to do something else After entering the first two segments the region is always closed during creation The last closing side or sides if you are in 90 or 45 angle mode will be drawn dashed It becomes solid when creation is completed Note If you create a polygon or a wire the info in the message line shows the region s area coordinates displacements of the cursor with respect to the previous point and the number of vertices as follows N 4 6 Variants Sometimes it is inconvenient to use right mouse click to enter the last vertex of the region There are two ways to do without this 1 Select Tools gt Mouse Click gt Right to assign a bindkey to replace the right mouse click by hitting a key 2 Select Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Editing and the Last mouse click does not add a point to wire region Numeric Input You can use Numeric Input to perform precision input of vertices at any place of the vertex list and even modify already created vertices Also you can combine mouse input and numeric input Simucad 5 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual wi 3 8100 31 6270 0 0004 0 0000 Hew Vertes 55880 31 6270 0 0000 a al Delete Vertex 5 5880 27 4030 4 2240 _Delete Verte a s1450 27 4030 3 55
33. They may be specified in the corresponding I O setups available from the Setup submenu or by pressing the Option button See Chapter 11 Setup for more information File Name You must enter a file name in this field either by typing in or using the standard file browser window Technology You may define the path of the technology file as described in Section 4 2 1 Technology File Selection It is used when a project is loaded from a foreign format or when Setup gt Technology gt General gt General gt Use external technology file for eld projects is set Options It allows you to specify certain option related to the type selected For ELD and SLD type it will bring up the Data Safety setup and when a project is loaded from a foreign format GDSII Applicon CIF or OASIS it will open the corresponding setup option See the next section and Chapter 11 Setup for more information As Read Only You will see this option if you select eld type of files for loading If this option is checked the opened eld project cannot be modified Output name This is the name of an ELD or SLD file This is necessary when loading data from foreign format Backup name You will see this field instead of Output name if an EXPERT project eld or sld is being loaded and the option Save original project upon loading in Setup Editor Viewer gt Data Safety is checked The Select button to the right may be active or grayed
34. col 4 ydeltarow 12 xdeltacol 20 rotate 90 Creates the array 3x4 of the cell nand2 with rotation angle 90 17 8 4 Device Instance Object Creation CONTACT Creates modifies and deletes the instance of a predefined contact template Format CONTACT contact_name xpos ypos width value length value Eftoplette repecenter Eopright maddlelert middlecenter middleright bottomleft bottomeenter bottomright jJustification value rows value cols value deltarow value deltacol value mirror value rotate value property namel valuel name2 value2 namen valuen text textl textZ textn parent_cell value create find delete replace layoutobject select reselect add deselect get Arguments e contact_name type STRING Name of the contact template stored in the technology e xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE X coordinate of the contact position e ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Y coordinate of the contact position Named Arguments e width value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the contact width If not present the wire width is defined by the contact template Simucad 17 53 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e length value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the contact length If not present the contact length is defined by a contact template teoplette il ropcenver rooragh
35. design windows menus dialogs toolbars e Customized design setup grids colors layers etc e Customized shortcuts e Various pan zoom operations e Custom menu e Command line interface Hierarchy Manipulation e Convenient instance array definition e Efficient global and selective flattening exploding e Grouping selected objects into cells e Advanced recursive edit in place e Direct pick of objects anywhere in the hierarchy for edit in place bok Sb k bk OE e Replace instances e Flexible means for presenting of instances arrays in layout view e Efficient Search of objects anywhere in design hierarchy Project Tree e Convenient design hierarchy navigator e Coherent navigation through hierarchy tree and layout e Global and local hierarchy trees for inspection of layout nesting structure Layout Objects e Wires of various styles e Polygons arbitrary orthogonal diagonal e Boxes Squares e Ellipses Circles Donuts e Rolled regions bounded by arcs and line segments e Cell instances and arrays e Texts labels and polygonial texts t Edit Modify Operations e Ergonomic interface with optional fine tuning via alphanumeric input e Cut Copy Paste e Rotate Reflect e Delete Undelete e Stretch both angle and segment preserving e Add Jog Points e Duplicate Move e Merge regions 1 4 Simucad Subtract create hole Cut by poly line Modification of properties Polygonize Resize Scale Import Export Stream GDSII
36. e Restore defaults The settings predefined in EXPERT are applied to the rest of the current session Hint When working on multiple projects it may be useful to load setup from a file upon starting an EXPERT application using the Autorun script feature of the menu command Setup gt Editor Viewer Editing Custom keyboard shortcuts custom menus and custom colors are saved loaded by their own commands Setup gt Shortcuts gt Save Shortcuts and Setup gt Shortcuts gt Load Shortcuts see Section 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom Color Setups for more information 11 4 Simucad Setup Note Another way to store editor preference in a separate file is to open the Manage Preferences panel of the editor Preferences window This can be done with the menu Setup Setup then activate the Manage Preferences panel The Import and Export buttons of this panel correspond to the Import setup and Export setup commands described above The Factory settings button is equivalent to the Restore defaults command 11 3 Editor Viewer Form The Setup Editor Viewer menu command opens a form with several pages that control various aspects of editing viewing the layout 11 3 1 General Page e Lock database units If this option is checked you cannot modify the values of database units This is a safety option to maintain the same database unit for all libraries of the current design e Database unit for new imported projec
37. gt Pcell Script Simucad 9 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 9 8 View Array View The View Array View menu item allows you to select one of the three available styles of array display see Figure 9 17 These array styles are effective only with Flat view style and apply to all arrays in all windows View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Next view OE Be Previous view 7 200m Pan Cell view EE Complete o a o Perimeter Cutlook Layer View b Filling H Figure 9 17 Array View Modes The View Cell View Edited Cell Frame option adds the gray frame around the array shown in the Outlook mode The styles Complete Perimeter and Outlook are also show in Figure 9 18 Aa HIR Ma S Ma A SRS S HIE Bio HIT HAE SISIE HA BISIG HiG Bicie Hie PIGE Ale 1s dll Siaa 9 BAJ HiG Binip 914 BAJE BE Pinia Me AA Mio ES Bia EIA Bo ME HE Sini 98 0414 818 Sisia Hia 988 Hie PIIR ds ABI HIE BIBIE Baa AiE a HIE Bia HII ia BIE Bia ET FE dl BiSa Hia PIIG Bi Hinia 918 Piai pia PISIA le E JAJA Hie HISIE Ma 0 ba HA Bo BLA bo IE Bia PR ba EI Bo HIIS a ENE Bio HIIS E EE ffl BIE Hie Binih oia HINA Gie HISIA EEE Eik HIRIE Ge AIBA oia Haih Hia Hi Complete Perimeter Outlook Figure 9 18 Styles of array display 9 9 Layer View Commands from the View Layer View submenu with the exception of the ones described below are described in Chapter 11 Setup
38. technology file is created the default value of this string is Non named technology ver 1 01 Note Since the technology data are stored inside e 1d files this ID string is the only way to identify e 1d projects with the same technology Use external technology file for eld projects Normally technology data for EXPERT S native projects is stored inside the eld file It is however possible to load a eld project with an external technology file selectable as described for loading of foreign data formats This is particularly useful for teamwork It ensures that everyone uses the same technology for example from a file on a server Under this option layers in the project and in the technology file are matched basing on e Layer name if the corresponding radio button Identify layers by name is checked In this case the GDSII number of a layer of the technology file will replace the GDSII number of the layer with same name in the loaded ELD project e Layer GDSII number if the other radio button is checked In this case the name of a layer of the technology file will replace the name of a layer having the same GDSII number in the loaded ELD project If the project has layers undefined in the technology file they will be loaded anyway but their parameters will have the same default values Note You cannot replace technology for a loaded project You must reload the project However you may replace colors sti
39. 0 100 100 SZ Lex 4 18 7 24 Delete Linked Text BOOL ExpApiDeleteLinkedText HOBJECT hObject int nText Purpose Deletes the Linked Text given it s number from specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object int nText Linked text zero based index Return BOOL TRUE if Linked Text is deleted successfully FALSE if failed Example HOBJECT hObject some object int nText 0 Linked Text number BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteLinkedText hObject nText 18 7 25 Delete All Linked Text HOBJECT ExpApiDeleteLinkedTexts HOBJECT hObject Simucad 18 37 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Deletes all Linked Texts from specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteLinkedTexts hObject 18 7 26 Get Linked Texts Number int ExpApiGetLinkedTextsNumber HOBJECT hObject Purpose Retrieves the number of Linked Texts attached to the specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object Return int Non negative number of Linked Texts if successful negative if failed Example HOBJECT hObject some object int nTexts ExpApiGetLinkedTextsNumber hObject 18 7 27 Get Linked Text BOOL ExpApiGetLinkedText HOBJECT hObject int nText OBJECT _PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Retrieves the Linked
40. 1 Library Setup for Your Project A Layout cell library is a file in the same format of EXPERT S layout database e1d format therefore any library may be opened as a project in EXPERT If cells from libraries are used in a work project these external cells are identified by cell name and logical library name In xi script and in many other parts of EXPERT you will see such extended cell names in the following format lt logical_library_name gt lt cell_name gt For example cont PM1Con denotes the cell PM1Con from the library with the logical name cont A logical name is assigned to a library file through the Library Setup panel menu command Libraries gt Setup See Figure 16 16 1 x Library List a us 051999 M Demo 05999 eld N Demo 05t999_Leld Exclusive Mon Jan 17 10 05 42 2005 kon Jan 17 10 05 42 2005 Exclusive Yez Cell List Cin Cell Name Check Out Date TADIFENA 05t9399_ Exclusive TADIFONS 05t9399_ Exclusive TA PUCHA 05t9399_ Exclusive TAP CNS 05t9399_ Exclusive TAPPLC 05t9399_ Exclusive TA CR 051999 1 Exclusive TA WES 051999 Exclusive Cell Filter Figure 16 1 Library Setup Dialog The Library Setup panel contains the list of libraries defined for your workspace If you open a project that contains cells from some library this library is automatically activated if it was presented in list All other libraries must be added to this list manually using the Add c
41. 11 35 11 5 1 Description of Particular Options 20 20 con tetas uns duce eke rial 11 36 X Simucad Table of Contents 11 67 CIPO SUD iaa dados aria iia deeds 11 41 127 APRICONVO Selina laicidad iaa ii 11 42 11 87 OASIS VO SOU aa tenemos twa tadbe reas EERO A E ue oueen 11 43 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom Color Setups 0 cc cece eee eee e eens 11 44 TOA CUSIOMIZADIO OIKGYS cir a A Ai 11 44 A VOOIDAIS F AAA OO 11 45 119 MADDIICATION Colors Panels a tee Tea 11 46 It 9 4 CUSTOM Me Use atte rated idiota dada Oda 11 46 11 10 Built in DRC Command Setup 2 00 cece eee eee eee eee eens 11 49 UTE DAC SCHDE RUN SetUD usar acia veis 11 50 Chapter 12 A A II ee ee ee ee eee 12 1 12 AAV OUT TOOS a ees ean ome ee eee ea eete Hames ewan 12 1 12 2 Measures iaa a were a cia eats a aera Cee en 12 2 AA E CNC Banin a a a a a a A A T a OOREEN 12 2 122 2 PONM RUE ette EA Dolor actas iria TAEAE 12 4 12 2 3 Coordinate AXES asinina hi o ea e A A i 12 5 12 2 4 Coordinate Origin n be reel Va dha el od Maced ed ole AAA na ated ee weds 12 5 122 0 GUISO Orossa arser nS 2 te otk beck asian tea aaa ork teeta baci alee cdta 12 5 12 2 6 Distance from Point to Line cece nett nee e tne e nee ne tenes 12 5 12 2 7 Distance from Reference Point 0 0 ccc cc anaana arannana 12 6 123 TX oChiDt SUBMENU pc ctas da cane O dwar a a 12 6 12 4 TNDL Netlist Driven Lavoro a di 12 7 124 Loading INC Nel Coda nd a 12 7 PAZ
42. 2 Sticks and End Styles Extend m W 2 Figure 2 3 Joint Styles Figure 2 4 Wire with Extend ends and Miter joints Simucad 2 5 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Note The above description specifies only how wires will be shown on the screen The actual shape of a fabricated wire depends on fabrication technology For example a miter joint style does not necessarily mean that two wires with touching miters will have electric contact e Ellipse region or ellipse for short is a part of the design plane bounded by a polygon that approximates ellipse with user specified precision e Circle is a special case of ellipse e Box is an axes oriented rectangle e Donut is a region of the design plane between two concentric circles e Rolled region is a region of the design plane bounded by a complex line consisting of straight segments and arcs For details in Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects Section 5 4 5 Rolled Region Creation Cell Instances and Arrays Instance of a cell is a cell placed within another cell An instance does not contain the actual content of the cell to be placed It only references this cell and specifies the position of its origin and its transformation if any In the case of a parameterized cell P cell it contains the actual values of parameters This gives a considerable memory reduction in the case of multiple instancing of a cell A cell may contain instances of other c
43. 3 Set Measurement Units function description Return double value in um for the requested unit Example double dNum ExpApiGetUnitUMValue UNIT_NM value in um of UNIT_NM double dNum ExpApiGetUnitUMValue value in um of the current Expert unit 18 2 6 Set Drawing Angle Mode BOOL ExpApiSetAngleMode DAM daMode Purpose Sets Drawing Angle Mode Parameters DAM daMode New Drawing Mode Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetAngleMode DAM_90D 18 2 7 Get Angle Mode DAM ExpApiGetAngleMode Purpose Retrieves the current Drawing Angle Mode Parameters None Return DAM current Drawing Mode Example DAM daMode ExpApiSetAngleMode 18 2 8 Set Region Mode BOOL ExpApiSetRegionMode int nRegionMode Purpose Sets Region Mode Parameters int nRegionMode A Region Mode to be set 18 4 Simucad Expert API Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetRegionMode RM_ HOLE 18 2 9 Get Region Mode int ExpApiGetRegionMode Purpose Retrieves current Region Mode Parameters None Return int current Region Mode Example int nRegionMode ExpApiGetRegionMode 18 2 10 Set General Setup Data void ExpApiSetSetupGeneral const GENERAL SETUP amp sGeneralSetup Purpose Sets EXPERT S General Setup data Parameters GENERAL _SETUP amp
44. 5 1 5 6 5 0 5 6 5 layer P Gate Gl My Nu ell c g N SD c My H Gate E My Metall c My Metl_Text c My Contact c MY Bulk c My Bulk Connect e fa nand2 mus 2 oa Figure 10 2 Project Tree 10 2 Simucad Hierarchy Operations The Project Tree tree displays the following item types e Project library item Labeled by logical name of project library e Cell item Labeled by cell name e Instance Bundle item A special item that further spawns items for all instances and arrays of the given cell in its parent The bundle item is labeled by the number of these instances and arrays e Instance item Labeled by the LISA script command which creates this instance This command includes instanced cell name coordinates etc e Array item An array is also marked by the text of LISA script command e Layer item Labeled by name of layer e Graphics primitive item Labeled by the LISA script command which creates this instance Expanding Collapsing Tree A Project Tree may be in collapsed expanded or partially collapsed states If a tree item has a plus button on the left side of its image it has children hidden which may be expanded by clicking the plus button If a tree item has a minus button its descendants may be collapsed by clicking the minus button You may also walk along the tree by using arrow keys and expanding or collapsing branches by using the right and left arrows respectively 10 3 E
45. 7 2 Lazy Figure 9 15 Lazy View with Edited Cell Primitives In the View gt Cell View Lazy mode only primitives and instances arrays immediately belonging to the edited cell are shown Instances arrays are displayed as hatched boxes i e with their insides hidden In other words only the top level of the edited cell hierarchy is displayed the rest of cell hierarchy is hidden When cell instance insides are not shown Lazy View or other views with restricted level of display the cell name is written within the instance s frame Lazy view shows only the layout objects which are directly selectable editable in the edited cell 9 12 Simucad Viewing the Layout 9 7 3 Floorplan Mode In the View gt Cell View Floorplan Mode mode only instances arrays are displayed by their bounding boxes depending on hierarchical depth selected in the View gt Cell View Hierarchy Depth submenu Figure 9 16 Floorplan Mode 9 7 4 Primitives Mode In the View gt Cell View Primitives Mode mode only primitives are displayed 9 7 5 Edited Cell Frame If the View gt Cell View Edired Cell Frame menu option is checked the bounding box of the edited cell is shown as a dashed frame around the cell or around the instance if the edited cell is the cell under edit in place otherwise it is hidden You may toggle this option on and off by clicking the left mouse button in this menu item Figure 9 16 illustrates the bounding box when
46. Box big box 0 0 1000 10007 zoom gt amp Point Get amp point get_point BOX3 pox T0 TO LOO LUU zoom lt lt amp Two Boxes pox OO 100 100 Box SO SO 100 Looe zoom lt 11 gt C ustom BOX Dox 0 0 T00 100 zoom Get amp point get_point lt LA gt Test P mos kaysi PACU box Sl gt 2 layer Poly box 30 5 2 2 0 Pmosg 2 pos 2 L 5 3 tayer P AC0E 7 box OP 2 2 5 7 layer Poly Pmos amp 3 box lt Syntax The syntax will be explained using the example above 10 11 12 are the positions in EXPERT s main menu for new submenus The gt character marks the beginning of a submenu The lt character marks the end of a submenu As you can see submenus may be nested Debug shows how to define the name Debug of a submenu and its hotkey Alt D amp Box box 0 0 100 100 zoom line defines a submenu command Here as above amp Box defines the name and the hotkey for the command It is separated from the actual command by the equation sign Here you can put several xi commands separated by a semicolon as in BOX box 10 LO 100 1005 zoom The line Wordpad amp 2 spawn C WinNT notepad exe is an example of calling other Windows programs from EXPERT More advanced customization of EXPERT s User Interface and functionality is possible using Expert API see Chapter 18 Expert API 3 16 Simucad Chapter 4 Project Cell Commands 4 1 Overview
47. Cell List Se ot TACIFCNA 051999 Shared SE DIFCNS eee Checked out alexs Mon Jan 17 10 20 05 2008 TAPLYCNA 05t999_ Shared TAPLYCNS 05t999_ Shared TA PPLC 05t999_ Shared TA CR 05t999_ Shared TA WES 05t999_ Shared Cell Filter Figure 16 4 Cell Management for Controlled Libraries Simucad 16 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Library List and Commands The Library List shows the controlled libraries in the current setup If you select a library in this list the list of its cells will be shown in the Cell List below You may select several libraries and all their cells will be listed below The library list may be sorted by any column in ascending or descending order by clicking at the column title button once or twice Cell List and Commands This list shows cells from all active libraries selected in the Library list The Cell list may be sorted by any column in ascending or descending order by clicking at the column title button once or twice The status column may contain e Exclusive This cell is located in library which was open in exclusive mode It can be edited without applying the check out operation e Shared Shared cell check out action required before editing e Read only Cell can not be edited e Checked out Cell is shared checked out If it is checked out by current user cell is ready for editing e Unresolved Cell is instanced to some project or library cells but the
48. Cell Objects as well as in the Cell Hierarchy of the current cell Search among selected and Search among visible options are self explanatory The option Search in area allows you to search for the objects in the specified area If this option is checked the Search in area group appears The area to be searched may be specified with the mouse by clicking the Define by mouse button and drawing a selection box or manually by typing the values in the Min Point and Max Point input fields In addition there are two modes to define how the desired objects must be related to the specified search area e Inside to search among objects completely inside the search area Simucad 8 15 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual e Cross to search among objects intersecting the search area The option More search criteria is used to specify additional search criteria in terms of object attributes and user defined properties If this option is checked More search criteria group is added to the Search Options panel Use the buttons Add new criterion Edit selected criterion and Delete selected criterion to specify and modify additional search criteria You can add any number of such criteria each of them narrows down the search Many search criteria from this group are different for different types of objects A typical set of such criteria is shown in Figure 8 15 for wires Wire Search Criteria Z x Property Mame Condition alue Type
49. DRC Script Panel They insert DRC statements into a DRC script basing on simple input forms see Figure 14 3 so that the user doesn t have to worry about the exact syntax of commands Note The complete description of GUARDIAN DRC can be found in the GUARDIAN LAYOUT VERIFICATION USER S MANUAL DRC Script Running To run a DRC script perform the following steps 1 Load IC layout 2 Open the DRC Script Panel 3 Load an existing EXPERT script using the Load button or create a new script 4 Choose the scope of layout objects which will be checked during the running of the DRC script by means of Scope group of radio buttons 5 Press the Run button on the DRC Script Panel The way the DRC script runs depends on the settings assigned by the Setup gt DRC Run command see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 11 DRC Script Run Setup After running the script you can look at DRC results using the error report tools 14 2 Simucad Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools DRG Script C Users Kuwagaki data CELEBRIT TotalDemo Demo3 demo3 dst H Eile Edit Find Insert DRO Setup Window x PEB eeIJH Balpe ggg Bab BoOalli e Fe D Geele T E z x PL a O Eh En su 1 1 WIDTH 0042853808 A A n C Users Kuwagaki data CELEBRITY To G Users Kuwagaki data CELEBRITY To width layer pvell limits lt 10 ID WELL_1_1 Comment 1 1 Width spacing lt 10 lambda width l
50. Derivation Editor Layer Derivation Editor Figure 11 12 provides control over all the existing derived layers It allows you to create inspect or modify the macro defining any derived layer E Layer derivation N Gate li Soript Derivation Edit Find ylindow O AE oa A 0665 FASE And Layerl Poly Layer2 H Act LayerF Tnp Or Layerl Substrate Layvere Tnp Layerk N Gate A h ana H Gale N 50 P Gabe PSO Ln St Coli Figure 11 12 Layer Derivation Editor Here is the list of available operations on layers to create a derived layer macro e Logic operations AND OF DIF XOR and MERGE e Select operations Inside Outside Hole Connect Cut Overlap Enclose and Touch e Resize operations Oversize Undersize and Size e Check operations Width Outdistance Indistance Intersection Length e Layer operations Substrate generation Copy and Delete These commands can be written directly in the Layer Derivation Editor or they can be generated thanks to the items of the Insert menu 11 26 Simucad Setup You may find the exhaustive description of the syntax of these five types of commands in the DRC part of GUARDIAN manual respectively in Sections 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 7 and 2 3 8 The use of the first four panels of the Insert menu is described in Section 2 6 of GUARDIAN manual Interactive operations The Layer Operation panel is described in Section 2 4 2 3 of GUARDIAN manual
51. Graphics documentation 14 14 Simucad Chapter 15 Plotting 15 1 Plotting Layouts The group of plotting commands from the File submenu allows you to plot the visible part of the layout on local or network printers plotters You must have the device driver for the required plotter installed If you do not have the driver for your plotter especially if you are using some older plotters like Calcomp Tektronix you may search internet for manufacturer s web site Usually you may download drivers from there Moreover it is a good idea to download the latest version of the plotter printer driver even if you already have one installed In addition most Windows NT printer drivers provide redirection of the output data into a file This file contains control commands recognized by the associated plotter printer It gives the option after the installation of several different plotter printer drivers on EXPERT S computer to generate command files of various formats e g Postscript These files may then be transferred into other environments and processed by device specific utilities available in those environments This chapter describes the following commands e File gt Printer Setup Dialog e File gt Page Setup e File gt Print Preview e File gt Print e File gt Print Status Simucad 15 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 15 2 Printer Setup Dialog This standard Printer Setup dialog appears on first using of comman
52. Grid e Snap to Directions e Snap to Objects Gravity Snap to Grid and Smooth modes are toggled by the Edit gt Snap Cursor to Grid menu command In the grid snapping mode the cursor may be positioned only at the nodes of the snap grid This is valid for all editing tools Measurement Text Modify etc but not working for some others Select by box Zoom in out window etc If the grid snapping mode is disabled cursors such as Selection Measurement and Text are allowed to be offgrid However all cursors to create or alter geometry shapes remain locked to the snap grid resolution specified in the grid setup If offgrid geometries need to be placed the snap grid resolution needs to be modified temporarily Grid snap grid parameters are set in the Setup gt Technology gt Grid Setup see Figure 3 12 3 10 Simucad Hi Preferences E i Manage Preferences Application Shortcuts Dock Windows fas Toolbars i i Custom Menus Editor Viewer Setup General i Wiewing Editing Gravity Data Safety Directories and Files pu Ruler E lnfis Technology Setup i General Shapes Layer Setup pu Instance Grid Setup Layer Connection Setup E i Device Setup Import Export Setup z GDS Input Output GDS Output i CIF Input E CIF Input Output CIF Output Applicon Input Applicon Dutput E i ASIS Input Output DAC Setup E pu Built in DRC command setup E i DAC script run setu
53. H E ICBBASE ZICBBLK ZICHIPC H CMOS H EJCMAK12 EE Z EICORNER o 9 EADIFCNA mel EL 9 AIDIFONS gala Y Y EA EA E g El LY ESA EA Al wi ma La fa a s Il EE Instance of 5005T999 Rot 90 Pos 0 0000 0 0000 Sel 1 1 Hier 4 6 R W 0 MB OSilvaco 2005 Ui Figure 3 1 EXPERT s Interface General View Toolbar layout can be customized and stored between EXPERT sessions It is also possible to remove all these bars from the screen using menu command View Toolbars or View Dock Windows and to run editing commands from the menu from the command line or by keyboard shortcuts See Chapter 11 Setup on shortcut customization Simucad 3 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 3 1 1 Menus 3 2 The Main menu see Figure 3 2 controls all EXPERT operations Clicking a menu item activates the corresponding operation or opens a submenu Operations of close functionality are grouped into submenus If a menu item is followed by ellipsis then it invokes a dialog for example input of a command parameters pre File Cell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries PCell Setup Window Help Figure 3 2 EXPERT s Main Menu IC layout window shows the design plane for working with cell layouts It is used for creating
54. Interface and in Chapter 11 Setup 9 16 Simucad Chapter 10 Hierarchy Operations 10 1 Hierarchy Menu This chapter describes how EXPERT commands allow you to operate with the chip s hierarchy To operate these commands use the Hierarchy submenu Figure 10 1 Rei Verification Libraries Setup Window Explorer Edit In Place b Create Cell in Place EIP Enter into subcell Explode Selected av Up Explode All Exit Flatten O Equalize TE Dim C Hide Figure 10 1 Hierarchy Submenu They may be split into the following catagories e The Explorer commands provide the means to view and walk through the hierarchy tree and to reach layout objects regardless of their position in the chip s hierarchy ye The Edit in Place commands allows you to edit a cell while being within its particular instance at any level of hierarchy and to view its surroundings in the chip Note In EXPERTVIEWS the Edit in Place group of commands is replaced by Show in Place commands je The Hierarchy modification commands allow you to modify the chip s hierarchy of cells either by preserving its actual geometry or by preserving the hierarchy tree structure The most important commands from hierarchy edition and edit in place groups use shortcuts via buttons from the toolbars the Hierarchy bar and the Edit in Place bar 10 2 Hierarchy Navigator Project Tree Purpose Invokes a submenu of Hierarchy Navigator
55. Layout Expert cutt_blank 10 x File Cell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Yerification Libraries Setup Window Help IDe lt s Baal Aega AY WH E E ee x Joge30 Y 3 6950 um Y 124 Papi CellBase 2 Ms ao O F b h A O ORI CellB ase x AS NS AV NV Text _ D D a Sel 0 0 Hier 0 0 R W Silvaco 2004 y Figure 9 13 Cell Map Window 9 7 View Cell View The View gt Cell View submenu controls the degree of detail in the edited cell layout Settings assigned from this submenu are applied to the edited cell in the active window At the same time they become actual for this cell in all windows where it is opened either normally or by entering from Edit in Place There are other ways to change the contents of layout s view It is possible to make parts of the geometry hidden for viewing convenience This is controlled by the following settings e Layer visibility settings in View Layer View submenu or in the Layer Bar e View gt Array View menu command e Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Viewing gt Draw layout for at most lt N gt hierarchy levels 9 7 1 Flat In the View gt Cell View Flat mode only the real geometry of the layout is shown no cell instances arrays are denoted in any way In other words the edited cell looks like with its hierarchy is flattened Simucad 9 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual oS Figure 9 14 Flat View 9
56. New Cell Dialogs Results Clicking OK will add the new cell to the project or library A new window for the layout of the new cell is opened for editing if the check box Open Now is checked Note You cannot create a new cell with the name existing in the target library 4 6 1 Possible Problems 1 The library list does not show me the library to which I want to add a new cell Possible reasons e the library is not activated e the library is read only 4 12 Simucad Project Cell Commands 4 7 Opening Cells There are two commands to open a cell for editing viewing in a Cell submenu Cell gt 0pen and Cell gt Descend You can open several cells from exclusive libraries at the same time from the libraries panel menu command Libraries gt Setup See also Hierarchy Edit in Place commands 4 7 1 Open Purpose Cell gt 0Open opens a cell from the currently processed project or from libraries attached to it Execution Click on the menu command Cell gt 0pen to see the Cell Selection dialog which is described in Section 4 3 7 Cell Selection Dialog You must select a library from the library list and a cell name from the cell list and click the OK or Apply button You can have a Cell Preview or choose to display the cell information as described in Section 4 3 7 Results The layout window for the selected cell appears with the cell drawn to fit the window If you are opening a P cell the PCell Scrip
57. Paste menu option inserts the set of objects contained on the EXPERT clipboard into the current cell This operation may also be invoked from the Command bar To insert these objects into another cell it must be opened and made current before invoking the Paste operation EXPERT prompts you to point at the position where the object will be inserted To this end the bounding box of the objects to be pasted is attached to the cursor You can then drag this box over the screen to select a proper position for pasting At the selected place click the left mouse button to drop the objects here The relative positions of objects as well as their layers will be preserved Figure 8 2 demonstrates the Paste operation The first picture shows three layout objects two of them being selected The white rectangle near the cursor at the bottom of the second picture is the box illustrating the required location of the inserted objects The two rectangles at the bottom of the third picture are the objects from the clipboard inserted at the position of the bounding box Simucad 8 3 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Figure 8 2 Paste operation 8 2 4 Paste into Layer Purpose The Edit Expert Clipboard Paste into Layer menu option inserts the set of objects contained on the ExPERT clipboard into the current layer of the current cell The Paste into Layer operation works like the Paste operation with two natural exceptions e This operatio
58. Previous wiew i zoom Be To Target Point Cell view be To Cursor Position gt Array View To Reference Point ShiFt 0 Layer View j Scroll be Filling One screen Scroll Toggle Reference Point Q To Cell Border Activate Reference Point AutoPan Traveling Reference Point To Reference Point Redraw Redraw Region Cursor Crosshairs w Show Grid Dock Windows H Toolbars Figure 9 7 View Submenu 9 6 Simucad Viewing the Layout 9 3 1 Pan To Target Point The Pan gt To Target Point operation sets a point of the layout to be the new center in the active window Upon this command the cursor assumes the Pan shape and you must click the mouse at the required new center of the window Figure 9 8 shows the visible part of the layout before and after completing the View gt Pan gt To Target Point operation Figure 9 8 Pan gt To Target Point operation 9 3 2 Pan To Cursor Position The Pan gt To Cursor Position operation allows you to pan to the current position of the cursor An easy way to use this command is by means of the keyboard shortcut Once a keyboard shortcut in Setup Editor Viewer Shortcut is specified placing the cursor at the desired position and hitting the shortcut key will pan the screen to the cursor 9 3 3 Pan Scroll Left Right Up Down The Pan gt Scroll gt Left Right Up Down operations shift the boundaries of the visible area of the layout in the corresponding direct
59. Return Value ret type BOOLEAN True if the file or directory exists and False otherwise Example display file_exists d GDSII mux4 gds Simucad 17 95 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual FILE SELECTOR Invokes the File Selector dialog box to input a file name see Figure 17 17 2 Syntax fname FILE SELECTOR Return Value fname type STRING The string with the file pathname Look in Scripts 0 e ef Er bugs sl changewirestyle xis 8 fle_sel_ex xis cys emddre xis finid_left_bottorn xis History 1 divide xis cmdeip xis for m_create xis A 416creat xis cmdfloorplan xis hier_search xis ol 417creatods emdobjicomps xis imp L xis Desktop a aset xis emdobjcreate xis s load_pcell_prj xis EN hox_info sis emdproject xis loadeld xis Ee box info 2 xis cmdsetpars xis mi 100 xis My Documents box _info_3 xis compare xis make holes xis a bug_form_long_string xis compare_test xis multiuser xis calc time xis comparecells xis multiuser 1 xis My Computer callcopy xis a compproj xis multiuser 2 xis x callcopy xis compproj_test xis multiuserend xis E celimp xis ka delete xis ntran xis My Network Pla l xl name file_selector Run Figure 17 2 Calling File Selector Dialog Window from Xi script FILE SELECTOR_EX Files of type All Files 4 Invokes the File Selector dialog box with extended capabilities Syntax fname FILE _SELECTOR_EX param
60. SELECTION Copies the selected objects from the edited cell onto EXPERT S clipboard Format COPY SELECTION CUT SELECTION Moves the selected objects from the edited cell onto EXPERT S clipboard Format CUT SELECTION DELETE SELECTION Deletes the selected objects of the edited cell Format DELETE SELECTION DUPLICATE SELECTION Duplicates the set of selected objects of the edited cell Format DUPLICATE SELECTION shift_x yshift_y repeat_x repeat_y Arguments shift_x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Displacements in X direction shift_y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Displacements in Y direction repeat_x type INTEGER Number of replication steps in X direction repeat_y type INTEGER Simucad 17 65 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Number of replication steps in Y direction Example 1 gt duplicate selection 0 5 1 0 Creates a copy of the selected set displaced by x 0 5 y 1 0 from the original set Example 2 gt duplicate selection 0 5 1 0 2 4 Replicates the selected set in array fashion making 2 columns and 4 rows with a spacing of 0 5 between columns and 1 0 between rows Example 3 gt duplicate selection 0 5 1 0 1 1 Does nothing MIRROR SELECTION Mirrors the set of selected objects vertically or horizontally Format MIRROR SELECTION x value y value duplicate Named Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies vertical axis for the reflection of the selected objects w
61. STRING Sets a new label of text Sets a new label of text new label of text i ae Returns TRUE if text is mirrored and FALSE other wise MI MIRROR MIRROR put BOOLEAN Sets or resets mirroring status 0 or resets Sets or resets mirroring status 0 status i Lac Returns TRUE if text is slanted and FALSE other wise SLANT SLANT put BOOLEAN Sets or resets a slanted text 00 Sets or resets a slanted text resets a slanted text Simucad 17 107 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Table 17 9 LayoutObject Text Components SLOPE SLOPE get DOUBLE Returns a slope of text line in degrees SLOPE Us DOUBLE Sets a new slope of text line in degrees WIDTH EE DOUBLE Returns a width of text characters Sets a new width of text characters Table 17 10 LayoutObject Wire Components ECO Returns a joint style of wire Sets a new joint style of wire Table 17 11 LayoutObject Instance Components Returns name of cell valid for instances arrays only CELL STRING Sets new cell COLDELTA POINT Returns a column delta COLDELTA POINT Sets a new column delta COLS INTEGER Returns a number of columns in array COLS INTEGER Sets a new number of columns in array LIBRARY STRING Returns a logical name of library for instanced cell MIRROR get BOOLEAN Returns TRUE if instance is mirrored and FALSE otherwise MIRROR BOOLEAN Sets or resets mirroring status PARAMS SEQUENCE Returns param
62. Section 17 20 5 OBJECTCONTAINER Type Example 1 gt criteria search_criterion create O0OA_ LAYER Metal EQ gt ob Js FIND OBJECTS SEARCH BOX criteria criteria visible gt hierarchy Hierarchical search for visible box objects in the current cell on layer Metal is performed The result is in the form of a container of layout objects Example 2 gt criteria search _criterion_ create OA_LAYER Metal EQ gt objs FIND OBJECTS SEARCH_WIRE criteria criteria seg_output Search for wire objects in the current cell on layer Metal is performed The result is in the form of a sequence of layout objects SEARCH To search for objects of specified types in the specified area according to various criteria Note This command is obsolete Use FIND OBJECTS command with the switch seq_output specified Simucad 17 71 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 12 Modify Object Commands These sections describes commands that modify layout objects specified by variables of LAYOUTOBJECT data type 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments Note If both argument lobject and switch selected are not specified than selected objects will be modified If both are specified than switch selected is ignored during command execution Arguments lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT OBJECTCONTAINER SEQUENCE The layout object is represented by the variable of LAYOUT
63. Sectional Viewer controls the viewer of layout cross sections tNetlist Driven Layout Cut by Line cuts objects into different parts To choose how to cut the object use Cut by Line Modes Cut by Vertices Count cuts wires and regions into smaller ones with a specified number of vertices Clip Out Clip In is used to cut an area from the active cell layout and save it as a cell Merge Selected joins the objects selected in a cell together Resize Selected shrinks or expands the areas bounded by the selected objects in a cell Split commands are used to split instance arrays parametric wires and multipaths into components instances for arrays boxes and wires for parametric wires and wires and instances for multipaths Polygonize submenu is for converting wires and circles to polygons Link Devices commands allow you to automatically connect and align P cell instances Scale Selected is used to control the scaling factor in selected objects Scale Whole Layout is used to control the scaling factor in the entire layout Snap Selected To Grid is used to snap the selected objects to a grid Snap Whole Layout To Grid is used to snap the entire layout to a grid Derived Layers is used to recalculate generate and clean derived layers Scratch layers menu is used to clean layers which are generated by a DRC script The Tools menu also contains other editing operations See Section 12 16 Various for the functions of these oper
64. So aos 12 38 12161 OCIAICM Ls id sil dio 12 38 12102 o E A ta testes i ca ew ei eae ee eed Ge eee aries ede 12 38 12 10 05 FONON ZE ee ee ee ee ee ee re ee ee ee 12 38 121604 MOUSE GIICK cane o ek Oe 12 38 e o AMI A O ae ea eee ake eS 12 38 12 16 6 Detach scans rs ari sings EEE eueeeiNeeet Wane tsek sass 12 38 Eto VIOUS TOO ai 2a athe a acta ns a alee at eae eau Be eee A 12 38 12168 Vod MOO AAA rok St Se A Mh hue wee thie Merete bid 12 38 Chapter 13 Parameterized Cel oscssinda riada iris 13 1 1ALOVEIVIC Wi a 13 1 19 2 Peel Men COMMANG ars tthe ean Dae eed ben ead onal en ies St 13 2 13 3 Creating graphical P CONS secci n A A 13 3 13 3 1 Graphical P cell Creation Flow 0 ccc cece ene ete t eee e nent ee eens 13 3 13 3 2 Defining Graphical P cell RUICS cscs sc oot eet MEO ew Radek eG eae Sa Ne eG es 13 5 13 3 3 Defining Graphical P cell Parameters 0 0 ccc ccc ete erence eet teen nnn 13 9 13 3 4 Graphical P cell Preface sy a 5 05 2 nnana a da ke oe ek 13 10 13 3 5Grapnial P Cell COMPING si a a a eee 13 10 19 4 gt Creating VextualliP CONS aid iii A lan ae galangal la a 13 11 13 4 1 Textual P cell Creation FloW 22 ccc vanec seeds teev i adee ios as sd San 13 11 13 5 Conversion From Graphical to Textual P cell 00 00 cc cece eee ee eee eee eee eens 13 12 19 6 P cell Password Protection 23 uiaue sa siete ne ease ees bie eee tndee aie 13 13 Chapter 14 Integrated Layout Verification TOOIS 0ccc cece cenc
65. TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult BOOL ExpApiGenAllDLayers j 18 6 13 Clean Cell Primitives in Derived Layers BOOL ExpApiCleanCellPrimitivesDLayers Purpose Deletes data from all derived layers of the current cell Parameters None Simucad 18 25 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanCellPrimitivesDLayers 18 6 14 Clean Cell Hierarchy in Derived Layers BOOL ExpApiCleanCellHierarchyDLayers Purpose Deletes data from all derived layers of the current cell and of all its ancestor cells Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanCellHierarchyDLayers 18 6 15 Clean Derived Layers in the Whole Project BOOL ExpApiCleanWholeProjectDLayers Purpose Cleans Derived Layers in the whole project Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanWholeProjectDLayers 18 6 16 Clean Cell Primitives in Scratch Layers BOOL ExpApiCleanCellPrimitivesSLayers Purpose Deletes data from all scratch layers of the current cell Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise 18 26 Simucad Expert API Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanCellPrimitivesSLayers 18 6 17 Clean Cell Hierarchy in Scratch Layers BOOL ExpApiC
66. Text given it s number attached to the specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object int nText Linked text zero based index OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Reference to Linked Text property retrieved Return BOOL TRUE if Linked Text is retrieved successfully FALSE if failed Example HOBJECT hObject some object int nText 0 Linked Text number OBJECT PROPERTY Property 18 38 Simucad Expert API BOOL bIsOk ExpApiGetLinkedText hObject nText Property 18 7 28 Add User Defined Property BOOL ExpApiAddUserProperty HOBJECT hObject LPCTSTR szName LPCTSTR szValue Purpose Adds User Defined Property with specified Name and Value to Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object LPCTSTR szName Property Name LPCTSTR szValue Property Value Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL PReEsult EXpAprAdodUserrroperty Ob yecL property li m 18 7 29 Get User Defined Property LPTSTR ExpApiGetUserProperty HOBJECT hObject LPCTSTR szName Purpose Retrieves Value of Object s User Defined Property with specified Name ExpApiGetProperty allocates memory for Value and this memory should be explicitly freed later see the example Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object LPCTSTR szName Property Name Return LPCTSTR szValue Property Value Example HOBJECT hObject some object L
67. The first type belong to built in stipples libraries system library which contains cross lines and dotted stipples of different densities and X stipples library which contains several kinds of complete X or partial X stipples The second type belongs to the external user definable library of stipple patterns To invoke this feature use the new Edit button on the Stipple Selection panel command Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup gt Stipples gt Edit Bitmaps The stipple editor panel will be displayed It allows defining and managing of user defined libraries see Stipple Editor Operations below In any case a stipple pattern can be assigned to a layer in this way 11 22 In the Layer Wire Setup panel select the layer you want to assign a stipple Click on the Stipples button the Stipple Selection panel appears see Figure 11 10 In the Stipples tree view expand the item of the library containing the desired stipple the external library is under the Bitmaps item Select the stipple and click OK Simucad Setup Stipple Selection Stipples Stpples Bitmeps Transparent 0 pice Cross Diagonal SS F onard Diagonal w am Edi Bimaps DE Cancel Edt Bimaps L K J Cancel Figure 11 10 Stipple Selection Panel Note External stipple libraries files have a st p extension The default filename which resides in EXPERT S installation directory is default stp Although stipple lib
68. There are three possible cases how a non shared library can be opened e Ifyou do not have the write permissions to the lt library_name gt eld file it will always be opened in read only mode e If you have the write permission but the library is currently opened in exclusive mode by another user 1t will be also opened in read only mode e In other case if you have the write permission and nobody else has opened this library in exclusive mode it will be automatically opened in exclusive mode To change file access permissions please contact your system administrator On MS Windows operation systems you can change the read only property of lt library_name gt eld file to disable it s editing or opening in exclusive mode To do that open the File Properties dialog which is available from file context menu in explorer Shared library Libraries of this type may be accessed by many designers If you have proper access rights for a shared library you can check out cells from it for editing Only one user can edit any particular cell at a time The changes become visible to the other users after the cell is saved or checked in The Libraries gt Update Library menu command allows you to update the current library after other users have saved or checked into this library A shared library can be created on local and network drives Both shared and non shared libraries can be opened in read only mode Cells from libraries opened in read o
69. UM MM CM M MIL INCH LAMBDA nm mcm um mm cm m mil inch lambda and Lambda are names of available units of measurement e EXTEND FILL ROUND MITER and FLUSH are names of predefined wire styles e PRIMITIVES CELLWISE and FLAT are names of predefined DRC scope modes Note For Measurement Units in Technology File Remember that in the technology file the minimal grid step parameter Grid Is input in nanometers but the wire width is defined in the measurement units specified in this technology file by the Units parameter If you select the custom unit Lambda Units Lambda then Lambda size must be in micrometers Example Grid 100 in nm Unit lambda UnitValue 0 2 FALLO um Layer Name N Well Wire Width 1 0 wire width equal to two minimal grid steps In this case the minimal grid step is 100nm and the default wire width in the N_We11 layeris 1 0 0 2 0 2 um 200nm or 2 grid steps Sometimes it may be useful to set Lambda equal to the minimal grid step There are several ways to create a technology file e edit it manually in a text editor e create the necessary settings from EXPERT S user interface see Chapter 11 Setup and then save them by selecting Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology File Simucad 2 11 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual e import the file from Dracula runset See Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 2 1 Technology Settings
70. Uy false TA TOBGEET true Oo Texts Uso Desde Us Erus TA BOTTOMBEE TL takse Creates the instance with specified properties and attached texts Example 6 gt old_instance instance 0 0 cell nand create get gt instance 0 0 cell nand2 replace old_instance The first command creates the instance of the cell nand and returns one type LAYOUTOBJECT The second command replaces this object by the instance of cell nand2 ARRAY Creates selects or deletes a cell instance array Format ARRAY xpos ypos cell cellname Simucad 17 51 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual scale value rotate value params value parnames value row value xdeltarow value ydeltarow value xdeltacol value f eol value ydeltacol value property name value name value name value text text text text replace layoutobject net netname name instancename conn connectivity horizontal vertical Creare Tina delete ears add deselect get Named Arguments row value type INTEGER Specifies the number of rows in a cell instance array The value must be greater or equal 1 Default value is 1 row value type INTEGER Specifies the number of columns in a cell instance array The value must be greater or equal 1 Default value is 1 xdeltarow value type IN
71. Wire Setup e In the layer bar right click on a layer name and then choose layer setup in the contextual menu which is displayed This panel can be used to visualize or to modify layer parameters first by selecting the layer in the layer list at the top of this panel and then checking or modifying parameters which can be accessed in the fields at the bottom of the panel Note When you change some layer parameters in Layer Setup dialog these changes are applied to the current project only and they are stored in the current project e1 d when saving it These changes are never applied automatically to the original technology file even if you loaded the project in GDSII format with an associated technology file The only way to apply the changes to the technology file is to generate again the technology file from the current e1d project with the command Setup Technology Save Technology File Layer Creation In order to add a layer in the technology click on the New button The New Layer dialog box appears shown in Figure 11 8 Figure 11 8 New Layer dialog box Enter a new name then press OK If you need to create several layers click on Apply and repeat the sequence as many times as needed and then press OK You are returned to the main layer setup dialog so that other parameters of the new layers may be entered You can also specify the CIF name GDSII Parameters Assignment It is mandatory to assign each la
72. ZOOM Expands or reduces the view of the current cell Format ZOOM x yl x ys fall in out selected window Arguments x Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE X Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE S Yes Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y defines the left bottom point of window box for zooming to window x and y define dimension of the window box Note arguments are valid if the switch window is selected Switches fall fin out selected window e all shows the whole layout of the active cell e in enlarges the content of the layout window for a more detailed view e out decreases the resolution of the image allowing a more detailed overview e selected allows you to investigate selected objects e window shows part of the active cell located inside bounding box defined by arguments x y Xs Ys Examples SZoom Jall som iw OL O LO TO 17 20 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 5 2 Cell View Procedures CELLVIEW GET VIEW RECT Returns the rectangular area of the current cell view window in the user units Syntax view rect CELLVIEW_GET VIEW _RECT Parameters None Return Value view_rect type RECT View a rectangle of the current cell view The components of the rectangle are in the current measurement units Example gt cur_view_rec cellview_get_view_rect 17 6 Setup Commands 17 6 1 Set Directories Commands CURRENT DIRECTORY S
73. a set by moving this set from List3 to List2 and vice versa 11 4 5 Device Setup Device information is specified in the technology file in order to allow netlist extraction tool GUARDIAN LPE to extract all devices which are designed on the layout The description of this panel and the list of all kind of devices which can be extracted by GUARDIAN LPE can be found in GUARDIAN manual section 3 4 3 Devices 11 4 6 Grid Setup There are several kinds of grids in EXPERT Their sizes and visibility are defined in Grid Setup The grid setup dialog described below is invoked from three different places for different purposes Simucad 11 29 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 1 Default grid settings are set from Setup gt Technology gt Grid Setup or directly with the Grid Setup button of the Command toolbar These grid settings applied to all editing operations if they are not overridden 2 Individual layer grid settings are set from the Layer Setup panel Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup menu command They are applied to that particular layer 3 Cell instance placement grid see Section 11 4 9 Instance Grid is set as a parameter of the cell instancing dialog and is applied to cell instance array placement See Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects Section 5 3 1 Instance Array Attributes for more information Grid Setup Panel Steps for snap visual and super grids may be set differently in X
74. acts for the objects which are under the cursor does not change but the preselection changes If you release the Alt key and click once more with mouse still then the preselected object will be selected Simucad Selecting Layout Objects If you think that the above is too tricky the Preselection mode described below makes this task easier Note In order to reduce the choice you may hide some layers or make them non selectable 7 2 3 Preselection Mode Preselection mode greatly simplifies selection among overlapping objects The Select gt Preselection menu mode acts for various single object picking selection tools For example single object selection picking for the Modify operation entering into Edit in place or for node probing Here we describe the action of this mode for the selection tool Select gt By Click Drag menu command If this mode is on then the object with a boundary sufficiently close to the cursor position is highlighted If you click the left mouse button the highlighted object is selected In order to be preselected the object s boundary must be closer than 10 pixels to the cursor If there are several such objects then the closest one is preselected Note Ellipces circles can be displayed either as a true ellipse circle or as expected polygonal shapes depending on the options in Setup gt Editor Viewer Viewing The preselection marker for ellipses circles shows the shape that will be ob
75. ae ee ees 2 6 A Vee rr Cnet eer ter emu a tren 5 12 CID Ulsa iS 12 30 DDO 1o sudando 8 3 clipboard OR EXDGM css aa a 8 3 COSO DIO JO Clair 4 11 A a aa aai 3 14 colummdela csi 2 6 column displacement escroto olor carino 2 6 COIUMA INGEN sastre ias 2 6 Command Dar ita e ccciad 3 2 Command Line Input sate cate et cee 17 120 GOMIPIESS uste a ili ini 4 11 CONT QUPANON MG sas 2 12 COOraIMale AXES nanenane E a edie 12 5 Coordinate ON a E btecdeeeeecteaceteed 12 5 COGICINALCS oniro isihs calas 2 3 A A A 8 3 COPY CGS ito 4 15 COV MOA Gl enana le line a lcedidas 7 6 co A E 4 14 Create Cell in Place ooooncccocnoncnnccococcnnocoonnnccoranonnnnnnaoos 10 7 Creating Layout Objects sisi acieccdstidedcdoeietem nen ds 5 1 CUIPSORCNOSSMANS a od 12 5 A ie ce ae 3 10 Sc mie ecsarieereneete 12 2 CUNVSAPDrOXIMa lets 11 15 CUSTOM Menu curia 3 14 3 15 11 46 CUSTOMIZANON sir A E 3 14 Ui ETEEN 8 3 CUEDY POIWIEING seiersen a a tios 12 27 D database UNIN at 2 3 DOHGCHON AP e s T 11 15 Delete CEE ns a 4 17 Depth of display of cell hierarchy cccccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeenees 9 13 Derived Eayn atrasados laa 11 25 DES ui ee des 4 13 DESCIECUOn vs iii said 7 5 Desi Balt aaa 3 3 deso Pipas 2 3 3 2 o A e E O AES 10 5 Direction Snap Modes scccccsssseecceeeeeececeeeeeeeeesseeeseaeees 5 2 Discard Changes i ciedsears chides cincidneelndvieeaea eee 4 21 DISTAN E sees hose ae cae a esos 12 3 Index 1 Expert ExpertView
76. and Procedures Table 17 14 OBJECTCONTAINTER Operations Basic Operation Operator Second Operand Behavior equal EQL OBJECTCONTAINER Returns TRUE if two objects represent the same layout object container returns FALSE otherwise not equal NEQ OBJECTCONTAINER Returns TRUE if two objects do not repre sent the same layout object container returns FALSE otherwise Table 17 15 OBJECTCONTAINTER Components ie CN 17 20 6 EXPERT LISA Data Type Procedures POINT_CREATE Creates a point data object from the coordinates Syntax pe POINT CREATE Xy Parameters x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Return Value 17 110 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell pt type POINT Example gt pt point_create 5 4 5 Creates a new point 5 4 5 RECT_CREATE Creates a rectangle data object Syntax r RECT _CREATE xpos ypos xsize ysize Parameters Xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Keres AEYpPe INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Ysize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Return Value r type RECT Example gt r rect create 0 0 5 7 Creates a new rectangle 5 4 5 with position 0 0 and dimensions 5 and 7 along the x and y directions respectively SEARCH_CRITERION_CREATE Creates SEARCHCRITERION data object Syntax Criterion SEARCH CRITERION CREATE COD atte value condi tron Parameters ob at ee Specifies the layout object
77. and area During creation the donut is drawn as exact concentric circles as shown on the left side of Figure 5 13 After creation the donut is converted into a polygon as shown on the right side of Figure 5 18 according to the settings in Setup gt Technology gt General gt Shapes 5 4 5 Rolled Region Creation Purpose Rolled region is created in the same way as a polygonal region except the radius of curving is defined for each vertex The radius can be changed during drawing Changes of the radius affect only joints of the last segment All points input before the last one preserves their settings a velco i a Radius 20000 i Figure 5 14 Rolled Region 5 12 Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 4 6 Wire Creation To create a wire first define the following parameters e Active layer The layer where all new objects are created To create a wire in a layer set to active as described in Section 5 4 Primitive Object Creation e Every layer when defined in the technology has default values for the following wire parameters e wire width e end style e joint style Select Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup to set or change them You can override the defaults for the new wire in the Numeric Input C El Layer Via gt Width 2 0000 10 0050 53 9650 0 0000 0 0000 10 0050 47 0100 0 0000 6 8550 19 1500 47 0100 91450 0 0000 Ent Round y 19 1500 30 8400 0 0000 16 1700 Joint Fi 9
78. area blockborderspacing value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies offset of block shape from chip boundary blockspacing value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies space value between blocks pinsizex value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies X pin size pinsizey value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies Y pin size padsizex value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies X pad size padsizey value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies Y pad size Simucad 17 55 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Switches FAL Sizes J NnOTLXSi1zZeXx e fixsizex prevents sizex from modifying e nofixsizex allows to modify sizex 7 7iixstzey notaxsizey e fixsizey prevents sizey from modifying e nofixsizey allows to modify sizey FELXPAcIO nOtixXBatio e fixratio prevents ratiox and ratioy from modifying e nofixratio allows to modify ratiox and ratioy fixarea nofixarea e fixarea prevents to change chip area e nofixarea allows to change chip area Return Value None FLOORPLAN BLOCK Creates selects or deletes a floorplan block Note This command is obsolete Any library cell can be used in place of old floorplan block Use the command INSTANCE see Section 17 8 3 Instance Object Creation to place a block into an active cell view and commands for connectivity creation and modification see Section 17 16 Connectivity Commands FLOORPLA
79. assist the wiring process The Netlist Driven Layout is used to automatically create IC layouts based on information from a netlist Cell instances are created from existing cells P cells are instanced with parameters from the netlist file Netlist driven layout automatically transfers net names instance names and connectivity information from netlist to the layout Figure 12 6 below illustrates the Netlist Driven Layout NDL submenu and its different functions Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help Measure b al Script Metlist Driven Layout Mets 2 Cut By Line E Reextract Connectivity Cut By Line Modes H e Show Mets Clip Out Global Nets Clip In Shorted Nets Only Attach Texts ww Unfinished Nets Only Detach Texts Closest Points Only Polygonize e Show Pins Merge Selected e Show Ports Resize Selected Netlist Panel Scale Selected Load Metlist Scale Whole Layout La Snap Selected To Grid Snap Whole Layout To Grid Merge Two Wires Pick Lawyer Derived Layers Scratch Layers de Woid Tool Previous Tool Mouse Move b Mouse Click Figure 12 6 NDL Submenu 12 4 1 Loading the Netlist In order to auto generate the layout based on the information from the schematic netlist an existing ELD project file must be opened for the automatically generated cells to be placed Once the ELD project is open you can choose Tools Netlist Driven Layo
80. be found in the GUARDIAN LAYOUT VERIFICATION USER S MANUAL 14 5 Node Probing 14 5 1 Overview This operation highlights selects all layout objects electrically connected with a given object It is designed to trace electrically connected nodes throughout the hierarchy of a cell Also it allows using the short locator which generates the shortest pass for specified points in the highlighted node to find the reason of the short Expert 05t9994 SO05T999 ST File Gell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help IBS Al 6 B8RQa B 80 A P MK E E ew x far5o000 y from fon jase B Ur o SO05T999_ST s LALE GUO ILE GE Q gt jamia en H o ea MEE A 0d me na olla l HH H i acs TH no MET AH pg im n alag EF 0a ap HH H f a it si RSS MS H OO TF b W xl 45 NS AY NY Plans H i q O Y ae A Bae a i cali Enia H qd H HH Rina hide layer IPIMP show layer Layer hide layer Layer show layer Layer12 show layer IMETI hide layer Layer12 zoom inwindow 308 553 494 627 634 538 238 836 gt display node_get_name yx Run REP Sel 0 0 Hier 6 6 RAW Silvaco 2004 y Figure 14 8 Node Probing in Expert Before probing a node layer to layer connectivity
81. by its extension Lists of allowable output file extensions are specified in the corresponding setups APPLICON_SETUP GDSII_SETUP CIF_SETUP Parameters LPCTSTR szProjName File name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectSaveAs New_Project eld 18 10 Simucad Expert API 18 3 7 Compress Project BOOL ExpApiProjectCompress Purpose Decreases the size of the current project data file by performing garbage collection operation Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectCompress 18 4 Technology 18 4 1 Get the Number of Technology Layers int ExpApiGetTechLayerNumber Purpose Retrieves the number of Technology Layers Parameters None Return int the number of Technology Layers Example int nNum ExpApiGetTechLayerNumber 18 4 2 Get First Technology Layer HTLAYER ExpApiGetTechFirstlayer Purpose Returns handle to the first Technology Layer Parameters None Return HTLAYER The first Technology Layer Example HTLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetTechFirstlayer 18 4 3 Get Next Technology Layer HTLAYER ExpApiGetTechNextLayer Simucad 18 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Returns the handle to the next Technology Layer or EA_INVALID_HANDLE if no layers left Parameters None Return HTLAYER The next Technology
82. by object types and layers It is displayed in a text window from which it may be cut and pasted into any Windows application e g into a word processor To do this select the required part of the following information using the mouse e Depress the left button with the cursor at the beginning of the required piece e Drag cursor across the text and release the button at the end of the required piece e Press Ctrl C to copy the text into Windows NT buffer e Switch to your word processor and press Ctrl V You can also save all information into a file by clicking the Save button 4 22 Simucad Project Cell Commands Hint If you want a detailed list of cell objects together with all their coordinates and so on select Cell Export Xi Script File Hint If you want detailed information for selected objects you can create a temporary cell from the selected objects export it into xi script and then delete it In fact you can write a short xi script to do this for you Simucad 4 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page is intentionally left blank Simucad Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects 5 1 Creating Layouts This chapter describes how to create layout objects wires regions cell instances arrays and annotation elements texts or labels Wires can be of several styles Some special region types boxes ellipses circles donuts rings and rolled regions can be created by separate means In fact
83. contact group the new one will be added to source means sources and target means targets respectively Example Wwe add COntact port crsate 12 D sources 1 adds point contact to the source COonlLact Groupo we ada contact box 17 1 5 521 Fayer Metall fino get sources 1 adds object contact node_pick point_create 0 5 9 Metall selects node we edd contact targets Tadd node to Contact group WC_REMOVE_CONTACTS Removes source and target contacts from the wiring context Format 17 82 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell WC_REMOVE_CONTACTS Arguments None Switches None 17 14 Hierarchy Commands CELL CREATE See CELL CREATE on page 17 8 EXPLODE Explodes cell instances in the edited cell up one level of the cell hierarchy Format EXPLODE all selected Switches Zari I FBetectead e all switch means that all instances and arrays in the edited cell are exploded e selected default switch switch means that selected instances and arrays in the edited cell are exploded Example gt explode all All instances arrays in the edited cell are exploded FLATTEN Flattens completely removes hierarchy the edited cell into a file Format FLATTEN project_name Arguments project name type STRING The name of the eld file to write the flattened cell Example gt flatten mux_flat Flattened image of the current cell is saved into the ELD project
84. details of manipulations with the mouse in EXPERT are presented in their respective sections of the manual This section only summarizes the terminology that is applicable for a description of your actions with the mouse e The mouse cursor is a small moving icon on the screen whose movement is controlled by the mouse device The classical cursor s shape is an arrow In EXPERT the cursor s shape depends on which operation is activated as described in the corresponding sections A cursor has a distinguished point called the pointer It is used to precisely specify cursor position or mouse position on screen The pointer is usually the arrow s tip the center of a small cross or some other clearly distinguished point of a cursor s shape e To point Move the mouse to stop the cursor over the required object or screen area e To click Press and release mouse button e To double click Click the mouse button twice quickly at the same point For example in file selectors and cell selectors double clicking a file or cell name will open the file cell under the cursor e To drag Press and hold the mouse button move the mouse in such a way that the cursor passes along the required path on the screen then release the button This action may be used for example to draw various boxes for zoom area selection shape creation etc Cursor Movements There are several modes of movement of the cursor in the layout area e Smooth e Snap to
85. disable existing toolbars and it additionally allows you to define or customize the contents of these toolbars This panel can be accessed with Setup Hotkeys Menus Toolbars menu or with View gt Toolbars gt Customize menu A toolbar can be enabled disabled by checking unchecking the corresponding box in the toolbar list Note Toolbars and dock windows may also be enabled disabled thanks to the contextual menu of the toolbars This contextual menu may be displayed by a right click on any displayed toolbar Toolbar Customization e Select the requested toolbar in the list Gt becomes highlighted in blue e Click the Customize button the Customize toolbar panel is displayed see Figure 11 18 below e All available buttons are listed in the Available toolbar buttons list with alphabetical order Select any one and click the Add button in order to place it in the Current toolbar buttons list e Any of them can be removed from the Current toolbar buttons list by clicking the Remove button e Button order in the Current toolbar buttons list can be changed with the Move up and Move down buttons Note The Design bar is the only toolbar which cannot be customized Its shape and direction can be although changed in Setup Editor Viewer Editing panel see more details about it in Section 11 3 3 Editing Page El Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Separabor Mew project A 45 deg
86. doe eal eae ew od eee oar weenie ee RS 9 7 9 0 2 Pano CUSO POSION avi diarias ec cheese ote dl ata 9 7 9 3 3 Pan Scroll Let RIGhY UD DOWN nies Pnoente sored ei Sr 9 7 9 3 4 Pan To Reference POlMt ooocococcccccon eee e etn ete ee nee en et eeeeaes 9 7 a A O 9 7 E ZOOM ee id Da 9 8 Oe Ve ZOOM OHM sr create sore EAn ce te a as entree oa Soe Saeed ee ee 9 8 94 2 ZOOM DO SCI hs vase ar eax leer dete ee sual AA weed cae aes 9 8 AS ZOOM IMO WINGOW a bia Rei he ere EA Sika y 9 8 9 4 4 Zoom OEI OWEN ATA EA ee ee Od ek ee 9 9 94 3 Fixed RINO Zoom and OU 24 086 cies erect dc Gos baht Sips onde ness 9 10 9 5 Mouse Wheel for Scrolling and ZOOMING ccc cece eee eee teen eee eee eee 9 10 96 CAM atar rr a ADE 9 10 IT NICW CON VICW coran dd ena ee 9 11 o eee eae E ee ee ae are ee ee ee ee era O eRe a ee re eer ere Sree ae 9 11 Je WAL a aed yarn Gah tact dwelt shies bre ae eat ee Nene a a ar ee Dera 9 12 9 73 lOO plan MOJO 5 2 60 tebe bed e dade dd cadena nit babi ie bested eke 9 13 9 74 PRIMMnVeS MOC cas ts wate t aes a e ras lios 9 13 O70 nn erat ee use we tant ot ad aed tetra Senda ate 9 13 9 7 6 Hierarchy Depth orDISplay aia vise ed dade a dade dud ewe eee dees A E ee 9 13 IT ACIValo Layout VIEW csi rca gees 9 13 9 0 VIWA VICW A A care acntes aaa a whveret a OM Calera wal E 9 14 O LAVer VIEW atada adidas 9 14 A A A O ee ee ee 9 14 ra EENS li AAA og en ee ee ee ee es eee 9 15 9 10 Temporary Reference Point icc sees cccsienctad
87. down list Layer from the Subparts dialog to set the layer for the offset wire In addition you can specify the Begin Offset and End Offset parameters to extend or truncate the beginning and ending wire segments correspondingly see description above Table 1 Offset Path Separation CO CO Vertices coincide Left edge master wire Right edge master wire Shift left separation value is distance between center lines Shift right separation value 1s distance between center lines coincide with right edge of offset wire Shift left separation value is distance between left edge of mas ter wire and right edge of offset wire Shift right separation value is distance between left edge of mas ter wire and right edge of offset wire coincide with left edge of offset wire Shift right separation value is distance between right edge of master wire and left edge of offset wire Shift left separation value is distance between right edge of master wire and left edge of offset wire e Box is the set of boxes laying in the specified layer The size of the box is defined by the Width and Length parameters where box width is measured across the master wire and box length along the master wire centerline The distance between boxes is defined by the Space and Distribution parameters Space defines minimal distance between boxes Distribution can be one of two types minimum or even minimum means that distance between
88. e All wires in the current project e All regions in the current project 12 28 Simucad Tools e All regions and wires in the current project The Tools gt Cut by Vertices Count Cut by Vertices Count Setup commands pops upa dialog for setting the maximum number of vertices used by the Cut command for resultant split wires and regions see Figure 12 30 Cut Large Regions Wires x Max vertices count tor regions 4000 Max vertices counttor wires 2000 aa Zi Figure 12 30 Cut Large Polygon Wires 12 9 Split Compound Objects The Split commands allows you to split arrays parametric wires and multipaths into separate objects wires boxes and instances Once compound objects are split you cannot modify them like a complex object In addition splitting compound objects can be performed during object creation see Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects The following object sets can be split e Selected arrays P wires and mulipaths in the active cell view e All arrays in the current project e All P wires in the current project e All multipaths in the current project The array splitting depends on array splitting mode selectable from the Tools gt Split gt Array Split Mode submenu split all split by rows split by columns Simucad 12 29 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 10 Clip Out Clip In Purpose To cut a rectangular area from the active cell layout and save it as a separate cell
89. ee 5 15 5 0 TEXULADOL Crealo src a ved ee RC aie ds shea nd ds 5 15 5 6 Parame tie WING ica AR 5 16 dl COMlaCl ania wile heat lates on ate eae Se ea res leew ee awe taney 5 21 58 BUS ara raid eee ee er ee 5 23 Chapter 6 Modifying Layout Objects ice sc castes rr A A RA 6 1 Os CCUG a chara sade ew scene ei eatin Sa o o id e dees 6 1 6 2 General panic aria rada 6 1 Chapter 7 Selecting Layout ODO riviera dd EAS 7 1 Tal Layout Opecs APRPUO U 0 OPP PP aaa aa hanes Seat dia ee amen eee 7 1 7 2 Select BY CICK Diag vr in a chose eee ued ne eave seee kets 7 1 721 Selecion MOORS apesta tt ds ba ied ta th ie bok 7 2 7 2 2 Selection Among Overlapping Objects 0 ccc ccc ete e eee ete e nee eae 7 2 Ves PreSelect ModE 46 deans at 2 Soares 3d BO cute A ori Banana ae a a oan oe 7 3 TO BOX Seleciona ert aa aa a ea a aa a 7 4 TA List Selection wie cue ces Tennan to a a e AA eed A ee wet aes AS ADA 7 5 7D DESCIECHON e dist tute tor o Pacman as aaa Ebene 7 5 7 0 cave Selected AS CO corsa rara oases 7 6 7 7 Save Selected Copy To Active Layer ccc cece cee e eee eee teen eee e eee eens 7 6 7 6 Save Selected MOVE To Luis daros 7 7 7 9 Other Selection Commands Options 0c cece cece eee eee ee eee eee eeeenaees 7 7 A A RN 1 7 LI Z A Ec AAA ee ee a ee eee eee ee ee eer ee ee ee re 7 7 79 3 Selection by Object Types siria sores a AAA atyaiaesan 7 7 Simucad vil Expert ExpertViews User s Manual 7 9 4 Select A 7
90. field identifies ExPERT s technology file which contains converted device definitions e The DRC Script for Layer Generation field identifies GUARDIAN DRC s script file which contains converted statements for derived layers used for device and connectivity definition e The DRC Script for DRC Checking field identifies GUARDIAN DRC s script file which contains converted statements for DRC checks which can be in the same input DRACULA deck and use connectivity statements for connectivity based DRC checks Conversion into any of the destination files can be skipped by removing the check mark in the corresponding checkbox Any of the three technology fields may refer to the same technology file 11 2 2 Security of Technology Settings What is Protected The TCN Security mode prevents project technology information from being inadvertently changed If this mode is on then the operations listed below are deactivated Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology File e minimal and snap grid settings e layer connectivity settings e layer definitions name GDSII number datatype wire styles etc except for color and stipple patterns e color library selection and modification e editing of stipple patterns How to Set the TCN Security Mode To switch this mode on do the following 1 Create an EXPERT configuration file tcnsecur ecf or some other name with the following two lines Application TCNSecurity 1 2 Load it by
91. file where the project must be saved is typed in the File Name field of the dialog an extension is added automatically or a file name may be selected from the existing files with the given extension shown in the list of files Click the Save button to save the project to file Choose the Cancel button to abandon the save operation Result The project is saved in the specified file If an existing file name is selected for saving then a dialog appears that gives you a choice either to overwrite the file or step back and select another file name Pressing the Yes button overwrites the existing file Pressing the No button returns you to the Save As dialog box 4 4 4 Compress The File gt Compress decreases the size of the current project data file by performing garbage collection This operation can be useful after massive deletion of objects e g whole layers and cells After smaller deletions EXPERT successfully utilizes free data file space for new objects The project is saved before compression 4 5 Closing Project Selecting File gt Close closes the current project In addition File gt New and File gt Open attempt to close the previous project as well After these commands EXPERT S warning about unsaved changes may follow see Figure 4 7 It means that there are unsaved changes in the work project and or in some linked libraries Yes Pressing this button forces EXPERT to save the project to the file
92. filename ecf gt upon startup A number of user interface settings may be assigned to the current window such as grid style snap modes selection modes hierarchy viewing mode and shortcut key assignments If you change some of them normally the changes are valid only for the current window If you open a cell in a new window apply default values to it There are three ways of changing these defaults as described below The following group of commands from the Setup submenu allow you to transfer editing setups between windows and EXPERT s sessions e Fix Setup By this operation the settings of the active window are set as default or as active for your system This means that all newly opened windows assume these settings until you explicitly change them Already opened windows retain their settings Upon normal termination EXPERT saves the last fixed setup into the Windows registry so that it will be used when EXPERT starts next time unless it is overridden by the ecf command line switch described in this section e Export Setup The settings of the current setup are stored in a file for later use e Import Setup The previously saved settings are read from a file and applied to the rest of the current session e Save Setup The settings of the active session are written into the permanent storage of the current user e Restore Setup The settings are read from the permanent storage and applied to the rest of the current session
93. first mouse click The following directional modes are available e None cursor moves in all directions e Diagonal cursor moves vertically horizontally and diagonally e Orthogonal cursor moves vertically and horizontally e Vertical cursor moves in vertical direction only e Horizontal cursor moves in horizontal direction only Gravity or Snap to Objects mode means that when the cursor comes close enough to shape elements such as vertices and centers it jumps to these elements See Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 8 Gravity Page for more information Simucad Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Bindkeys shortcuts for Mouse Functions Sometimes clicking mouse buttons may be inconvenient For example if a tablet is used instead of mouse some buttons on the stylus pen may be inconvenient to press To this end the following are added Tools Mouse Click Left Middle Right If bindkeys are assigned to them these bindkeys can be used instead of mouse clicks when drawing the shape and in some other operations In addition the Enter key acts as the right mouse click to terminate the drawing of polygonal shapes region wire ruler and cutting line These replacements are especially useful if the mouse is not stable 3 1 4 Dialogs For many of EXPERT S operations you must input some parameters Such input is usually performed from dialog windows or simply dialogs that appear on the screen
94. format CIF format Applicon format OASIS format LEF DEF format t Special Functions Fast built in batch and real time DRC Electrical node extraction and Node Probing Clipping out layout areas with hierarchy preserved Resizing and rescaling Offgrid checks and snapping to grid Netlist Driven Layout Layout Database Handling Efficient access to external storage Real time processing of huge layouts High performance support of layout manipulations Shared library system for teamwork Selection Tools Flexible selection modes By mouse click drag By rectangular box By object type Preselection from list of objects Selection of objects based on various criteria using Search functionality Accessories User defined grids subgrids Automatic grids adjustable to zoom ratio Multiple grid representations Automatically graduated axes Flexible polyline rulers and distance meters Point Line distance measurement Convenient toolbar for layer manipulations Powerful plotting capabilities Simucad Introduction Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page intentionally left blank 1 6 Simucad Chapter 2 Basic Notions 2 1 Projects Cells Libraries The basic unit of layout design in EXPERT is a cell It is a logical group of primitive layout objects regions wires boxes ellipses labels and instances of other cells Although this group may be arbitrary cells most often correspond to actual components of i
95. given the library will be searched in the current directory Switches exclusive readonly e exclusive default switch makes the library an exclusive library only one user can edit the library at any moment e readonly default switch makes library as a read only cells cannot be edited 17 18 2 Library Management Procedures GET_ACTIVATED_LIBRARY_LIST Gets the sequence of logical names of activated libraries from the EXPERT S workspace Syntax libs GET ACTIVATED LIBRARY LISTO Return Value Sequence of logical names of activated libraries from EXPERT S workspace type SEQUENCE GET_COMPUTER_NAME Gets computer name Syntax comp GET_COMPUTER_NAME Return Value Name of computer type STRING GET_LIBRARY_LIST Gets the sequence of library logical names from the EXPERT S workspace Syntax libs GET LIBRARY LIST Return Value Sequence of logical names from EXPERT S workspace type SEQUENCE LIBRARY_ACTIVATED Returns TRUE if library is activated and FALSE otherwise Syntax ret LIBRARY_ACTIVATED lib_logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library Return Value 17 92 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell TRUE if library activated and FALSE otherwise type BOOLEAN Example Pdieplay library activated A LIBRARY_EXISTS Returns TRUE if library exists and FALSE otherwise Syntax ret LIBRARY_EXISTS lib_logname Param
96. gt lt GDSII_Number gt lt DATATYPE gt or lt LayerName gt lt GDSII_Number gt In the second case DATATYPE is set to 0 Simucad 11 39 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Examples Via 10 0 Poly 6 GRings 43 5 To apply remapping use the following settings in the Setup gt GDSIT Input Output gt Output panel e Check the Use layer remapping table option e Select the file with the table either by typing its name in the File name field or by browsing the files by clicking the Browse button labeled by If you are using the remapping table only those layers that are listed in the table will be output into the GDSII file Other restrictions may also be applied as defined in the GDSII Output setup Writing Parameterized Cells into GDSII File Parameterized Cells P cells are converted into ordinary cells during GDSII export When an instance of a P cell is written into a GDSII file an ordinary cell is created based on actual P cell parameters of this instance The name of this cell is created by attaching actual values of parameters to the name of the P cell As this may produce a long cell name please take care of setting a sufficient limit for cell name length in order not to have truncated names for instances of P cells in the output GDII file Notice also that P cell instances with the same set of parameter values produce the same new cell name 11 40 Simucad Setup 11 6 CIF 1 0 Setup EXPERT may r
97. has to be assigned as described in Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 4 4 Connectivity Setup 14 10 Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools When the menu command Verification gt Node Probing gt Pick Node is selected the cursor assumes the node probing shape You must point and click at the geometric object whose electric connections are to be traced As a result the whole net electrically connected to the probed object will be highlighted and you may inspect it using other commands from Verification gt Node Probing submenu The corresponding commands can also be executed from the Node Probing bar This bar may be turned on off by the View gt Control Bars command The probed object may be anywhere in the hierarchy To facilitate the choosing of the required object preselection highlighting is used You can also hide some layers for better selectivity Node probing function ignores layer visibility Multiple Nets can be highlighted simultaneously If the Shift key is depressed while the Probe Node or Find Net by Name tools are activated the picked net becomes highlighted and available for inspection and the previously selected nets stay highlighted on the screen Node objects from non selectable layers are always displayed in a wireframe mode When Probe Node or Find Net by Name tools are activated for power or ground nets big highlighted objects from substrate layers often make other node objects hard to see To see pow
98. hierarchical full custom design ULSI layout editor It is designed to fit a wide variety of requirements for a modern IC design tool e no limitations on size of ULSI designs e intelligent geometry database offering extremely fast navigation processing speed and low requirements on computer memory e rich set of comprehensive tools for support of all angle geometry designs e shared libraries system for distributed development environment e flexible tuning on different IC technologies e versatile customizable user interface combining smart GUI with alphanumeric input e comprehensive flexible setup f e integrated DRC with real time on the fly on line and batch modes of use e powerful script language for command line input activity logs autogeneration of layouts and parameterized cells y e possibility of adding custom C C programs to control edit and modify EXPERT S project data and user interface using EXPERT API functions e efficient utilization of multithreading multiprocessing e powerful plotting capabilities e convenient hierarchical navigation and selection The current version of EXPERT runs on PCs and workstations under Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris and Linux Simucad 1 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 1 2 1 Advanced Capabilities No Restrictions on Layout Complexity EXPERT provides high speed loading editing and verification functions and advanced graphical tools It has n
99. if Lambda unit is selected e Load maximum Sets the maximum amount of physical memory in megabytes for storing layout objects Zero value means some default value It is recommended that you change this value in heavy multitasking sessions only e Default type of project for load save file You may choose one of GDSII EXPERT CIF Applicon or Recent The latter selection means that EXPERT will remember the last opened saved project type In all remaining cases EXPERT will start Open and Save As dialogs with the selected project file type e Idle time for SFLM min Recall SFLM is SIMUCAD FLOATING LICENCE MANAGEMENT If a copy of EXPERT is idle longer than the allotted time the license becomes available to the next user starting EXPERT The copy of EXPERT that lost its license still has options to save data and exit or try to Simucad 11 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual regain the license The corresponding dialog will show up when EXPERT resumes its activity Zero value for idle time means that the license is released only when the application terminates Disallow saving into GDSII CIF Applicon formats If this option is checked then the command Project Save As will give the only option to save into the eld format This option provides an extra protection of inspected layouts Write scratch layers into Expert ELD files Allows to save scratch layers as scratch layers in ELD files Write scr
100. in the lazy instance view mode The ports are displayed with a dash blue line The command Tools gt Netlist Driven Layout gt Edit Nets invokes a window titled Edit Nets See Figure 12 11 which allows you to add or delete nets and change their type Global External or Internal You can also modify the instance pin related to the selected net Edit Nets ees Nets Add Delete Instances Add Delete Figure 12 11 Edit Nets Simucad 12 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The command Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Assign pins assigns object pins from text labels if connectivity between the text and objects layer exists and the option Generate ports is set to on The command Tools Netlist Driven Layout Update nets turn on off the automatic update nets flight lines during layout modifications For modes Shorted Nets Only and Unfinished Nets Only this option automatically turns off during modifications layout because these options required connectivity information It this case after turning this option on you will receive a warning to update connectivity information 12 4 5 Cells P cells Requirements In order for the NDL feature to be able to establish the connectivity and display it with the use of flight line nets and pins have to be specified in your standard cells or P cells P cells In the project presented in this section the cells MNL and MPL are actual P cells A portion of the script of th
101. in these submenus thanks to following sequence Select the desired Custom Menu in the drop down list Click the New menu button and give the name of the submenu to be created The new submenu is added in the Custom Menu items list with an indented separator below indicating the end of the submenu Add any item from the Commands list with the gt gt button and place this item in the Custom Menu items list between the new submenu name and the separator using the Up and Down buttons Other Functions of the Custom Menus Panel 11 48 To remove an item from custom menu select a line at the Custom Menu Items list and click the Delete button To rename an item of custom menu select a line at the Custom Menu Items list click the Rename button and give the new item s name To go back to default custom menu click the Default button Simucad Setup 11 10 Built in DRC Command Setup The Built in DRC Command Setup panel is used to set options controlling Built in DRC i e interactive DRC These options are taken into account when a single DRC command is executed from the following commands of the Verification gt DRC menu e Select e Boolean operation e Resize e Layer e Spacing check The first four commands of this list can be used to generate layers thanks to boolean operations or specific geometrical operations on drawing layers The generated layers will be scratch layers like those generated from a usual DRC script
102. invisible correspondingly supergrid nosupergrid e supergridand nosupergrid switches turn super grid nodes ON and OFF correspondingly autogrid noautogrid autogrid switch means that visual grid will be generated automatically e noautogrid switch turns OFF automatic visual grid autonormal autodense autosparse e autonormal autodense and autosparse are different types of density for automatic grid Jadottedorid solvagrid e dottedgrid means that the grid will be represented by dots e solidgrid means that the grid will be drawn as lines SETUP SHAPE Sets parameters for approximation of ellipses wires donuts and rolled regions by polygonal regions Format SETUP SHAPE OffgridWire noOffgridWire Foot rara rel fMOOTrPGrTdcire PEivstascenter nofarstascenter Jeixvroumscribed anscribed mertices 7angle deflection Hvale Arguments None Named Arguments value Type DOUBLE Specifies the value for the specified polygonal curve approximation method The number of vertices for polygonal approximation if the vertices switch selected angular distance between vertices in degrees if the angle switch selected deflection distance of polyline from the curve in user units if the deflection switch selected Switches offgridwire nooffgridwire Simucad 17 25 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Affects the wire drawing and convert t
103. it is unique However the set of xi commands grows together with EXPERT s capabil ities Therefore some abbreviations may no longer be unique and some older xi scripts will fail to run with newer versions of EXPERT Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 7 As described below the phrase the command fails means that the command will not be executed and the execution of the script in most cases will be terminated 8 If a command parameter is described as cel1_name then whenever applicable this name will contain the logical library name e g gates inverter means inverter cell from gates library 9 Some XI commands and XI types is used extended functionality of predefined LISA data type ATTRIBUTE_ASET There are LISA commands ASET_CREATE_CS and ASET_CREATE_PREDICTED_CS to create case sensitive attribute sets Their syntax is the same as for LISA commands ASET_CREATE and ASET_CREATE_PREDICTED A new component IS_CS for the ATTRIBUTE_SET type returns TRUE if attribute set is case sensitive and FALSE otherwise A new function ATTR_CREATE_CS allows you to create a case sensitive attribute Notice that ATTR_CREATE function converts the attribute name to upper case to produce case insensitive attribute A case sensitive attribute may be added may only to case sensitive attribute set while a case insensitive one may be added to both types of attribute sets 17 3 Project Commands and Procedures
104. linked The linking directions are properly updated if instance rotated and or mirrored User defined linking procedure is to adjust the parameters of linking P cell instances The EXPERT Device Linking tool provides the following arguments for linking procedure Simucad 12 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e The P cell parameters of the first instance being linked in the form of case sensitive LISA ASET object where the name of each attribute corresponds to the name of the P cell parameter and the value of each attribute corresponds to a P cell parameter value e The P cell parameters of the second instance in the form described above e The pin name of the first instance The pin name coincides with the name of net to which it belongs e The pin name of the second instance e The boolean value FALSE if pins are only pins in the external net TRUE if there are other pins connected to the same net The linked procedure is invoked automatically when all linking conditions are satisfied When the linked procedure is finished the new P cell parameters are applied to the linked instances and the last ones are aligned along the edges where linking had taken place 12 6 2 Automatic Linking Automatic linking allows newly created objects to be automatically linked with existing objects if their pins overlapped and other linking conditions are satisfied An object for linking can be the result of any of the following editing operati
105. may be executed from the command line A xi command may have any number of arguments parameters 17 120 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 22 3 Activity Log The Activity Log is a record of all operations you executed in an xi script format The Activity Log is written if the corresponding option is selected in Setup Editor Viewer Data Safety To replay the Activity Log you must have the license for LISA language 17 22 4 CellExport Xi script This menu command writes the current cell into a file in xi script format 17 23 Command Quick Reference Table 17 22 Return type Command Procedure ll Arguments Switches ll arameters OOo EE FICA EC name output_name ree O IO ET E ION CAI EU CI DO ECT CS E A a A E to oe lib_logname OO e ESO ECT IO CREI CS E ES es ees O Sk e ECT O e ISA EH A gt CELL RENAME Old ell mame new cell name 17 13 CELL SAVE cell_name 17 14 Simucad 17 121 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters CELL SAVEAS cell name new cell name 17 14 CELL STATUS cell name r rw 17 14 DEFINE PCELL pcell_ name replace 17 15 parN_name TYPE type DEFAULT value BODY pcell_body x REFERENCE POINT 17 19 Command Procedure Return type y activate deacti vate ey Ges tye L S emake 4720 selected window RESTORE EXPERT SETTINGS default
106. may launch the GUARDIAN LVS tool to compare the extracted netlist against the one produced by a schematic capture tool or extracted from another layout The complete description of GUARDIAN LPE can be found in the GUARDIAN LAYOUT VERIFICATION USER S MANUAL 14 8 Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools 14 4 Guardian LVS Netlist Comparator The GUARDIAN LVS netlist comparison system LVS is integrated within CELEBRITY CAD It may be run both as standalone application and in batch mode from the operation system s command line The GUARDIAN tool may be launched from the EXPERT layout editor as shown in Figure 14 1 if the licence for GUARDIAN is available GUARDIAN is a tool used for comparing two circuits as described by their netlists in the standard spice netlist format One of these netlists usually corresponds to the schematic of a circuit produced e g by the GATEWAY schematic editor It represents the logic of the circuit The other netlist is extracted from the circuit layout by the GUARDIAN LPE netlist extractor It represents the actual physical layout of the circuit as produced e g by EXPERT layout editor This kind of circuit verification is called LVS layout versus schematic comparison It is not uncommon to compare two schematic netlists SVS or schematic versus schematic or two layout netlists LVL or layout versus layout GUARDIAN compares circuits that may contain both primitive devices flat designs and
107. mode ty Load project Gs te About BARELY Separator ir Accept All derivations _A Redraw L H Accept denvation HH Zom bo fil A an i i Zoomin SE ARE AAs des EMC N E ras PU Figure 11 18 Customize Toolbar Dialog Other Toolbar Characteristics Each toolbar can be set to default state with Reset button of the Customize toolbar panel The look of all icons of the toolbars can be modified in three ways e The icons size can be increased with the large icons option Simucad 11 45 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e The textual description of the function can be added in the icon thanks to display text labels option e Contextual description of the function can be displayed as tooltip when holding the mouse on the icon thanks to display hints option 11 9 3 Application Colors Panel In this setup panel it is possible to assign colors to various auxiliary drawings in EXPERT e cell map perimeter active inactive e cross line and cross hair cursor line e layer and grid default color e modified objects e newly created object e highlighted node e selection and pre selection markers e cell origin and reference point e ruler e stretched shape elements e router source and target for selection zoom clip out etc Custom colors are set separately for black and white backgrounds It is possible to come back to colors defined in the current setup by cli
108. modes e Automatic in which it selects parameters for the new contact depending on the parameters of overlapping wires In this mode contact could be placed only at places where two or more wires overlap Eo ME Position de ar A 3 4500 CES Y 24 56000 EE Ok Cancel S Figure 5 23 Placing the Contact in Automatic Mode e Manual in which you can define parameters for new contacts and place them wherever you want Ze Contact CONTA y 1 EN ES E 0 7500 a 3 4500 E 21 0000 0000 H 25500 E zg Delta ES copes p Columns Poo Dr 1 3000 2000 i Cancel Figure 5 24 Placing the Contact in Manual Mode In Automatic mode simply point the cursor where wires overlap and click left mouse button and the appropriate contact will be created Simucad 5 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Figure 5 25 Example of a Contact In Manual mode you can select a contact template from the drop down list of contacts defined in the technology When you select a template all other fields in the Numeric input are filled with predefined values from the technology You can override all these values before placing the contact The Width and Height fields define the size of the box object that is created in the contact layer This size does not include margins in contacted layers which are defined in technology so the actual size of contact cell could be different Usually contact dimensions are equal
109. name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HCLAYER Handle of the first Cell Layer Example HCLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetFirstCelllayer Cel1_ 1 18 6 9 Get Cell Next Layer HCLAYER ExpApiGetNextCellLayer LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Returns handle of the next Cell Layer in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HCLAYER Handle of the next Cell Layer or EA INVALID_HANDLE if no cell layers left Example HCLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetNextCellLayer Cell1_ 1 18 6 10 Get Cell Layer Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetCellLayerName HCLAYER hlLayer Purpose Returns Cell Layer s name by Layer s handle 18 24 Simucad Expert API Parameters HCLAYER hLayer Layer handle Return LPCTSTR The name of Cell Layer Example HCLAYER hLayer some data LPCTSTR szLayer ExpApiGetCellLayerName hLayer 18 6 11 Generate Derived Layer BOOL ExpApiGenDLayer LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Generates Derived Layer with specified name or the current layer if Derived Layer name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of derived layer Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGenDLayer New_DLayer 18 6 12 Generate All Derived Layers BOOL ExpApiGenAllDLayers Purpose Generates all Derived Layers Parameters None Return BOOL
110. necessary Execution Select Cell gt Copy and the Cell Selection dialog box will appears titled Copy Cell s see Figure 4 9 Copy Cell s xj Library List Cell List All None E lt Mund gt No Expert km finverter lt Mund gt A ml Mundo Amd lt Mund gt Top cells only Ananda lt Muxd gt All cells Open Now With Hierarchy With Library Cells Target Library lt Mund gt Cell Filter Mew cell name mut er Cell preview Show info _ Cancel o Awy E Figure 4 9 Copy Cells Dialog Target Library The library into which the cells will be copied It may be a current project as well New Cell Name If you select a single cell you may assign a new name to the copied cell If you select several cells then EXPERT will try to copy the cells using the same names for duplicates In the latter case if cells with these names already exist in the target library the Cell Name Collision Resolving Dialog will appear see Section 4 9 1 Cell Name Collision Resolving Dialog With Hierarchy If this option is set then cells will be copied with all required subcells If this option is not set the references to subcell instances will point to the original libraries With Library Cells If this option is set then cells from the library will also be copied Open Now If a single cell is selected for copying and this option is checked then upon successful copying the resulting dupl
111. newest created or modified object Simucad 7 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 7 9 5 Invert Selection The menu command Select Invert Selection inverts the selection state for all objects of the current cell All selected objects become unselected and vice versa As usual it acts only on visible and selectable objects 7 9 6 Cell Instance Selectivity Select Ignore Instances command allows you to switch off on the selectivity of cell instances in the layout 7 9 7 Primitive Object Selectivity Select gt 1Ignore Primitives command allows you to switch off on the selectivity of primitive objects in the layout 7 9 8 Selection Count Indicator At the right end of the message line bottom of EXPERT S window there is an indicator showing the total number of currently selected objects in the edited cell It looks like this Sel 5 2 where the first number is the number of all selected objects and the second one is the number of selected instances If you need more detailed information about selected objects use the Cell Info menu command More information about selected objects may be obtained by the menu command Cell gt Selection Info The Info window is resizable to see more data without scrolling 7 9 9 Selection Highlight Modes The following mode acts only for a Solid or a Stipple kind of filling If the menu item Select Solid Highlight is checked the whole interior of a selected object is highl
112. object will be deleted The default switch is determined by values of other named arguments and switches The find switch is used if switches select or get are present otherwise the create switch is used select e select switch means that the object will be selected or deselected according to object select mode defined by select mode command or Select gt Selection Modes setting reselect add deselect These switches temporary change the default select object mode e reselect switch means that the object will be selected and previously selected objects will be deselected e add switch means that the object will be selected without a change in the selection state of other objects e deselect switch means that the object will be deselected get e get switch means that the new object create or object that is searched for find will be returned as a LAYOUTOBJECT type variable pin e pin switch means that the object added by the named argument net to the net will be used as a net pin in the instance connectivity see Section 17 16 Connectivity Commands The switch is ignored if the object does not belong to any net Note Combinations of following switches and named arguments are illegal delete and get delete and select deleteand replace findand replace Simucad 17 39 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 8 2 Primitive Object Creation Named arguments and switches applicable f
113. objects and Deselect all objects correspondingly select and deselect all found objects Note A single run of Search finds objects such that each of them satisfies ALL search criteria In other words a single search answers queries such as lt Find all wires in layer Metal2 with property Node equal to VDD gt If for example you want to find all wires and all boxes according to certain criteria you must do the following e find wires e click Select all at the Find panel e find boxes e click Select all at the Find panel Now you have selected all wires and boxes that satisfy your criteria Simucad 8 17 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual 8 11 Other Editing Commands The Edit menu command also contains some setup features which allows you to toggle on and off certain functionality in the current session Edit gt Gravity allows you to activate or deactivate gravity More details about the Gravity setup can be found in the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Gravity form and in Chapter 11 section 11 3 Edit gt Snap Cursor to Grid allows you to specify the snapping mode of the cursor in relation to the erid Section 3 1 3 of Chapter 3 and Chapter 11 Setup provides a more completed description of this feature The submenu Edit gt Region Mode provides you with four different settings for geometry creation Normal Merge Hole and Hole Selected E wiew Select Tools Hierarchy Verificati
114. of diagonal wire segments will then increase e If this setting is on the wire shape will be drawn according to its centerline and constant width This option affects the drawing of wires and the Convert to polygon operation for wires Warning If this option is on you must use the offgrid checks in DRC for the final design Multiwire Multiwire is a complex layout object that consists of several wires running in different layers consecutively connected by appropriate contacts Creation of multiwires is disabled if technology doesn t have defined contacts See Section 11 4 8 Contact Setup to see how contacts are defined Figure 5 16 Multiwire Multiwires are created in a similar way to wires Simply check the Multipath checkbox in the Numeric input panel and switch the layers when you want the contact to be placed Laver metal 30 0000 150 0000 0 0000 0 0000 APRA nd aang 30 0000 156 0000 0 0000 6 0000 MS 27 0000 156 0000 3 0000 0 0000 Ent Fush y Jor Etend gt he Multipath FT Split New Vertex Delete Vertex Figure 5 17 Multiwire Creation 5 14 Simucad Creating Layout Objects A sample drawing of a Multiwire shown in Figure 5 17 may look like this e Check the Multipath checkbox e Select Layer metall and click two points to define the first wire segment e In the Numeric input panel change Layer to metal2 and click one point to define second multiwire segm
115. omitted The ExpApiSearch and either ExpApiGetFoundFirstObject or ExpApiGetFoundLastObject calls are required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to previous found Object or EA_INVALID_OBJECT Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFoundPrevObject Cell_1 18 7 9 Find Last Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFoundLastObject LPCTSTR szCellName NULL 18 30 Simucad Expert API Purpose Gets last Object in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted The ExpApiSearch call is required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to last found Object Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFoundLastObject Cell_1 18 7 10 Get First Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFirstObject LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets first Object in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted and specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Layer name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle of the first Object Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFirstObject Layer_1 Cell_1 18 7 11 Get Next Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetNextObject LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets next Object in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted and sp
116. operation is performed successfully the project changes as follows e A new cell is added to the project It consists of the copies of the selected objects of the active cell The reference point of the new cell is at the lower left corner of the bounding box of the selected objects and the local coordinates of the copied objects in the new cell are obtained by subtraction of the bounding box s lower left corner coordinates from the selected object s coordinates in the active cell e The active cell remains unchanged e The selected objects remain selected in the active cell See also Hierarchy gt Create Cell in Place Cell gt Create 7 7 Save Selected Copy To Active Layer Purpose Save Selected gt Copy To Active Layer menu item copies the set of selected layout objects into the current layer Execution e Select a set of layout objects to copy into the current layer These objects may be from different layers e Click the Select gt Save Selected gt Copy To Active Layer menu item Results The selected primitive objects and texts will be copied into the current layer This operation does not involve selected instances and arrays 1t is meaningless for them 7 6 Simucad Selecting Layout Objects 7 8 Save Selected Move To Layer Purpose Save Selected Move To Layer menu item moves the set of selected layout objects into the current layer Execution e Select a set of layout objects which you want to move into
117. option Allow layers with same GDSI numbers datatypes in Setup gt Technology gt General is not checked Only layers with negative values of GDSII numbers datatypes may have these values the same These values are not allowed by the GDSII stream data format specification but may be used by EXPERT for scratch layers GDSII Format Issues On Input Two cases of wrong GDSII file format produced by some CAD systems are processed The corresponding warnings are entered in the GDSII input log Simucad 4 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 1 One point wires although forbidden by GDSII format are converted into circles or squares depending on the wire end style rounded extended if the corresponding option in Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Input is checked One point wires with flush end styles are always skipped 2 A definition of structure cell started within the definition of another cell In this case the piece of the GDSII file between an ENDSTR record and the closest next BGNSTR record is skipped and some data may be lost On Output 1 When an attempt is made for writing a GDSII file with cell names longer than the number of symbol specified in Cell name limit symbol using Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Output the cell name will automatically be modified to fit the symbol limit fixed The last 7 symbols of the cell name will be given a unique instance index Some CAD systems fail to read GDSII files with cell
118. or using the New Vertex button If you are using an existing template from the Template drop down list then parameter values for the path and all subparts will be filled automatically You can make any changes to predefined parameters or create a new Pwire from scratch without using templates x sa coord Y coord Ds Dy Template y Hame poo Layer Via id 30000 Erd Flush x oint Miter Split Subpart Hew Wertes Delete Vertex Cancel Figure 5 20 Numeric Input The Subparts dialog allows the adding removing and modifying the subparts for the current Pwire Z subparts a al Add ita oc E E See eae Remove Enclosure Wire Metal 0 O 0 5 Update Te co ec Begin Offset fo oe Doo End Offset fo Justhicaton center E width fi Enclosure OS Length fp Space pO Begin Corner Offset fo Distibubonc even sss End Comer Offset fo Cancel Figure 5 21 Subparts Dialog Simucad 5 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Figure 5 22 Example of PWire A Pwire object can include any number of subparts such as enclosure wires offset wires and sets of rectangles A Pwire subparts list is shown at the top of the Subparts dialog see Figure 5 21 When you select an existing subpart the values of its parameters will be automatically filled in the corresponding fields You can edit the values of parameters and click the Update button to apply the changes to the selected subp
119. otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApilmportSettings settings ecf 18 2 Simucad 18 2 3 Set Measurement Units void ExpApiSetUnits UUNITS nUnit double dValue 1 0 Purpose Sets EXPERT measurement units Parameters UUNITS nUnit Type of units UNIT_NM nanometers 1 0e 3 um UNIT_UM micrometers 1 0 um UNIT _MIL mils 2 54 um UNIT_MM millimeters 1 0e3 um UNIT_CM centimeters 1 0e4 um UNIT_INCH inches 2 54e4 um UNIT_M meters 1 0e6 um UNIT_LAMBDA user defined unit double dValue value of the user defined unit in um Return None Example ExpApiSetUnits UNIT_UM je UNAS L and ExpApiSetUnits UNIT_LAMBDA Units 1 um by default ExpApiSetUnits UNIT_LAMBDA 0 1 Units 100 nm user defined 18 2 4 Get Measurement Units UUNITS ExpApiGetUnits Purpose Gets EXPERT measurement units Parameters None Return UUNITS EXPERT measurement units see Section 18 2 3 Set Measurement Units description Example UUNITS uNumber ExpApiGetUnits 18 2 5 Get Measurement Unit Value in Microns double ExpApiGetUnitUMValue UUNITS nUnit UNIT_NONBE Purpose Expert API function Returns value in um of the unit specified by the argument If no argument is given or the argument is UNIT_NONE the micron value of the current EXPERT unit is returned Simucad 18 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Parameters UUNITS nUnit Type of unit see Section 18 2
120. out depending on the status of As bak file in Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Data Safety Cancel Pressing this button abandons the File gt Open operation Open Pressing this button opens the selected file and a prompt to open a cell appears If the project is successfully opened the value of File Type field is saved in the configuration settings and used as the default in subsequent project selections However you can override this behavior and select some fixed file type e g eld by setting the Default type of project for load save file option in Setup gt Editor Viewer gt General Shared Access to Projects in Read Only Mode If a designer opens an exclusive library for editing other designers can open this project in read only mode 4 3 2 Most Recent Used Project List File submenu contains the Recent Files command which opens a list of several most recently opened projects MRU list This list contains full path names of projects files A mouse click at any line from this list loads the corresponding project If the corresponding project is in external format GDSII Applicon CIF etc then you are prompted to select a technology file and or modify the I O settings for the current external file format See Section 4 3 5 Loading from a Foreign Format for more information 4 3 3 Loading from the ELD format If you press the Open button using the ELD format selected a project with the file name lt File Name gt
121. primitive layout object into polygon Simucad 17 75 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Format CONVERT POLYGON lobject Arguments lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT SEQUENCE See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for argument description SPLIT ARRAY Splits an existing cell array into rows columns or separate instances Format SPLIT ARRAY lobject splcol splrow Arguments lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT SEQUENCE See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for argument description Switches splcol If specified then the cell instance array is divided into columns splrow If specified then the cell instance array is divided into rows If both switches are specified then the cell instance array is divided into separate instances 17 13 Tools Commands CLIP Saves a rectangular area of the edited cell as a new cell Format CLIP X Xe Ye CELL nare yout Jn Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE S Ya type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE X Y Xs y are defined as a rectangular area where x y is a left bottom corner and x and y are dimensions of the rectangle cell name type STRING The name of the new cell Switches yout ii PLA e out is used to perform Clip out operation It saves all geometry of the edited cell bordered with specified rectangular area into the new cell with nam
122. project is loaded 2 The first library otherwise will have unresolved references If you add the secondary library to the setup these references may be resolved Deactivate Button Library Setup If you select a library by clicking at its logical name and then click the Deactivate button the library will be deactivated for the opened project This means that access for cells of this library will be lost You cannot deactivate a library if some of its cells are used in the opened project 16 4 2 Library and Cell Access Rights Access rights for non shared libraries shared libraries and cells in shared libraries can be granted by means of operation system only It is not possible to assign different access rights for cells inside one non shared library e1d but the system administrator can grant required access rights for the whole library To assign different access rights for cells inside one library use shared libraries where every cell is stored in the separate lt cell_name gt eld file In this case your system administrator would be able to assign proper access rights for every cell in the library The basic access rights for library or cell are e No access e Read Only Simucad 16 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e Change For Non Shared Library e No access right means that you can not open this library at all e Read Only access right means that you can open this library any cell in
123. repetitions is defined in the Row and Col editing fields by any valid LISA Xi expression A LISA function floor is useful to truncate the calculated value to the integer number The repetition step in vertical row and horizontal column directions is defined by the corresponding Delta editing fields If Convert repeated instances to array is checked then instance objects with the Repettion rule will be converted to instance arrays 13 6 Simucad Parameterized Cells Direction nght o Direction upright Figure 13 10 Repetition in Various Directions e Layer rule is to parameterize a layer for primitive objects Use the Add gt Layer menu option in the PCell Rule dialog to activate Layer form see Figure 13 11 The value for Layer rule can be any valid LISA Xi expression evaluated as string type and matched with a layer name defined in the technology ajx Layer difttyped select cercai ee Figure 13 11 Layer Dialog e Conditional Inclusion rule allows you to include exclude objects or a group of objects defined by the control block from the calculated cell depending on how the specified condition expression is evaluated true or false and which option Show or Hide is checked Use the Add gt Conditional Inclusion menu option in the PCell Rule dialog to activate the Conditional Inclusion form see Figure Simucad 13 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 13 8 Conditional Inclusion a x Conditi
124. save before nun Do not seve before mun e Parallel mode enabled 5 processor detected Number of threads Autosalect Figure 11 20 DRC Script Run Setup Dialog Other options are specific to the DRC Script Run Setup panel 11 50 Browse for script from project directory This box must be checked if the DRC script you are using is stored in the project directory In this way when loading a DRC script with the File gt 0Open command of the DRC script panel menu Verification gt DRC gt DRC script panel the browser window will be set to the current project directory Otherwise the browser window will point to last DRC script which has been loaded Simucad Setup e ms beep upon DRC run finish If a nonzero value is entered into the edit field of the ms beep upon DRC run finish setting then DRC run started from EXPERT S user interface will signal its finish by sound e Minimize when running This option minimizes the EXPERT main window into the Windows taskbar while the DRC script is executing Once the execution of the DRC script is finished or terminated the application s window is restored to its most recent state e Script progress bar and Command progress bar These options are to enable the display the progress of script execution and the progress of the execution of every script command e Hierarchical error report allows defining output of error reports This radio button can be activated in Whole hierarchy m
125. selected objects into it Preselection helps you to pick the required object 12 16 3 Polygonize The commands of the Tools gt Polygonize submenu convert wires and circles ellipses to polygonal regions It is possible to e selected objects e all wires in the project e all ellipses circles in the project It also converts selected texts to polygonal ones 12 16 4 Mouse Click It is possible to assign bindkeys to left right and idle button mouse clicks using the commands from the Tools gt Mouse Click submenu This option is useful e g if your mouse is unstable or you are using a tablet as a pointing device with a stylus that has some buttons inconvenient to click 12 16 5 Attach Texts The Tools gt Attach Texts command attaches a selected text to another selected object The layer of the attached text becomes same as the parent object 12 16 6 Detach Text The Tools Detach Text command is a convenient operation to detach all attached texts from all selected objects 12 16 7 Previous Tool The Tools gt Previous Tool command switches to the previously used drawing tool 12 16 8 Void Tool The Tools gt Void Tool command switches to the Void tool This tool does nothing and is used for safety while idly browsing the layout 12 38 Simucad Chapter 13 Parameterized Cells 13 1 Overview Parameterized cell P cell is a cell generator programmed with Xi scripting language Each P cell has predefined set of par
126. selecting Setup gt Import Setup 3 Save settings by selecting Setup Save Setup Following these actions the user of the current PC will be working with EXPERT in TCN security mode To switch this mode off do the same as above only using an ecf file with the following two lines Application TCNSecurity 0 Simucad 11 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This method of managing security is not intended to prevent deliberate actions This protection will be more flexible in subsequent releases t 11 2 3 Editor Preferences These settings control various viewing drawing loading saving and checking options They are stored in the permanent storage the user section of registry for Windows or the hidden directory in the user s home directiry for Linux Solaris You may export import these settings to from text files with a ecf extension from the Setup menu The path to the most recently loaded ecf file is remembered in EXPERT settings To open this folder select Setup Export Setup and Setup gt Import Setup There are two ways of loading settings from a ecf file 1 Select Setup gt Import Setup 2 Start EXPERT with the command line switch ecf lt filename ecf gt For example you can create a shortcut with the following Target command line C Silvaco etc GuiAdppStarter exe lib dir name Expert exe name Expert OV Se Zick Oak eCi tte aa ecr If you use this shortcut EXPERT will load lt
127. selection e instance switch means that instances will not be ignored during selection noprimitive primitive Simucad 17 29 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e noprimitive switch means that primitives will be ignored during selection e primitive switch means that primitives will not be ignored during selection reselect select deselect e reselect switch means that all previously selected objects will be deselected before select operation e select switch means that new objects will be selected without change of selection state of other objects e deselect switch means that objects will be deselected iyveross inside e cross mode means that all object intersected by selection box will be affected by the selection command e inside mode means that objects that are completely inside of the selection box will be affected by the selection command boundary solid e boundary switch means that objects will be selected by point at the border line e solid switch mean that objects will be selected by any point inside object Example gt select mode reselect inside 17 6 6 Getting Releasing Simucad Licenses Commands When DRC or netlist extraction is run from within EXPERT the corresponding license is taken released for each run of DRC extraction In some cases such as when running big batches of jobs for small cells license search may slow down the execution or even interrupt it if
128. shown when you execute the Pcell gt 5Show Xi Script command If you failed to provide valid password P cell script will no be shown Verify Pcell pass 2 x Password conc Figure 13 21 Verify Pcell Password Dialog Simucad 13 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page is intentionally left blank 13 14 Simucad Chapter 14 Integrated Layout Verification Tools 14 1 Layout Verification Tools This chapter describes EXPERT s interface to layout verification tools Figure 14 1 from Celebrity suite e GUARDIAN DRC e GUARDIAN LPE Netlist Extractor including parasitic RC extraction by HIPEX RC e GUARDIAN LVS Verification as well as e Real time DRC e Electrical Node Probing including Short locator A ray ESE j DRG script panel act Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help il mi Wo e1500 500 Extraction d ma DRG in area Mode Probine El Reapply last script Mode Search ara Launch LYS DRG run setup Select Boolean operation Resize Spacing check Laver Enable show error flags show critical zone show error ID Check in area Release license Figure 14 1 Elements of Interface to Layout Verification Tools in Expert GUARDIAN DRC LPE and LVS may run in three modes e as standalone applications e in batch mode from the operation system s command lin
129. someone grabs the last license between two DRC runs of a batch job LICENSE GET Gets Simucad licence Format LICENCE GET GUARDIAN DRC GUARDIAN LPE Switches GUARDIAN_DRC GUARDIAN_LPE e GUARDIAN_DRC switch means that DRC license will be taken e GUARDIAN_LPE switch means that EXTRACTOR S license will be taken Example gt LICENSE GET GUARDIAN_DRC DRC license is taken LICENSE RELEASE Gets Simucad licence Format 17 30 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell LICENCE RELEASE GUARDIAN DRC GUARDIAN EPE Switches GUARDIAN_ DRC GUARDIAN_LPE e GUARDIAN_DRC switch means that DRC license will be taken e GUARDIAN_LPE switch means that Extractor s license will be taken Example gt LICENSE RELEASE GUARDIAN_LPE Netlist extraction license is released 17 7 Layer Commands and Procedures 17 7 1 Layer Commands DERIVATION SCRIPT Stores the DRC script for the all derived layers of current technology into the specified disk file Format DERIVATION SCRIPT path_name Arguments path_name type STRING Specifies the pathname where full derivation script is stored DERIVED CLEAN Cleans derived layers in the specified cell scope Format DERIVED CLEAN primitives hierarchy project Switches Jorim tives T hrerarchy project Argument cluster defines the scope where the derived layers will be cleaned up e primitive means that primitive layout objects laying on the deri
130. styles to from files with the sty file extension To start a new style file select the Unload command It clears the current style setting Layer Operations Merge Adds all layers from the current project to the layer list shown on the Plotting Style sheet Only layers absent in the latter list are added Delete Deletes the highlighted layer from the style list Add Adds a new layer to the style list If this layer is present in the project its screen style settings are copied to plotter style settings Style Group Click at the layer name if you want to change its appearance on the plot Two previews in the top part of the Plotting Style sheet appears Layer on Screen and Layer on Plotting You may select one of three drawing styles for the highlighted layer by clicking at the corresponding radio buttons on the right side of the Plotting Style sheet Simucad 15 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e wireframe e solid e stipple In the latter case you are prompted to select a particular stipple style There are three stipple style categories e bitmaps e system stipples e X stipples System stipples called hatches in previous versions of EXPERT are usually much faster than bitmaps X stipples are also very fast Stipple patterns are defined by bitmaps There are a number of predefined stipple bitmaps in EXPERT Moreover EXPERT has a stipple editor to create fully customized stipple bitmaps The stipple
131. than in Y This is controlled by the option Equal grid steps in X and Y in the Grid Setup menu Grid Setup Minimal grid Grid unk rinimum gid step mm 100 Equal grid step nX and Y Snap grid Snap cursor Mogge Yoge C Dependent on vesual gid Shep in gnd unite 1 E LE Ralio X E 2 Step ir ur 0 1 01 Raro Y E Offord cursor posktict allowed visual grid Wisble Sample Cunert grid step ase size Slep in giid uris S0 50 Step in um 5 5 E Supergrid Preview Mode X sz ize bra 2 Solid Step aver visual ond 110 110 C Stipple Step in um 50 0 Automate grid cotor T Type Nomi X size Ye anois ERE E 2 Dotted Step in grid umts 50 pin gnd uri C Said Shep In Lr Figure 11 13 Grid Setup Minimal Grid Grid Unit It is the grid with the minimal step allowable under the current technology This minimal step is called grid unit in EXPERT This value is also called resolution or spot size in other CAD systems This step is stored in the technology file as a positive integer Grid value in nanometers This step is the minimal step allowable in the Snap cursor mode Snap Grid This is a grid that controls cursor movement cursor stops only at snap grid nodes Snap grid step is a positive integer in terms of minimal grid step For example if grid unit is 10 nm and snap grid setting is 20 then the actual value of the snap step is 10x20 200nm 0 2u 11 30 Simucad Setup When
132. that the object will be selected and previously selected objects will be deselected e deselect switch means that the object will be deselected SELECT INSTANCES Selects instances of cells with the specified names Format SELECT INSTANCES cell_name Arguments cell_name type SEQUENCE cell_name cell_name cell_name is a sequence of cells which instances will be selected If the argument is not specified then all cell instances in the edited cell will be selected Example gt select instances All instances in the edited cell are selected SELECT LAYERS Selects all objects in the layers Format SELECT LAYERS layer_name Arguments layer_name type SEQUENCE layer_name layer_name layer_name is a sequence of layer which objects will be selected If argument is not specified then all objects on the active layer will be selected Example gt select layers Metal All objects on the layer Metal are selected SELECT NEWEST Selects the new object in the edited cell produced by the create or modify commands Format SELECT NEWEST SELECT OBJECT Selects an object or a sequence of objects Format SELECT OBJECT lobject Arguments lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT SEQUENCE Simucad 17 63 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Layout object or a sequence of layout objects to be selected Use commands for creating objects Section 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects
133. the active layer Therefore before object creation the necessary layer must be set to active To do this perform one of the following steps e Click in the color strip near the required layer name at the Layer Bar recall that clicking the layer name shows hides this layer e Select Tools gt Pick Layer See Chapter 12 Tools Section 12 16 1 Scratch Layers for more information e Select active layer for the corresponding tool in the Numeric Input If the required layer is absent in the layer list you must create it by selecting Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wires Setup The shapes of created objects and the way they are created depend upon the following settings Region Mode Angle Mode Numeric Input Mode and Cursor snapping described above By default object creation operations are modal ones for example when you select the box creation command box enter the box creation mode and you can create several boxes until you switch to some other operation or to the void tool To start an object creation mode either select Edit gt Create Object or click the corresponding button from the Design Bar This mode is recognizable by its cursor shape which is similar to that drawn on the Design Bar button 5 4 1 Polygonal Region Creation Default Way of Execution Point the cursor at the required region vertices one by one and click the mouse on them All vertices except the last one must be clicked by the left mouse button
134. the cell s to export From the Cell List select the cell s that you want to export The check boxes With Hierarchy and Multifile Export are available to customize the type of export desired These options are described below When the cell s selection is completed press OK or Apply to continue the cell s export process Pressing Cancel at this stage will abandon the cell export operation e Ifthe Multifile Export option is NOT checked after clicking the OK button you are prompted to select a file name to write all selected cells into it e Ifthe Multifile Export option is checked all cells are saved in separate files In this case after clicking the OK button of the Export Cell s dialog you will be prompted to select a file name prefix so that each file will have the name lt prefix gt lt cell_name gt gds lt prefix gt lt cell_name gt eld or with other extensions based on the file type selected For each cell exported the corresponding file s may contain the cell s and all hierarchy of subcells referenced in it depending on the status of the With Hierarchy check box e If the With Hierarchy option is NOT checked the cell s exported will contain only the top level without any subcells The reference to the subcells will still be present e Ifthe With Hierarchy option is checked the cell s exported will contain the top level and all hierarchy of subcells referenced in it e Ifthe With Library Cells is checked the subcells fro
135. the current layer These objects may be from different layers e Click the Select gt Save Selected gt Move To Layer menu item Result The selected primitive objects and texts will be moved into the current layer This operation does not involve selected instances and arrays it is meaningless for them 7 9 Other Selection Commands Options 7 9 1 All The menu command Select All selects all visible and selectable objects in the current cell 7 9 2 Active Layer The menu command Select gt Active Layer selects all objects in the active layer of the current cell The active layer must be selectable see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 4 3 Layer Wire Setup 7 9 3 Selection by Object Type The Select gt By Object Type command allows to choose objects among the following types e Cell Instances Arrays e Cell Arrays e Texts e Shapes e Boxes e Regions e Wires e Circles e Ellipses When the Cell Instances Arrays is chosen the cell selection dialog box appears with the list of cells instanced in the current cell Several cells may be marked from this list and all instances of all marked cells will be selected in the edited cell 7 9 4 Select Newest The menu command Select gt Newest Object selects the newest object in other words the one resulting from the most recent Create or Modify command in the edited cell Note Option Setup Editing Select newest object allows you to automatically select the
136. the snap cursor box is checked or if the equivalent command Edit gt Snap cursor to Grid is activated the cursor is snapped e by default to the grid which is defined in the Step in grid units field of the snap grid part of the Grid panel e toaratio of the visual grid if the Dependent on visual grid box is also checked In this case the attached fields Ratio X and Ratio Y selecting the ratio between Snap grid step and Visual grid step must be filled The grid step is maintained while changing the visual grid step anyway When the Snap cursor box is not checked the cursor is off grid in all non design modes void tool select tool ruler This is particularly useful when performing measurements But when activating functions of shapes design or shapes modification the cursor is automatically snapped to the Snap grid step or to the Visual grid step which are defined above depending on the Dependent on visual grid box Visual Grid The Visual grid is the one shown on the screen and on plot The Visual grid step is also given in terms of minimal grid step A Visual grid may be either an automatic or a fixed step In automatic mode the grid most naturally subdivides the screen however its step cannot be less than that of the minimal grid In fixed step mode the grid step is always the same specified in Grid Setup as a multiple of the minimal grid step Therefore this grid is invisible when it is either too small or too large with re
137. the text itself is transformed by the edit commands Rotate or Mirror the drawing of a text is transformed as follows e its origin and bounding box are transformed into correct positions e the text is written inside its bounding box to be the most readable In other words EXPERT does not mirror it nor does it write upside down Simucad 5 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Hello Chip Layer Wallon Position a 8 4780 Y 45 3370 Attributes width 0 5000 Frame Height 1 jagi Slope sd Align BottomLett Mirroring e Slant Polygonal MA E Proportional Cancel Figure 5 19 Text Label Creation To create the required text type in the Numeric Input click the mouse at the desired position The text will be created with a default size To create text with different sizes enter corresponding values in the Numeric Input Alternatively you can define the text s frame by mouse To do this press the Frame button in the Numeric Input When the Make Frame cursor appears drag the frame to a desired size in the layout The Numeric Input for Text creation provides the following properties e Text input field inputs an as is single line text In other words no special character translation 1s performed e Text can be aligned with respect to its position in nine ways by selecting the required alignment from the corresponding drop down list titled Align e Text can be slanted by check
138. then you can select the object you want to modify and perform transformations only on that object other objects won t be touched To use the Modify tool either select Edit gt Modify Object from the menu or press the corresponding button from the Design Bar see Figure 6 1 Si Modify Pick cursor Figure 6 1 Modify objects The cursor assumes the Modify Pick shape It indicates that you can pick an object for modification by clicking on it In this mode the Modify tool behaves in the same way as Select By Click Drag tool see Chapter 7 Selecting Layout Objects If you move the cursor over the selected object it changes its shape to the Grab cursor It indicates that you can grab object s segment corner or even the whole object it depends which part of the object cursor is moved If pre selection is on you can actually see what part of the object would be grabbed in each particular point of time Simucad 6 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 6 2 In order to modify the object grab the object or its part and move it on desired offset You can grab and move something with the Modify tool by either pressing the mouse button dragging the mouse releasing the mouse button or by clicking the mouse button moving mouse and clicking mouse button again When you are dragging segments of an object they remain parallel to themselves For adjacent segments two modes are available see Figure 6 2 e If you check Edit g
139. up select magnification of stipple patterns 15 5 Print The Print command invokes the following dialogs in turn The standard Printer Setup to assign the output device used for plotting and to change printer device parameters EXPERT S Page Setup dialog described in the corresponding section Then it prints the visible part of the layout The printing session may be interrupted by hitting the Esc key In addition most Windows NT printer drivers provide redirection of the output data into a file This file contains control commands recognized by the associated plotter printer It gives the option after the installation of several different plotter printer drivers on the EXPERT S computer to generate command files of various formats e g Postscript These files may then be transferred into other environments and processed by device specific utilities available in those environments 15 10 Simucad Plotting 15 6 Print Status Print Status ES Status idle Printer HF DeskJet 95Cse Cell demo_mus mus4 Printed area 4717373 363000 557617 3074 23 Time Started Mon Jun 20 14 24 56 2005 Elapsed O seconds Remaining estimated Progress Total progress 100 Copy 1 of 1 Page 1 of 1 Page part NA Layer 0 of 0 Layer name Wa Figure 15 6 Print Status The Print Status command shows the Print Status window which displays the parameters and status of current printed cell You can cancel printi
140. vertices into which the complete ellipse circumference is split This means that an arc will be split into proportionally less vertices depending on its angular size Notice that if an arc is too small it will be converted into a straight line segment e Angle An ellipse arc will be split by vertices in such a way that the angular distance between split points does not exceed the prescribed angular value in degrees e Deflection An ellipse arc will be approximated by a polyline in such a way that the maximal deflection of the polyline from the curve will not exceed the prescribed distance specified in current measurement units e By circumscribed polygon If this option is on then the approximating polygon is outside the circle i e it is the circumscribing one Otherwise the circle ellipse is approximated by the inscribed polygon e Same Y for first vertex and center This setting controls the conversion of circle ellipse to polygon If this option is checked then the first point of the approximating polygon is taken with the same coordinate as the center of the circle ellipse Otherwise the polygon is created in such a way that the first side is vertical The latter option is useful when circles are converted into octagons You will obtain a 45 degrees octagon e Offgrid wire boundary allowed This option affects the drawing of wires and the Convert to polygon operation for wires If this setting is off the shape of a 45 degr
141. view for the opened cell e Click the green button of the Cross Sections window e Specify a cut line in the active cell of the layout You must move the cursor to a point on the layout view press and release the left button drag a line across layout in an arbitrary direction and finally press the left button to finish the cut line e After drawing the cut line the processing is automatically launched The Cross Sectional View window displays the calculated cross section view and the coordinates of starting point and ending point of the cross section are displayed in the Cross Segments list of the Cross Section window Repeat this step as many times as is needed in order to create several cross sections In such a case you can display any of these cross sections by clicking on its starting point coordinates in the Cross Segments list The cut line is then highlighted in white on the layout Other cut lines are highlighted in red see Figure 12 23 Cross Sections T e Cross Segments r 5 65 6 05 87 5 14 7915 0 5 24 55 67 5 24 55 05 413 87 5 41 3 Figure 12 21 Cross Sections window An alternative way to generate a Cross Sectional view for the current cell is to use the following XI script command through the command line of EXPERT see Figure 12 23 cross view start_x start_y end_x end_y This kind of command can be included inside a script and executed in EXPERT The detailed description of
142. 0 180 and 270 In addition the angle can be set manually to any value Note If the number of rows or columns or both is not equal to one then only orthogonal rotation angles are allowed In other words you cannot rotate an array by an arbitrary angle Scaling Any positive real number is allowed Mirroring Three choices are available from the corresponding drop down list None Vertical and Horizontal Mirroring is performed with respect to the axis passing through the position point of the cell instance Vertical mirroring is done in a vertical direction In other words verticle mirroring is done with respect to X axis and horizontal mirroring is done with respect to Y axis Note When the instance creation modification is finished horizontal mirroring is replaced by the equivalent combination of vertical mirroring and rotation by 180 Clicking the OK button in the Numeric Input or clicking the left mouse button in the Layout area completes the creation of one instance array and immediately starts the creation of the next cell instance Array creation An array is created if the number of rows or columns or both is greater than the one entered The frame attached to the cursor turns into the corresponding array of frames allowing you to enter relative displacements of array entries row and column deltas There are two modes for deltas orthogonal and arbitrary The difference is that the orthogonal displaces rows only
143. 0 0000 Y Top cells only f Split Array f Allcells Cell Filter Y Rows Columns Bf Cell preview Pao te 2 i wa Sf Show info Figure 5 8 Cell Instancing Dialog together with Cell Selector Dialog You can enter edit instance array attributes in any order Two properties are mandatory cell selectionand instance position The remaining ones are optional To finish cell instance creation click the OK button in the Numeric Input or click the left mouse button anywhere in the layout 3 1 Instance Array Attributes Cell The drop down lists Library Name and Cell Name are used to select the cell to be placed Alternatively you can click the browser button marked with and use the standard cell selection dialog Cell selector stops the selection of cells that may produce recursive instancing Position The coordinates of the position of the instance array can be assigned both by mouse and by numeric input Hint When working under low resolution clicking the mouse creates instance in an approximate position This instance can then be selected and its position can be fine tuned by numeric input in the Property Bar Note For instances of small visible size cell origins are not shown even if you check the corresponding option Setup gt Editor Viewer Viewing Show cell instance origin Simucad Creating Layout Objects Rotation The corresponding drop down list contains four orthogonal rotation angles 0 9
144. 0ooocoococccc eee eee eee 16 2 163 1 NON SNareG LIDIANGS ico idilio ideada ai Odes 16 2 16 3 2 Shared Libraries Cell Version Control 0 0 cece eee e etn ene eens 16 2 16 3 3 Shared Access to Projects in Read Only Mode 0 cc ccc cece cnet eens 16 2 t 16 4 Project Library Management iii A AAA 16 3 16 4 1 Library Setup for Your Project ccoo sides lb 16 3 16 4 2 Library and Cell Access Rights vita sb ir ow An ia 16 5 T169 Cell Manage Menciona a aa aaae 16 7 16 5 1 Usage of Library Cells in Projects esosrrarariaca iria 16 7 16 5 2 Cell Version Management 0 cc nannaa 16 7 16 5 3 Edited Cell Version Management 0 0 ccc ccc eee tenet ete nee ne tenes 16 8 Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts AE Snell eaten ccc eddeiaeieeotiniidinitawetwee ten 17 1 17 1 Scripting Language LISA for Expert Commands 2c cc cece eee eee eee eee eeaees 17 1 17 2 Remarks on Command Syntax and Descriptions cc cece eee eee eee eee eens 17 2 17 3 Project Commands and Procedures ccccce cece cece eee eee eee eee eens 17 3 ASTRO ec GOMMANOSs rn nea ot a ea eee eke ee RAGE eke nia arios 17 3 1432 FYOlCCLF OCCOUlGS ss ca hails e a o oe Bote 17 5 17 4 Cell Commands and Procedures iia AA idea alada 17 8 174 1 Cel COmMMmaNd Saen re n id dad vada 17 8 1742 Cell Procedures es rai ss id als lee a E a a being dite 17 16 17 5 Cell View Commands and Procedures ccccccc eee e teen eee eee e nena
145. 10 The Cell Map dock window displays at all time the location of your current view in the active layout window in relation to the full view of this same cell A fat yellow outlined box is used to specify the location of the current view The Cell Map dock window is shown in the bottom right corner of Figure 3 10 Simucad User Interface xl 00928 55808 TRA48 DFFC REP Sel 1 1 Hier 1 1 R W Silvaco 2004 Figure 3 10 Window and Cell Map e The Nets dock window allows you to display the flight lines for all nets or selected nets in different ways This is mainly used when working with the NDL feature e The Cross Sections dock window allow you to input the coordinate of the required cross segment specifying where the cross section view needs to take place This dock window is shown in Figure 3 11 e The Cross Sectional View dock window displays the cross section of the process based on the specified cross segment This dock window is shown at the bottom left corner of Figure 3 11 Simucad 3 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 0 x s Hierarchy Verification Libraries PCell Setup Window Help g x BB Fie Cell Edit view Select Tools Iosa pean 9518009 RKE Ble a a e oan Mao O F b AOCGR SS AS NS AY NV Plans X Contact ntap Metall Poly Metal2 N Act P Act Nwell Metl_Text Poly_Text _ Met2_ Text cI 3 12 16 20 EEE Y EE gt Box La
146. 10 9 Chapter 11 AAA 11 1 Tie setting UDIEXPenGExXDeNVICWS ciar rai rr 11 1 11 2 Managi g Sets iii il la 11 2 11 21 Technology SENS sesi taneria a a d ea eee 11 2 11 2 2 Security of Technology Settings diria rca sable aid 11 3 o FNCICICNCCG reacaire age A 11 4 11 3 GION VIEWER FOM screen ae 11 5 aci sid ease aha eau ade a aaa ba a aaa AREA 11 5 diz VICWING PAYO sobs wien b20 events ara Usb Guay Peaks dames pos weet nl 11 6 Wd CINCH AC O a NAO 11 8 11 3 4 Data Safety Page wicks ie caches dk wan 1h bade cedace shee bhai d eae wk Nah aie deena es 11 10 1123 5 Directones and Files Page sr o a sitas 11 11 1 esla UE pl a 015 ARO A TA 11 12 RETA A aaa te Cade Pee aera Medea a tread ad aerate eek ee waite tes 11 12 11 30 Gla Pages ustedes cat ida dad 11 13 11 47 Technology SCD ura cana Caw ecoadene ete ar nate meee Ae eae demas tnameas as 11 14 MAT General Pade sip A er ck hate AA 11 14 A 25s acne ches telnet ek eod ied nenmes a A pedals ARSA 11 15 11 4 3 Layer Wire SQUD is cit nade bte i eiw bir iie ied ad 11 15 1144 Connectivity SetU secos e ei be tina baad a va ak eked 11 29 1145 Device AAA A Stati decode ot havea ode ats eae EE 11 29 Tele Oe GHC SEUD fete t ohare whet aa n e a Salad ted aera and stent tena miei eines 11 29 11 47 Pwe Templis i te diari rotar iio liar eee ses 11 32 1196 65 A A eee hee 11 33 PU ele Gie zs hag PP era E hs settee ars 43 Sees et cane ee tab Brae oe Geen ee Se eee 11 34 MS GDSINVO SGU ptr AAA a a a ae barey
147. 17 18 1 Library Setup Commands LIBRARY ACTIVATE Activates library for the current project 17 90 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Format LIBRARY ACTIVATE lib_logname Arguments lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library LIBRARY DEACTIVATE Deactivates the library for the current project You cannot deactivate a library if some of its cell are used in the opened projects Format LIBRARY DEACTIVATE lib_logname Arguments lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library LIBRARY NAME REMOVE Deletes the library from EXPERT S workspace Format LIBRARY NAME REMOVE lib_logname all Arguments lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library Switches a11 If the switch a11 is specified then all libraries will be deleted from EXPERT S workspace LIBRARY NAME SET Adds a library into EXPERT S workspace Format LIBRARY NAME SET lib logname lib_pathname Arguments lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library lib_pathname type STRING The full or short name of the file for the library If the short file name is given the library will be searched in the current directory LIBRARY TYPE Sets library type Format LIBRARY TYPE lib_pathname exclusive readonly Simucad 17 91 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Arguments lib_pathname type STRING The full or short name of the file for the library If the short file name is
148. 17 3 1 Project Commands PROJECT NEW Creates a new layout project Format PROJECT NEW proj_ name tech_name Arguments proj_name type STRING The name of the new project tech name type STRING The file name of the technology file optional argument Example 1 gt PLOJ ect new de pro jects pro yl dey Lech mux4 t cn New project with selected file name and technology is created Example 2 Spree ject new de pr Jecbs prod 2 sta de vtech 05 ten New SLD project with selected file name and technology is created PROJECT LOAD Opens an existing project from disk file Format PROJECT LOAD proj_name tech_name outputname output_name readonly Arguments proj_name type STRING Simucad 17 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The path name of the file containing the project in ELD SLD GDSII CIF or Applicon format Project type is defined by the path name extension Extension for EXPERT S project file is eld You can omit path name extension for ELD project file Allowable extensions for GDSII CIF and Applicon files are defined by Setup gt GDSH Input Output Setup gt CIF Input Output and Setup gt Applicon Input Output dialog panels tech_name type STRING The name of a technology file optional argument ELD SLD project files store technology data inside themselves To load an ELD SLD project file with external technology select the option Use external technology file in the
149. 18 72 La yO CODECS sinc eit ete AR a 18 28 18 721 eV ODIECU SPECS a avg ir posa 18 28 18 72 A00 ODE srta tee darte santas 18 28 18 73 Dele Oca ro ri teca Lenin aE ape acti ee we Se Bk 18 28 18 74 MOGIY OD eclesial ara 18 29 A A A we 18 29 1870 o o AA aa eea bee teas heeee nee thas 18 29 18 7 7 Find NEXT ODJECU cai a llo Rda 18 30 18 78 Find Previous ODO aa 18 30 18 797 IMG RAS ODECE S rie Sencct ant A seed E a r a E o aa 18 30 18 710 Get Frot ODIO lisina aaa 18 31 LAR co AA Ek ate ey a ar e a a a r e aan 18 31 18 7 12 Get First Cell Instance Array Object n nunana 18 32 18 7 13 Get Next Cell Instance Array Object 0 0 cect e een n eet ne eee neees 18 32 1 7 14s AA ee kes ode eee ete ater e Lele Bava ea bas Bd 18 32 Ibs By Ath Io OES ae Mee a Re 18 33 VE 7 POS a l oe EEEE A ee ark teh cere etre earn a E ent eae eat ah ont A le 18 33 Simucad Table of Contents A cea a hoe Sy ae cease gece oes Grad Susie ede II 18 34 e POs WV 208 ack eterna oe aN e did a he eine o id a o ete ls 18 34 aa o Maar een ae eee ever Se rege a eee E eee ee ee 18 35 TOPOL Oe OM gett Soa Bae ale cakes estat ES 18 35 lI L2 EMKTOX o a Cu at 18 36 19 722 UMINK Et a SS 18 36 19129 0 6 A SA a Bree cae oo E meres ee ee OEY ree ee 18 37 18 7 24 Delete Linked VOX sac a a eee een oy ey e Bg ee ee Se ee aoe on WES alee ee Ea ase ee 18 37 18 720 Delle All LINKER TO aa rt See ait Ra A aa 18 37 18 7 26 Get Linked Texts Number 0 00 ccc cece
150. 2 2 e AMA aa ea aaa baw Ar eek iA 17 120 1722 ACV o A ee ech a a ee al A A e aca e 17 121 17 224 CCIPEEXDONFEAI CCNDV eoria aa a ey eee eae 17 121 17 23 Command Quick Reference A 17 121 Chapter 18 EXPER AP serenana vow er OE REENE EADIE NIAE 18 1 TS AP OVENI W ssanie a a eka patho 18 1 18 te PlugIM Dae oee EEE a3 8 ew aye EEA Bs CEN RETN 18 1 18 1 2 Structure of Objects in Expert API Library 00 00 ccc cece eee ete eens 18 1 18 1 3 Access to Functions from Plug in Library 00 cece eee ee nen eens 18 1 18 2 ACCESS 10 EXPN SCUINGS ic AAA AAA 18 2 1B 2A Save Setinas IMO Fil acatar hoe be taria toda estada 18 2 XIV Simucad Table of Contents 18 2 2 Load Settings from File ici si dida 18 2 18 2 3 Set Measurement WINS airada woe ee ts anc a e a das 18 3 18 2 4 Get Measurement UnitS 0 0c anaana 18 3 18 2 5 Get Measurement Unit Value in Microns 0 ccc cect ete teen t eee nnnees 18 3 18 2 6 Set Drawing Angle Mode 2 24 0inhe tina etud vie he ats 18 4 182 7 GELANGIC MO0C ii 2a dese ee Kia AA bay EN 18 4 19 28 SOL Redon MO tasca opta ia dota ic Gest Seah Sale eh etal red aia avis here ae 18 4 192 9 Get Regon MOUS Scroll ee eae neta pianos 18 5 18 2 10 S t General Setup Dalis deck ii di ee or ee ete 18 5 18 2 11 Get General Setup Data 2 0 0c eee ee eee eee eee eee eeeeneaes 18 5 18 2 12 Set Technology Setup D lar osas rado whack toed rejas yeaa oe wee adi 18 6 18 2 13 Get Technology setup Data cio
151. 2 ta O Jproperty Mnane l nanadal y Creates the object with specified property in the active layer Example 7 gt polygon T070 Ar Al Arar Aray 2 4 gt JEext 110 0 ESKE 04 5 Obs Dn Talse TA BOTTOMLERT truek gt Orap TA Dig By Debe Uy true TA TOPLEEI falser Creates the object with specified attached texts in the active layer Example 8 zold pol polygon 10 07 rl 442 252 a DGA JOER gt polygon 0 0 4 0 4 4 0 4 replace old_pol 17 44 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell The first command searches for an object with specified attributes in the active layer The second command replaces this object with the new one TEXT Creates selects or deletes a text Format TEXT xpos ypos string height textheight width textwidth slope slope layer layername property name value name value name value attachto layoutobject detachfrom layoutobject replace layoutobject Foottomlete Jpettomeenter bottomrioght middlelete middlecenter y middleright Ftoplete eopcenter topright SS lant FEEL Oe polygonal ereate find delete proportional select reselect fadd s deselect get Arguments xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e X coordinate of the text position ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e yY coordinate of the text position string type STRING e Single
152. 2517 11858 204133 BD dime lay ees por aer cre Da REP Sel W0 Hien 22 FW pikan DONA Line 13 Col 9 TNS Dos FO Geusrdian LWG 0 Siwaco W Figure 14 7 Cross Probing between Expert and Guardian LVS The basic flow of the netlist comparison is as follows GUARDIAN performs Device Reduction At this stage series and parallel devices are merged and unused devices are filtered out if the corresponding options are ON GUARDIAN then performs logic function recognition and reduces groups of transistors to block Simucad 14 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual with permutable interchangeable terminals Finally the actual comparison takes place at which time GUARDIAN attempts to match elements of the two reduced netlists against each other Both preprocessing and comparison are controlled by various options and conditions Options are specified through user interface or control files An example of the latter option is the list of prematched nets devices or subcircuits The results of the netlist comparison filtered merged and reduced devices matched pairs and discrepancies are stored in report files In the report of unmatched nodes GUARDIAN gives suggestions about nodes that could have been matched if discrepancies between netlists were fixed LVS reports can be cross probed in both netlist as well as in the layout if Simucad s intertool communication SIPC is enabled The complete description of GUARDIAN can
153. 50 Simucad Expert API 18 11 6 Get Fill Mode SELECT_FILL MODE ExpApiGetFillMode Purpose Gets selection fill mode See Section 18 11 5 Set Fill Mode Parameters None Return SELECT FILL MODE Current fill mode Example SELECT_FILL_ MODE Mode ExpApiGetFillMode 18 11 7 Set Ignore Instances BOOL ExpApiSetIgnoreInstances BOOL bMode TRUE Purpose Switches off on the selectivity of cell instances arrays in the layout Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetIgnorelInstances 18 11 8 Get Ignore Instances BOOL ExpApiGetIgnoreInstances Purpose Gets current selectivity of cell instances arrays in the layout Parameters None Return BOOL Current selectivity of cell instances arrays in the layout Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGetlignorelnstances 18 11 9 Set Ignore Primitives BOOL ExpApiSetIgnorePrimitives BOOL bMode TRUE Simucad 18 51 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Switch off on the selectivity of primitive objects in the layout Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetIgnorePrimitives 18 11 10 Get Ignore Primitives BOOL ExpApiGetIgnorePrimitives Purpose Gets current selectivity of primitive objects in the layout Parameters None Return BOOL Current selectivity of primitive ob
154. 5150 30 8400 9 6350 0 0000 via Split New Vertes Delete Vertex Cancel Figure 5 15 Wire Creation When you are drawing geometry on a grid there is a natural restriction on the wire width It must be an even multiple of the minimum grid step If you are trying to set a wire width that does not satisfy this condition a warning message appears During wire creation the message line shows wire length and displacements of the cursor with respect to the previous point The construction of a wire is performed similarly to that of a region including numeric input of vertices in the Numeric Input The exception is that the mouse clicks define the wire s centerline rather than the region s boundary Zero Width Wires You may need to make some marks in the layout e g mark centerlines or alignment with lines In other words using one dimensional objects It is recomended that you use wires of zero width Boxes and polygons of zero thickness are not allowed even if you import them from a GDSII file They will be purged away either during editing operations or during saving Off Grid Wire Shapes To use this option select Setup gt Technology gt General gt Shapes gt 0Offgrid wire boundary allowed Simucad 5 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e If this setting is off a 45 mode wire is corrected in such a way that the vertices of its boundary polygon fit on the minimal grid The width
155. 62 18 16 3 Get File Name By Logical Name 6 cent ene n nee e nee neees 18 62 TOGA ACHVAO EIDNANY eera IA A SS ee ant 18 62 19 10 00 Deactivate TIDE ra ada rae aetna acto bie kite Maree wee ae 18 63 1021020 Delete ba ida ii aiii 18 63 1816 7 Delete All EIDFANCS ick deck ive an ore eet bak A A yeaa ed eee bed vis 18 63 19 16 90 Gelib tall NAMCs asa ii 18 64 18 16 9 Get library Directory Nau aros toast want oodeekeewaatiateaead daekani asicid 18 64 xviii Simucad Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 About This Manual EXPERT LAYOUT EDITOR and EXPERTVIEWS LAYOUT VIEWER are tools for designers of physical layout of integrated circuits In this manual both tools are referred to as EXPERT since both tools essentially share the same user interface The only difference is that EXPERTVIEWS has no operations that change the layout of integrated circuits Moreover the user interfaces of GUARDIAN DRC and GUARDIAN LPE are basically the same as that of EXPERTVIEWS with the addition of specific verification operations Chapter 1 gives an overview of EXPERT S features Chapter 2 introduces basic notions and terms used in EXPERT Chapter 3 gives a general description of EXPERT S user interface The remaining chapters discuss EXPERT S tools in detail Note Those sections and paragraphs with features pertaining to EXPERT LAYOUT EDITOR only are marked by a f dagger symbol 1 2 Overview of Expert Capabilities EXPERT is the state of the art
156. 7 AS INVER De lCClON tate ot et tet caste da one sen heels ee gunk vote eee a oe ee 7 8 7 9 6 Cell Instance Selectivity tare wt As ieee owners aoe aoe 7 8 TIT F IMMIVGODIECE Select aiii did tS og 7 8 19 0 Selection GOUNT INGICAIO 44 4 a2 ccbb wie A acid Meee vbw Seka 7 8 7 9 9 Selection Highlight Modes arica NS 7 8 TOTO Select NGWESI ODIECIS costillas lps deere aaa 7 8 7 9 11 Selection Toolas Detalla sarao aten dea peat a oe ohn ra aes 7 8 LOA a o A ack eae ea eB to aed Mee ele heat a he ein te Bs 7 8 7 9 13 Layer Selectability Visibility 0 0 ccc ccc cee eect nee e eee tenet nenennenes 7 8 7 9 14 Setup Hotkeys Menus Colors Color cence eee e nett enna 7 8 Chapter 8 Other Edit Submenu Operati0NS 000coccoccocco eee ean 8 1 9 1 Editing COMMANGS iorsin tate a iGuccs ners ie pele rere a 8 1 9 2 Expert ClPDOAlG rrien irritada aras 8 3 ell il 2 E ah ean he dS a horas a Bacar ea PRO eat Ad Bae Bue 8 3 ON TOE ee E ee ee we Re Ee ee 8 3 YS Ba gt lt seer O ee ee A 8 3 SA A e o AA toe E Sie seu O 8 4 6 3 Delle ca5 picinnaewen wkend Lee ER In 8 4 SA POSION CUSO iia 8 4 9 5 GEOMmelne Transi ormalions 2 0 airada Cis iow ent a ae eae btn te cass 8 5 6 5 1 Edit Duplicate Edit Move coco betel oi Lied tae oe pee ee aa 8 5 ony gC Ci Aen eee ee ee eee ee ee Leet eT eer ee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee 8 7 GOs OIC vay hel vedere ctedee eveedowan ares yee atone wend meu eevee keer eis E EET E 8 7 Soda NINO OPE ON cert dora
157. 70 0 0000 a2 EM 3 1450 0 5100 0 0000 6 0330 Cancel Figure 5 10 Region Numeric Input e New vertex Clicking this button adds a new vertex to the list The new vertex can be specified either by its X or Y coordinates or by displacements Dx and Dy with respect to the previous vertex e Delete vertex Clicking this button deletes the highlighted vertex 5 4 2 Box Region Creation This is the simplest operation done either by two mouse clicks or by mouse drag 1 Click the mouse at the two required opposite corners of the box 2 Alternatively press the left mouse button at one corner and drag to the other one and release the button Numeric Input Mode You can use the Numeric Input to precisely define position and size of a new box Clicking the OK button in the Numeric Input finishes box creation Notice that the message line shows box area and dimensions Position a 8 3820 os E 2 4220 Ok Cancel i Figure 5 11 Box Numeric Input Hint If you want to create a square box with the mouse use the diagonal direction snap mode Edit Direction Snap Mode Diagonal 5 10 Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 4 3 Circle Ellipse Creation The first mouse click defines the center The second mouse click defines both radii of the ellipse or the radius of the circle Numeric Inpunejed Welllon Position ka 0 1180 os E r 5460 Radius Ok C
158. A RAR 18 54 19121 MINO Vela uns atcan nests ert eteenad a a e r eae bw uaa Wee eae aa 18 54 18 128 VOR ONZOMAN 5 ou edil tee ag ie iio decidio wks hat ue ena veh leet ea eet ane ates 18 55 18 12 9 Move To Active Layer 1 ccc cece eee teen nee nee tener n en eeeeeennes 18 55 18 1210 Copy To Active Lay i aora ars 18 55 18 12 11 Delete Selected Objects oirr it a cee een i i a ea a Ea 18 56 18 12 12 Replace Selected Instances ununun nunnana 18 56 18 12 13 Replace Insiances in GA A eek a A ee at 18 56 18 12 14 Replace Instances in Project 0 e eee eee ene nnees 18 57 1813 SUPPO acordada rada rata chs 18 57 18 13 17 FileName Selecione 18 57 18 19 23 UDS VEW dt A bs Bw pe EEE AS 18 58 18 19 Reres N VICW cis a iia 18 58 1813 4 Remes ODECE paserinan a ee eae EO aE 18 58 18135 GOLEMO GOOG eor a A a 18 59 18 13 6 Get Error Message ssunnnnnunnnnn nananana 18 59 18 14 Script Language LISA narrada 18 59 VO AA Ana lIZ ON a Ua eel ool aah ae Sea eat a idol 18 59 Me ree AIIM IPN ts te a A cena Ged aaah lane enn ee 18 60 18 15 User Intertace Ulla cria ei dida 18 60 18 15 12 Gel MOUSE Pol usa irrita dida 18 60 18 15 2 Get Mouse Rectangle 0ooococoocccoocc rc 18 60 18 153 ls Mouse Right Button PESCA adas das 18 61 18 16 LIDIALY s4 c A ASS 18 61 1819051 De LOGICA Name lt s ieoane oh nad thee wae hawt ana 18 61 18 16 2 Get Logical Name By File Name 0 nunnan ccc cece tenet ene ne een nnees 18
159. A eS SS a A Se SH SS a A e EA Ae A SES SS SS Ae A Se SH aD aM SS Ae AAA eee PEPE En eE eErEO A Figure 9 5 Filling Modes Wireframe Stipple Solid Stipple patterns are assigned to layers in the layer setup Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup menu command There are two sets of predefined stipple patterns System X Stipples as well as a stipple editor that allows you to create your own stipple patterns and store them in a file see Chapter 11 Setup Section Stipple Setup See also Chapter 15 Plotting which provides information about filling modes on the plot Simucad 9 2 1 Individual Filling Modes for Layers It is possible to set filling modes for individual layers that override the common default filling mode A simple way to do this is to right click at the color strip of the layer in the Layer bar dock window You will see a list as shown in Figure 9 6 You may select either one of three modes or the default In the latter case the common default setting will be applied to the pointed layer Layer Bar EEEE AS NS aw Myto Planz O Via Contact 2 W ellCon uy Active Metall 2 visible Foly Metal Selectable N Act E All visible P Act NWell A Metl Text E All Selectable Poly Text Mone Selectable Met Text F H Gate E jli i None visible Laver Wire Setup Ei Layer Connection P Gate a i E SD E Ordering
160. APO1INE 1000 07 LODO DI HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateRegion RegPoints Layer_ 1 18 7 20 Text HOBJECT ExpApiCreateText LPCTSTR sText double dSx double dSy double dtWidth double dtHeight double dEscapement 0 BOOL bSlant FALSE BOOL bMirroring FALSE LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateText LPCTSTR szText RCEAPoint ptPos double dWidth double dHeight double dEscapement 0 BOOL bSlant FALSE BOOL bMirroring FALSE LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateText LPCTSTR szText RCEARect rtRect double dEscapement Wer BOOL DSlant FALSE BOOL bMurrorang FALSE LPCTSTR sziavyerNname NULL Purpose Creates a Text in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters double dSx double dSy Initial placement position of Text RCEAPoint ptPos Initial placement position of Text double dWidth double dHeight Text width Text height Simucad 18 35 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual RCEARect rtRect Initial placement position Text width Text height double dEscapement Escapement of Text BOOL bSlant Slanted Text BOOL bMirroring Mirrored Text LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer Return HOBJECT Handle to created text EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateText Some Text CEAPoint 10 0 20 0 100 POO 0300 FALDE TRUE Layer 1 18 7 21 Link Text BOOL ExpApiLinkText HOBJECT hObject HOBJECT hText
161. ATYPE layer _name GDSII_datatype Arguments layer_name type STRING Specifies name of layer GDSII_datatype Type INTEGER Specifies new GDSII data type for layer Example gt set_GDSII_datatype Met1 1 Sets GDSII datatype 1 for the layer Met STYLE WIRE Sets wire style for the current layer similarly to Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire gt Wire Style setting Format STYLE WIRE width value angle value extend T f lushend roundend fextejoine l ZELL oane Foundajolinte ZmiterJoint Named Arguments width value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies default wire width for the active layer angle value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies default miter angle value for the active layer valid only for miterjoint style Switches extend flushend roundend Specifies the default wire end style for the active layer eze Joint frei joint Fonda jorae i fmiter joint Specifies the default wire joint style for the active layer Example gt style wire width 073 extend y rounaJjolnt LAYERPLAN LOAD Loads layer plans from a specified disk file Simucad 17 35 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Note Layer plan should be compatible with current technology Format LAYERPLAN LOAD pathname Arguments pathname Type STRING Specifies the name of a disk file that contains EXPERT layer plans Example gt layerplan load d temp asa elp 17 7 2 Layer Pro
162. ApiAddTechLayer const LAYER _PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Creates a new Technology Layer with specified Property Parameters LAYER _PROPERTY amp Property Technology Layer property Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example LAYER PROPERTY Property Property someField some data BOOL bResult ExpApiAddTechLayer Property 18 4 8 Delete Technology Layer BOOL ExpApiDeleteTechLayer LPCTSTR szLayerName Purpose Deletes specified Technology Layer Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Technology Layer name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Simucad 18 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Example LPCTSTR szName Layer_1 BOOL bResult ExpDeleteTechLayer szName 18 4 9 Get Technology Layer Handle HTLAYER ExpApiGetTechLayerName LPCTSTR szLayer Purpose Returns the handle of a Technology Layer given by its name or EA_INVALID_HANDLE if this layer doesn t exist Parameters LPCTSTR The name of the Technology Layer Return HTLAYER hLayer Technology Layer handle Example LPCTSTR szLayer some data HTLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetTechLayerHandle szLayer 18 5 Cells 18 5 1 Set Current Cell BOOL ExpApiSetCurrentCell LPCTSTR szCellName Purpose Makes the specified cell active Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Name of the cell Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCu
163. ApiDuplicate double dx double dy BOOL ExpApiDuplicate RCEAPoint pt Simucad 18 53 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Duplicates selected cell objects to a place shifted relatively to the initial position Parameters double dx double dy Placement coordinates RCEAPoint pt Placement coordinates Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDuplicate 50 0 80 0 BOOL bResult ExpApiDuplicate CEAPoint 100 0 200 0 18 12 6 Rotate BOOL ExpApiRotate double dx double dy double dAngle BOOL bDuplicate FABSE S BOOL ExpApiRotate RCEAPoint pt double dAngle BOOL bDuplicate FALSE Purpose Rotates selected cell objects by a given angle and at specific position with or without duplication Parameters double dx double dy Placement coordinates RCEAPoint pt Placement coordinates double dAngle Rotation angle bDuplicate Duplicate flag Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiRotate 50 0 80 0 45 without duplication BOOL bResult ExpApi Rotate CEAPOint 100 0 200 0 45 TRUE 18 12 7 Mirror Vertical BOOL ExpApiMirrorVertical double dAxis BOOL bDuplicate FALSE Purpose Vertically flips selected cell objects with respect to the specified horizontal axis Parameters double dAxis Y coordinate of the horizontal axis bDuplicate Duplicate flag Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALS
164. Applicon File Extensions This field in the Input group inputs the list of possible extensions of Applicon files as shown by the following example apli apple eae which is a list of file specifications separated by semicolon This list is used in the Project gt Load and Cell Import dialogs to filter the file list in the File Browser Only one extension may be specified for output Conversion Log You may write all events during Applicon file conversion into a log file To do this you must check the option Write log file and specify a file extension for the log file For example if you select the extension rep the messages during conversion of the file gs341 ap1 will be written into the file qs341 rep in the same directory If this option is checked off such a file will be written anyway in the case of conversion errors or significant warnings like a missing map for some layer or level which might mean data loss Applicon Control File This option allows you to select the name of a file with mapping of Applicon layer numbers to GDSII layer numbers datatypes Its syntax is very simple and clear from the example that comes with the distribution of EXPERT When a control file is absent or not specified a warning is issued In this case e import is performed anyway with default layer names e export is not performed i e a CTL file is obligatory for export into Applicon format Ignore Undefined Layers If
165. CEASearchContext amp SearchContext Search Context LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name to search for Context Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example CEASearchtontext SearcnContext SearchContext m_nTypeSearchObject SOT_ELLIPSE int nFound ExpApiSearch SearchContext Cell_1 18 7 6 Find First Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFoundFirstObject LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Simucad 18 29 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Gets first Object in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted The ExpApiSearch callis required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to found first Object Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFoundFirstObject Cell_1 18 7 7 Find Next Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFoundNextObject LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets next Object in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted The ExpApiSearch and either ExpApiGetFoundFirstObject or ExpApiGetFoundLastObject calls are required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to found next Object or EA_INVALID_ OBJECT Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFoundNextObject Cell_1 18 7 8 Find Previous Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFoundPrevObject LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets previous Object in specified cell or current cell if cell name is
166. Cell Filter Mew cell name jntran_g W Compose of selected cell Cell preview e an ca F Show into _ Cancel Apply we Figure 13 3 New P cell Dialog Enter a basic design primitives and instances using normal editing commands If you have one in an already existing cell put the instance and explode or copy and paste those primitive objects using the commands in the Edit gt Expert Clipboard menu option Create P cell control blocks using Pcell gt Create Control Block command A graphical P cell control block is a special object for storing common graphical P cell rules for all objects inside or crossed by a control block The process of creation and modification of a P cell control blocks is similar to polygonal region objects As you create a control block the PCell Rules dialog panel pop ups see Figure 13 4 The PCell Rules dialog allows you to add various graphical p cell rules used during auto generation of a P cell from a graphical one 13 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual o ate E Z ul Ta a DO E Figure 13 4 P cell Control Block with PCell Rules Dialog e Add gra e al P cell rules definitions to the control blo cks or and objects of the P cell by s ae cti os appropriate objects and editing ell Rules column nthe Expert Property bar eke pressing button a e Figur ie hie Several rules can be applied A e es ntrol block as well as one sule can be added to several obje ne ntrol blo cks ai
167. Cerren does ays teeta ae eae ee Ane EA ede te 12 9 124 OU LAVOUL ECIUING raid oe ee Apes o wanted aia eee tes 12 10 1244 NDL SUBMENU sic Sethi ee ent vite Moet Liar Soe beet Ghee os bya 12 10 12 4 5 Cells P cells Requirements 0 ccc cee eee eet eee eee e nee nnes 12 12 12 5 CrosS SecllONal VICWG ciar ds 12 14 As AA tepid ce at aed hi eee ia a lide eek aed Shae Ser ae Ged te cere t 12 14 12 5 2 Cross Sectional Viewer Setup 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee e eee ennees 12 14 12 5 3 Using the Cross Sectional Viewer ns if bastardo dentaria daa daveb Dd dawned 12 20 120 OGVICE LINKING Sida Ai 12 23 A A ed eh nae ea haa was 12 23 126 2 Automat EINKINO aora coli raro beds a ai eee 12 24 126 3 Manual ENKNO 30m ih eveakats rn was venus ata lb ds riada cts 12 26 12 72 CUE DY POIVILING taras as 12 27 12 6 Cul by VeniceS COUNT dra a 12 28 12 9 Spl COMPOUNG ODICCIS o airada rita cia ada headin 12 29 TZ AG FOND OUU CID Mirar sical asd ie Ww eevee boda da 12 30 1211 Merge Selecionar ns 12 32 12 1227 ReSize Selected cirio 12 32 12 19 LECNNOIOGY MIO LION secos rap aio da 12 34 12 13 1 TScale Selected and Scale Whole Layout 0 ccc cece eee eee teens 12 34 12 13 2 TSnap Selected or Whole Layout to Grid 1 cect e ee t eee e oo 12 35 Simucad Xi Expert ExpertViews User s Manual 12 14 Handling Derved Layers lt aarscediereeaaepida emia pend ie teed eee cee oeneea cad 12 36 1215 Mrge TWO WIP sii A Aa 12 37 12 197 VARIOUS
168. Color Setups 11 9 1 Customizable Hotkeys Setup Shortcuts Setup panel associates keyboard keys with EXPERT menu commands so that the commands may be quickly executed by hitting the associated key instead of selecting them from menu These associations are called shortcuts bindkeys or hotkeys You may assign EXPERT commands to almost all keys from the keyboard combined with Shift Ctrl and Alt modifier keys Notice however that combinations with the Alt key is the default way for Windows OS to navigate menus using underlined characters in menu command names For example Alt E O lt right arrow gt W corresponds to the Edit gt Create Object Wire menu command Note All functions of EXPERT menus can be assigned a keyboard shortcut except in the following case When several cells are opened in EXPERT each of them can be accessed with a numbered item in the Windows menu but no shortcut can be assigned directly to these items In this case you may switch between windows using standard Windows shortcuts lt ctrl TAB gt and lt shift ctrl TAB gt You may assign several shortcuts to the same command You may delete a shortcut You may restore EXPERT S defaults for shortcuts To Assign a Shortcut e select a command category it corresponds to main menu items including the commands for toolbars and dock windows activation e select a command it corresponds to an executable menu item e in the field Press new shortcut key pres
169. Commands and Procedures 17 5 1 Cell View Commands CELL OPEN See CELL OPEN on page 17 12 CELLVIEW REDRAW Refreshes the screen image in the specified region of the layout in the current window Format CELLVIEW REDRAW domain Arguments domain Type RECT Specifies the region to be redrawn If the argument is not specified the whole image of the current window will be refreshed Example 1 gt dom rect _create 0 0 3 4 gt cellview redraw dom REFERENCE POINT Sets a temporary reference point to be used by the command and activates or deactivates it REFERENCE POINT command without parameters displays the current reference point Format REFERENCE POINT x y activate deactivate Arguments x Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y are the absolute coordinates of the reference point in the user units Switches activate deactivate Example 1 gt reference point 20 30 Simucad 17 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual gt reference point gt Reference Point RX 0 RY O Sets the reference point 20 30 but does not activate it Example 2 gt reference point 20 30 activate gt reference point gt Reference Point RX 20 RY 30 Sets and activates the reference point 20 30 STATUSBAR Updates the message in the EXPERT Status Bar Format STATUSBAR msg Arguments msg Type STRING Specifies the text to show in the EXPERT Status Bar
170. Cyclic Redundancy Check will be done using a 32 bits generating polynomial e Checksum32 validation Using this scheme the validation data will be the sum of the ASCII values of all of the characters within the OASIS file truncated to its least significant 32 bits File Compression Checking the Compress option will decrease the size occupied by cells and name tables in the OASIS file using the Deflate compression method Otherwise no compression will be done Relative Mode This option concerns the coordinates of elements in the OASIS file If checking the box all x y coordinates of objects will be stored relatively to the position of the last written object of the file Otherwise the absolute x y position of elements will be written in the OASIS file Optimization Level This feature can be used to choose the level of computing of the layout data in order to generate an OASIS file as small as possible Three levels are available in the corresponding drop down list e None No optimization of size will be done All points will be dumped using an arbitrary mode e Medium In this mode of optimization points are sorted and grid is computed in arbitrary mode anywhere it is possible e High The highest mode of optimization leads to building a sparse matrix then searching all patterns in this matrix with gridded variants if possible Simucad 11 43 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom
171. Database eld file It is a binary file with an eld extension containing the layout data technology data and system setup parameters in EXPERT S internal format Simucad 2 7 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual 2 5 2 Shared Expert Layout Database sid file Any opened e1d project can be saved in an EXPERT shared format It consists of a binary file with a sld extension and c11 file folder containing eld files for each cell This file format allows multiple users to access and edit a single EXPERT project using the Check Out and Check In functions 2 5 3 GDSII file gds file GDSII or stream files are binary files used to transfer layout designs between different CAD systems Most often these files have the following extensions gds sf stm str In some cases however they may have other extensions For example when DRC error reports are output in the stream format To make EXPERT recognize these extensions specify them in the GDSII I O setup 2 5 4 CIF file cif file CIF files with the default extension cif are ASCII files used to transfer layout designs between different CAD systems 2 5 5 Applicon file apl file Applicon files with the default extension apl1 are binary files that store layout data in Applicon Apple format 2 5 6 OASIS file oas Open Artwork System Interchange Standard OASIS is the new binary stream format created in response to the need for mo
172. Drag operation mode you can select by box as well To draw a selection box press the left mouse button at the first corner of the desired selection box drag the cursor into the opposite corner and then release the button 7 2 1 Selection Modes Select gt Selection Modes Select In this mode the picked objects are added to the selected set Select gt Selection Modes Reselect In this mode the previously selected objects are deselected and the picked objects become selected Select gt Selection Modes gt Deselect In this mode the picked objects are removed from the selected set The mode set from Select submenu is called active here Shift key depressed Toggles between the Reselect or Deselect active mode and Select mode Ctrl key depressed Toggles between the Reselect or Select active mode and Deselect mode 7 2 2 Selection Among Overlapping Objects 1 2 If the cursor points at several overlapping objects you can choose which of them you need to select deselect in several ways e Use List Selection mode described in Section 7 4 List Selection e Hold the mouse still at the same point and click the left mouse button several times You will see how your selection changes for the objects which are under the cursor Notice also that the preselection highlights the next object to be selected if you click next time e Hold down the Alt key and click the left mouse button several times You will see that your selection
173. E otherwise 18 54 Simucad Expert API Example BOOL bResult ExpApiMirrorVertical 100 0 18 12 8 Mirror Horizontal BOOL ExpApiMirrorHorizontal double dAxis BOOL bDuplicate FALSE Purpose Horizontally flips selected cell objects with respect to the specified vertical axis Parameters double dAxis X coordinate of the vertical axis bDuplicate Duplicate flag Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiMirrorHorizontal 100 0 18 12 9 Move To Active Layer BOOL ExpApiMoveToActiveLayer Purpose Moves selected primitive Objects to active Layer Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiMoveToActiveLayer 18 12 10 Copy To Active Layer BOOL ExpApiCopyToActiveLayer Purpose Copies selected primitive Objects to active Layer Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCopyToActiveLayer Simucad 18 55 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 12 11 Delete Selected Objects BOOL ExpApiDeleteSelected Purpose Deletes selected Objects Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteSelected 18 12 12 Replace Selected Instances BOOL ExpApiReplaceSelectedInstances LPCTSTR szTargetCellName LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Replaces sele
174. ELL ACCUCORE ACCUMODEL ACCUTEST SFLM VYPER INTERPRETER DECKBUILD SMARTLIB CIRCUIT OPTIMIZER PROMOST RESILIANCE DISCOVERY ANALOG EXPRESS ANALOG IC DESIGN FLOW CELEBRITY CELEBRITY_C are trademarks of Simucad 1990 2008 by Simucad Design Automation Inc Simucad li Style Conventions This represents a list of items or terms 1 This represents a set of direc tions to perform an action This represents a sequence of menu options and GUI buttons to perform an action Courier New Century Schoolbook Bold New Century Schoolbook This represents the equations Italics This represents the commands parameters and variables syn tax This represents the menu options and buttons in the GUI This represents the additional important information New Century SchoolBook in This represents the names of Small Caps the products Simucad How to Read this Manual Bullet A Bullet B Bullet C To open a door Unlock the door by inserting the key into keyhole Turn key counter clockwise Pull out the key from the keyhole Grab the doorknob and turn clockwise and pull File gt Open HAPPY BIRTHDAY Note Make sure you save often while run ning an experiment ATHENA ATLAS EXPERT GATEWAY HIPEX SMARTSPICE STELLAR and UTMOST Table of Contents Chapter 1 pi e eeeeenanens 1 1 TAS ADOUL TAS MANU iaa Ada 1 1 1 2 Overview of Expert Capabilities 0 0ooooo
175. ETCH SELECT Selects or deselects object segments or whole object for stretch operation Format STRETCH SELECT lobject box r point pt segment ptl pt2 select reselect deselect Arguments e lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT Specifies the layout object part of which will be selected for stretch The argument is ignored if selected by box mode the box argument presented Named Arguments Selection or deselection of stretch parts can be performed by one of the following methods by box box argument by point point argument is presented and lobject specified and by segment segment argument is presented and lobject specified e box r type RECT Specifies a box for selection by box mode Select by box operation depends on Select Selection Modes in the same way as the Select gt Select by Box command e point pt type POINT Specifies a point for selection by point mode The point must lay on the boundary of the specified object or on the centerline if object is wire e segment ptl pt2 type SEQUENCE Defines an edge or centerline of a specified object by a sequence of two points e select reselect deselect Cluster of named arguments that modify the default selection mode defined by the Select gt Selection Modes command e select adds new stretch segments e reselect deselects previously selected segments and selects new ones e deselect deselects picked segments Example 1 __ expe
176. EXPERT enforces the rule against recursive instancing in two ways e All operations with cells are monitored and those producing recursion are rejected e When a project is loaded or imported the recursion check is performed Suppose a cell some_cell is detected to be its own ancestor Then a non existing cell named some_cell_RECURSIVE replaces an instance of some_cell1 in such a way the recursion is broken After the loading import is completed the corresponding warning message is issued This lists all these cells You can then search for them and fix the problems 2 2 2 Parameterized Cells Parameterized cells often called P cells add enormous flexibility to design and increase designer productivity While the notion of cell allows you to avoid repetitive drawing of identical pieces of layout P cells go further you can avoid repetitive creation of similar pieces of layout As an additional benefit you can quickly introduce changes into the layout by modifying the parameters of an instance of a P cell rather than redrawing the geometry P cells are created by writing a xi script command in special format compiling it and saving After that P cells appear in cell lists of various commands You can view them place their instances and change parameters of their instances through the Ordinary Cell Instancing Dialog See the description of commands Cell gt New and Edit gt Create Object gt Cell Instance Array for usage of parameterized ce
177. False if No button was selected Simucad 17 103 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 20 EXPERT LISA Data Types This section describes additional predefined LISA data types that are defined to execute specific EXPERT actions 17 20 1 POINT Type Type object constant POINT The POINT type represents a coordinate which is a pair of doubles Table 17 1 Point Basic Operation Basic Second E Operator Behavior operation operand POINT Returns TRUE if two points are equal have the same x and y component returns FALSE other wise not equal NEQ POINT Returns TRUE if two points are not equal have the different x and y component returns FALSE other wise amp TO Siring E POINT Returns a string containing point components Table 17 2 Point Components a ee ee a X et e s t et Sets the y coordinate Returns the RECT type constant 17 104 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 20 2 RECT Type Type object constant RECT The RECT type represents a rectangle defined by the coordinates of the lower left corner and the dimensions of the rectangle which are pairs of doubles Table 17 3 Rect Basic Operation Basic Second Operator Behavior operation operand equal EOL Returns TRUE if two rects have the same left cor ner and dimensions returns FALSE otherwise not equal NEO Returns TRUE if two rects do not have the same left corner and dimensions returns FALSE otherwise
178. Flow Simucad 13 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 13 2 P cell Menu Command The Pcell menu command see Figure is to create and modify p cells The menu includes the following commands see Figure 4 1 New Creates new graphical or textual P cell Parameters Defines parameters for the graphical P cell Preface Defines user defined Xi script code to be added to automatically generated graphical P cell code Create Control Block Creates a graphical P cell control blocks Compile Creates or modifies a P cell in the EXPERT database from the current graphical P cell Show Xi Script Show P cell script Recalculate Instances Recalculates all generated cells View Pcells Shows all generated cells PCell setup Window Help Pera Parameters Preface Create Control Blocks Compile Show xi Script Recalculate Instances View Preells Figure 13 2 P cell Menu 13 2 Simucad 13 3 Parameterized Cells Creating graphical P cells 13 3 1 Graphical P cell Creation Flow Simucad Create a new graphical P cell using the command Pcell gt New see Figure 13 3 with the option Graphical Pcell checked The initial content of the new graphical P cell can be filled with content of a regular cell by checking the option Compose of selected cell and selecting the cell name in the Cell List control of the New PCell dialog form C Top cells only f All cells C Textual PCell f Graphical PCell M Open Now
179. GS Loads EXPERT settings from file with the extension ecf Format IMPORT EXPERT SETTINGS path_name Arguments path_name type STRING Path name of EXPERT S settings file Example gt import expert settings d data expert ecf RESTORE EXPERT SETTINGS Restores EXPERT settings either default ones or from the registry of the current user Format RESTORE EXPERT SETTINGS default registry Switches default registry If default is specified then predefined EXPERT settings will be applied If registry switch or no switch is specified the setting will be read from the registry Example 1 17 22 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell gt restore expert settings default Predefined EXPERT settings will be applied Example 2 gt restore expert settings EXPERT settings stored in the registry will be applied SAVE EXPERT SETTINGS Writes EXPERT settings into the registry of the current user Format SAVE EXPERT SETTINGS Arguments None Example gt save expert settings 17 6 3 Expert Setup Commands SETUP GRID Sets parameters for the common layer specific or cell instance Setup gt Technology gt Grid dialog panel Format SETUP GRID commongrid layergrid instancegrid layer layername minstep value equalxy noegqualxy snap nosnap snapstepx value snapstepy value snapdependvisible nosnapdependvisible snapratiox value snapratioy value
180. GUAGE FOR INTERFACING SIMUCAD APPLICATIONS by commands that execute EXPERT S actions These commands xi commands together with the language constructs of LISA allow you to write powerful xi scripts for automatic generation and verification of layouts Some possibilities provided by the XI SHELL are e saving layout into an XI SCRIPT file e parameterized construction of shapes e P cells parameterized cells e editable activity logs with playback possibility e editing the layout by execution of EXPERT commands from the command line e automation of design tasks like writing various logs reading parameters from files running verification jobs etc Most xi commands are directly related to EXPERT menu commands For more details about these xi commands see the corresponding sections of this manual The complete description of LISA may be found in the document LANGUAGE FOR INTERFACING SIMUCAD APPLICATIONS LISA USER S MANUAL Please keep in mind that the set of available xi commands constantly grows so see the release notes for the most recent additions Simucad 17 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 2 Remarks on Command Syntax and Descriptions 17 2 1 2 3 A 5 6 For a general description of the syntax see the document LANGUAGE FOR INTERFACING SIMUCAD APPLICATIONS LISA USER S MANUAL Syntax conventions used for the xi command description Vertical bars s
181. II const GDSII_SETUP amp sGDSIISetup Purpose Sets EXPERT S GDSII Setup data Parameters GDSII_SETUP amp sGDSIISetup Reference to a GDSII Setup structure 18 6 Simucad Expert API Return None Example GDSII_SETUP sGDSIISetup sGDSIISetup someField some data ExpApiSetSetupGDSII sGDSIISetup 18 2 15 Get GDSII Setup Data void ExpApiGetSetupGDSII GDSII_SETUP amp sGDSIISetup Purpose Gets EXPERT S GDSII Read Write Setup data Parameters GDSII_SETUP amp sGDSIISetup Reference to a GDSII Setup structure Return None Example GDSII_SETUP sGDSIISetup ExpApiGetSetupGDSII sGDSIISetup 18 2 16 Set CIF Setup Data void ExpApiSetSetupCIF const CIF_SETUP amp sCIFSetup Purpose Sets EXPERT S CIF Read Write Setup data Parameters CIF_SETUP amp sCIFSetup Reference to a CIF Setup structure Return None Example CIF SETUP SGIFSetupi sCIFSetup someField some data ExpApiSetSetupCIF CIFSetup 18 2 17 Get CIF Setup Data void ExpApiGetSetupCIF CIF_SETUP amp sCIFSetup Purpose Gets EXPERT S CIF Setup data Parameters CIF_SETUP amp sCIFSetup Reference to a CIF Setup structure Simucad 18 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Return None Example CLF SETUP SCLEServup ExpApiGetSetupCIF CIFSetup 18 2 18 Set Applicon Setup Data void ExpApiSetSetupApplicon const APPLICON_SETUP amp sAPPLICONSetup Purpose Sets Expert s Applicon Re
182. IL then begin Tete P in Linkdir DED LEE TL _leftPin linkcallback nmos_linker end A M O 12 24 Simucad Tools END linking procedure define procedure nmos_linker replace parameter devicelParams parameter device2Params parameter devicelPin parameter defice2Pin parameter externalConn do begin if devicelPin EQL D then begin device2Params RightCont false if not externalConn then begin devicelParams RightCont false end end if devicelPin EQL S then begin device2Params LeftCont false if not externalConn then begin devicelParams LeftCont false end end end The results of linking two instances of the P cell nmos depicted in Figure 12 24 One of the instances the lower one was rotated 180 degree to make proper linking directions The rotated instance was moved into direction to first instance while pins overlapped Once pins are overlapped the EXPERT Automatic Linker is triggered Because there are no more pins connected to the external net the linking procedure nmos_linker is invoked with parameter externalConn false and no contacts between the two linked instances are presented oe ee LAA NODOS GY ILLA A Pin with Right link dir DIAS GY A MY AME ZAS MON IAN NEN NIN A pi cht wa VY Linked instances adjusted to Lett 4 MON ds KZ A oe eel Y Figure 12 24 Automatic Instance Linking When the pins of two linked instances are connected t
183. IL otherwise eae Returns TRUE if object is selected and FALSE other wise SELECTED BOOLEAN Sets Sets or resets selecting resets Sets or resets selecting STRING Returns the shape of the object box ellipse 99 poly 2 66 gon wire text instance array TYPE TYPE Returns the LAYOUTOBJECT type constant 17 106 Simucad 2 66 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Property names in the EXPERT database are case sensitive therefore you must use case sensitive attribute sets see Section 17 2 Remarks on Command Syntax and Descriptions for more information If you assign a new attribute set for the layout object the old attribute set is deleted Example gt instl instance 39 5 4 rotate 90 cell nand2 find get gt property instl property gt 1if property EOL NIL then property aset_create_cs gt property NodeName Nodel add new property attribute gt instl property property update properties for the instance gt display instl property NodeName Table 17 7 LayoutObject Box Ellipse Components pos ZE ESO M8 Returns a size radius of box ellipse Table 17 8 LayoutObject Polygon Components Returns a sequence of vertex type POINT of poly gon Table 17 9 LayoutObject Text Components EI BO Returns a align style of text Sets a new align style of text EC E E remse LABEL LABEL put
184. L BOOL bReadOnly FALSE Purpose Loads a Project with specified Technology if the Technology name is not NULL and saves Output Backup file if not NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szProjName Input file name The format of the file is determined by its extension Lists of allowable input file extensions are specified in the corresponding setups APPLICON_SETUP GDSII_SETUP CIF_SETUP LPCTSTR szOutputProjectName Output Project name for GDS CIF or APL types of loading file backup file name for ELD LPCTSTR szTechName Technology file name BOOL bReadOnly Read only flag Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectLoad Proj_l eld Proj_la eld Techno tcn Simucad 18 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual FALSE 18 3 4 Close Project BOOL ExpApiProjectClose Purpose Closes the current Project Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectClose 18 3 5 Save Project BOOL ExpApiProjectSave Purpose Saves the current Project if it is changed Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectSave 18 3 6 Save Project As Another File BOOL ExpApiProjectSaveAs LPCTSTR szProjName Purpose Saves current Project into a file with the specified name The format of the file is determined
185. Layer Example HTLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetTechNextlayer 18 4 4 Get Technology Layer Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetTechLayerName HTLAYER hLayer Purpose Returns the name of a Technology Layer given by its handle Parameters HTLAYER hLayer Technology Layer handle Return LPCTSTR The name of the Technology Layer Example HTLAYER hLayer some data LPCTSTR szLayer ExpApiGetTechLayerName hLayer 18 4 5 Set Technology Layer BOOL ExpApiSetTechLayer LPCTSTR szLayerName const LAYER _PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Sets the Property specification of the Technology Layer specified by its name Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Layer name LAYER_PROPERTY amp Property Layer property Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example LAYER PROPERTY Property Property someField some data LPCTSTR szName Layer_1 BOOL bResult ExpApiSetTechLayer szName Property 18 12 Simucad Expert API 18 4 6 Get Technology Layer Specification BOOL ExpApiGetTechLayer LPCTSTR szLayerName LAYER _PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Gets the Property of specified Technology Layer Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Layer name LAYER _PROPERTY amp Property Layer property Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example LAYER PROPERTY Property LPCTSTR szName Layer_1 BOOL bResult ExpApiGetTechLayer szName Property 18 4 7 Add Technology Layer BOOL Exp
186. Layer Plan panel always contains the plan __ Current which corresponds to the one used in the Layer bar The most common use of it as follows e You set layer visibility selectability filling as desired for any layer in the layer list or through the layer plan e In the Layer Plan panel rename the _ Current layer plan with the name of the layer plan you want to create click the Rename button change the layer plan name and type return on the keyboard e There are two ways to save your layer plans e If you want to reuse your layer plans later in other projects save them into separate files and load them later For each layer plan select it and click on the Save button then you will be prompted to choose the name of the Layer Plan file elp You may load this file later in another project with equivalent technology using the Load button of the Layer Plan panel e Ifyou want your Layer Plans to always be available in your current project you can store them directly in a eld file together with EXPERT S project It consists simply of saving your project when you have defined your layer plans Moreover you can set one of the layer plans as the default one when opening the project You have to activate it and then execute the command View gt Layer View gt Layer Plan gt Fix Plan Loading Saving Layer Style Color Filling using Layer Plans Expert Layer Plan files elp store layer color and stipple pattern data so that yo
187. MAX_POINT then a line is drawn from ptPrev to the current mouse position CEAPoint amp pt Output mouse cursor coordinates Return BOOL TRUE if mouse cursor coordinates are valid FALSE otherwise Example if draws the ine Trom ptPrev to current Point CRAP OLNE pere CEAPOINE LOO 200 CEAPOLAL pt BOOL bValid ExpApiGetMousePoint pt ptPrev does not draw line CHAPOLNE pt BOOL bValid ExpApiGetMousePoint pt 18 15 2 Get Mouse Rectangle BOOL ExpApiGetMouseRect CEARect r 18 60 Simucad Purpose Reads and stores coordinates of mouse tracking rectangle Parameters CEARect amp r Output coordinates of mouse tracking rectangle Return BOOL TRUE if mouse cursor coordinates are valid FALSE otherwise Example CEARect mRect BOOL bValid ExpApiGetMouseRect mRect 18 15 3 Is Mouse Right Button Pressed BOOL ExpApilsRMousePress Purpose Catches right mouse button press event Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if pressed FALSE otherwise Example OBJECT PROPERTIE Property CEAPoint ptPrev EA_MAX_POINT CHEAP OLN Ol do pt ExpApiGetMousePoint ptPrev Property VerticesArray Add pt PELLEV pE while ExpApilIsRMousePress 18 16 Library 18 16 1 Set Logical Name BOOL ExpApiSetLogName LPCTSTR szLibLogName LPCTSTR szLibPathName Purpose Sets Library logical name for specified Library path in the Library Name Table Parame
188. MS LH 0 250 WH 1 60 LP 0 250 1 E MPL Hl 1 4 YSS VDD 1 Y INVE1 PARAMS LNH 0 250 WH 0 7U0 LP 0 250 1 x 51811 ENDS LATCH E E MNL Structdef name INVE H pl 2 Structdef attribute BUS EXPANDED E MPL l 5 12 SUBCET INVE MINUS Y PLUS V Y ES el 7 oom lan HII Y MINUS_V HINOS Y MHL L LH W WNH AD 50 WH AS 50 1H me HZ Zt Figure 12 7 Netlist Panel The Netlist Rover showed to the right of Figure 12 7 illustrates the circuit hierarchical tree allowing you to browse through and locate different instances devices In order to run the Netlist Driven Layout tool a library of predefined standard cells resistors capacitors transistors diodes and other devices must be present in your custom cell These standard cells must be located in the current project For each cell or device referenced in the netlist there should be an equivalent cell or device in the ELD project The available cells can be P cell This will be described in more detail later in this section 12 8 Simucad Tools 12 4 2 Cell Creation Using the Netlist Rover window you can generate the cells made of standard cells or P cells available in your current project By placing the mouse cursor at the location of the subcircuit you want to lay out and clicking the right mouse button a popup menu will appear see Figure 12 8 e Select Create in the popup menu and automatic cell generation will be performed e Select Open in
189. Manual BOOL bUnderSize UnderSize TRUE to shrinks the covered areas or OverSize FALSE to the covered areas BOOL bGrid Flag to grid put the resized shapes on minimal grid BOOL bMerge Flag to merge the resized shapes Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiResizeSelected 100 FALSE FALSE FALSE 18 8 4 Explode Selected BOOL ExpApiExplodeSelected Purpose Explodes the selected cell instance array Objects Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiExplodeSelected 18 8 5 Explode All BOOL ExpApliExplodeAll Purpose Explodes all cell instance array Objects Decreases cell hierarchy depth by one Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiExplodeAll 18 8 6 Flatten BOOL ExpApiFlatten LPCTSTR szFileName LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose expand Creates a new flat project and saves it the specified file in eld format from the specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted 18 42 Simucad Expert API Parameters LPCTSTR szFileName Output eld file name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiFlatten FlattenCell l eld Cell 1 18 8 7 Cut by Line BOOL ExpApiCutBylLine RCEAPointsArray pLinePoints LPCTSTR szCellNam
190. N PAD Creates selects or deletes a floorplan pad Note This command is obsolete Use primitive layout objects with the named argument net and switch to pin See Section 17 8 2 Primitive Object Creation 1FLOORPLAN PIN Creates selects or deletes a pin in the floorplan block Pins are used to connect block terminals Note This command is obsolete Use primitive layout objects with the named argument net and switch to pin See Section 17 8 2 Primitive Object Creation 17 56 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 8 6 Complex Object Creation MULTIPATH Creates a multiwire complex layout object containing wires on different layers connected by appropriate contact cells Note Technology for the current project must contain contact statements for layers to be contacted Format MULTIPATH wire W1ires wire Arguments wlre W1Yreo wire type SEQUENCE Sequence of wires to be contacted by appropriate contact cells Each element can be either a layout object wire type LAYOUTOBJECT or sequence of wire attributes The latter form is represented as wire vertices layer width endstyle joinstyle where vertices is a sequence of wire vertices see WIRE on page 17 47 layer is the name of the layer width is the wire width endstyle is the wire end style and joinstyle is the wire joint style see pre defined constants in MODIFY WIRE on page 17 74
191. OBJECT data type a container of layout objects type OBJECTCONTAINER or a sequence of layout objects type SEQUENCE Use commands for creating objects Section 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects with switch get or FIND OBJECTS command Section 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures to obtain layout objects Named Arguments selected If specified than selected objects will be modified layer layer_name type STRING The name of a layer Changes the layer of a primitive object if specified Not applicable for instance layout objects property type SEQUENCE xpos value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of the horizontal position Sets the new horizontal position for object if specified Not applicable for layout objects with shape polygon or wire ypos value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of a vertical position Sets the vertical position for object if specified Not applicable for layout objects with shape polygon or wire net net_name type STRING The name of a layer Adds object to the specified net Empty net name is used to remove object from the net the last one belongs pin TRUE FALSE type BOOLEAN If specified it changes the object status in the net applicable only for layout objects included to the net 17 12 2 Modify Commands MODIFY OBJECT Changes the common attributes for specified objects Format MODIFY OBJECT lobject selected xp
192. OINT SEQUENCE Specifies source contact or contacts target type POINT SEQUENCE Specifies target contact or contacts Simucad 17 81 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Named Arguments rarea type RECT Specifies the routing area If the argument is omitted the routing area is defined automatically layer type STRING The layer name If not specified the active layer is used width type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The wire width If not specified the wire width for specified layer will be applied space type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The spacing from the wire to the obstacles If not specified the wire width value will be applied Return Value The wire handle type LAYOUTOBJECT if wiring is succeeded and NIL otherwise Example PUSOUrCEe polnt cr ation 00 Petarget point Create op 53 wiring ptsource pttarget WC_ADD_CONTACT Adds source or target contact for wiring Afterwards the WIRING command can be used without source and target arguments Format WC ADD CONTACT cnt source target Arguments ent type POINT or LAYOUTOBJECT Specifies a point or an object node for adding to the source or target contact s set If this argument is omitted then objects from the preliminarily selected node are added Note if the new contact already exists in the corresponding contacts set then the last one is excluded from the specified contact group Switches source target Specifies the
193. OL_MODE ExpApiGetSelectMode Purpose Gets current selection mode See Section 18 11 1 Set Select Mode Parameters None Return SELECT _BOOL_MODE Current selection mode Example SELECT_BOOL_MODE Mode ExpApiGetSelectMode l 18 11 3 Set Concern Mode BOOL ExpApiSetConcernMode SELECT CONCERN MODE Mode Simucad 18 49 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Sets selection concern mode Parameters SELECT_CONCERN_MODE Mode SCM_INSIDE Select the objects that fit completely inside the selection box SCM_TOUCH Select the objects that cross the selection box Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetConcernMode SCM_INSIDE 18 11 4 Get Concern Mode SELECT CONCERN MODE ExpApiGetConcernMode Purpose Gets current selection concern mode See Section 18 11 3 Set Concern Mode Parameters None Return SELECT CONCERN MODE Current concern mode Example SELECT_CONCERN_ MODE Mode ExpApiGetConcernMode 18 11 5 Set Fill Mode BOOL ExpApiSetFillMode SELECT_FILL_MODE Mode Purpose Sets selection fill mode Parameters SELECT_FILL MODE Mode SFM_BOUNDARY In this mode objects are de selectable by any of its boundary points SFM_SOLID In this mode objects are de selectable by any of its inside or boundary points Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetFillMode SFM_SOLID 18
194. OM SCICCIOG csik cok eet hee vote Gee eased tines 9 8 ZOOMMAO E eo iaa 9 8 ZOOM VVINGOWS 2 rele a sence a Ge bee 9 8 Index 4 Simucad
195. Operations 8 6 Undo Redo An Undo operation of unlimited rollback depth is implemented with its own undo list The Undo is invoked in one of the following three ways e by menu command Edit gt Undo e by clicking the Undo button at the Command bar or e by pressing Ctrl Z The Esc key an additional option interrupts editing In general undo is applicable only to editing operations You cannot undo pan zoom select operations switching among windows etc If the undo list is empty the undo button is gray and inactive Note Some operations are not undoable if the numbers of changed objects exceeds the settings Maximum size of Undo step N objects see Section 11 3 4 Data Safety Page You will get a warning in this case 8 6 1 Esc Key Interrupts Editing Operations The Esc key interrupts many operations of EXPERT such as loading In particular if you start creating an object pressing the Ese key deletes the unfinished object In other words it serves as a limited undo operation 8 6 2 Undo The Undo operation is available outside of any editing operation that allows you to roll back along the completed editing operations Note 1 Be careful during a long roll back you may undo changes you do not see Note 2 If a selected object undergoes an undo operation it remains selected 8 6 3 Redo A Redo operation reverses the results of the undo operation Simucad 8 9 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual
196. PERT Device Linker restores the parameters of the instances before linking but positions before linking are not preserved The unlinked instances are left in the same positions linked state and might be overlapped see Figure 12 27 12 26 Simucad Tools Figure 12 27 Unlinked Instances The command Tools gt Link Devices gt Unlink All will unlink all instances in the current cell 12 7 Cut by Poly Line Purpose To cut primitive objects into one or more parts The goal of cutting primitive objects into one or more parts is to remove a piece of a geometrical object or to simplify its shape etc Several objects may be cut simultaneously There are three modes for cut by line selectable from the Tools gt Cut by Line Mode submenu e cut in the active layer e cut selected objects e cut all e save wires The first three self explanatory modes define which objects will be cut If the option Tools gt Cut by Line Modes Save Wires is on then the cut by line operation does not convert wires into polygons Wires are split into several wires by points of intersection of its centerlines with the cutting line Wire styles are preserved In particular if the original wire has the Extended end style then the resulting wires will overlap near the splitting point Execution e To start cutting objects click the Cut By Line button at the Design Bar or select the Tools gt Cut By Line menu item e To cut object s draw a p
197. PERT s message line will then contain information about the selected object 2 Selects layout objects by box by dragging a mouse Simucad 7 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Execution This action is invoked from the Select menu or by the corresponding button from the Design bar You then select objects several times until you switch to another command or to the Void tool There are several modes of selection described in Section 7 2 1 Selection Modes Nonlinked texts are selected if you click anywhere inside its frame A linked text cannot be selected separately from its linking object If you click on the linked text you will select its linking object as well If Select Preselection mode described below is off then the exact position of the cursor to select a primitive object depends on the current selection mode boundary or solid e If Select Selection Modes gt By Boundary mode is on you must point at the border line of the required object e IfSelect gt Selection Modes gt By Solid mode is on objects are de selectable by clicking on any of its inside or boundary points The borders of the selected primitive objects are highlighted If the menu option Select Solid Highlight is checked then the interiors of the selected primitive objects are highlighted Note If you are in Select by Box operation see below double clicking on an object emulates pointer selection Note If you are in the Select By Click
198. PLATE Adds modifies deletes the Pwire template in the technology Format PWIRE_ TEMPLATE pwire_template_name layer layername width value extend flushend roundend FextoLnt fila yoink T reund7o1nc A miters orat centeroffset leftoffset rightoffset enclwires enclwires offwires offwires boxes boxes Arguments pwire_template_name type STRING Specifies Pwire template name layer layername type STRING Specifies layer for master wire object width value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the master wire width If not presented the default wire width for specified layer is used extend flushend roundend Specifies the wire end style If not presented the default wire end style for specified layer is used extjoint filljoint roundjoint miterjoint Specifies the wire joint style If not presented the default joint end style for specified layer is used enclwires enclwires type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of enclosure wire type offsetwires offsetwires type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of offset wire type boxes boxes type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of box type There are set of predefined Xi attributes used for definition of Pwire subparts such as 17 60 PWA_BEGIN_OFFSET Defines offset for subpart objects with respect to the first vertex of the master wire object value typ
199. POSITORY_LIBRARY_L repository_name 17 92 IAN mano N a a No N Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Table 17 22 Return type Command Procedure Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters INTEGER SPAWN program_pathname 17 103 program_arguments nowait ing SEARCH SEARCH_CRITERION_CREATE obj atti value condition 17 111 CRITE RION 17 128 Simucad Chapter 18 Expert API 18 1 Overview 18 1 1 Plug in Libraries The EXPERT Application Programming Interface API provides the possibility of adding functions written in C C to the EXPERT LAYOUT EDITOR Numerous functions of API constitute very powerful and flexible means of access to full EXPERT functionality EXPERT API is provided in the form of a library It contains numerous API functions that provide powerful and flexible tools to control edit and modify EXPERT S project data and user interface Using EXPERT API you can create one or several plug in shared libraries These libraries should be placed in a plugins directory where EXPERTS executable module is ex S lib expert 4 4 4 R x86 NT plugins When starting EXPERT loads all plug in libraries from directory plugins to memory and makes all functions from libraries available To access these functions EXPERT API has to add new menu items The library CelExpApi lib file is to be added into a C project where you build your plug in library in the form of a Dynamically Linked Libr
200. PTSTR szValue ExpApiGetUserProperty hObject propertyl17 ae do Something if szValue free szValue 18 7 30 Modify User Defined Property BOOL ExpApiModifyUserProperty HOBJECT hObject LPCTSTR szName LPCTSTR szValue Simucad 18 39 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Modifies Value of Object s User Defined Property with specified Name Memory allocated by ExpApiModifyProperty should be finally freed Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object LPCTSTR szName Property Name LPCTSTR szValue Property Value to set Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiModifyUserProperty hObject propertyl7 18 7 31 Delete User Defined Property BOOL ExpApiDeleteUserProperty HOBJECT hObject LPCTSTR szName Purpose Deletes Object s User Defined Property with specified Name Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object LPCTSTR szName Property Name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteUserProperty hObject propertyl 18 7 32 Delete All User Defined Properties BOOL ExpApiDeleteUserPropertyAll HOBJECT hObject Purpose Deletes All Object s User Defined Properties Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some obje
201. Pressing any of these buttons completes the copy operation Upon completion OK closes the copy dialog while Apply leaves it open and refreshes cell lists for more copy operations If you type the Enter key in a cell dialog 1t behaves as follows e Ifthe Filter field is applied the caret cursor is in this field the specified filter is applied and the corresponding cell name list is displayed e The selected cell is copied as if the OK button is clicked Every time Copy Cell Dialog is called it uses recently set up cell name filter and All cells Top cells only group choice that are preserved during the session If you press OK or Apply there are possible two outcomes 1 The operation will perform successfully 2 The Cell Name Collision dialog box appears as described in the following subsection The cells will be copied after resolving all collisions Note To copy the currently edited cell you can select Cell gt Save as 4 9 1 Cell Name Collision Resolving Dialog This dialog is shown in Figure 4 10 The following operations are provided for resolving pairs of colliding cells Select cells by clicking the individual names or All Copied or All Existing buttons Replace selected old cells by the new ones Skip selected new cells 4 16 Simucad Project Cell Commands Cell Name Collision f xj Collision name list Skip copied cells Old Cell Name New Cell Name Skip Skip All inverter inverter inve
202. Property Bar instead of the Numeric Input panel for inspecting modifying attributes of objects while they are created In order to do so you need to select option at Setup gt Editor Viewer Setup gt Editing Use Property bar for Numeric Input You can read more about the Property Bar in the Section 8 9 Inspecting Changing Object Properties Simucad 5 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 5 2 Drawing Settings 5 2 1 Admissible Angles The Angle Modes submenu and the corresponding buttons in the Drawing Bar are used to specify admissible directions of region sides during their creation Under the 90 restriction region sides and wire segments can be only vertical or horizontal Two more diagonal directions are allowed under the 45 restriction Figure 5 2 qe Set Origin Position Cursor Ctrl F i Mumeric Input Direction Snap Mode Region Mode A e Snap Cursor to Grid e Preserve Angles Mode rawik Figure 5 2 Admissible Angles Menu and Toolbar 5 2 2 Snap Cursor to Grid In this mode the cursor can be positioned only at the nodes of the snap grid It can differ from the visual grid To set grid parameters select Setup gt Technology gt Grid See Chapter 11 Setup for the description of grids used in EXPERT 5 2 3 Direction Snap Modes These modes restrict the cursors movement to specific sets of directions during the creation and modification of objects To use these modes either se
203. Purpose Links text to object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object HOBJECT hText Handle of text object Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object HOBJECT hText ExpApiCreateText This is attached text CEAPoint 0 0 100 LOOF TOD OUy FALSE TRUE BOOL bResult ExpApiLinkText hObject hText 18 7 22 Unlink Text HOBJECT ExpApiUnlinkText HOBJECT hObject int nText Purpose Unlinks the linked text given its number from the specified object then inserts it into the layout and returns its handle Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to object int nText Linked text zero based index Return HOBJECT The handle to unlinked text EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed 18 36 Simucad Expert API Example HOBJECT hObject some object int nText 0 Linked Text number HOBJECT hText ExpApiUnlinkText hObject nText 18 7 23 Add Linked Text BOOL ExpApiAddLinkedText HOBJECT hObject RCEAPoint Position double dHeight double dWidth LPCTSTR szText Purpose Creates and adds linked text to object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object RCEAPoint ptPos Initial placement position of Text double dWidth double dHeight Text width Text height LPCTSTR szText Text to attach Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiAddLinkedText hObject CEAPoint 0 0 10
204. RCEAPoint ptCenter The center of Donut double dRadl double dRad2 Radius 1 Radius 2 LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer Return HOBJECT Handle to created donut EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateDonut CEAPoint 0 0 100 200 Layer_1 18 7 18 Wire HOBJECT ExpApiCreateWire RCEAPointsArray Points double dWidth LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates a Wire in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters RCEAPointsArray Points Reference to array of Wire coordinates double dWidth Wire width LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer 18 34 Simucad Expert API Return HOBJECT Handle to created Wire EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example CEAPointsArray WirePoints WirePoints Add CEAPoint 1000 0 2000 0 WirePoints Add CEAPoint 2000 0 1000 0 HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateWire WirePoints 20 0 Layer_ 1 18 7 19 Region HOBJECT ExpApiCreateRegion RCEAPointsArray Points LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates a Region in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters RCEAPointsArray Points Reference to array of Region coordinates LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer Return HOBJECT Handle to created region EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example CEAPointsArray RegPoints RegPoints Add CHAPoint 1000 0 2000 0 RegPoints Add CEAPoint 2000 0 1000 0 RegPoints Add CE
205. ROPERTY amp Property Reference to Object property Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to added Object Example OBJECT PROPERTY Property Property someField some data HOBJECT hObject ExpApiAddObject Property 18 7 3 Delete Object BOOL ExpApiDeleteObject HOBJECT hObject Purpose Deletes the specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object to delete Return BOOL TRUE if pressed FALSE otherwise 18 28 Simucad Expert API Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteObject hObject 18 7 4 Modify Object HOBJECT ExpApiModifyObject HOBJECT hObject OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Modifies Object s property Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object to modify OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Reference to Object property Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to modified Object Example HOBJECT hObject some object OBJECT PROPERTY Property Property someField some data ExpApiModifyObject hObject Property 18 7 5 Search int ExpApiSearch const CEASearchContext SearchContext LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Searches objects in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted for specific context search criteria For access to found objects use ExpApiGetFoundFirstObject ExpApiGetFoundNextObject ExpApiGetFoundPrevObject ExpApiGetFoundLastObject functions Parameters const
206. RT Simucad Tools e The user can delete some rulers by selecting them through the usual Select gt By Click Drag tool and by using the command Tools gt Measure gt Remove Selected Rulers 12 2 3 Coordinate Axes The user may switch on off the display of coordinate axes by clicking at the Tools Measure Coordinate Axes menu item If this menu item is checked on then an X coordinate axis is located on the top side and a Y coordinate axis is located on the left side of EXPERT S working area as shown in Figure 12 3 The current cursor position is marked by thin lines on the coordinate axes 12 2 4 Coordinate Origin When the Tools gt Measure Origin menu item is checked the origin is displayed if it is contained in the display window Otherwise Origin menu item is unchecked the origin is not shown 12 2 5 Cursor Crosshairs If the View gt Cursor Crosshairs menu item is checked all cursors in the layout editor are accompanied by two orthogonal dashed lines shown in Figure 12 3 This helps to estimate the cursor position with respect to layout objects 12 2 6 Distance from Point to Line The command Tools gt Measure gt Point Line Distance measures the distance between a point and a line The line may be defined by a side of the boundary of a shape or by a segment of the centerline of a wire Execution Click the point from which the distance is required then pick a line segment to which the distance is required When
207. RefPoint CEAPoint 100 200 EXpPApPTISetrerPoLatiCRAPOLACALOO 200 5 Cell LT 18 5 19 Get Reference Point CEAPoint ExpApiGetRefPoint LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets current Reference Point coordinates for specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return CEAPoint Position of the Reference Point Example CEAPoint pt ExpApiGetRefPoint CEAPoint pt ExpApiGetRefPoint Cell_1 18 5 20 Activate Reference Point BOOL ExpApiActivateRefPoint BOOL bRefPointActivate TRUE LPCTSTR szCellName NULL 18 20 Simucad Expert API Purpose Activates deactivates the Reference Point for specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters BOOL bRefPointActivate Flag TRUE to activate reference point FALSE to deactivate LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiActivateRefPoint Activate reference point BOOL bResult ExpApiActivateRefPoint FALSE Cell_1 Deactivate reference point 18 5 21 Get Window Rect CEARect ExpApiGetCurrentWindowRect Purpose Gets current window rectangle 1 e drawing area size in user units Parameters None Return CEARect Drawing area Example CEARect r ExpApiGetCurrentWindowRect 18 5 22 Is Ancestor of Cell BOOL ExpApilsAncestorOf LPCTSTR szCellName LPCTSTR szPare
208. Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetReadOnlyCell TRUE Cell 1 18 5 16 Get Cell Read only Flag BOOL ExpApiGetReadOnlyCell LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets value of Read only flag for specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if cell is Read only FALSE if write enabled Example BOOL bRO ExpApiGetReadOnlyCell Cell_1 18 5 17 Set Origin BOOL ExpApiSetOrigin double dx double dy LPCTSTR szCellName NULL BOOL ExpApiSetOrigin RCEAPoint pt LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Sets new Origin of specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Simucad 18 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Parameters double dx double dy Coordinates of new Origin RCEAPoint pt Coordinates of new Origin LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL DResult BxpApi SetOrigin LoU 200 47 ter the current cell BOOL DRESULe ExXpApisetOrigin CERAPOINECLOO 200 Cell I 18 5 18 Set Reference Point void ExpApiSetRefPoint RCEAPoint ptStart LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Sets new Reference Point coordinates for specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters RCEAPoint ptStart Position of the Reference Point LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return None Example ExpApiSet
209. SCIGCION Mode cria id 7 3 DIE a aci 2 4 A ea EE 2 1 4 5 project file cp road 2 1 Project Cell Commands occcooccccocccnccnccncoconnnonoconoconononononinnns 4 1 PROPA TUR tn e lalo cds 2 6 properties of objects parias 8 13 propery map Tile sa e 2 6 A e E E 2 6 Property Valie ricana e a E 2 6 R FACIODUUON rasa 3 12 Read Only A a 4 21 Read Only mode of project loading cc csseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 6 A a 17 105 recursive instancing tia 2 2 PROC BOPE EPEE OAN EEE AEE E AE A DATAENE 8 9 PRO Clea Wi nsn a E EA EE E 9 16 terere nce DOIN sertare ne E eaters 9 15 Reference Point traveling cccccssseeeccssseeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeees 9 15 Seneca a i iS 2 1 COIN E E E E E A E T 2 4 Regon Modes in e a 9 3 Rename Coll ainda isa 4 18 Simucad Index Restrictions for Layer Names ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 11 21 AA A 2 6 5 12 lec io ior caninas d 8 7 Ao eUS O NE E E E EE dite oad EEE T EE eee 8 7 A EA E AAR 2 6 row displacement sisirin aa 2 6 O A 2 6 A A mn ene eee 12 4 S A ae E 4 21 BCICCIMIAVOUL sande snasenterap ante A 3 1 Sear srianan a E E a 8 15 A EE 8 15 SearchCriterion Type sssccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 107 17 108 Security of Technology Settings ccccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 Selecting Layout Objects socio aiis 7 1 A 7 4 SETON prasarana aaa S 8 8 A ey ae ne ee ere a 11 1 GUD tds 2 4 Shared A E 4 6 E scrisese a E REER 16 1 shared liDrary O EA AS 2 1 SNONC
210. SELECT ALL DESELECT OBJECT Deselects an object or a sequence of objects Format DESELECT OBJECT TobJject Arguments lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT SEQUENCE Layout object or a sequence of layout objects to be selected Use commands for creating objects Section 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects with the switch get or SEARCH procedure Section 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures to obtain layout objects Example gt pols search SEARCH POLYGON WHOLE CELL FALSE FALSE TRUE gt deselect object bb Deselects all polygons in the current cell INVERT SELECTION Toggles the selection state for all objects in the edited cell Format INVERT SELECTION SELECT ALL Selects all objects in the edited cell Format SELECT ALL SELECT BOX Selects layouts objects depending on the box mode Format SELECT BOX xpos ypos xsize ysize select reselect deselect Arguments xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE xsize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE ysize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE xpos xpos is the lower left corner of selection box and x ys 18 size of box Switches select reselect deselect These switches temporary change the default select object mode 17 62 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e select switch means that the object will be selected without a change in the selection state of other objects e reselect switch means
211. STR ExpApiGetCellName HCELL hCell Purpose Retrieves cell s name by cell s handle Parameters HCELL hCel1 Cell handle Return LPCTSTR Name of the cell Example HCELL hCell some data LPCTSTR szCellName ExpApiGetCellName hCell 18 5 7 Create New Cell BOOL ExpApiCreateNewCell LPCTSTR szCellName Purpose Creates a new cell with the specified name Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName The name of the new cell to create Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCreateNewCell New_Cell 18 5 8 Create New Cell from Rectangular Clipping BOOL ExpApiCreateNewClipCell LPCTSTR szCellName RCEARect ptRect BOOL DC LOL TRUE Purpose Creates a new cell from all layout geometry in the specified Rectangle with maximally preserved cell hierarchy Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name RCEARect ptRect Rectangle to ClipIn ClipOut BOOL bClipIn TRUE if to make Clip In replace the piece of layout by the instance of the new cell FALSE to make Clip Out clip out a piece of layout to a new cell 18 16 Simucad Expert API Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example CEARGCE PERGE CRARGCE CEAPOInk 1000 0 1000 0 CHAP OAant 2000 0 ZOO0 6 07 BOOL bResult ExpApiCreateNewClipCell Cell _ClipOut ptRect FALSE 18 5 9 Delete Cell BOOL ExpApiDeleteCell LPCTSTR szCellName NULL BOOL bHier FALSE Purpose Deletes t
212. Setup gt Technology gt General dialog panel Named Arguments outputname output_name type STRING The name of an ELD SLD project file for conversion from foreign format GDSII CIF or Applicon Switches readonly If specified a project will be opened in read only mode Switch is valid only for EXPERT database disk files with extension eld or s1d Example 1 gt project load d 6DSIT mux4 GDSII d GDSII mux4 ten outputname mux4_org GDSII project file d GDSII mux4 GDSII with technology d GDSII mux4 tcn will be converted to ELD project file mux4_org eld and the last one will be opened Example 2 gt project load d GDSII mux4 gds d GDSII mux4 tcn outputname mux4 sld GDSII project file d GDSII mux4 gds with technology d GDSII mux4 tcn will be converted to SLD project file mux4_org eld and the last one will be opened PROJECT SAVE Saves the current project on disk in ELD SLD or foreign formats Format PROJECT SAVE proj_name Arguments proj_ name type STRING The name of the project file of type ELD SLD GDSII CIF or APL according to the extension of the path name argument The command corresponds to File gt Save menu command if project name is not specified and corresponds to File gt Save As menu command otherwise Examples 1 project save d CIF new cif Current project is saved as CIF project file d CIF new cif Ex
213. T preferences The global variable __EXPERT_SETUP is available to change the EXPERT setup modes Table 16 x EXPERT_SETUP Components FORBID_SERLINTERSECT get BOOLEAN Returns TRUE if cre ation of self intersected shapes forbidden returns FALSE otherwise FORBID _SERLINTERSECT put BOOLEAN Allows FALSE or disal lows TRUE creation of self intersected shapes LPE_DERIVEDLAYERSCRIPT put STRING Returns a pathname of external DRC script file LPE_DERIVEDLAYERSCRIPT get STRING Sets a pathname to the external DRC script file Simucad 17 115 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual LPE_DERIVEDLAYERTECH BOOLEAN Returns TRUE if current technology is used for layer derivation return FALSE if external DRC script file is used LPE_DERIVEDLAYERTECH BOOLEAN Defines how to calculate derived layers current technology or external DRC script REGIONMODE get INTEGER predefined Returns current Region RM_NORMAL mode for creation of shape RM_MERGE object RM_HOLE RM_HOLESELECTED REGIONMODE put INTEGER predefined Sets the Region mode SM_SELECT SM_DESELECT SM_RESELECT SELECTBOXMODE get INTEGER predefined Returns current Select by SBM_INSIDE Box mode SBM_CROSS SELECTBOXMODE put INTEGER predefined Sets the Select by Box SBM_INSIDE Mode SBM_CROSS SELECTFILLMODE get INTEGER predefined Returns current Select SFM_BOUNDARY Fill mode SFM_SOLID SELECTFILLMODE put INTEGER predefined Sets the Select Fil
214. TEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets X shift for array rows Default value is 0 orthogonal array ydeltarow value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets Y shift for array rows Default value is the Y size of the cell instance Y size of a cell bounding box after instance transformation was applied The latter is specified by scale rotate and horizontal or vertical named arguments and switches xdeltacol value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets X shift for array columns Default value is the X size of the cell instance X size of cell bounding box after instance transformation was applied the latter is specified by scale rotate and horizontal or vertical named arguments and switches ydeltacol value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets Y shift for array columns Default value is 0 orthogonal array See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches and INSTANCE command for description of the other named arguments and switches 17 52 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Note If the number of rows or columns is not equal to 1 then only orthogonal rotation angles are allowed Return Value An object represents the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 gt cell activate inverter gt array 0 0 row 2 col 3 ydeltarow 20 xdeltacol 12 Creates the array 2x3 of activated cell inverter Example 2 gt array 40 0 cell nand2 jrow 3
215. UT essa a aaa iaa ot 3 14 11 44 Snap Cursorto Grid stats lo E aa 5 2 Snap GAG en eo tons tat a a a 2 7 11 30 O a Seen renee 9 3 A etc tee cae oslswe tnd ae geumeea dete toem eas 9 3 OEIC a bi ea 8 10 Stretching Modes scSsoscsccseccesesecsac inercia 8 11 Superge a a vedewet aces 2 7 11 31 T Cl cra hs uee saccades nan ceeeaeneceeeeae 2 8 e 11 3 technology Mei a a 2 11 Technology File from Dracula DRC Runset cccccocccccocnnco 11 2 technology file selection coccoconccccococcnnonococonnornnnnnoos 4 4 TONE acre Scie e ea 2 6 TES E EE dit oo 3 10 A e Aa 3 10 Toda A O 3 10 TO DOME sacas 3 10 A Pick ose a A 12 1 TOD Cll aa aid 2 2 WEG COMMON A A NO 3 12 U UNO tensa loas le cl 0 E O 8 9 user defined property atte pasoo 2 6 Index 3 Expert ExpertViews User s Manual User Interface oo cccccecececececcecccececececeeeenenececscavavacaenenenens 3 1 V NWETSIOM COMMOD crac A ed eet cane ates 16 2 Viewing the Layout csm 9 1 MISA Grid tea E 2 7 11 31 W TN 2 4 A A EAEE AEE A 2 4 Wire SClUD acaso 11 24 11 25 AN 9 3 A siini Ee E E Netecunaalectteoens 2 1 X A A A Ms 17 120 KiESCMPUSUDIMGNW tt 12 6 XI COMMANA line cececcecececececcecccccecececacceeunenecececsuaeaenenes 3 5 ESS O EAE N E E E sadatacweieedabatalinadecas 17 1 A a T T 17 1 Z Zero WINE td d 5 13 POO AEE PT ac en E AE A A AEN EAT A AEE AE EAE EATS 9 8 ZOOM Out of WINKOW ccecececccccccececececaceeceneceretenenaees 9 9 ZO
216. Use non default path for layout viewer editor temporary data If this option is not checked then EXPERT S temporary files are created in the EXPERT subdirectory of the Windows temporary directory usually specified by the TMP or TEMP environment variable Simucad 11 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e Use non default path for DRC temporary data and Use non default path for netlist extractor temporary data e If one of these options is checked then the lt project_name gt DRC resp lt project_name gt EXTR working folder will be created in the indicated directory e If this option is not checked or the corresponding directory is not specified then lt project_name gt DRC resp lt project_name gt EXTR working folder will be created in the directory containing the loaded lt project_name gt eld file e If this non default path points to a non existing directory or with insufficient access rights then DRC extractor will abort with the corresponding error message e This option is useful when the project is stored on a remote disk and DRC would run slowly and if the lt project_name gt DRC resp lt project_name gt EXTR is on the remote disk in a slow or busy network The following fields define correspondent setting files different from the default ones e Color library file e Stipple library file e Plotting style file e Bindkey file e Configuration file 11 3 6 Ruler Page The Ruler page allo
217. Viewer requests specific information to be presented in the technology of the opened project The Setup gt Editor Viewer then Cross Sectional Viewer item pops up the Cross Sectional Viewer setup panel for adding and editing the parameters of the simulation of fabrication steps See Section 12 5 2 Cross Sectional Viewer Setup for detailed information about the process setup Besides the setup panel the Cross Sectional Viewer consists in two separate dock windows for its current use e The Cross Sections dock window is the command window see Figure 12 21 It can be used first to generate new cross sections on the active cell of the layout and secondly to activate existing cross sections of the layout This window can be displayed thanks to the menu View gt Dock Windows gt Cross Sections 12 20 Simucad Tools e The Cross Sectional View window is the output window see Figure 12 22 It is the window where cross sections are displayed and where all the viewing commands of the Cross Sectional Viewer can be activated This window can be displayed thanks to the menu View Dock Windows gt Cross Sectional View These two separate windows are closely linked to each other in the current use of the Cross Sectional Viewer they can be displayed in one shot thanks to the menu Tools gt Cross Sectional Viewer Moreover they can be docked to the GUI for an easier use see Figure 12 23 Cross Sections Generation To generate a Cross Sectional
218. X 0 0 4 5 Creates the box in the active layer Example 2 PDOs Oi U ar 5 Creates the box in the active layer with attributes xpos 4 ypos 5 xsize 4 ysize 5 If the size values are negative then box attributes are recalculated as xpos xpos abs xsize xpos xpos abs xsize xsize abs xsize ysize abs ysize Example 3 gt box 0 0 4 5 layer CONT Creates the box in the layer CONT Example 4 Shox 0 0 4 5 fereate select sreselect gt select mode deselect Sbox 0000 4 5 select The first command creates the box in the active layer selects it and deselects the other objects The second command sets the default select mode as deselect The third command searches for the box and deselects it according to default select mode Example 5 gt box 0 0 4 5 delete Searches for the object with specified attributes in the active layer and then deletes one Example 6 Soo UOU LES property named 10 nameZ Z20 gt Lex t 4 40 0 textil Uns Den De False TA BOETOMEERT enue Sa Oyo TECI Der De dr Us ELLIS TA TOPLEF Dy false Creates the object with specified properties and attached texts in the active layer Example 7 gt old_box box 0 0 4 5 create get gt box 0 0 5 6 replace old_box The first command creates a box and then returns one type LAYOUTOBJECT The second command replaces this object with the new one ELLIPSE Creates selects or delet
219. _PROPERTY_BOOLEAN if you want to process the property value as integer float and boolean value correspondingly Example 1 gt property attr_create_cs path width 0 57 gt prop_crit search_criterion_create O0A_ PROPERTY _FLOAT property LE Creates a search criterion to find objects with properties path width less than or equal to 0 5 Example 2 gt property attr_create_ecs width gt prop_crit search_criterion_create AO_PROPERTY property EQ Creates a search criterion to find objects with properties width with any values of given property Table 17 17 Primitive Layout Object Attributes SEARCH_ANY_SHAPE Example 3 gt layer_crit search_criterion_create OA_LAYER Met1 NE Creates a search criterion to find primitives that are not in layer Met1 17 112 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Table 17 18 Box Ellipse Layout Object Attributes OA SIZEY Box size Y Ellipse radius Y Example 4 gt px_crit search_criterion_create OA_POSX 0 5 GT Creates a search criterion to find objects with horizontal position greater than 0 5 from the cell origin Example 5 gt py_crit search_criterion_create OA_POSY 0 5 GT Creates a search criterion to find objects with a vertical position greater than 0 5 from the cell origin Example 5 gt 93 crit search criterion create OA SIZEX 0 5 GT Creates a search criterion to find boxes with horizontal size
220. a wire is also a special kind of region Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy verification Libraries Setup Window Help d Undo Gtrl z Redo Ctrl Create Object rh Cell Instance Array Ea Modify Object Shift M O Box s ILE b Stretch Shift 5 1 Region s k gt Be Add Jog Points TP Wire W fs E Remove All Jog Points O Circle O rF b d Set Origin O Elipse A O GRI Position Cursor Ctrl F S Donut lei Numeric Input Tab A Text T Angle Mode t y Rolled Region Figure 5 1 Object Creation Menu and Tool Bar EXPERT gives the following possibilities Starting object drawing from the menu in the Design Bar through a keyboard shortcut bindkey or from the xi command line Creating primitive objects i e other than instances arrays in the active layer To make a layer active either click at the color strip of the layer in the Layer Bar or select it in the Numeric Input panel Placing restrictions on the geometry is created e by snapping the cursor to grid e by selecting admissible angles e by selecting a direction snap mode The newly created shapes will modify the existing ones if you set the hole or merge mode of a primitive object creation Creating objects by using point and click mouse actions precision numeric input of geometric parameters or a combination of both Creating objects by running DRC scripts xi scripts or by commands from the xi command line Note You can use the
221. ad Write Setup data Parameters APPLICON_SETUP amp sAPPLICONSetup Reference to an Applicon Setup structure Return None Example APPLICON_SETUP sAPPLICONSetup SAPPLICONSetup someField some data EXpApiSetSetupApplicon sAPPLICONSetup 18 2 19 Get Applicon Setup Data void ExpApiGetSetupApplicon APPLICON_SETUP amp sAPPLICONSetup Purpose Gets EXPERT S Applicon Setup data Parameters APPLICON_SETUP amp sAPPLICONSetup Reference to an Applicon Setup structure Return None Example APPLICON_SETUP sAPPLICONSetup EXpApiGetSetupApplicon sAPPLICONSetup 18 3 Project 18 3 1 Is Project Open BOOL ExpApilsProjectOpen Purpose Checks if there is a project open in EXPERT 18 8 Simucad Expert API Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if a project is open FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApilsProjectOpen 18 3 2 New Project BOOL ExpApiProjectNew LPCTSTR szProjName LPCTSTR szTechName NULL Purpose Creates a new Project with the specified Technology or empty technology if Technology name is omitted or NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szProjName Project name LPCTSTR szTechName Technology file name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiProjectNew New_Project eld New_Technology tcn 18 3 3 Load Project BOOL ExpApiProjectLoad LPCTSTR szProjName LPCTSTR szOutputProjectName NULL LPCTSTR szTechName NUL
222. ading from LEF or DEF FORMAL ova kate bin eae ne eee AA eee Teas 4 7 4 3 7 Gell Selection Dialog sesers curar radares ene ra rails 4 7 310 POSSIDIS PODIO cocoa Daach wands terrassa 4 9 4 4 Saving Compressing the Project 0ooococcoccccoco eee ee ee eee ee eeeeeaeeneaes 4 10 O caesar tne tsa tae eae ere a ee een A eee eee 4 10 AS A O hated cana a 9s cede BS hae ae ee Aes Bans dete banc tne eons 4 10 DNs DOAN PNG ad tice cde ad tn ei byte bd eee kre Bae Ate ae aoe on a nis fete Bh oe Bones Wee Aes 4 11 AAA COMDICSS A cosas haces che a a acre aneass Sensard Laces cheesy seeoses 4 11 452 ClOSING Project sees sen Micaela bis on Sew wok Stree 4 11 4 67 CCS NeW usas iros s 4 12 AGN POSSE POEMS 8 ic 8s oie a ec ate cote ets a ae tg eS la in ech ares te tan 4 12 AT Opening COS ia iaa 4 13 A A A Bee eo A ae ee nee ee eee 4 13 a Ose tits O et een US a et eG he ee Ol eee ih a A a 4 13 Ae NAG OR cage eae 4 13 ATA POSSIDIS PODOM GS acted i digas ias 4 13 4 8 tCreating a New Cell from Selected Objects ccc cece eect e eens eee eee eens 4 14 4 9 COPYING O Call aia ada 4 15 4 9 1 Cell Name Collision Resolving Dialog 0 ccc ccc eee tne e eee n nen nenes 4 16 4 10 FDGIGTIING CONS aa AA A a 4 17 411 Renaming Ol COS acia as ir aerate peomtee teresa mee etea sens 4 18 4 12 IMpOring Cels to Proein 4 18 AAS TEXPONMO CONS orador UA ede ome de ane ene oie 4 19 4 13 1 Cell Export to GDSII Files wits xed inal NE dh eel Sed
223. all objects that undergo scaling The scaling parameter panel provides some natural choices The nine radio buttons in a 3x3 pattern show possible choices with respect to the bounding box of the object For example in Figure 12 37 the scaling center is set to be the upper left corner of the bounding box of the object s Hint Itis possible to set the scaling center by mouse If you set a temporary reference point default shortcut Q and leave the scaling center at 0 0 then scaling will be performed with respect to the temporary reference point 12 34 Simucad Tools 12 13 2 tSnap Selected or Whole Layout to Grid The set of selected objects or the whole layout of the edited cell respectively is snapped to the specified grid according to parameters shown in Figure 12 38 o ap selected to Grid anap to Options C Minimal grid f To closest node Snap grid O North East Outwards C Custom grid C Inwards Reference Point um Grid Shift nm x E 0 ve Y fp Save squares Grid Step nm a Y ho ai Save 45 Y foo Gut spikes coca _ Figure 12 38 Parameters of Snapping to Grid The first group of parameters specifies the grid If the option Custom grid is selected then it is possible to specify both grid steps in X and Y direction and the displacement shift of the grid with respect to the origin The second group of parameters specifies how the coordination of the off grid point
224. ame Name of the layer Return HOBJECT Handle to created circle EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateCircle 0 0 100 Layer_ 1 18 7 16 Ellipse HOBJECT ExpApiCreateEllipse double dSx double dSy double dEx LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL LECTS LR double dEy HOBJECT ExpApiCreateEllipse RCEAPoint ptCenter RCEAPoint ptRadius LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateEllipse RCEARect rtRect LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates an Ellipse in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Simucad 18 33 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Parameters double dSx double dSy The center of Ellipse RCEAPoint ptCenter The center of Ellipse double dEx double dEy Radius 1 Radius 2 RCEAPoint ptRadius Radius 1 Radius 2 RCEARect rtRect The center of Ellipse Radius 1 Radius 2 LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer Return HOBJECT Handle to created ellipse EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiCreateEllipse 0 0 100 200 Layer_ 1 18 7 17 Donut HOBJECT ExpApiCreateDonut double dSx double dSy double dRadl double dRad2 LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateDonut RCEAPoint ptCenter double dRadl double dRad2 LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates a Donut in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters double dSx double dSy The center of Donut
225. ameters P cells are stored in the EXPERT database in the form of Xi code Using P cells in the EXPERT environment is extremely easy When you place instance of a P cell the Numeric Input form shows the list of parameters for a specified P cell see Figure 5 9 You can accept defaults or change value of any parameter Using P cells gives a considerable reduction of disk space in the case of multiple instancing of a cell with different parameter values EXPERT creates a temporary regular cell for each set of parameter values and does not store it in the database There are two types of P cells in the EXPERT design environment graphical and textual ones Graphical P cell is a simple P cell generated automatically by specifying expressions for the predefined rules such as stretch repetition layer and so forth Their functionality is limited by supported parameters Graphical P cell is suitable for quick and intuitive creation of simple parameterized cells Textual P cell is a complex P cell with structures described using powerful features of LISA Xi scripting language that are impossible to generate automatically with a graphical P cell Create or modify basic geometry Define or replace definition of the primitives and instances control textual P cell blocks and P cell rules of the graphical P cell Compile graphical P cell Run Xi script with P cell definition P cell generator Place P cell instances Figure 13 1 P cell Design
226. amples 2 gt project save Current project is saved in the corresponding disk file 17 4 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell PROJECT CLOSE Closes the active project Format PROJECT CLOSE nosave Switches nosave The nosave switch means closing a project without checking for unsaved changes in the active project Example gt pro ject close nosave TECHNOLOGY SAVE Saves technology on disk in a file of the type tcen Format TECHNOLOGY SAVE tech_pathname Arguments tech_name type STRING The name of technology file with or without the extension tcn Example gt save technology d GDSII tsmc018_r3 Current technology date is saved to the disk file d GDSII tsmc018_r3 17 3 2 Project Procedures GET_LIBRARY_CELL_COUNT Returns the number of cells in the specified library Syntax num GET _ LIBRARY CELL COUNT lib_logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library or empty string if the cell list for the current project is requested see example Return Value num type INTEGER Number of cells in the specified library Example gt num get_library_cell_count GET_LIBRARY_CELL_LIST Gets the sequence of cell names in the specified library Simucad 17 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Syntax cells GET_LIBRARY_CELL LIST lib _logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library
227. ance of the cell in the new library scale value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The scale value Sets the new scale factor for an instance object if specified rotation value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of a rotation angle in degree Sets the new rotation angle for an instance object if specified mirror value predefined constants Sets the specified mirroring type for an instance object Mirroring type is defined by the following predefined constants MT_NONE MT_HORIZONTAL MI_VERTICAL conn connectivityl type SEQUENCE Updates connectivity for the specified instances See description of INSTANCE command on page 17 49 for named argument conn col value type INTEGER Sets new number of columns in a cell instance array if specified row value type INTEGER Sets new number of rows in a cell instance array if specified xcol value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets new X shift for a cell instance array columns if specified ycol value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets new Y shift for a cell instance array columns if specified xrow value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets new X shift for a cell instance array rows if specified yrow value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets new Y shift for a cell instance array rows if specified See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments CONVERT POLYGON Converts a
228. ancel i Figure 5 12 Circle Ellipse Numeric Input Numeric Input Mode Properties for circle ellipse are the same as for box The circle ellipse is converted into a polygon according to the current settings from Setup gt Technology gt General gt Shapes in the following cases e When selecting Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Editing gt Convert ellipses circles to polygons immediately e When created in hole or merge mode e When selecting Tools gt Merge Selected e During export into GDSII format e During internal conversion for DRC operations Otherwise in the normal mode of object creation a circle ellipse is drawn and stored in the database as a special object Hint While in the Ellipse mode if you want to create a circle rather than an arbitrary ellipse by mouse use the diagonal direction snap mode Edit Direction Snap Mode Diagonal during ellipse creation Simucad 5 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 5 4 4 Donut Circular Ring Shape Creation A donut circular ring is a polygon approximating the region between two concentric circles The precision of approximation is specified in Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Shapes Figure 5 13 Donut Execution The first mouse click defines the center The second and the third mouse clicks define both radii of the circular donut As in other shapes donuts can also be created in hole and merge modes During creation the message line shows donut radii
229. and the interior The operation does not affect instances of cells and it does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard All of merged objects including wires rectangles and circles are converted to polygons Resize Selected Resize value um A f Oversize Co Undersize J Save grid ok Cancel Figure 12 34 Resize Selected 12 32 Simucad Tools Execution If the Tools gt Resize Selected command is invoked the dialog shown in Figure 12 34 appears allowing you to input the following parameters Type of operation defines shifting direction Oversize expands the covered areas or Undersize shrinks the covered areas Value defines the shift size it is a positive number expressed in current measurement units shown in the Metric bar Save grid acts for region vertices whose adjacent sizes have slopes in 45 degree multiples It states that resizing must be performed in such a way that the region vertices will remain on grid if they were on grid and the resize value is a multiple of the grid size possibly unknown Run button starts the Resize operation Cancel closes the Resize dialog without modification of layout A reasonable Value parameter is required otherwise Oversize and Undersize operation scan cause unexpected results Figure 12 35 demonstrates several transformations of layout objects made using the OverSize operation Note the hole inside the first object is decreased the hole in
230. ands It can be accessed by both menus Setup gt DRC Run and Verification gt DRC gt DRC run setup The following options of this panel are found in the Built in DRC Command Setup dialog panel see Section 11 10 Built in DRC Command Setup Check tolerance Report at most lt xxx gt errors per check Write log file Saving layout and DRC script Scope two radio buttons are added regards to the Scope options of the Built in DRC Command Setup dialog e the Cellwise button will set the DRC processing to all shapes of all subcells of the current cell until the lower level of hierarchy It means that the cross errors that is to say errors caused by shapes of different cells will not be detected by a DRC script if this button is checked e The Whole hierarchy button will make the DRC script be processed on the whole contents of the current cell as if it was a flat layout So the Whole hierarchy button must be set in the case when an exhaustive check of the geometry of the current cell is needed DRC script run setup Browse for script irom project directoay Check tolerance a 7 Fini oo oOo me beep upon DAC mun finish Repot at mast 110000 estors per check OI Mirimize when running Scope site log file Selected shapes iv Append Cell own shapes O Bret O Cellwise Whole hiearchy Script progress bar C Command progress bar Hierarchical enor repost Saving layout and DAL senpt O Save before run O Prompt to
231. ap width field overlaps the images printed on adjacent pages If the overlapped width is a non zero then page registration marks in the shape of crosses will be plotted These marks are used for exact continuation of the plot across the adjacent pages Title overlaps drawing This option saves some space if the top part of the drawing is unimportant Layer Legend and Cell Info options are to put the corresponding information on the plot 15 4 2 Plotting Style Sheet You may reassign plotting style as a whole by loading a style file or layer by layer The layers for which you may reassign plotting style are shown in the list in the center of the Plotting Style sheet of the Page Setup dialog If you do not see any layers in the layer list click the Merge button This puts the layers of the current technology into the layer list for plotting style setup 15 6 Simucad Plotting Page Setup x Page Layout Plotting Style Miscellaneous Layer on Screen Layer on Plotting Registration Mark Size a pis coor M Style of Objects eee Backward Diagonal TIO E wireframe pe E ee Backward Diagonal Stipple E 223 Backward Diagonal i Border f pis Backward Diagonal AARAA Color a Ovord Layer List Manipulation Menge Delete Add File Operations UAT emp sty Load Unload Save E Figure 15 4 Page Setup Plotting Style Sheet File Operations You may load and save plotting
232. are added Format NET ADD DELETE net_name lobject Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT Layout object to be added to the net optional argument 17 86 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell NET_SUB_OBJ Subtracts the layout object from the specified net in the current cell If the object is not specified then selected objects are subtracted Format NET _SUB_DELETE net_name lobject Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT Layout object to be subtracted the net optional argument NET ADD CONN Connects the instance cell net to the net of the current cell Format NET ADD CONN net name instance name instance cell net name Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net instance_name type STRING Name of the instance object instance_cell_net_name type STRING Name of the net in the instance cell NET SUB_CONN Disconnects the instance cell net from the net of the current cell Format NET_SUB_CONN net_name instance_name instance_cell_net_name Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net instance_name type STRING Name of the instance object instance_cell_net_name type STRING Name of the net in the instance cell 17 17 Verification Commands DRC COMMAND Execute DRC command in the current cell Format Simucad 17 87 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual DRC COMMAND command xp
233. are saved e lt FName gt dsf is the converted script e lt FName gt log is the conversion log e lt FName gt tcn is the corresponding technology file Note The technology file imported from an INPUT_LAYER block contains minimal data necessary to run the converted DRC script Import from Foreign Technology Display Netlist Definition Files Selecting Setup gt Technology gt Import Technology open the Technology Import dialog This dialog has two pages Display and Connectivity Devices 11 2 Simucad Setup The Display page is used to create EXPERT S technology color library and stipple library files from the Cadence technology file dump and display the resource file To obtain the Cadence technology file dump select Virtuoso gt Technology File gt Dump with the setting All classes set and type in the ASCII technology file name The Display resource file has a drf extension Sometimes display resources can be defined in the ASCII technology file itself The Connectivity Devices page is used to generate device and netlist definitions for HIPEX NET netlist extractor from Dracula decks containing this information At this page the input file is Dracula s deck e The Layer Definitions field identifies EXPERT technology file which contains converted statements of derived layers e The Connectivity field identifies EXPERT s technology file which contains converted connectivity definitions e The Devices
234. art The Delete button is to delete highlighted subpart To add a new subpart first of all select subpart type Enclosure Path Offset Path or Subrectangle Then set up specifics for the selected subpart type parameters and click Add A new subpart will be added to the current Pwire and the subpart list will be updated Click OK to apply changes to the subparts or Cancel to discard any changes 5 18 Simucad Creating Layout Objects You can create following types of Pwire subparts e Enclosure Wire is a wire with vertices coincided with vertices of the master wire Width is calculated by the formula width master wire width 2 enclosure where enclosure is defined in the Enclosure field of the Subparts dialog You can choose the layer from the drop down list Layer for the Enclosure path In addition you can specify how the start ing and ending points of the Enclosure path are located in respect to starting and ending points of the master wire Use the Begin Offset and End Offset fields from Subparts dialog to change the beginning and ending points of the Enclosure path Starting and ending edges of the enclosure path are extended by specified values if the offset values are positive and truncated if negative e Offset Wire is a wire with edges parallel to the master wire edges and shift defined by the Offset and Justification parameters see Table 1 The width of the offset wire is defined by the Width parameter Use the drop
235. ary DLL for Windows OS or shared library for Unix OS The built library is easily integrated with EXPERT S main application To build a plug in library a C compiler required 18 1 2 Structure of Objects in Expert API Library HPROJECT is a layout project that contains an HTECHNOLOGY object and collections of HCELL objects HTECHNOLOGY is a technology object that contains a collection of HTLAYER objects HCELL is a layout cell that contains collections of HLAYER and or HCLAYER objects HLAYER is a geometric layer that contains geometric HOBJECT objects box polygon wire ellipse text and links to HTLAYER object HCLAYER is a cell instance layer that contains instance HOBJECT objects instance array of instances skew instance 18 1 3 Access to Functions from Plug in Library For access to user functions you have to create static objects of CCustomMenu class The constructor of CCustomMenu contains top level menu position the name of the menu and an array of CUSTOMENU_ITEM structures CUSTOMENU_ITEM contains a description of each menu item It could be linked to other arrays of CUSTOMENU_ITEM structures or to callback function Example 74 definition of user Functions Void BualdshorePatnh gt void DeleteShortPath void PrepareNetForShortSearch void ChangeShortDrawMode void SetupGraph void SetupPath Simucad 18 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual E Qefinitions OF menu structure
236. atch layers into GDSII files Allows to save scratch layers as ordinary layers in GDSII files This option is duplicated in Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Output option Write scratch layers 11 3 2 Viewing Page 11 6 Viewing Hide objects smaller than 4 pisels Draw layout for almost U hierarchy levels Dala reduction i i i i Accuracy a Speed Hide texts Color mixing on screen C Hide text mign Show cell instance names O Sac cell views C Show cell instance aigins Decimals displayed 4 Zoom factor 1 2 l Active layer filing mode 5 No change 0 Wrelrame Sold Vertical step 100 C Slippe Background color Black w Display ciclestellpses as expected polygons Preselection shows cicles elipses as polygons Do mot select objects with whole boundary outside wandov Draw active layer over all layers C Cross inside selection mode depends on ditection of drawing Scrolling Steps in piels Honzortal step 100 Figure 11 2 Viewing Page Hide objects less than N pixels This option improves screen drawing speed by not drawing very small objects If zero N 0 value is set for pixels all objects are drawn on the screen Draw layout for at most N hierarchy levels When a fixed depth viewing mode is on say with depth D then only hierarchy levels D D 1 D N are drawn If N 0 then all levels from 0 to D are drawn Hide texts Text will not be drawn and will be nonselectable Hi
237. ated Layers Layer specification within the technology file allows definitions of derived layers A derived layer is obtained from other layers input layers by execution of a given sequence of logical selection and resizing operations The following example shows layer description if the layer is the derived one Layer Name P Gate Wire MiterAngle 20 Width 1 Joint EXTEND End EXTEND Se ppLe ts MUOso ka Bitmap 0000000008000000080000000200000001000100FFOOFFOOFFOOFFOOFFO Color 02550500 ColorName green GDS2Num 17 GDS2DataType OU Derive And Layerl Poly Layer2 P Act LayerR P Gate 17 scope CELLWISE UseGridParams FALSE scratchLayer FALSE FdgeLayer FALSE 11 28 Simucad Setup 11 4 4 Connectivity Setup Connectivity information is specified in the technology file as sets of layers connected by a connecting layer or a via layer The format is given by examples connect layerl vialayer connect layerl lay2 lay3 vialayer connect layeri lay2a lava ess vlialayer The connectivity list may consist of any number of layer names Layer names must be in quote marks The last layer is the connecting layer for the remaining ones connect are obligatory elements of syntax You may use any separators between layer names for readability Connectivity Setup Dialog This dialog is invoked by Setup gt Technology gt Layer Connectio
238. ath and input vertices e enclwires enclwires type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of the enclosure wire type if different from the enclosure wires defined in the Pwire template See Section PWIRE_TEMPLATFE for a description of the format for enclosure wire subparts e offsetwires offsetwires type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of the offset wire type if different from the offset wires defined in the Pwire template See cSection PWIRE_TEMPLATFE for a description of the format for offset wire subparts e boxes boxes type SEQUENCE Specifies Pwire subparts of box type if different from boxes defined in the Pwire template See Section PWIRE_TEMPLATE for a description of the format for box subparts Ferecate modriy delete splat e create default means the new Pwire object will be created e modify means the Pwire object will be modified The named argument name should be present e delete means the Pwire object will be deleted The named argument name should be present e split means the Pwire object will be split into regular wire and box objects The named argument name should be present Example Sowire 4 l0 10 10 20 205207 2Z0 HL0s 87 10 ftemplace GuardRing_2 Creates a new Pwire object in the current cell supposing the Pwire template GuardRing_2 exists in the technology Simucad 17 59 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual PWIRE_TEM
239. ation some systems do not accept such values or interpret them incorrectly If the Normalize arrays option is ON then such arrays are written into a GDSII file in a modified way The actual geometry remains unchanged but the first array element is considered to be in the lower left corner of the whole array and deltas become positive A similar modification is applied to arrays with transformation rotation and or mirroring The first array element is considered to be in the corner into which the lower left corner of the array is moved if the transformation is applied to the array considered as solid body An alternative option is Positive Array Deltas If this option is checked then the deltas for the arrays written into a GDSII file are always positive irrespective of array transformation Writing External Library Cells into GDSIl File If a project has instances of cells from other libraries the following two options define how their external cells and their instances will be written into a GDSII file Write library cells With this option on cells from external libraries referenced in the current project will be written in the output GDSII file as well Add library prefix to cell names With this option on cells from external libraries will be renamed by prefixing it with the logical library name For example cell nand2 from library gates will be renamed gates_nand2 Its instances will be changed in the same way This op
240. ation Task Manager e As arule the Warning message box appears on the screen see Figure 3 13 after the exit actions listed above Figure 3 13 EXPERT Warning Box Pressing the Cancel button returns you to the EXPERT session If you press NO the program exits and the latest changes are lost If you press YES EXPERT will save all changes made during the program session and exits Simucad 3 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 3 4 Customization 3 3 3 3 14 4 1 Shortcuts To assign keyboard shortcuts also known as hotkeys bindkeys to any menu commands select Setup Shortcuts Setups For more information about keyboard shortcuts see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom Color Setups 4 2 Color Setup To change colors for various elements of EXPERT S interface such as selected objects grid and selection boxes select Setup Setups and go in the section Application and Colors For more information about colors see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom Color Setups 4 3 Custom Pop up Menu The custom menu will pop up if the middle mouse button inside the layout window is clicked It contains a user definable list of commands The most frequently used commands can be put into the custom menu by selecting Setup Setups and selecting Custom Menus from the Application section There are three different cust
241. ations Simucad 12 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual IM Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help Al Script Hla Point Line Distance Netlist Driven Layout Remove All Rulers E Cut By Line Remove Selected Rulers Cut By Line Modes Graduate Rulers Clip Gut Clip In Attach Texts Preserve Rulers Show Rulers Coordinate Axes Detach Texts Origin Polwgonize Merge Selected Resize Selected Scale Selected Scale Whole Layout Snap Selected To Grid Snap Whole Layout To Grid Merge Two Wires Pick Lawyer Derived Layers Scratch Layers W Void Tool Previous Tool Mouse Move Mouse Click Figure 12 1 Tools Menu 12 2 Measurement This section describes Tools gt Measure submenu also shown in Figure 12 1 and some other elements of EXPERT s interface related to measurements on the layout 12 2 1 Metric Bar The Metric bar Figure 12 2 consists in two parts Cursor Position left part and Measurement Units right part Metric Bar Ed 0 0200 0 0200 Y Figure 12 2 Metric Bar Position Locator has two fields X coordinate and Y coordinate To define the coordinates of a point in the layout place the cursor at the required point and read Cursor Position settings Cursor position may be absolute or relative If no temporary reference point is activated the positions are taken with respect to cell origin and called absolute If a tempo
242. attribute to be compared with a specified value See predefined constants below value type STRING INT FLOAT DOUBLE ATTRIBUTE Specifies the value of layout object attribute for comparison with condition An operator used for comparing the value of a layout object attribute and the value of a search parameter Use predefined constants e EQ Equal to e NE Not equal to e GT Greater than e GE Greater than or equal to e LT Less than e LE Less than or equal to e SUBSTR Substring Simucad 17 111 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e FILTER Filter Return Value criterion type SEARCHCRITERION Search criterion objects for using in the SEARCH procedure see Section 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures Table 17 16 Layout Object Attributes SEARCH_ANY_OBJECT OA PROPERTY ATTRIBUTE User defined property OA PROPERTY_INT ATTRIBUTE User defined property as integer OA PROPERTY _FLOAT ATTRIBUTE User defined property as float OA PROPERTY_BOOLEAN ATTRIBUTE User defined property as boolean User defined properties in the search criteria are described by ATTRIBUTE type values where names of property correspond to names of attribute and the value of property correspond the value of attribute Case sensitive ATTRIBUTE should be used because EXPERT property name is case sensitive Property value is stored in the EXPERT data base as a string Use the predefined constants OA_PROPERTY_INT OA_PROPERY_FLOAT and OA
243. awn filled This setting is duplicated in the View gt Filling gt Active Layer Mode submenu e Background Color General setup allows you to select either black or white background color In the case of a white background all auxiliary markers will be inverted from white to black e Display circles ellipses as expected polygons and Preselection shows circles ellipses as polygons These options allow you to see the polygonal shape of a circle ellipse according to the settings in this setup panel rather than the perfect circle ellipse e Do not select objects with whole boundary outside window This option acts if Select gt Selection Modes gt By Solid mode is active It excludes from selection by box or by click the objects whose boundaries are completely outside the part of the layout visible on the screen e Draw active layer over all layers If it is turned on all shapes in active layer are drawn over the shapes in other layers e Cross inside selection mode depends on direction of drawing If the selection frame is drawn from left to right the Cross or Inside mode set by Select gt Selection Modes submenu is Simucad 11 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual used Contrary if the selection frame is drawn from right to left the mode is opposite to the option set by Select Selection Modes submenu 11 3 3 Editing Page 11 8 Editing Design Bar Button lines 4 Auto Direction C Selection tool as default Select newest obj
244. ayer names Layer names must be in quotation marks The last layer is the connecting layer for the remaining ones connect are obligatory elements of syntax You may use any separators between layer names for readability e Comment is the part of a line between double slashes and the end of line in the technology file Parameters not defined by a technology file are set to default values with the following exception If layer color or stipple pattern or both are not defined they are generated automatically e The order of layer definitions defines the order of their visibility on the screen with one exception the active layer is always drawn over all other layers because new objects are created in the active layer and you want to be able to see them The technology file is in text format so you can easily edit them by any ASCII text editor Names of variables are case insensitive String values are case sensitive There are a number of other optional sections of the technology file supporting other Simucad CAD applications They are described in detail in the corresponding manuals The example below shows a typical definition of technology parameters Begin sample ten file Version 100 Techno lLlogyLD Sample Echa Title Vers 1 10 Bdited by DKK for UM 1 2 99 Unit um units of measurement is one of the follows NM MCM UM MM CM M MIL INCH LAMBDA nm m
245. ayer nwell limits lt 10 ID WELL_1_1 Comment 1 1 Width spacing lt 10 lambda outdistance options c layer pwell limits lt 9 ID WELL_1_2 Conment 1 2 Well at different potential spacing lt 9 lambda outdistance options c layer nwell limits lt 9 ID WELL_1_2 Conment 1 2 Well at different potential spacing lt 9 lambda of Figure 14 2 DRC Script Panel W select Operation Relation Options inside F Not FP Connection outside Node Label List hole MT Limits touch a Nodes o encloze overlap Input Layers vertex Layer contact area Layer contact y connect pa pa pa pa a a pa a a pa label Generate Cancel Figure 14 3 DRC Command Input Form Example Select command 14 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual DRC Reporting DRC results can be reported in three ways e as temporary output layers directly on the layout e as layers in error cells written into an external GDSII file e as GUARDIAN DRC error database which is the most flexible and convenient way When errors are reported as regions to output layers you may switch visibility of all irrelevant layers off and examine those input layers that are overlaid by output layers When errors are reported into the Error Data Base you can inspect errors consecutively using the commands from Verification DRC Errors submenu or from the DRC
246. be ignored Switches hierarchy If the switch hierarchy is specified then cells will be copied with hierarchy Example cells ado CB BAER OUS2SCEBASE adore PLYCNR Oat7PhyYCNR SCAR a Gott O Qos VCC EBCF mapsourcetells aset create cs aCells size PMapoourcceCce lis 0S7sCBBASE CBBASE 0S Pma Poor cece lis 05 2 PLYCNR PLYCONR05 gt mMapoourcece lls OS ES VER VERLOS gt cell copy aCells sourcemap mapSourceCells hierarchy Simucad 17 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual CELL DELETE Deletes the set of cells given by the list of cell names from the project If a cell is a read only cell or its parent library is read only then it is not deleted Format CELL DELETE cell name Arguments cell_name type SEQUENCE cell_name cell_namel cell_namen is a sequence of cells represented by names to be deleted Switches J hierarchy If the switch hierarchy is specified then all cells which have become top cells as a result of delete operation and will be deleted Example gt cell delete inverteri nand2 Cells invert and nand2 is deleted from current project CELL DISCARD Discards all changes in the specified cell Format CELL DISCARD cell_name Arguments cell_name type STRING Specifies the name of the cell whose changes will be discarded If the parameter is not set the cur
247. by the button next to the file name field Note The user must have a license for LISA to replay activity logs e Keep old activity logs If this option is off then when a next project is loaded the old activity log is overwritten If this option is on then the old activity logs are renamed using consecutive numbers and stored Under this option you must periodically delete old logs manually e Write command line input If this option is on all the LISA commands typed in the command line will be added to the journal file je Online Log If this option is checked and Tools gt XI Script gt Log window opens the messages which are generated by xi commands are displayed in the Log window Message Filters for EXPERT Log Online panel allows you to choose the output you want to display You can include or exclude from output the following items e Prefix means EXPERT output codes W gt for warnings E gt for errors O gt for LISA DISPLAY command e Location filter is for adding XI script line number to the output where errors warnings or DISPLAY commands are appeared e Errors filter is to show hide error messages e Warnings filter is to show hide warning messages e Commands filter is to show hide XI commands e Display filter is to show the result of DISPLAY command The Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Data Safety dialog is shown in Figure 11 4 11 3 5 Directories and Files Page e
248. ccompanied by small boxes that are either empty the corresponding choice mode is switched OFF or it contains the check sign choice mode is switched ON Unlike the radio buttons you can check several boxes turned ON simultaneously e Tree control is used to display data with a tree like hierarchy Most often this hierarchy is based on the hierarchy of cells in the project This type of control is used in Project Tree cell hierarchy navigator in DRC error loading panel and so forth 3 2 Command Execution Command execution can be started in various ways e from the main menu e from the custom menu invoked by middle mouse button click in layout area e from toolbars e from the command line e by shortcuts e by execution of DRC scripts je by execution of xi scripts either from the xi command line or from the xi script panel Execution of many commands is accompanied by progress indicators on the message line 3 12 Simucad User Interface 3 2 1 Breaking Execution Many commands that take too long to execute e g project loading can be interrupted by hitting the Esc key Following this action EXPERT will then run the default tool which is either the void tool or the selection tool depending on the Selection tool as default setting in the Setup Editor Viewer Editing form In addition if a redrawing operation takes tool long the Redraw icon changes to a Red Stop Sign icon which allows you to stop the redra
249. cedures GET_EDITED_LAYER_NAME Returns the name of the current layer Syntax layer name GET ED TED LAYER NAME Return Value Name of the current layer type STRING Example gt layerl get_edited_layer_name LAYER_EXISTS Returns TRUE if the layer with specified name exists and FALSE if otherwise Syntax ret LAYER_EXISTS layer_name Parameter layer_name type STRING Name of the layer Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the layer with specified name exists and FALSE otherwise Example gt display layer_exists Met1 GET_LAYER_LIST Gets the sequence of layer names for the current project Syntax layers GET LAYER LIST Return Value 17 36 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell layers type SEQUENCE Sequence of layer names Example gt layers get_layer_list GET_LAYER_OBJECT_COUNT Returns the number of objects in the specified cell and layer Syntax obj_num GET_LAYER_OBJECT_COUNT cell_name layer_name Parameters cell name type STRING Full name of a cell layer_name type STRING Name of the layer Return Value obj_num type INTEGER Number of objects in the specified cell and layer Example gt nobjs get_layer_object_count mux4 inverter Met1 GET_GDSII_NUMBER Returns GDSII number of the specified layer Syntax GDSII_num GET_GDSII_NUMBER layer_name Parameter layer name type STRING Name of the layer Return Value GDSII_num t
250. cee teen tee ete ete etnies 18 38 191 275 GCULINKGG TeX s n0nds0 wer cardos vaio dr ee lebwetoandsaedeaeehes 18 38 18 7 28 Add User Defined Property revistan Peete Reo bh tala ye ved Pugh 18 39 18 7 29 Get User Defined Properly 00 ccc ccc cee cece eect eet eee e eee eeeenanes 18 39 18 7 30 Modify User Defined Property 0 ccc cect cece teen eee e eee etn neeenees 18 39 18 7 31 Delete User Defined Property 0 ccc cece cc cee eet eee n eee en een nnnes 18 40 18 7 32 Delete All User Defined Properties 0ooooocoooocoonnoncn eee ee eens 18 40 10 0 MOOIS iru earn o ene ne een E ren nea earn o auaeroe ute sees Shave ane aeapmeseyaarns 18 41 18 8 1 METIO WGS psss dedica aio aaa Raed he aie EPS he S Ae Baas 18 41 18 8 2 Merge Selected circio osteria iraro a A hoe e Reads AS E 18 41 18 8 9 Resize Selected win oid ias LONE i 18 41 18 34 Explode Selected srine ii gi ele r 18 42 199 5 Explode Alrae ae aa i a Huet web eee A eh det 18 42 19 96 Faten eaea a aaa a aaa raaa dak aa eS ane 18 42 ar CUVE esae a a A a E E nee ee ee 18 43 18 8 8 Set Cut by Line Mode avatar aiii 18 43 18 8 9 Set Cut by Line Wire Mode 224 i4 ec esage ieee eid Geese eae era Rata ieas ka ee 18 44 18 8 10 Get Cut by Line Mode currar der eo to LAE a ee ae iras 18 44 18 E WING ie oven eae nuded AS O 18 44 10 9 GU OUDS od ata da sais 18 45 10 9 1 Orecale COD rose arias 18 45 18 92 Remake ORI uri a PR teu ea 18 45 18 9 3 DOSTOMal0l ardil
251. ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 Geometrical DRC System cccsccesecceceseeeeeesssereeseaeees 14 2 CAVITY one sean ins Se alas a a i at ae 3 11 gravity MOOG votado iros 11 13 A ee ere nee eS eee ee nae 2 7 11 30 Guardian LPE Netlist Extractor c ccccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 14 7 Guardian Netlist Comparator cccssssseccesseeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeees 14 9 H Hierarchy Depth of Display ooooccocccooccnncoconcncnononncnnnnnos 9 13 Fer rc Operations een lbs 10 1 Index 2 1S E A scans venoveretentaeedeesuesa A A E tet 5 3 Hole modes iria a 5 4 A a adeseenaeeaaacensict aden eene see 3 14 11 44 Importing GellS cuts dad 4 18 AM ad eel es 11 12 instance ofa COM lt lt 2 6 STANCE AO estic acerlo ratio aiii 5 6 INSTANCE POSION source 2 1 2 3 ISTAV ICING no 2 1 Integrated Layout Verification Tools cccccoononcccnncccnno oo 14 1 NTOUCION cad 1 1 MAA e AEE aed Aa 7 8 J JONU SUNG a reta 2 4 K Keyboard Shortcut Definition File ooocoocooooccnccoooo 2 12 L leE E ve une shaecemnas tere came cneaapnauenstoce etek P P E EAT 2 6 AV Ol cok taste le tt ease ang A ce cctaues ee 2 4 Ve A A 3 6 11 16 AAA trey reteset errr iret re 11 17 11 18 Ei rir OTT 11 15 11 19 FAY OUT WINGOW mensasi a A 3 2 LayoutObject Type aoticio da 17 106 Ee TA AEN AE EENE TEE AIA A EA A EA E 9 12 Sarli 2 2 A a E 2 1 IDEM ota ia dl shes dateoe shes speeeactys 2 1 ISUSCISCUON cercado 7 5 loading P
252. cell Examples 1 gt cell open gates inverter Opens cell inverter from the library gates Examples 2 gt cell open inverter Opens cell view for the cell inverter from the current project CELL NEW Creates a new cell in the project Format CELL NEW cell_name pcell true false textual graphical parnames pname_1 pname_n params pvalue_1 pvalue_n params pvalue_1 pvalue_n 17 12 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell pattern_cell cell_name Type String Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the new cell Named Arguments pcell true false type BOOLEAN If specified or assigned a value of true the new P cell will be added to the current cell library textual Jgraphicaq e textual means than textual P cell will be created e graphical is for graphical P cell creation The argument cluster is not used for regular cells parnames pname_l pname_n Sets the P cell parameter names params pvalue_l pvalue_n Sets the P cell parameter values pattern_cell cell_name Type String Specifies the cell by its name The specified cell is used for creating initial content of the new P cell P cell Xi script in the case of textual P cell and copy of specified cell geometry when graphical P cell is created Example 1 gt cell new inverterl Creates cell inverter1 and adds it to the c
253. cell or it s library was not found The user name column shows the name of the user who checked out the cell The check out date column shows date time of the check out operation Check out the selected cells from shared libraries You must check out a cell from a shared library if you want to edit it Only one user may check out a particular cell at any given time The remaining users will see the previous version of the cell until 1t is checked in Cancel check out for the selected cells These cells remain unchanged in their libraries and other users may check them out Check in the selected cells Cells are saved automatically before checking in These cells are changed in their libraries and other users may check them out Open Opens all selected cells 16 5 3 Edited Cell Version Management For the edited cell either opened directly or through Edit in Place EIP commands the following version control commands are available directly from the menu and from the Version Control Bar Libraries gt Edited Cell5Check Out Libraries gt Edited Cell Check In Libraries gt Edited Cell gt Cancel Check Out This simplifies the cell version management since you do not need to open any additional panels You may even assign shortcut keys for these commands 16 8 Simucad Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell 17 1 Scripting Language LISA for Expert Commands EXPERT Interface XI shell is the extension of LISA LAN
254. ch Edge n m ER mn CA o M A O Beal Node O O ee Pach O O Nivel Oo O Ence A P hetl Text Oo O E Pela Test O B eal Met2_Tex A O ER NSD O ei 2 Pate n mp va PS5D O O EE Subsirale E L 4 Buk oH A a ua ial ee gt ah as LA Hame A CIF Blame C6 Sample GDS 1 Parameters Cetived Layer Preview Mode Lapes Number 16 Fl sersict eave Wireframe Datatype lo ad O Stippie Crete alee nee Individual Grid Figure 11 5 Layer Setup Dialog and Layer Bar The visibility of a layer is toggled by clicking on its name strip e The AV all visible button makes all layers visible e The NV none visible button makes all layers except the active one invisible The selectability of a layer is toggled by clicking on its name strip while holding down the Ctrl button You may toggle selectability of all layers in the same way as it is done for the visibility of layers 11 16 Simucad Setup e If you click the AS all selectable button all layers become selectable e Ifyou click the NS none selectable button all layers but the active one become nonselectable Layers with geometry actually present in the cell are check marked and their names are printed in boldface Layer Bar Context Menu If you right click the mouse button in the Layer bar on the name strip or color strip a contextual menu will be displayed see Figure 11 6 This menu allows you to set several chara
255. checked each time you load a new project you are prompted to save a copy under a new name If you respond by clicking Cancel no backup copy will be saved This option has the sub option As bak file If the latter one is checked instead of asking the name for the backup file EXPERT creates the backup file with a bak extension If the file name already exists a new one will be created Note The first way of backing up is convenient if you want to have a backup copy on another disk or even across the network especially when the project file is large or if you want to have several backup generations The bak method might be convenient for smaller projects Note EXPERT S file selectors normally will not see files with a bak extension since EXPERT recognizes database file format by file extension only Therefore to open a backup project you must rename the required bak file into a e 1 d file using the Windows file browser e Autosave interval min If you enter a positive value for this parameter the current project is 11 10 autosaved each time the autosave time interval in minutes is elapsed if there were changes in the project during this period If you enter zero no autosave will be performed Prompt before saving box activation allows you to be prompted to skip automatic save Simucad Setup e Recovery info interval min The Recovery info is a record of all operations executed It is written for recov
256. checking are specified by an ordinary DRC script of EXPERT GUARDIAN DRC The violations are not saved in the DRC error database but are reported by blinking markers on the screen If the cursor is placed at a blinking error marker a short description of the error appears as a small pop up label Note The checks are performed when object creation or modification is completed This prevents cluttering by false errors during the uncompleted operation Note Real time DRC takes an advantage of multi CPU machines Editing operations are performed using one processor while Real time DRC loads another one As a result you will not feel a slowdown when editing with DRC on guard Note On a single CPU machine Real time DRC runs in background mode with user definable priority for processor resources Set Up and Control Real time DRC script and priority of Real time DRC with respect to editing operations can be set up using Real time DRC Setup To invoke Real time DRC Setup dialog open the DRC script panel load a DRC script and run Setup Real time DRC Setup menu command in the DRC Script panel Verification gt DRC gt Real time DRC submenu provides the following commands to control Real time DRC e Enable menu item allows you to enable disable execution of Real time DRC with parameters previously set in the Real time DRC Setup Once Real time DRC is set up you may enable disable it any number of times By default Real time DRC is disabled Di
257. cking the Set Current button Colors can be chosen by selecting the desired item in the color category list and then opening the select color panel see Section Layer Color Setup 11 9 4 Custom Menu If you click the right mouse button inside the layout window the custom menu appears It contains a user definable list of commands You may put the most frequently used commands into the custom menu Three different custom menus can be defined depending of the tool which is active when you click the right mouse button Custom menus can be configured through the panel Setup gt Hotkeys Menus gt Custom Menus see Figure 11 19 11 46 Simucad Custom Menus Setup Category Custom m nu Separator Fla Select we Commandz Custom menu tems Kir Sechan Rename Open Move Chee Duplicate ae ft Dente Down Save Menge Tao Mines Save Ad Del Save Celk Cut Iranit Pasle Defaul Export Create Col Place Re oad Esplode Selected Inte Comores Ignore Insisnces Igne Primitives Page Setup Prt Previgns Piri Aecert Files Clea al Recent Files Figure 11 19 Custom Menus Panel This dialog allows you to do the following operations Add an Item to Custom Menus In the Category drop down list e Select the EXPERT menu where you want to take the item to be added in a custom menu Note Any function of any existing menu of EXPERT can be added to custom menus e Selec
258. click the first input point 11 12 Simucad Setup 11 3 8 Gravity Page If the gravity mode is on the cursor snaps to elements that are characteristic of the object s shape such as vertices midpoints and centers The setup panel Gravity provides the following controls e Gravity mode On Turn the gravity on and off e Attracting elements Select snappable shape elements wire centerline wire end wire joint midpoint edge vertex box ellipse center etc e Gravity distance Set the radius within which the gravity acts Gravity radius may be set in the following measurement units e pixels e microns e nanometers Gravity acts only for the following tools e void tool e create box region wire ellipse donut e move duplicate modify e paste e ruler e create instance Gravity acts only for editing tools and rulers These tools are e create objects box region wire ellipse donut instance etc e move duplicate e modify stretch e cut by line clip in out e paste e ruler Simucad 11 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 4 Technology Setup 11 4 1 General Page This panel is used to choose the general settings of the technology it belongs to the Technology setup panels group of the Preferences window It can also be displayed directly from the menu Setup Technology General Technology ID This is a user defined string that identifies a particular technology file When a new
259. cm um mm cm m mil inch lambda Lambda UnitValue 1 0 size of user unit is actual if Unit LAMBDA lambda Lambda Grid 100 step of the minimal grid is 100 nanometers Layer Name Metal2 name of the layer ColorName Blue color name from library Color 0 0 255 color of the layer may be also defined directly as R G B value BLUE is a predefined RGB constant Stipple STIPPLE1 name of stipple pattern GDS2Number 22 layer s GDS2 number GDS2DataType 11 GDS2 datatype CIFName CM2 t layer ts Cif name string im Quotation Marks Wire default wire parameters for this layer Width 10 J width in current units Joint EXTEND E Style OF wite Joints TS one OF EXTEND FILL ROUND MITER End FLUSH style of wire ends is one of EXTEND FLUSH ROUND Derive AND Layerl Lrl Layer2 Lr2 LayerR amp Lr3 OR Layerl amp Lr3 Layer2 Lr4 LayerR Layer27 Any DRC commands Scope PRIMITIVES for derivation command is one of PRIMITIVES JJ CHEWS FLAT 2 10 Simucad Basic Notions t Ff end of Metal2 Layer Name Layer28 COLO 90 90 0 Stipple STIPPLEZ GDS2Number 23 GDS2DataType 12 CIFName TEMP Wire Width 10 Joint MITER End EXTEND bo Jf end Or Layer 9 connect Metal2 Poly CM2P Note Names in upper case represent names of predefined variables e BLUE is a shortcut for RGB color value e NM MCM
260. completely inside the selection box changes their selection state e If Select gt Selection Modes gt Cross mode is on the objects that fit completely inside the selection box or intersect its boundary changes their selection state The Select Reselect Deselect modes act as those described above Figure 7 2 demonstrates the difference between the Inside and Cross selection modes The first figure shows the initial state of objects and the selection box The second figure shows the selection made in Inside mode The third figure shows the selection made in Cross mode Figure 7 2 Selection modes inside and cross 7 4 Simucad Selecting Layout Objects 7 4 List Selection It is possible to obtain the list of objects which are under the cursor or hit the selection box You can preview them one by one and select the required ones Check Select Preselect from list option and start selecting by left mouse click or by box in either way by two clicks or by drag You will see the list of all objects that may be selected in Preselected Objects List dialog as shown in Figure 7 3 This list has two columns e Type shows object type box wire cell instance etc e Layer Cell shows the name of the corresponding layer or cell If you click once or twice at the title of a column the lines will be sorted by this column If you pick some objects in the Object column then the corresponding objects in the layout will be highlighted T
261. coordinates for the new cell origin Example OCIO 2 30 PASTE LAYER Inserts the set of objects from EXPERT S clipboard into the layer Format PASTE LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name The name of a layer optional parameter if it is absent objects are pasted into the active layer Example Simucad 17 67 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual gt paste layer Metall PASTE SELECTION Inserts the set of objects from the EXPERT S clipboard into the edited cell Format PASTE SELECTION x y Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y is a position where the objects will be inserted Example gt paste selection 10 5 ROTATE SELECTION Rotates the set of selected objects of the edited cell Format ROTATE SELECTION x y angle duplicate Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y is the center of rotation angle type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The angle of rotation Optional 90 is default Switches duplicate If specified then new objects will be created as a copy of selected ones and rotated according to specified parameters Example gt rotate selection 0 0 180 REDO Performs one step of redo Format REDO STRETCH DESELECT_ALL Deleselects segments and objects selected for stretch operation Format STRETCH DESELECT_ALL Arguments None 17 68 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell STR
262. ct BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteUserProperty hObject propertyl17 18 40 pl a a Simucad Expert API 18 8 Tools 18 8 1 Merge Wires HOBJECT ExpApiMergeWires HOBJECT hObjectl BOOL bFirstl HOBJECT hObject2 BOOL bFirst2 LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Merges two separate wires into one wire in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters HOBJECT hObjecti The first wire BOOL bFirst1 TRUE if the first vertex of the first wire connects to the second wire FALSE if the last vertex does HOBJECT hOb ject2 The second wire BOOL bFirst2 TRUE if the first vertex of the second wire connects to the first wire FALSE if the last vertex does LPCTSTR szCellName Name of the cell Return HOBJECT Resultant wire Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiMergeWires hObjectl TRUE hObject2 TRUE Cell_1 18 8 2 Merge Selected BOOL ExpApiMergeSelected Purpose Produces the union of shape objects selected in the active cell Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiMergeSelected 18 8 3 Resize Selected BOOL ExpApiResizeSelected double dSize BOOL bUnderSize FALSE BOOL bGrid FALSE BOOL bMerge FALSE Purpose Resizes the selected shape objects by the given value Parameters double dSize Defines the shape shift size in current measurement units Simucad 18 41 Expert and ExpertViews User s
263. ct Format CELL IMPORT project_pathname cell_name sourcemap source_cell_names targetmap target_cell_names nolibcells libcells true false Arguments project_pathname type STRING The path name of a project disk file containing the required cells cell_name type SEQUENCE cell_name cell_namel cell_namen is a sequence of cells represented by names imported from specified project to the current project If this parameter is not set then all cells from file project_pathname will be imported Named Arguments Note Cell names without a library logical name should be used in all named arguments for this command sourcemap source_cell_names type ATTRIBUTE_SET Case sensitive EXPERT s cell names are case sensitive attribute sets are used to set new names for imported cells It is needed for example to resolve collision between names of copied cells and cells existing in the current project The name of each attribute in the source_cell_names is the name of an imported cell type STRING The attribute value is the name of this cell in the current project type STRING targetmap target_cell_names type ATTRIBUTE_SET Case sensitive EXPERT s cell names are case sensitive attribute sets are used to set new names for the cells in the current project It is needed for example to resolve collision between names of copied cells and cells existing in the current project The name of eac
264. ct SPLIT ARRAY Lobiect spIcor solrow CLIP X Y X Ya cell_name out in Scripts XI Shell 17 65 17 65 17 65 17 66 17 66 17 67 17 67 17 67 17 68 17 68 17 68 17 70 17 70 17 71 17 72 17 73 17 73 17 73 17 74 17 74 17 75 17 76 17 76 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters Command Procedure Return type CUT LINE Ve Sop Vow Re Va 17 77 DETACH TEXT MERGE SELECTION 17 77 17 77 RESIZE SELECTION value over under save 17 78 grid SNAP GRID snap minimal visual 17 79 custom LAYOUT WIRING source tar OBJECT get rarea layer width s pace WC_REMOVE_CONTACTS A 17 82 REPLACE INSTANCES cell name new cell name cell 17 83 project instance colnum rownum 17 85 save saveas explode 17 85 reject newname exit command 17 87 17 81 17 126 Simucad Return type SEQUENCE STRING SEQUENCE SEQUENCE BOOLEAN SEQUENCE BOOLEAN STRING STRING STRING POINT POINT RECI BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN BOOLEAN Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters Command Procedure LIBRARY TYPE lib_pathname exclusive rea 17 91 donkey 17 92 LIBRARY REPOSITORY GET repository_name lib_name path name of GET_RE
265. cted Instances by Instances of TargetCell inside the specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szTargetCellName Target cell name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiReplaceSelectedInstances Target_Cell BOOL bResult ExpApiReplaceSelectedinstances Target_Cell Cell_1 18 12 13 Replace Instances in Cell BOOL ExpApiReplaceInstancesInCell LPCTSTR szSourceCellName LPCTSTR szTargetCellName LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Replaces Instances of SourceCell by Instances of TargetCell inside the specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szSourceCellName Source cell name LPCTSTR szTargetCellName Target cell name LPCTSTR szCellName Work cell name 18 56 Simucad Expert API Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiReplacelInstancesInCell Source_Cell Target_Cell BOOL bResult ExpApiReplacelnstancesIinCell Source Cell Target_Cell Cell Lts 18 12 14 Replace Instances in Project BOOL ExpApiReplacelnstancesInProject LPCTSTR szSourceCellName LPCTSTR szTargetCellName Purpose Replaces Instances of SourceCell by Instances of TargetCell in the whole project Parameters LPCTSTR szSourceCellName Source cell name LPCTSTR szTargetCellName Target cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE othe
266. cteristics of layers e visibility and selectability of the pointed layer e visibility and selectability of all layers e layer setup dialog e layer connection setup e layers reordering modes alphabetical technological or GDSIl number order Note custom reordering can be done in layer wire setup dialog described in Section Layer Setup Dialog e individual layer filling wireframe solid stipple This filling mode will override the common default filling mode e color and stipple of the pointed layer these two items can be accessed from Layer wire setup and will be described in Section Layer Setup Dialog Layer Bar Ib Active ta ly visbla tast Well w Selectable Hete Al Wieble EERE lt F roe Home Visible F Metz Alselectable NAc More Selectable a P Ac Sa A wie Layer Wire Setup EE Eror Layer Conmection L Metl Poly Ordering gt a MGa Color ire Ti Wiretrame Pra Stiprs Solid P SD Stipple Substrate PEE Bulk ia BulkCormect uE i G Figure 11 6 Layer Bar Contextual Menu Layer Plans Filling Selectivity Visibility and Inclusion At the Layer bar the Plan command button is used to set the following properties for each layer e Individual filling settings e Visible Invisible in the layout e Selectable nonselectable 1 e elements of this layer may be selectable or not Note that invisible layers are non selectable as well e Incl
267. current_cell net name where each element of the sequence above consist of two parts linked by set of characters gt instance_cell_net_name is the external net name of the instanced cell and current_cell_net_name is the net name of the current cell correspondingly 17 50 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Switches Anorizontel vertices horizontal specifies mirror over the y axis vertical specifies mirror over the x axis See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for a description of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 gt instance 0 0 rotate 90 vertical Creates the instance of current activated cell Example 2 gt instance 0 0 rotate 45 cell muxl Creates the instance of the cell mux1 with nonorthogonal rotation angle Example 3 gt select all gt select mode reselect gt instance 0 0 rotate 90 cell nand2 create select Creates the instance of the cell nand2 and selects it Other objects are deselected according to default selection mode reselect Example 4 gt instance 0 0 horizontal cell inverter delete Searches for the object with specified attributes and deletes it Example 5 gt instance 0 U cell mux gt propertye nanet exe cell nend2 gt text d 110 0 Textil Dio Dep
268. d be routed through multiple layers The procedure is the same e Make sure contacts are properly defined in the technology e Select a layer where the route will start e Checkmark the Multipath checkbox e Start routing bus e Select different layers in the Layer combobox e Continue routing the switching layers as needed 5 24 Simucad Chapter 6 Modifying Layout Objects 6 1 Objects To modify the shape of a single existing object select Edit gt Modify Object The Modify Object option changes an object by direct manipulations with components of its shape such as vertices and sides There are however some more complicated shape modifying commands as described in other chapters e Stretch e Jog Points e Cut by Line e Clip out Clip In e Merge Selected e Resize Selected e Scaling e Snapping to grid e Merge mode of Create Object commands e Hole mode of Create Object commands e Running xi scripts e Execution of DRC commands and running DRC scripts In addition you can change the object s attributes and user defined properties in the Property Bar or in the Numeric Input panel Finally many common editing operations that do not change the shape of primitive objects are described in Chapter 8 Other Edit Submenu Operations 6 2 General The Modify tool can change only selected objects This way you know exactly what object you are modifying If several objects lie close to each other or even overlap
269. d output property map files for user defined properties This file consists of several lines Each line has three items e GDSII PROPATTR value positive integer e type unused now e property name It must be in quotes if it contains special characters or spaces Examples 2 6 9 all node_name Simucad Basic Notions 12 all Instance name Warning lf a GDSTT file has some properties absent in the default epm file they are added with some default names Example Oo ll Properuy 9 Selecting the menu command Edit gt Properties allows you to add change attributes and user defined properties of selected objects Selecting the menu command Edit gt Search allows you to search objects in the layout according to different search criteria 2 4 Editor Accessories EXPERT offers various precision editing features visualization control tools and setups for configuring system parameters e Design measurement unit can be chosen either from a predefined list or it can be assigned by you See Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 Editor Viewer Form for details e Grid is produced by intersections of uniformly spaced horizontal and vertical lines on a design plane Grid provides navigation in a coordinate system for placing objects There are several kinds of grids used in EXPERT e Minimal Grid defines the resolution allowable under the given technology It is sometimes called spot size Normally all geom
270. de text origin Text origin marks will not be drawn Sync cell views If this setting is checked then all views of the same cell are redrawn simultaneously if any of them is edited Color mixing on screen Acts on the drawing in solid mode and stipple mode on the screen It means that when drawing on the screen in these modes the colors of overlapping pixels for objects from different layers will mix Simucad Setup If the Color mixing option is off e In the stipple mode of display the fill pixels of stipple patterns are visible in the order of layer drawing and pixels of lower layers are visible through holes in stipple patterns of the upper layers e In the solid mode of display the color of areas where shapes are overlapping will be the color of the layer which is the first of all in the current layer order in the layer bar The active layer can be over all layers independently of its place in the layer order if the specific option draw active layer over all layers is active in the panel Drawing is faster in color mixing mode The default setting for Color mixing is on The colors on plot and on screen in stipple mode for heavily overlapped drawings will look the same if you set Color mixing mode in the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Viewing and color mixing in mask mode in the Miscellaneous plotting style setup Note When activating the Color mixing in solid mode some areas of shapes can appear as white when too many laye
271. defined properties 8 14 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 10 Searching Layout Objects The menu command Edit gt Search invokes a panel used to search objects in the layout according to various criteria This panel is shown in Figure 8 14 search Options search Results Object tpe IA 2object s E A u A W Search among visible O Box METALI O Box METAL Search among selected M Searchin area Mode Cross Min Point 62 E 30 Max Point 3 10 40 IY More search criteria E Layer METAL on Figure 8 14 Search Operation The Search dialog has two panels named Search Options and Search Results correspondingly You can change the size of each panel or hide any of them by clicking and dragging the splitter Search Options panel is used to specify search criteria It is possible to search objects according to various criteria Some basic criteria are shown directly on the Search Options panel Object type In addition to primitive object types box wire region ellipse text the following types may be specified which deserve some explanation e Any Shape to search among primitive geometric objects boxes wires ellipses regions e Instance to search among cell instances and instance arrays e Array to search among cell instance arrays only e Any Object to search among all objects mentioned above Search in modes A search may be performed among the current
272. dit in Place Edit in Place menu see Figure 10 1 allows you to select a cell instance at any level of hierarchy for editing while working in the immediate surroundings of this instance in the chip All functions of the Edit In Place menu can be accessed through the Edit In Place toolbar This toolbar can be displayed by clicking the EIP button Note In EXPERTVIEWS the Edit in Place group of commands only allows viewing not editing To make the function of Edit in Place clear the following terms are defined An EIP session is started by the menu commands Hierarchy Edit in Place Enter into Subcell or Hierarchy gt Edit in Place gt Direct Pick and is ended by the menu command Hierarchy gt Edit in Place gt Exit Edit in Place gt Enter into Subcell may need to be clicked several times during the session but until Exit is clicked no new session begins During an EIP session you may enter into a cell instance then enter into an instance that belongs to the first instance and so on going deeper and deeper into the hierarchy The nested chain of instances from the top of the hierarchy to the edited cell instance defined by the last EIP Enter operation is called an EIP Chain 10 3 1 Enter into Subcell Purpose The Edit in Place gt Enter into Subcell command corresponds to the first button on the EIP toolbar It switches the EIP entering mode of editing on Gust as the Select gt By Click Drag command switches on the selection mode o
273. ds File gt Print Preview and File gt Print It can also be called from the Page Setup dialog Printer Setup dialog is used to assign the output device printer name size and orientation of paper sheets as well as other device specific properties These properties are used for previews and plotting operations You will only see the required plotter printer name in this setup if it is properly installed in your system otherwise contact your system administrator for assistance x General Layout Paper Quality Select Printer Add Printer PB22 BROHL1850 on NTSERVER1 GS B1 HPSPS on NTSERWER1 B22 HP46000 on NTSERVERL GaeBz S B1 HP755CM on NTSERYER1 2625 HP4000PS on ntserverl MA Statys Printer not found on server unable to connect Print to file Location l Find Printer Comment Fage Range ie All Humber of copies i f Selection Curent Page O Pages cos Figure 15 1 Printer Setup 15 2 Simucad Plotting 15 3 Print Preview The menu command File gt Print Preview invokes EXPERTS Page Setup dialog followed by the Print Preview window to show the arrangement of the plotted layout on paper sheets Opening preview windows can take long time and may be cancelled by hitting the Esc key Li lx Print Setup 3 y Close acer Bmmo Figure 15 2 Print Preview Simucad 15 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 15 4 Page Setup Dialog This d
274. e Parameters LPCTSTR szTargetCellName Cell name to save contents to LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name to save contents from Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSaveAsCell New_Cell Old Cell 18 5 13 Save Selected As Cell BOOL ExpApiSaveSelectedAsCell LPCTSTR szCellName BOOL bReplace TRUE Purpose Saves selected Objects into a new cell with the specified name Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name BOOL bReplace TRUE if to replace the selected objects by the instance of the new cell Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSaveSelectedAsCell Cell Cliplin BOOL bResult ExpApiSaveSelectedAsCell Cell Clip0ut FALSE 18 5 14 Discard Cell BOOL ExpApiDiscardCell LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Discards recent changes in the specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted 18 18 Simucad Expert API Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Name of the cell to discard changes Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDiscardCell Cell_1 18 5 15 Set Cell Read only Flag BOOL ExpApiSetReadOnlyCell BOOL bReadOnly TRUE LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Sets Read only flag for specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters BOOL bReadOnly TRUE if Read only FALSE if write enabled LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name
275. e middleletfte mida ltecenter middleright bottomleft bottomcenter bottomright justification value The cluster of named arguments modifies the default contacts array justification defined in the contact template The following predefined constants switches can be used CUT_TOPLEFT topleft CJT_TOPCENTER topcenter CIT_TOPRIGHT topright CIT_MIDDLELEFT middleleft CJT_MIDDLECENTER middlecenter CUT_MIDDLERIGHT middleright CIT_BOTTOMLEFT bottomleft COT_BOTTOMCENTER bottomcenter COT_BOTTOMRIGHT bottomright e rows value type INTEGER Specifies the number of rows in the contact array If not present the number of rows is defined by contact e cols value type INTEGER Specifies the number of columns in the contact array If not present the number of columns is defined by contact template e deltarow value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the distance between rows of contacts in the contact array If not present the default value from contact template is used e deltacol value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the distance between columns of contacts in the contact array If not present the default value from contact template is used See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for a description of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used other
276. e A contact template is an EXPERT contact with fixed basic parameters stored in the technology with a unique name A contact is an EXPERT predefined device for connecting two layers and has two sets of parameters basic and user The basic parameters define the physical content of the contact contacted and optional layers contact layer The user parameters contact width length etc can be modified when a contact is placed into a layout The default values for the user parameters are also stored in the technology The contact pattern is depicted in Figure 11 16 Simucad 11 33 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual L Row Delta Figure 11 16 Contact Pattern The following parameters set the contact template Basic parameters Name sets the contact name used when instance of contact is placed Layer 1 and Layer 2 specify two contacted layers Contact Layer specifies layer for contact boxes Layer 1 and 2 Margin sets overlap value for Layer 1 and Layer 2 respectively see Figure 11 15 Opt Layer 1 and 2 specifies optional layers to be used with contact definition Opt Layer 1 and 2 Margin specifies overlap values for corresponding optional layers User parameters Width and Length set the width and length of the contact Rows and Columns set the number of rows and the number of columns in a contact array Row Delta sets the distance between the centers of the contact rows see Figure 11 16 Column Delta sets the distance be
277. e NULL Purpose Cuts objects by Line in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters RCEAPointsArray pLinePoints Vertices of Line LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example CEAPointsArray LinePoints Lin ePoints Add CEAPO1AE 10 00 0007 LinePoints Add CEAPO1nNtE 0 0 0 0 LIinePoines Ada CHAP OLN 0 0 2000 0 joi BOOL bResult ExpApiCutByline LinePoints cell_1 18 8 8 Set Cut by Line Mode BOOL ExpApiSetCutByLineMode int nCutMode Purpose Sets Cut by Line Mode see table Cut by Line Modes CUT_MODE Parameters int nCutMode Cut by Line Mode Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCutByLineMode CM_SELECTED cut only selected objects by line BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCutByLineMode CM_CURRENT cut only objects on active layer Simucad 18 43 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCutByLineMode CM_ALL cut all objects by line 18 8 9 Set Cut by Line Wire Mode BOOL ExpApiSetCutByLineWireMode BOOL bSaveWire Purpose Sets Cut by Line Wire Mode to specified Parameters BOOL bSaveWire Cut by Line Wire Mode TRUE to save wire FALSE otherwise Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCutByLineWireMode TRUE save wire BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCutByLineWireMode FALSE do not sav
278. e e integrated within EXPERT layout editor Complete descriptions of GUARDIAN DRC LPE and LVS can be found in the GUARDIAN LAYOUT VERIFICATION USER S MANUAL Simucad 14 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 14 2 Geometrical DRC System 14 2 1 Basics of Usage in Expert GUARDIAN DRC geometrical DRC system integrated with EXPERT may be used in several ways e Run DRC scripts inline within EXPERT immediately inspect DRC results and perform corrections e Run batch DRC jobs using xi scripts to schedule runs of multiple DRC scripts on multiple layouts e Set Real time DRC to run DRC checks in real time design rule violations are reported immediately while the designer edits the layout e Use interactive DRC operations from the Verification DRC submenu to run simple one command checks and to perform Boolean operations on layers e Run combined xi DRC scripts and perform complicated operations with layout such as area filling and layout comparison Interactive DRC commands may be invoked either from the Verification gt DRC submenu or from the DRC bar DRC scripts in EXPERT can be run from the DRC Script Panel opened by the Verification gt DRC gt Script Panel command or from xi scripts Preparation of DRC scripts is facilitated by the following means e Import command at the DRC script panel which allows you to import DRC decks from foreign formats e Several Script auto generation commands in Insert menu of
279. e 2 You may use wildcard characters in the names of user defined properties as well as in their values when doing search by Edit gt Search command For example by typing both as a name and as a value while selecting filter as search condition type you may find all objects with at least one user defined property When all required search criteria are set click the Search button to perform a search When the search is finished the Search Results panel shows the number and list of found objects If the number of object exceeds 500 then the first line of the object list will be Too many items First 500 of them were listed here Double click here to show all items But be aware that a large amount of lines in the result list may slow down its performance As you click on any line in the list of object the Property Bar will show properties of the object listed in the highlighted line You can modify any object attribute by editing it in the Property Bar see Section 8 9 Inspecting Changing Object Properties If you select more than one found object the common properties of all of them will be shown Use the button Highlight All to inspect and edit the common properties of all found objects The buttons Select highlighted objects and Deselect highlighted objects allows you to select deselect objects corresponding to highlighted lines in the list of found objects shown in the Search Results panel The buttons Select all
280. e Ae 4 20 413 2 Cell EXPO t0 XSCAPE POS asa eh eden Lidar ds roca Dio Dace Bs 4 20 4 14 Saving Discarding Forbidding Cell Changes ccc cece eee eee eee seen eeee eens 4 21 LS etc E E E E UMaine aerator een E E Bee E E T 4 21 ATA SWEA a aiant heia r a ia ai ariii enata 4 21 AMAS Discard Changos ida do io ek 4 21 Adda Read ON Acasa erat Po EEE ct AE a E ees 4 21 AICC INTO MalON se 2d ee eae rae a ew eee are ce 4 21 vi Simucad Table of Contents Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects gaits cicada cdawie ii wis ka wee we kadewan eee 5 1 DI Creating LAVOULS votar a Rin 5 1 9 2 Drawing SOUINGS ig gecesi teenies Sailer a eb aden etna eee cae ea ete ated eee ee 5 2 Scale AAMS DIAN Ai 5 2 5 2 2r A AA 5 2 5 2 9 Direction Snap MOS ciar a lts aa 5 2 o 2t5actin Aaa to to a a ase hate ete e ted ek tet eee 5 3 5 3 Cell Instance Array Creation ci A 5 6 5 3 1 Instance Array Attributes wr sadn dd AAA abi 5 6 5 3 2 Instance of Parameterized G l ico si A A A in 5 8 5 4 Primitive ODIECI Creation tasar ciar aa aia Vid 5 9 541 Polygonal Regiom CIC alisios a ads ada 5 9 5 4 2 Box Region AA IT 5 10 543 Circle Ellips ChedliOn toria A as 5 11 5 4 4 Donut Circular Ring Shape Creation 0 ccc aaaea aaa 5 12 5 4 5 Rolled Region Creation 0 0 ccc eee nee e ete eee eee t nee eeeeenanes 5 12 DAO WING GlCAON Stes A aon es Soe E dk ae Sea oe tee eta 5 13 5 4 7 Rolled Wire Creation x2 ccs bye ears ae ee ee is ed ee ore bad be oe ee
281. e INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE If a value is positive the subpart starts before first edge of master wire if negative after PWA_BEGIN_CORNER_OFFSET Defines the shift for the subpart boxes at the start of each internal edge value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE By default corner offset 0 the boxes are placed in the internal vertices PWA_DISTRIBUTION Defines the distribution of boxes predefined constants BDT_EVEN BDT_MIN PWA_ENCLOSURE Defines width of the enclosure wires PWA_END_OFFSET Defines the offset for subpart objects with respect to the last vertex of the master wire object value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE If the value is positive the subpart ends after the last edge of the master wire if negative before PWA_END_CORNER_OFFSET Defines the shift for the subpart boxes at the end of each internal edge value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE PWA_JUSTIFICATION Controls the offset of subparts predefined constants PWJ_LEFT PWJ_CENTER PWJ_RIGHT PWA_LAYER Defines the subpart layer value type STRING Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e PWA_LENGTH Defines the length of the box in the subpart of type box value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e PWA_OFFSET Defines the separation from the master wire value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Valid for offset wires and boxes e PWA_SPACE Defines the minimum space between boxes for the box subparts value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e PWA_WIDTH Defin
282. e MNL P cell is displayed in Figure 12 12 Xi Editor XiScripti File Edit Find Script Window 1008 E Assa OB BBO RMS B SizeX_met SizeX_def 2 Met_NDiff_offset Met_Poly_dist L_def 2 SizeY_ met W Met_NDiff_offset 2 SizeX_met SizeY_met net D pin Figure 12 12 MNL P cell Script box PosX_ndiff Met_NDiff_offset PosY_ndiff Met_NDiff_offset SizeX_ met SizeY _ met net S pin box PosX_ndiff Met_NDiff_offset StretchMetCont Pos _ndiff Met_NDiff_offset In the script you can see that the text net X and pin were added at the end of the box statement corresponding to the geometry representing the pin and net of the cell The net D for drain and S for source are specified and will be use to establish connectivity Cells For other cells pins and nets can be specified through the property window Assuming you have chosen to create an inverter cell INVX from MNL and MPL P cells using the Open create Popup window shown in Figure 12 8 A Layout window will open to display the INVX inverter cell see Figure 12 13 12 12 Simucad Tools INVX Created As a first step you can realign the inverter as shown in Figure 12 14 Figure 12 13 f i f igned INVX Real Figure 12 14 12 13 Simucad Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual To create the pins for the net Y of the inverter illustrated in Figure 12 14 you can draw a m
283. e different toolbars available are Align Command Design Drawing DRC DRC error inspection Real Time DRC Edit In Place Filling Hierarchy Node Probing Selection Version control NDL and LPE A brief description of some of them is presented below e Command toolbar Figure 3 3 contains a set of buttons for direct access to the most frequently used operations each operation listed below corresponds to the numbered buttons in the figure The contents of this bar may be different for different versions of EXPERT 3 E E d E 12 3 45 6 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Figure 3 3 Command Toolbar 1 File gt New 2 File gt Open 3 File gt Save 4 View Redraw Simucad User Interface 5 View Zoom Zoom to Fit 6 View Zoom Zoom In 7 View gt Zoom gt Zoom Out 8 View Zoom Zoom Into Window 9 Edit gt Undo 10 Edit gt Redo 11 Edit gt Expert Clipboard gt Cut 12 Edit gt Expert Clipboard gt Copy 13 Edit gt Expert Clipboard gt Paste 14 Edit gt Delete 15 Edit gt Rotate 90 16 Edit Mirroring Horizontal Mirroring 17 Edit Mirroring Vertical Mirroring 18 Setup Technology Grid Setup 19 View Toolbars Edit In Place e The Design toolbar Figure 3 4 invokes tools for creating objects instancing of cells and typical selection and modification operations Create text Figure 3 4 Design Toolbar e The Drawing toolbar shows and assigns e Angle restrictions for objects and for cur
284. e eee eee eee eens 14 1 T41 Layout Verification TOONS erneten wa A RO 14 1 14 2 Geometbical DRCG SYSICM a 32 sieseaves sad ria 14 2 14 21 Basis of Usage IN EX OCW acosta ice bie 14 2 14 22 NEArUIMG DRO solo tated Moedhelivecs ias hes ii eevee eae hae 14 5 14 3 Guardian LPE Netlist Extractor oido A wa bate AAA 14 7 14 4 Guardian LVS Netlist Comparator 0 0 00 cee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eens 14 9 14 5 Node Prod ASA 14 10 TA Dal OVEINIGW is A ShSns eeoewe es eee A nares 14 10 o OC AON A oan oath eee Gane Beeler oa tuetn 14 12 14 5 3 Node Probing Submenu cc tava eed tae oe A et A a a 14 13 110 CADE ee a ee eer ee ee ere eee ree 14 14 Chapter 15 LAA stare Ae eae een dene uae anser aruda dneame tind 15 1 151 PIONO Layouts o auaa aa ok sn 15 1 15 2 Primer Setup DIal0d court 15 2 15 3 Pnt Preve W cdi daa AAA A 15 3 19 4 Page Setup Dialog riadas 15 4 xii Simucad Table of Contents 15 4 1 Page Layout Sheet cs Sarid cia che EES pee BR Rea Nel Bh ee eda ca 15 4 15 42 PIONO Ole ONCE ate iro deer des Mehek eae tree sie hatchet a teres a E 15 6 15 4 3 Miscellaneous Sheet 20 anaana naana 15 9 15 05 ed ee ee ee ee ee a ee ere er me res re 15 10 19 07 PANES US eS TI AAA ARO 15 11 Chapter 16 Libraries and Version Control for a Multi User Design Environment oocococccccc eee eee eenaes 16 1 T10 IE OVENIOW nora do doi ee 16 1 110 2 LIDAS 2 o Ari 16 1 t 16 3 Typical Scenarios for Library USAQE 0
285. e initial point is returned Syntax pt_ global POINT_TRANSFORM_GLOBAL pt Parameters pt type POINT Point in the local coordinate system Return Value pt_global type POINT Point in the global coordinate system POINT_TRANSFORM_LOCAL Transforms point to global coordinate system concerning local coordinate system of cell in the edit in place mode If the EIP session is not initiated then initial point is returned Syntax pt_ global POINT_TRANSFORM_GLOBAL pt Parameters pt type POINT Point in the global coordinate system Return Value pe global type POINT Point in the local coordinate system 17 102 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell SPAWN Executes a new program Note This command is obsolete Use the command SH see Chapter 10 General Library in the LISA user s manual Example 1 gt SH notepad Starts WINDOWS S NOTEPAD and waits until program is finished Example 2 gt oH xemacs Starts Unix s xemacs and waits until program is finished Example 3 gt Of start notepad Executes WINDOWS s NOTEPAD concurrently with an EXPERT process Example 4 gt SH xemacs Executes Unix s xemacs concurrently with EXPERT process YES _NO_DLG Yes No dialog box Syntax ret YES _NO_DLG string Parameters string Text string to be displayed in the dialog box Return Value ret type BOOLEAN True if Yes button was selected and
286. e lower left and upper right corners of the minimal bounding box and drawn domain total domain of shapes and texts e total object count in the cell and the list of them e child cells hierarchy statistics This last hierarchy statistics is especially useful when you are at the top cell level as it will give you a view and a count of all cells used in your project Figure 4 11 illustrates the Cell Info window for a given cell Expert version 4 2 4 R build 994 Current time 09 09 05 15 43 54 Local 09709705 20 43 54 GHT Current user michelb Current project N Ezpert Hanual 05t999 eld Cell ADS Created by 06 08 92 16 20 54 Local 06 08 92 21 20 54 GMT Changed by 06 08 92 16 20 54 Local 06 08 92 21 20 54 GMT Shape domain f 6 71 6 jum Size Sum FSum Drawn domain f 6 71 6 9 jum Size Sum bum 118 object s 0 selected 23 bosfes i 0 selected 17 0 IMET1 13 0 6 O IMET 15 0 4 wire 1 U selected 4 0 IMET1 13 0 dd textis 0 selected 14 0 Layerl 9 19 0 z O Layer60 60 0 12 0 Layer6l 61 0 16 0 Layerb2 62 0 dd oinstancefs U selected 20 0 DIFCHR 15 0 PLYCHR 9 0 VCR 3 array 0 selected 0 CBBASE 2 O DIFCHR Child cells hierarchy statistics 4 CBBASE dd DIFCHR lS PLYCHR J VCR Figure 4 11 Cell Info When a cell is loaded from the GDSII file and it contains an invalid date it is set to the current date The information about objects is grouped
287. e object except vertices and name e layer layername type STRING Specifies a layer for the master wire object If not presented a layer from the Pwire template is used if the last one presented current active layer is used otherwise e width value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the the master wire width If not presented the wire width is defined by the Pwire template the default value for the specified layer or active layer is in the specified order e extend flushend roundend Specifies the wire end style If not presented the wire end style is defined by the Pwire template default value for the specified layer or active layer is in the specified order e extjoint filljoint roundjoint miterjoint Specifies the wire joint style If not presented the joint end style is defined by the Pwire template default value for the specified layer or active layer is in the specified order e offset value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the offset of the created master wire from input vertices defined by the vertices argument Default offset 0 e offsetcenter offsetleft offsetright Specifies how to apply offset to the master Pwire e offsetcenter default means offset between centerline of the created path and input vertices e offsetleft means offset between left edge of the created path and input vertices e offsetright means offset between right edge of the created p
288. e of layer to be renamed new_layer_name Type STRING New layer name Example gt rename layer Met Metall Layer Met is renamed to Metall Simucad 17 33 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual HIDE LAYER Sets the specified layer or all layers except the active one to be invisible Format HIDE LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name Type STRING Name of layer to be invisible If name is not specified all layers except active one will be invisible Example 1 gt hide layer Met All objects on layer Met are hidden Example 2 gt hide layer Makes all layers except active one invisible SHOW LAYER Makes the specified layer or all layers visible Format SHOW LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name type STRING Name of layer to set visible If the name is not specified all layers will be visible Example 1 gt show layer Met Layer Met is visible Example 2 gt show layer Makes all layers visible SET_GDSII_NUMBER Sets GDSII number for layer Format SET _GDSII_NUMBER layer _name GDSII_number Arguments layer_name type STRING Specifies name of layer GDSII_number Type INTEGER Specifies new GDSII number for layer Example 17 34 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell gt set_GDSII number Met1 59 Sets GDSII number 59 for the layer Met SET_GDSII_DATATYPE Sets GDSII datatype for the layer Format SET_GDSII_DAT
289. e same as the one for the display of the corresponding layer on the layout This allows you to see clearly if several implantations are overlapping All other materials for deposit oxydation are displayed in solid mode OXIDIZE This step is to simulate local oxidation of silicon e The Mask Material layer corresponds to the chosen material resulting from the oxidation e The parameter Thickness defines total thickness of the field oxide It is assumed that field oxide both recesses into the surface depth T1 0 45 Thickness and grows above the surface T2 Thickness T1 See Figure 12 20 e The Patterned Layer list allows selective oxidation in exactly the same way than the implantation diffusion process step see above It means that the oxidation in patterned layers can be limited in terms of depth by the Thickness Depth parameter e Using additional parameters Undercut and Angle you can simulate bird s beak effect see Figure 12 20 Real mask Undercut Patterned layer Angle iio Figure 12 20 Local Oxidation Parameters Note Each process operation must be associated to a unique layer which will be the Mask Material of the step A layer of the technology cannot be used as Mask Material for several process steps Technology File Syntax As a result of the setup of the process description all the defined data are stored in the technology of the current project These technology data can be exported from
290. e specified by cell_name argument 17 76 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e in is used to perform Clip in operation In addition to Clip out the following actions are performed The part of original cell bounded by specified rectangle is cut through whole hierarchy Example Sodio 0 O0 10 20 ea an 7an Objects bound by a rectangle 0 0 10 20 are replaced by the new cell named cell_in CUT LINE Cuts primitive objects by polyline This command is subject to options set by the command CUT MODE See CUT MODE on page 17 28 for more information Format CUF BINE fiy Yir Xor Vou tay ar NAT Arguments Yie RO Pops Bar Vow KEYDS SEQUENCE The sequence of vertices of a polyline You may substitute any x y pair by variable of POINT type Arguments gt cut mode selected zeae LIne fOr A Selected objects intersected by specified polyline are cut DETACH TEXT Detaches all attached texts from selected objects Format DETACH TEXT Example gt detach text MERGE SELECTION Merges performs union of the selected objects in the edited cell Format MERGE SELECTION Example gt merge selection POLYGONIZE Converts wires and ellipses to polygonal regions Format POLYGONIZE selected wire ellipse Switches selected wire ellipse Cluster of switches defines scope of objects to be converted to polygons selected is a default switch Simucad 17 77
291. e the whole layout and the zoom out function is disabled 3 You see the cell together with some of its pieces duplicated Simucad 4 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The internal database unit is too small You can change its value through the menu command Setup gt Editor Viewer gt General This value must be changed before loading from a foreign format GDSII CIF Applicon or OASIS or after loading from an ELD or SLD file 4 8 Creating a New Cell from Selected Objects Purpose Creates a new cell from the set of selected layout objects It is similar to selecting Hierarchy Create Cell in Place command Execution Select either Cell5 Create or Select Save Selected gt As Cell menu items The Create new cell from selection box will appear with the following controls New Cell Name You must enter a name for the new cell into this field Initially this field contains a proposed default name e g Newce111 It will be used if some other name is not entered Cell List This is the list of all cell names existing in the project You can re use these names to create new ones as follows Click on a name from this list It appears in the New cell name field where you can edit it Cancel Pressing this button abandons the opening of the new cell OK Pressing this button accepts the selected cell name to finish the operation If you press OK there are two possible outcomes 1 A message box Cell cellname al
292. e wire 18 8 10 Get Cut by Line Mode void ExpApiGetCutByLineMode int nCutMode BOOL bSaveWire Purpose Retrieves Cut by Line Mode and Wire Mode see table Cut by Line Modes CUT_MODE Parameters int nCutMode Retrieved Cut by Line Mode BOOL bSaveWire Retrieved Cut by Line Wire Mode Return None Example int nCutMode BOOL bSaveWire ExpApiGetCutByLineMode amp nCutMode amp bSaveWilre 18 8 11 Wiring HOBJECT ExpApiRunwiring RCEAPOIUNE ptPointi REEAPOINt pLPOINtZ REEAReCt rtArea double dWidth 0 double dSpace 0 LPCTSTR szLayerlName NULL Purpose To create the shortest wire possible to connect two points Parameters RCEAPoint ptPointl First point RCEAPoint ptPoint2 Second point RCEARect rtArea Routing area If omitted it will be defined automatically double dWidth Wire width If omitted the width from the layer definition will be used 18 44 Simucad Expert API double dSpace Spacing between wire and obstacles If omitted zero spacing will be used LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of Layer If omitted the active layer will be used Return HOBJECT Resultant wire Example HOBUEGT Wire ExpApiRunWirang CRAPOTRE 0 0 0 0 y CRAPBOTAE 100 0 LOOVUST 18 9 Groups 18 9 1 Create Group BOOL ExpApiGroupsCreate Purpose Creates a group from selected objects Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult E
293. ead write CIF files for projects Project gt Load and Project Save As and cells Cell gt Export Cell Import You may set various options for CIF export import from the Setup gt CIF Input Output dialog for input and output separately on the corresponding pages of the dialog window CIF File Extensions This field in the Input group inputs the list of possible extensions of CIF files in the following format CLE Lay a List of tile specifications separated by semicolon or This list is used in the Project gt Load and Cell gt Import dialogs to filter the file list in the File Browser Only one extension may be specified for output Conversion Log You may write all events during cif file conversion into a log file To do this you must check the option Write log file and specify a file extension for the log file For example if you select the extension rep the messages during conversion of the file gs341 cif will be written into the file qs341 cif rep in the same directory Simucad 11 41 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 7 Applicon I O Setup EXPERT may read write Applicon files for projects Project gt Load and Project Save As and cells Cell gt 5Export Cell gt Impor t Various options may be set for the export import of Applicon files from the Setup Applicon Input Output dialog for input and output separately on the corresponding pages of the dialog window
294. ecause usually the height of the screen is less than its width The Width field defines the horizontal dimension of the plotted image The height of the image will be computed automatically to provide the same scaling along both axes The Height field defines the vertical dimension of the plotted image The width of the image will be computed automatically to provide the same scaling along both axes The Sealing field defines the magnification of the plotted image A sample reading in this dialog is Scaling 50 nm per 1 mm on paper The On chip field selects the unit of measurement and the size in the actual chip layout The On drawing field selects the unit of measurement and the size in the drawing In this way you may specify both direct and inverse scaling The location of the plotted image on the drawing media page can be defined by layout margins The Left Bottom Right and Top fields defines the margins near the corresponding page borders Margin size 1s expressed in units selectable in the Units field Images drawn on consecutive pages may be overlapped by the size defined in Overlap width field With this goal check in the appropriate box the Title overlaps drawing box controls page space for the title If it is not checked the title and layout are drawn in separate spaces Data units can be expressed in nm um mcm mil mm cm inch m and user units Lambdas Media units can be expressed in mm cm inch m and pages
295. ecified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted The ExpApiGetFirstObject call is required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Layer name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle of the next Object or EA_INVALID_OBJECT Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetNextObject Layer_1 Cell_1 Simucad 18 31 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 7 12 Get First Cell Instance Array Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetFirstiInstObject LPCTSTR szInstName NULL LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets first Instance array of the cell with name szInstName or of any cell if szInstName is NULL or omitted in the specified cell or current cell if szCel 1Name is NULL or omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szInstName Instance name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HOBJECT hObject Handle to the first instance of Object Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetFirstInstObject Instance_1 Cell_1 18 7 13 Get Next Cell Instance Array Object HOBJECT ExpApiGetNextInstObject LPCTSTR szInstName NULL LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets next Instance array of the cell with name szInstName or of any cell if szInstName is NULL or omitted in the specified cell or current cell if szCel1Name is NULL or omitted ExpApiGetFirstiInstObject call is required before calling this function Parameters LPCTSTR szInstName Instance name LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Retu
296. ects Create ness projects vith default new cell Always accept changes in the edited cell upon exit from EIF Right mouse button changes selection bool to move Allow Lehape mode input for regions and wares Flipiotate ange selected instance anray wilh respect bo ite ongir Last mouse click does not add a point to wine region Corwest circles ellipses to polpgons immediately Forked creation of sel intersecting shapes Forbid creation ol norm orlhogenal arrays Subo un Starts scrip D exanples expert scripts etarbuptinit xis C End script Pokgonalfontfile C Silveco IbSExpert 4 0 3 Fix86 nt palgfont gds a Figure 11 3 Editing Page Design bar In this field you can specify the number of button lines of the design bar and the orientation of the bar due to the Auto Direction box With the Auto Direction box checked the orientation of the Design toolbar will change depending where it is docked Without Auto Direction the toolbar orientation will not change in any case It is the number of lines which will force the orientation e g define 16 lines if you want the Design bar to always be vertical with only one column Selection tool as default If this option is on the Ese key will switch you from other tools to Select mode Select newest objects If this option is on each time you create a new object or modify an object it becomes selected Create new projects with default new cell If th
297. editing and inspecting layout objects You can open several cell layout windows Layout windows can be tuned i e magnified shrunk shifted hidden closed either from the Window submenu by the submenu View Dock Windows Windows or by dragging their borders with the mouse For a larger layout only a part of it is usually visible in a window When you need to see other parts of the layout or change magnification to see more either use the options in the View submenu in particular Zoom Zoom In Zoom gt Zoom 0ut Zoom gt Zoom to Fit Pan the corresponding buttons from the Command bar or the scrollers at the bottom and right borders of each layout window The simplest way of switching among layout windows is by clicking the left mouse button on the visible part of the window that you want activated The required window can be chosen by name from the list in the Windows submenu If the dock window Windows is open you can also directly double click on the name of the window you want active You can also press Ctrl F6 or Ctrl Shift F6 to cycle through the open windows Most frequently used commands are placed into a number of toolbars or dock windows which are described below Note If you hold the cursor still over a button a tool hint appears with a short description of the command as shown in Figure 3 4 this can be disabled by the menu option Display hints in Setup Toolbars Full description always shown in Status line Th
298. editor is called from the Layer Setup dialog Setup gt Technology gt Layer Setup command Color Selects the color for plotting the layer Often colors on the plotter differ from those on screen To handle this situation see Section Layer Color Setup Cell Instance Plotting Style Cell instance plotting style is selected exactly in the same way as for layers when Instances item is selected in the list Other Border Thickness It is possible to specify the thickness of the borderline of objects in the given layer Thickness is specified in pixels Registration Marks Cross shaped registration marks are plotted It is possible to specify their color and size on the Plotting Style sheet Plotting Grid and Supergrid Both grid and supergrid are plotted if they are present on the screen It is possible to specify their color and size on the Plotting Style sheet 15 8 Simucad Plotting 15 4 3 Miscellaneous Sheet Output Mode f Auto f Direct output 7 Always use bitmap Color Mixing fe Mask C Notx0R Scaling of Stipples f Auto f No scaling Object Boundaries e Drawn over all layers io Color darkness for boundaries U black 1 no change Figure 15 5 Page Setup Miscellaneous Sheet This page contains the option Output Mode There are three available choices e Auto EXPERT will try to select most appropriate output method e Direct output Layout will be plotted using the printer device driv
299. ee mode wire is corrected in such a way that the vertices of its boundary polygon fit on the minimal grid As a by product the width of diagonal wire segments is somewhat increased Unfortunately this cannot be avoided If this setting is on the wire shape is drawn exactly according to its centerline and constant width e Offgrid circle ellipse donut boundary allowed In general EXPERT tends to place all created geometry on the minimal grid if the Snap to grid setting is on In some cases it may be inconvenient For example sometimes a circle is converted to a polygon by command Tools gt Polygonize gt Convert All circles in project or when saving the project into a GDSII file If this polygon is snapped to a grid then subsequent operations of resizing and merging could accumulate significant deformations of the circular shape Therefore it is useful to force only the center and the radius of a circle to be on grid and do not snap the boundary of the corresponding polygon to grid The corresponding option is Offgrid ellipse circle donut boundary allowed The polygons produced under this option may be snapped to grid at the final stages of design by Tools Snap Selected To Grid and or Tools gt Snap Whole Layout To Grid commands 11 4 3 Layer Wire Setup Layer setup consists of two main parts Layer Bar and Layer Setup dialog The Layer bar is visible on screen if the View Dock Windows gt Layer Bar option is checked Layer Setu
300. eeeeee ean 17 19 1751 Cell VIEW Commands si danoegitele it ii e eee gt oder alte lia 17 19 17 5 2 Cell View Procedures 0 0 48 A IA AA A A a eee 17 21 17 6 Stup COMMANA Siasa a a AAA 17 21 176 1 Set Directores COMMANGS cinta dro ss a a a eel A drid 17 21 17 6 2 Expert Settings Commands cusco ae le 17 22 17 6 3 EXpell Setup Commands eerie thes lid do os 17 23 17 6 42 XA SetU COMMANA errin eaa oa erre eel Boeke e arras 17 27 17 6 5 Edit Settings Commands ercer rado res sara rain edi 17 28 17 6 6 Getting Releasing Simucad Licenses Commands 0c ccc cece cece eee teen ennee 17 30 17 7 Layer Commands and Procequres 10 2 52 0 cicteten diesen aia 17 31 al La er Commande ea ecc 17 31 17 2AL ayer Procedu aca iia ias od 17 36 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects ccc cece eee e ee eee eee eens 17 38 Simucad xiii Expert ExpertViews User s Manual 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches 0 ccc ccc cece eee e ete nee neees 17 38 178 2 PIME ODO Cal caos rr Ga ance anes coa otr 17 40 17 8 3 Instance Object Creati0N o ooooocooonorcnerr tent eee nett net nn eens 17 49 17 8 4 Device Instance Object Creation 0 c ccc ccc nett teen eet ne ee ne eens 17 53 17 8 5 Floorplan Object Creation tue ten teva Maus bye eet vee Bee bey eer el viet ee by 17 54 17 8 6 Complex Object Creation soria a a 17 57 17 9 Selece COMMANGS cristina ir acia 17 61 17102 EGit COMMANGS a A AS 17 65 17 11 Search Comma
301. efined logical subdivision of layout and full control of hierarchical structure possible The key operations here are recursive Edit in Place hierarchical view settings flattening and grouping into cells Edit in Place provides an easy and convenient way to edit objects of a cell within the surroundings of any its instance The group of hierarchical view operations creates a flexible environment for execution of basic editorial functions These operations allow various levels of detail ranging from showing the floorplan level to presenting all level objects together with instance frames Cell Map EXPERT is equipped with an advanced layout geometry navigator for controlling opened layout windows Cell Map is supplied with convenient tools for resizing focusing of dependent windows It allows you to view the layout map for current cell and to globally monitor the corrections made in a locally viewed work area If you click on a different cell name in the Project Tree window Cell Map shows a cell preview for it Double clicking on the cell name opens the cell Editing Tools and Design Accessories EXPERT supports polygon level entry as well as component level layout entry A comprehensive set of objects is available for editing complex layouts cell instances arrays polygonal regions rectangular boxes text for labeling of cells primitives multiple style wires of any width ellipses and rolled regions All angles 90 and 45 geometri
302. el eae dtdesdidbianbwobesdnaktehiaeaeds 2 12 Chapter 3 SOF MOM ACE rrsan asen caian 3 1 SI do MCN ACG sxc cs acian caus ae cteen ne ose eaten eaten aee mena te errata moo a ean 3 1 2 MMe ICU ours a 6 alten aoe knee ee ee rae eee ees a eee aes 2 See nee ties 25 ae ee ee 3 2 Onl T 0lbdrs and DOCK WINDOWS lt 0c 0 22 vanes eeabe ied aiia waned Baby Seesaw ds aliada 3 9 31 3 MOUSE CUISOF FUNCION Sitios bate ba hee beh hb ees bo oe eh oe eo 3 10 A A A ee ae ee EE ee eee 3 12 3 2 COMMaANG EXCCUNON irrita 3 12 9 2 1 Breaking EXCCUUOM dais rd Aa arma tnt ia HK beh Re 3 13 3 2 2 Running Previous Command ciao AAA 3 13 3 9 Entering and EXIting EXDO ica a a ees 3 13 34 CUSIOMIZALION ios e di 3 14 e e o ee E NA 3 14 3 4 2 COS sist tro ddr ddr 3 14 3 4 3 CUSIOM Pop up Men e rociatasicniaa ras a a ai 3 14 Simucad V Expert ExpertViews User s Manual 3 4 4 Simple Custom Submenu 1 ee cent e een eee e seen nee eeeeas 3 15 Chapter 4 ProjectCell COMMAND 4 1 ATOM Wa dai 4 1 4 2 TString NEW Project iia rra AAA e Mae a 4 3 4 2 1 Technology File Selecione di E ie ewes 4 4 4 3 LOACING Proel sieren da 4 5 SODOM o tonal 4 5 443 2 Most Recent Used Project LIS aj tii tr veer chee i bas blade 4 6 4 3 3 Loading from the ELD format srt id A wel A A 4 6 4 3 4 Loading from the SLD format a Anvicedt 2106 ri rain 4 7 4 3 5 Loading from a Foreign Format 0 0 cc ccc ccc cece cent eee t nent ne ene neeas 4 7 4 3 6 Lo
303. elect the list of materials which can be etched during this process step the Shift key can be used to select groups of layers and the Ctrl key can be used to deselect layers Simucad 12 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Csy Patterned Layers Patterned Materials Figure 12 18 Csv Patterned Layers window The Thickness Depth parameter defines the depth of the etching It will limit the depth of etching to this value even if there are several overlapping materials which can be potentially etched beyond this depth in regards to the Patterned Layer list In other words the selective etching allowed by the Patterned Layers can be limited in terms of depth by the Thickness Depth parameter If you want only a selective etching without influencing the depth parameter set the Thickness Depth parameter to a high value The Angle value represents the slant effect of the etching in degrees Set it to 90 degrees if you want to have vertical borders of etching for the current process step see Figure 12 19 The Undercut value represents the shift between the border of the mask of etching and the real place where the etching begins see Figure 12 19 Patterned layer Real mask Undercut Figure 12 19 Etching Step Parameters IMPLANTATION DIFFUSION Ion implantation and impurity diffusion processes are described using this step These operations are used to create n and p doped regions as well as n and p wells For descr
304. elector window Only files in eld format may be produced by this operation e Click the Save button in the file selector window Result The eld file with the selected name is created containing the flattened geometry of the cell See also Hierarchy gt Explode All Hierarchy Selected 10 8 Replacing Cell Instances The menu command Hierarchy gt Replace Instances gt In Current Cell replaces all instances of one cell by instances of another cell everywhere in the active cell Finally the command Hierarchy gt Replace Instances gt In Current Project replaces all instances of one cell by instances of another cell everywhere in the current project The command Hierarchy gt Replace Instances gt Selected Instances replaces all selected instances by instances of another cell Unlike the other two operations instances of different cells may be replaced by instances of the same cell Simucad 10 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page is intentionally left blank 10 10 Simucad Chapter 11 Setup 11 1 Setting Up Expert amp ExpertViews The Setup submenu Figure 11 1 allows you to set various options and parameters in EXPERT namely e technology setup including e layer setup including default layer drawing order e layer connectivity setup e device setup e grid setup e general technology related settings e import export setup for GDSII CIF and Applicon formats e ruler setup e gravity setup e DRC script r
305. ell instance remains visible 10 4 Create Cell in Place Purpose Create a new cell from the set of selected layout objects and replace the selected set by the new cell Execution e Select a set of layout objects to lump together into a new cell e Click on the Hierarchy gt Create Cell in Place menu The Cell Name Selection Form titled Create Cell in Place can be seen with the following fields e New Cell Name You must enter a name for the new cell into this field Initially this field contains a proposed default name It will be used if another name is not entered e List of Cells This is the list of all cell names existing in the project Double clicking on a name from this list causes it to appear in the New Cell Name field It may be further edited to produce a new name e Cancel This button aborts the Create Cell in Place operation e OK Press this button after selecting the cell name to complete the operation Simucad 10 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual If the OK button is pressed there are two possibilities e A message that says The project already has such a cell name appears You must click the OK button of the message box and repeat name selection e Create Cell in Place dialog closes The operation was performed successfully Results This operation changes only the hierarchy of the active cell it does not change its geometry 1 e the flattened active cell remains the same If the ope
306. ell preview window You can turn it on by checking the Cell preview option You can also check the Show Info box to display more information about the selected cell This information is presented in three subsections Parent Cells Child Cells and Layers Figure 4 6 illustrates the Cell Preview and Show info feature 4 8 Simucad Project Cell Commands Open Cell s Library List E 05993 N CAD project lt 051999 05199395 051993 051993 PSN lt 05 393 051993 TAFFPWRC lt 05999 AFFPWRE lt 05999 EA GNOLA 0519935 GRINGS lt 05t999 Top level cells only te Bl f All cells Cell Filter Parent Cells Child Cells FFBLE 1 JDIFCNS a IMET 16 INAET 15 IPAET b IPIMP 14 IPOLY Ab IFP ELL 4 e Cell preview e Show info _ Cancel o Ame A Figure 4 6 Open Cell s with preview 4 3 8 Possible Problems Not Enough Space When a project is loaded from a foreign format EXPERT performs conversion into the eld format Therefore you will need sufficient space on the output disk The same caution is necessary when some backup options are turned on in Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Data Safety Technology File Issues File gt New and File gt 0pen from a foreign format or with external technology file may fail because of syntax errors in the technology file or because some layers have the same GDSIl NUMBER DATATYPE pair In particular the latter may happen if the
307. ells from the project as well as instances of library cells Array is a set of instances of the same cell with the same transformation positioned at the nodes of a regular grid in the design plane The regular steps of this grid are called row displacement and column displacement or alternatively row delta and column delta of the array We may naturally speak about rows and columns of arrays and each array entry is associated with two indices conventionally called row index and column index Array position is defined to be the position of its 0 0 entry An array is specified by cell name position transformation row and column deltas numbers of rows and columns Text Text or label is a string of alphanumeric symbols used for the documenting or labeling of objects A text object has the following characteristics layer position orientation height width slant and alignment with respect to its position Optionaly you can attach text to any non text layout object Text is not fabricated However you can convert them to polygons from the Numeric Input Panel see Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects Section 5 5 Text Label Creation 2 3 3 User Defined Properties Objects may have user defined properties A property is specified by property name and property value An object may only have one property with a given name To export import properties from to GDSII file use the property map file You can select input an
308. eneration or Layer Rebuilding is the process of actual construction of the contents of derived layers according to their definition It may be invoked in several ways e from the menu Tools gt Derived Layers e on activation of a derived layer using the Layer Bar e on switching to a window where a derived layer is the active one Restrictions When a single layer is being rebuilt the layers from which it was derived may be non rebuilt Therefore it is recommended that you use the menu command Tools Derived Layers Generate All Derived Layers which regenerates derived layers in their logical order See also Chapter 12 Tools Section 12 14 Handling Derived Layers for more information Derived Layer Definition Using Layer Setup The Layer Setup panel provides tools for maintaining derived generated layers in GUARDIAN DRC They are the Derived layer check box and the Derivation button The Derived layer check box has a dual function Simucad 11 25 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e On one hand it indicates whether the current selected layer in the layer list is a derived one exactly like the boxes of the Derived column in the Layer list of the Layer Setup panel e On the other hand it allows you to control the type of the current layer that turns ordinary layers into derived layers and vice versa If the Derived layer box is not checked left blank it means that the layer currently selected in the layer li
309. ent e Change Layer to metal3 and right click one point to finish the multiwire creation Multiwire segments on different layers can have different width and styles You can change these settings after you switched to appropriate layer or you can use left part of the Numeric input panel to highlight vertices corresponding to segments you want to change By default all parts of Multiwire are united together into one group Thus multiwire could be edited in the same way as a regular wire However if you want them to be created as separate objects check the Split checkbox in the Numeric input panel of the Wire tool 5 4 7 Rolled Wire Creation Rolled Wire xl a Layer metal3 gt th width 12 0000 End Extend gt ead Figure 5 18 Rolled Wire Creation Rolled wire is created in a similar way to a regular wire except in addition to the usual parameters you need to define the radius of curving Layer Wire Width and Wire End Style parameters are the same as in a regular wire Wire Joint Style is predefined set to Extend and cannot be changed 5 5 Text Label Creation Selecting Edit gt Create Object gt Text allows you to write one line text anywhere in the layout However only one font is available of any size and text line orientation In addition the reference point origin of a Text object is shown as bird s footmark of constant pixel size When a cell instance that contains text is transformed or
310. ent CAD systems For example if the texts appear too large after loading a GDSII file try to decrease this value and reload the file By default Use text rescaling is ON for compatibility with previous versions of EXPERT Simucad 11 37 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Restrict property attribute number You can set up a specific limit for property attribute numbers to be written into the GDSII output stream It can be done by checking the Restrict property attribute number box and specifying the max number of property attribute allowed to write into output stream The default range for property attribute numbers is an integer from 1 to 127 Properties with invalid numbers will be skipped A warning will be displayed if properties with attribute numbers exceeding the specified limits are encountered during GDSII saving If the Restrict option is not checked all properties both user defined and EXPERT internal will be streamed out into the output file It is important to uncheck this option if you want to preserve the connectivity information stored in the EXPERT internal properties GDSII Output Panel Cell name limit To comply with GDSII standards limiting the cell names to 32 characters you can set a maximum limit to cell name character number Output Representation of Arrays Array deltas steps in x and y directions may be negative for the untransformed in EXPERT While this is not forbidden by the GDSII format specific
311. ent EXPERT implementation of the Cross Sectional viewer is based on the simplified simulation of the process steps using rough processing parameters from the EXPERT technology file 12 5 2 Cross Sectional Viewer Setup Approximate parameters for the simulation of the fabrication step must be specified in the technology file For simplicity assume that each fabrication step is associated with a separate layer in the layout This layer may be either a drawn layer or a derived one in other words produced by boolean resizing or any other DRC operations on the drawn layers 12 14 Simucad Tools There are two ways to create and modify process simulation parameters e Interactively which is the recommended way using the Cross Sectional Viewer setup dialog see Figure 12 16 below in the Preferences window This panel can be accessed in two ways e through the Preferences window menu option Setup Editor Viewer then click on Cross sectional Viewer at the bottom of the panel list e from the Cross Sections window menu option View gt Dock windows gt Cross sections then click the setup icon on the right side of the window e Manually by editing the EXPERT technology file Cross Sectional Viewer Derived Layers f Uze Current Technology f Use Dre Script ae a RA A T xidation E Nwel Substrate opa m tehing va E pra ee CE ching a a E fusion eso elfiwso trv pa a e e iching 100 Ona eposiion e A Ova va A
312. ent project TExport Export a cell from your current project to one of many format ELD SLD GDSII CIF APL OASIS LEF DEF XIS Save Saves changes of the edited cell Save Cell As Saves the edited cell under another name Discard Changes Discards changes in the edited cell Read Only Sets Clears the read only status of the active cell Info Shows information about the cell and objects in it Selection Info Shows information about the selected objects in the active cell 4 2 Starting New Project Purpose To initialize a new IC layout design project Execution e Select File gt New from the menu or click New project button at the Command bar You will see the New Project dialog window shown in Figure 4 3 e Select the File type file in EXPERT layout data format with a eld extension or file in Shared layout data format with a s1d extension e Select new project file name e Optionally select a technology file as described in Section 4 2 1 Technology File Selection If a technology was not selected the project will start with the empty technology You must then update it for your needs using commands from the Setup gt Technology submenu See Chapter 11 Setup for more information e Click the Save button Simucad 4 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Look in M CAD_project a ee Libraries Techfile a 05t999 eld def project_double eld a def project_s
313. eparate possible choises of swithes for command swithes Brackets define optional arguments gt Angle means EXPERT command line prompt Description of xi command has the folowing sections although not every one is required Format Format requirement for commandes Arguments Description of positional arguments Named Arguments Description of named arguments Switches Description of switches predefined named arguments Return Value Description of return value by the commands Examples Actual XI code using this command Description of xi procedure has the folowing sections although not every one is required Syntax Syntax requirement for procedure Parameters Description of parameters Return Value Description of return value by the procedure Examples Actual XI code using this procedure In command arguments or procedure parameters e complex cell names e g library_name cell_name must always be in quotes gt cell open gates013 nand2x4 e directory names and file names with the path must always be in quotes and the path separator must be the slash or 11 double backslash gt 0urrent directory d tests GDSLII Command names may be truncated as long as commands remain uniquely identified gt view mode off gt LO 40 Nevertheless in xi scripts it is recommended to write full command names for the following reason An abbreviation for a xi command or LISA command may be used as long as
314. er e Always use bitmap All plotting operations will be performed in memory by EXPERT and then the prepared bitmap will be transferred to the printer device In Direct Output mode e Several operations with plot such as color mixing transparency etc are performed directly by the plotter s driver Otherwise some preliminary operations are performed by EXPERT e EXPERT requires less memory e The amount of data transferred to the printer depends on the amount of graphics on layout so plotting may be slower for large plots In Bitmap Output Mode Simucad 15 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Such operations color mixing transparency etc are performed by EXPERT and may be more accurate EXPERT requires more memory The amount of data transferred to the printer depends on page size number of pages dpi and color depth This amount does not depend on the amount of graphics on layout so plotting may be much faster for large plots Try different output modes to see which one suits your printer plotter in terms of plotting quality and speed The other settings of this panel make it possible to do the following Draw layers in color mixing mode Draw object boundaries on top of all drawings so that they will come sharp in stipple mode Change boundary darkness from black color up to current color by setting a real number from 0 0 up to 1 0 when View gt Filling gt Stipple or View gt Filling Solid modes are set
315. er Format LAYER layer_name 17 28 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Arguments layer_name type STRING The name of the layer this layer must exist in the active project LAYER command without the parameter displays the name of the active layer Example gt layer Metal2 gt box 0 045 box is created on the active layer Metal2 REGION MODE Sets a mode for object creation according to the setting from Edit Region Modes submenu Format REGION MODE normal merge hole holeall holeselected Switches normal merge hole holeall holeselected e normal switch is used to create a new shape e merge switch means that new object will be merged with existing ones e hole switch means that new object will be treated as hole in the existing ones in the active layer e holeall works like hole but hole is created in the overlapping objects on the all layers e holeselected switch means that hole will be created in the overlapping selected objects Example gt DOX 0 0 3535 gt region mode merge POX UD OG Region with bounding box 0 0 3 6 will be created SELECT MODE Defines selection settings Format SELECT MODE J noinstance insteance noprimitive primitive reselect select deselect feross fansade boundary solid Switches noinstance instance e noinstance switch means that instances will be ignored during
316. er and ground net objects clearly set the substrate layers the non selectable by pressing Ctrl while clicking on the layer name or using the layer plan where substrate layers are not included or selectable Now all non selectable layer objects are displayed in wireframe mode independently from the filling mode of the probed node set by Verification gt Node Probing gt Node Filling submenu wireframe solid or stipple Note The layer of the picked object must be present in connectivity definition Note When a node is being probed for the first time for an unchanged layout a preprocessing takes place to extract node connectivity and build connectivity index for fast search and display After preprocessing the probing of all other nodes for the same layout works faster Simucad 14 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 14 5 2 Short Locator The Verification gt Node Probing gt Short Locator allows you to create the shortest pass connecting more than two specified points in the highlighted node If you click more than two points that are not of the same potentials the created shortest pass would include the reason of for the short If you cannot find the reason for the short you can reset the points and reduce the target area The shortest pass is created in the layer ShortPass as a normal wire If you want to delete it select it by Select gt By Click Drag and then run Edit Delete Expert 05t9994 SO05T999 ST
317. erName NULL Purpose Selects all objects in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the Layer Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectlayer Layer_1 18 10 4 Select All BOOL ExpApiSelectAll Purpose Selects all objects in current cell Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectAll 18 10 5 Deselect All BOOL ExpApiDeselectAll Purpose Deselects all objects in current cell Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDeselectAll Simucad 18 47 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 10 6 Invert Selection BOOL ExpApilnvertSelection Purpose Inverts selection of all objects in current cell Parameters None Returns BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApilnvertSelection 18 10 7 Select by Type BOOL ExpApiSelectByType SEARCH _OBJECT_TYPE sType Purpose Selects all Objects of specified Type in current cell Parameters SEARCH _OBJECT_TYPE sType Type of object to select see List of Structures for structure description Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectByType SOT_BOX 18 10 8 Select by Box BOOL ExpApiSelectByBox double dS
318. ero Simucad 8 11 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Diagonal Stretch shift may be at any angle multiple to 45 Either X shift or Y shift or both at the Stretch bar will be zero or X shift will be equal to Y shift Hint 1 Different objects may move differently during stretch because they have different restrictions for movement For exam ple if Edit gt Angle Mode Preserve Angles Mode is set during stretch the movable parts of regions would be confined by their adjacent angles to unmovable parts while the completely selected objects would move in the same direction as the mouse Hint 2 If during a stretch operation some polygons change their topological structure self intersections collinear segments etc in some cases their elements are deselected from the stretch Hint 3 If objects are picked for a stretch and some layers are hidden the hidden objects would not be stretched However all objects remain picked and if their layers are made visible again they would be subject to stretching 8 8 Jog Points Jog Points are points on region wire segments which divide that segment on separate parts When objects are modified the parts can be moved independently When you start the Edit gt Add Jog Points operation you activate a tool which allows you to draw a cut line on the layout The tool behaves in the same way as the Create Wire tool left clicks add points right click finishes line creation The line wi
319. ery purposes if EXPERT is terminated abnormally then you will be able to recover unsaved data To activate the EXPERT recovery feature check the option Recovery info interval and specify the interval of minutes you want to recover EXPERT will automatically write a recovery data at the entered interval After an abnormal termination restart EXPERT and load the project file which may contain unsaved information When unsaved data are detected the message box will pop up asking whether to save or discard recovered data or continue to load the project with the recovered information The last choice allows you to open and examine recovered cells they will be marked as modified Save or discard specific cells or whole projects by using Save project or Close project e Upon Closing Shared Library While closing library choose between e Check in all changes e Leave all checked out e Prompt for checking in e Upon Saving Cell While saving cell choose between e Check in and out to continue editing e Leave checked out e Prompt for checking in e Prompt for cell saving upon closing its last window If a cell has been changed and no windows are open with this cell choose to save changes in this cell eo Write activity log If this option is checked then all editing commands are stored in xi script format in the file with the name entered into the field Activity log file This name may be entered either by typing or by a file browser invoked
320. es arcs and rolled drawings provide strong editing capabilities for high frequency and mixed signal designs EXPERT is equipped with a flexible grid setup providing both user definable and automatic zoom adjustable grids and subgrids in several representations There are convenient means for fast on layout measurements automatically graduated axes flexible polyline rulers distance meter and cursor locator Layer settings arrangement and visibility are easily controlled from the Layer bar and Layer Setup dialog Special Tools 1 Fast automatic Extraction of Nodes as sets of electrically connected primitives from several layers y 2 Clipping In Out of arbitrary layout areas with the capability of saving the obtained pieces as separate cells The Clip out feature preserves the hierarchy of instances that lie completely in the clipped area The Clip in function replaces the portion of the layout by the clipped out cell y 3 Resizing rescaling and fitting to grid for process migration 4 Integration with GUARDIAN DRC SYSTEM GUARDIAN LPE NETLIST and PARASITIC EXTRACTOR and GUARDIAN LVS SYSTEM 1 2 2 Summary of Features Layout Design Options e Full custom design ASICs e Any integration scale Simucad 1 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e Any hierarchy depth e Arbitrary shaped geometry e High frequency circuits e Any mask defined technologies User Interface e Fast graphic display e Customized workplace
321. es a ellipse Format ELLIPSE xcenter ycenter xradius yradius layer layername property name value name values name value Simucad 17 41 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual text text text text replace layoutobject net netname fereate Tind I dehete reselect add deselect select topolygon pin get Arguments xcenter type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e X coordinate of the ellipse center ycenter type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e yY coordinate of the ellipse center xradius type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e Specifies X radius of ellipse yradius type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e Specifies Y radius of ellipse Named Arguments layer layer_name type STRING See the description above on 17 40 Switches topolygon Specifies that the object created or searched for will be converted into a polygon See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for descriptions of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 Creates the ellipse in the active layer Example 2 gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 layer CONT Creates the ellipse in the layer CONT Example 3 gt select all gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 create select reselect The first command selects all objects The second command creates
322. es the current cell together with all edits into a new cell with another name All recent changes i e the ones performed after the last save command in the current cell are discarded 4 14 3 Discard Changes The Cell gt 5Discard Changes command discards all recent changes 1 e the ones performed after the last File gt Save File gt Save Cells or Cell gt Save command in the current cell are discarded 4 14 4 Read Only If the cell has no unsaved changes then the Cell gt 5Read Only command sets removes the read only status for the current cell This status means that the cell cannot be edited Notice that cell may have read only status for other reasons e The project library may be of read only type e The project library may be of the Shared Layout data format type and the cell is not checked out e The project library may be opened in read only mode In the current versions of EXPERT it happens if another copy of EXPERT has already opened the project in read write mode 4 15 Cell Information Selecting Cell Info and Cell gt Selection Info menu commands report various data about the cell including e EXPERT version used e current time e current user e current project e cell name e its type top cell leaf cell read only cell etc e date of creation e date of modification e size of the current cell Simucad 4 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e its shape domain coordinates of th
323. es the width of the wire in the subparts of type offset wire or the width of the box in the subpart of type box value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Each subpart is described as a sequence of attributes with values of subparts parameters Attributes PWA_LAYER PWA_LAYER PWA_LAYER PWA_BEGIN_OFFSET PWA_BEGIN_OFFSET P PWA_BEGIN OFFSET PWA_END_OFFSET WA_END_OFFSET PWA_END_ OFFSET PWA_ENCLOSURE PWA_WIDTH PWA_WIDTH PWA_OFFSET PWA_LENGTH PWA_JUSTIFICATION PWA_OFFSET PWA_JUSTIFICATION PWA_BEGIN_CORNER_OFFSE T PWA_END_CORNER_OFFSET PWA_SPACE PWA_DISTRIBUTION Example pwire template GuardRing_2 layer contact width 3 extend extjoint boxes attr_create PWA_LAYER METALL PWA_WIDTH PWA_LENGTH PWA_BEGIN_OFFSET PWA_END_OFFSET attr_create PwA_ OFFSET OJy attr createl attr_create PWA_JUSTIFICATION PWJ_CENTER attr_create attr_create O O He H attr_create PWA_SPACE y attr_create PWA DISTRIBUTION BDT_EVEN attr_create PWA_BEGIN_CORNER_OFFSET 0 PWA_END_CORNER_OFFSET UI attr_ create attr create Creates the Pwire template GuardRing_2 with the box subpart 17 9 Select Commands Additional ways of selection are given in Section 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects DESELECT ALL Deselects all objects in the edited cell Simucad 17 61 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Format DE
324. et nenenaees 18 14 1900 CONS sashes a A ork eared Sn ear era 18 14 19 95 15 e Current Cell dc rusia ros madite weeds Vas ios sde adios 18 14 18 5 2 Gel Curent ellos ui pi A boa be ed de e A 18 14 18 5 3 Get A A A La ei 18 15 e A pa E ect ener h a Ae ol al ate ute altel 18 15 19 53 GeEUNEXU GEM units sli aaa done aio 18 15 199 6 GE Gell NIME s5248 25 Pe NA ng en Raia reine tetas Etat 18 16 1831 Create NeW Celltesrstasinsastiala rober dad das ratas tied ee hed teed 18 16 18 5 8 Create New Cell from Rectangular Clipping ooooooccococcoooncne e eee 18 16 195 9 Delte Celiacos teo date ia pios oil o 18 17 185 Unam oli ae ooo Doa 18 17 A II ous means ee ee 18 17 Simucad XV Expert ExpertViews User s Manual XVI es ate tes sae Ae e eed 4 He a eae eg woe ok kes 18 18 18 5 19 Save Selected AS Galas std ea ba eee tee ted deed no 18 18 joie iD lle old G CAPA RENE ER SO E E E EE EE EE A E A ee 18 18 18 5 15 SCL Cell Read only aC sis dai e leaned ue iaa Ueda kAS a denice nang oleh bd 18 19 185 16 Gel Cell Read only Fa ri aan 18 19 18917 CCl ONG Maes waar Aca 18 19 18 5 18 SEUREIETENCO POIN camisas eii als aia doo deis 18 20 18 5 19 Get Reference Point on 2270 ene ears nara Be won a ae ips eee abe Des 18 20 18 5 20 Activate Reference PONG sca tee a A ett Nee ee ae 18 20 18 95 21 GEUWINOOW ROCK existiera leaders se ned oad ire 18 21 18 5 22 515 AnCesionor Vella deus rte hennen vansd gay a beds dato 18 21 10 0 AVENS
325. etal rectangle to join both end of the net Y Select this metal rectangle and modify its property as shown in Figure 12 15 By clicking in the Net name field a drop down menu allows you to select the net name In this case the user chose Y If the Is Pin field is clicked you need to change the state to true Selected Objects Type Position Size Figure 12 15 Pin and Net Name using Property Bar Once these operations are completed each instances of the INVX inverter cell will now display pins and nets as specified and the connectivity will be establish based on these 12 5 Cross Sectional Viewer 12 5 1 Introduction IC technologies continue to develop and become more and more complex With increase of complexity in the contemporary design processes the designer must have knowledge not only of layout design but in simulation and manufacturing as well The more the design engineer knows about the process with respect to layout and technology the higher the performance he can design Cross Sectional viewer is a tool within EXPERT to simulate the cross sectional views of ICs along an arbitrary drawn cut line on the layout Cross Sectional viewer is a link between the layout and the resulting device It helps the designer to understand the spatial structure of the device being designed Cross Sectional drawings are useful for understanding design rules parasitic coupling and other design and fabrication problems The curr
326. eters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library Return Value TRUE if library exists and FALSE otherwise Example gt display library_exists A 17 18 3 Cell Management Commands CELL CHECKOUT Checks the cell out from the shared library for editing Format CELL CHECKOUT cell name Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the cell to be checked out If no argument is given the command will be applied to the current cell if it is from the shared library CELL CHECKIN Checks the cell in the shared library if it was checked out by the current user Format CELL CHECKIN cell name Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the cell to be checked in If no argument is given the command will be applied to the current cell if it is from the shared library CELL CANCEL CHECKOUT Discards changes in the checked out cell Format CELL CANCEL CHECKOUT cell_name Arguments Simucad 17 93 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual cell name type STRING The name of the cell If no argument is given the command will be applied to the current cell if it is from the shared library 17 19 Miscellaneous FORM CREATE Creates a data entry form to initialize the XI shell variables Syntax vars FORM_CREATE var_params form_params Parameters var_params type SEQUENCE The description of the variables Each element of the var_params is a sequence containing the initial value and
327. eters of P cell instance 17 108 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Table 17 11 LayoutObject Instance Components et reae mime g SCALE DOUBLE Sets a new scaling factor 17 20 4 SEARCHCRITERION Type Type object constant SEARCHCRITERION The SEARCHCRITERION type represents a criterion that finds objects with specific attributes using the search function To obtain a variable of SEARCHCRITERION type use the procedure SEARCH_CRITERION_CREATE see SEARCH_CRITERION_CREATF on page 17 111 Table 17 12 SearchCriterion Operations Hee Operator Second Operand Behavior Operation equal BOL SEARCHCRITERION Returns TRUE if two objects repre sent the same search criterion returns FALSE otherwise EQ not equal N SEARCHCRITERION Returns TRUE if two objects do not represent the same search criterion returns FALSE otherwise Table 17 13 SearchCriterion Components IO TYPE Returns the SEARCHCRITERION type constant Simucad 17 109 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 20 5 OBJECTCONTAINER Type Type object constant OBJECTCONTAINER Layout object containers are containers for accumulating of huge amount of layout objects type LAYOUTOBJECT with effective memory management Using this data type instead of predefined SEQUENCE data type increase performance greatly when dialing with large sets of layout objects for example result of hierarchical search command see Section 17 11 Search Commands
328. etry produced by EXPERT lies on the minimal grid e Snap Grid is a grid for cursor movement therefore for object creation if snap cursor mode is switched on The value of the snap grid step is set in EXPERT through Grid Setup e Visual Grid is the grid seen on screen Its step is either user defined or automatically adjusted so that some grid is always visible independently of the magnification of the layout See Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 4 6 Grid Setup for details e Supergrid is the grid with step multiple to the step of visual grid It is useful for better size distance reference e Objects with any angles and sizes can be easily measured with using rulers distance meter and cursor position locator e Optional graduated axes with cursor position marked on them and coordinate origins see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 Editor Viewer Form for details makes the coordinate system visible e Adjustable zoom and scroll steps see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 Editor Viewer Form for details allow you to customize layout navigation e Drawing styles choice between styles such as orthogonal diagonal or arbitrary angle modes filling modes and directional snap modes etc can be changed at any time using the corresponding bars at the bottom of the screen Notice that any layer may have individual grid settings 2 5 Files EXPERT works with the following file types 2 5 1 Expert Layout
329. ets the default directory for project open save operations both for file browser and for execution of xi script for files which are specified without a path name in xi commands Format CURRENT DIRECTORY dir_name Arguments dir_name type STRING Name of directory Example 1 gt current directory Eildata gt project load mux4 eld Project file f data mux4 eld will be loaded Example 2 gt current directory Ca WANT gt spawn notepad exe The Notepad Windows application will be started TECHNOLOGY DIRECTORY Sets the default directory where technology files are located both for the file browser and for execution of xi commands that specify a technology file without a full path Format TECHNOLOGY DIRECTORY dir_name Simucad 17 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Arguments dir_name type STRING Name of directory Example 1 gt current directory fs data gt LeCinGlogy dLrectOry TE teno gt project load mux4 gds mux4 tcn The GDSII file f data mux4 gds using the technology file f tcn03 mux4 tcn will be loaded 17 6 2 Expert Settings Commands EXPORT EXPERT SETTINGS Saves EXPERT settings into a file with the extension ecf for latter use Format EXPORT EXPERT SETTINGS path_name Arguments path_name type STRING Path name of EXPERT settings file Example gt export expert settings d data expert ecf IMPORT EXPERT SETTIN
330. f editing Execution e Click Hierarchy gt Edit in Place gt Enter into Subcell or the corresponding EIP toolbar button to select this operation Simucad 10 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The cursor assumes the EIP shape indicating that you can now enter into any instance belonging to the edited cell by pointing and clicking in order to edit the cell of this instance in place Now you may select a cell instance which you want to edit in place You may repeat entering into instances deeper and deeper until you select some other editing tool Note EIP mode is sensitive to the options activated in Select menu If the option Select lgnore Instances is active it will not be possible to EIP any cells e Point the cursor at a cell instance belonging to the currently edited cell and click the left mouse button The edited cell is defined to be e Either specified by the last Enter Up Pick operation as described below e Or if the EIP session was just started it is the active cell e Ifthe edited cell is not the active cell and if there are any changes in the edited cell the End Editing dialog appears asking you what to do with the changed cell instance It is described in Section 10 3 5 End Editing Dialog aia Name a rund EA mul a E inertes E My Contact My Hetal H My Metal My HAc YE E E 1 instances amp arrays in mur EL stance 0 5 0 cell inverter Pnad E My Contact F
331. f the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 ute PO 07 TOO LO nd Maia L extend ext joint Creates the wire with specified attributes in the active layer Example 2 were Oy 0s L070 10D Drok Miaea T ilushend Lillo int gt layer METAL1 Creates the wire with specified attributes in the layer METAL1 Example 3 gt select all 17 48 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Pwire 0 0 10 0 10 39 5 5 wadth 1 Srlushnend Iirrljoint gt create select add The first command selects all objects The second command creates the wire in the active layer and selects it Selection status of other objects is not changed Example 4 gt wLte 0707 TO Us Ono 979 widen al Js pena ye leo ae y delete Searches for the object with specified attributes in the active layer and deletes one Example 5 Swe 100 TOO LO ao Mono e extend y cal oii gt property naneli wire ty UE 4 5 gt Lext 4 4070 Text gt 025 Und Uy Ealse TA TOPLEPT Tetas Oros Leet Wig D 0 rite TA BOTTOMLEFR De sade ech he Creates the object with specified properties and attached texts in the active layer Example 6 gt old_wire wire 0 0 10 0 10 5 5 5 width 1 extend extjoint gt create get polyaon 1Uy 0 030 05 5 DS freplace old wire The first command creates wire and returns one type LAYOUTOBJECT The second command replaces this object with the new polygon Example 7 P
332. fect any objects of the active cell other than cell instances and arrays e Only the selected cell instances and arrays are affected by this operation e All layout objects from the selected instances arrays become objects of the active cell while preserving their absolute placement in the design e The instances arrays that were selected in the active cell are removed from it See also Hierarchy Explode All Hierarchy Flatten 10 6 Explode All Purpose Explode all instances and arrays in the active cell in other words move the contents of all instances arrays up one level of the cell hierarchy This operation is equivalent to the Select gt All Hierarchy Explode Selected sequence 10 8 Simucad Hierarchy Operations Execution e Click on the menu command Hierarchy gt Explode All Results e The operation does not affect any objects of the active cell other than cell instances and arrays e All layout objects from all instances arrays in the active cell become objects of the active cell while preserving their absolute placement in the design e The instances arrays that were in the active cell before the explosion are removed from it See also Hierarchy Explode Selected Hierarchy gt Flatten 10 7 Flatten Purpose Flatten the active cell in other words completely remove the hierarchy Execution e Click on the menu command Hierarchy gt Flatten e Select file name for the flattened database at the opened file s
333. ff and a cell to be deleted has instances of other cells the latter ones are not deleted even if they are no longer instanced anywhere else they become top level cells of the project Otherwise the selected cells that belong to the work project are deleted together with cells from this project that are no longer instanced anywhere else Simucad 4 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual If the cell to be deleted is currently active in the layout window Cell Delete will open the Cell Name Selection box and the active cell will be highlighted 4 11 fRenaming of Cells Purpose Renames a cell Execution Select Cell gt Rename menu item and the Cell Name Selection box titled Rename Cell s will appear The following fields appear e Cell List This is the list of all cell names existing in the project Clicking on a name from this list selects a cell to rename and copies its old name into the New cell name field Edit it to produce a new name for the cell e New cell name A new cell name must be entered into this field e Cancel Pressing this button abandons the Cell gt Rename operation e OK Pressing this button after selecting a cell name completes the operation If you press OK there are two possible outcomes 1 A message box appears with a warning that such a cell already exists Click the OK button of the message box to repeat cell name selection 2 The Cell gt Rename dialog closes The operation was
334. file mux_flat eld REPLACE INSTANCES Replaces the instances of a cell with the instances of another cell Format REPLACE INSTANCES cell_name new_cell_ name cell project Arguments cell_name type STRING Simucad 17 83 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Name of cell for replacing with new_cell_ name type STRING Name of new cell for replacing by Switches cerl I ero Teer e cell default switch means that instances will be replaced in the current cell e project switch means that instances will be replaced in the whole project Example rr MW y gt replace instances inverter inverter2 project Instances of the cell inverter will be replaced by instances of inverter2 in the whole project REPLACE SELECTED Replaces the selected cell instances by instances of the another cell Format REPLACE SELECTED cell_name Arguments cell_name type STRING Name of the new cell Example gt replace selected inverter2 Selected instances of the current cell will be replaced by instances of the cell inverter2 17 15 Edit in place Commands EIP COMPLETE Completes the editing in place in cell instance array Format EIP POP save saveas explode reject newname cell_name Named Arguments newname type STRING Name of the cell the changes will be saved to Valid for saveas switch only Switches save saveas explode reject e save applies c
335. file will be generated Example gt str_comm OR layerl POLY layer2 CONT layerr PCO gt are command str comm Limit L000 7 hierarchical DRC IMPORT ERRORS Imports the DRC errors stored either in the GUARDIAN DRC error database or in the other systems such as Mentor Graphics Calibre or Cadence s Dracula error reports Format DRC_IMPORT_ERRORS file_name guardian dracula calibre 17 88 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Arguments e file name type STRING Specifies the pathname of a DRC error database file Switches fouardian dracula calibre Defines the type of DRC error database guardian default switch means an import from GUARDIAN DRC s error database e dracula means an import from Cadence s Dracula database e calibre means an import from Mentor Graphics Calibre text error report DRC SCRIPT Executes DRC script from file in the current cell Format DRC SCRIPT pathname xpos value ypos value xsize value ysize value Limit v liuel selection cell 7CeLllwise whole WHoiterarcechi Gal I flat log Arguments pathname type STRING The name of the DRC script file See DRC COMMAND on page 17 87 for an explanation of other named arguments and switches EXTRACT CONNECTIVITY Extracts node connectivity data for the current cell view It corresponds to the menu command Verification gt Node Probing Reextract Connectivit
336. flip objects Duplicate Purpose Copies the set of selected objects of the current cell to another position in the cell shifted with respect to their initial positions by a given vector This operation may be invoked from the menu and the Design bar It does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard Figure 8 3 Duplicate Operation Execution This operation is similar in its execution to the Edit gt Move operation described in Move on page 8 6 After the selection of this operation either from the menu or from the Design bar you must define the shift vector To do this click first at the tail and then at the head of the required shift vector The vector may be chosen anywhere in the layout at your convenience When the shift vector head is clicked the new objects are created and shifted by this vector with respect to the initial selected objects The new objects belong to the current cell their relative positions and their layers are the same as for the initial objects Note After the duplicate operation the originals are deselected and the copies become selected Figure 8 3 demonstrates the stages of the Duplicate operation The first picture shows three layout objects Two selected highlighted objects are to be duplicated into a new location The white dash line at the second picture shows the shift vector Two highlighted selected boxes at the bottom of the third picture are the new objects created after clicki
337. for details The latter possibility is useful when you are converting Dracula DRC decks e by selecting Setup gt Technology gt Import Technology menu command Restrictions for Layer Names Layer names cannot use the characters forbidden in file names An additional list of restrictions is as follows e Layer name length must be at most 47 characters e The following characters are forbidden in layer names e All non printable characters with codes 0 31 and above 126 See PL AER e The space character e The first character cannot be amp It is reserved for marking temporary layers in the DRC script language 2 5 9 Other Expert Files Configuration files ecf file This file stores data about the working configuration the default of the editor See Chapter 11 Setup for description of settings stored in ecf files Keyboard Shortcut Definition Files ekb These files store keyboard shortcuts hot keys for EXPERT Color Definition Files clr Stipple Pattern Definition Files stp Plotting Style Files sty These files control plotter presentation of layouts Layer List Files e11 These files are used for layer remapping during GDSII export and for storing layer visibility lists Expert Layer Plan Files elp These files store layer color and stipple pattern data so layer style can be replaced without changing the technology file DRC Script Files dsf These files contain design rule check co
338. from both Layer setup and from Application color setup allows you to select color for a selected layer in two ways Simucad 11 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual by directly choosing a predefined color in the basic color field by defining a custom color with following steps e select by mouse click an empty box in the Custom colors field e define the custom color by entering numeric HSL hue saturation luminance or RGB red green blue values or by clicking in the color palette the Alpha Channel parameter does not matter e click on the Add to Custom Colors button and press OK The syntax of the technology file specifies color RGB value For example COLOr 0729397293 Background Color The Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Viewing form allows you to select either black or white background color In the case of a white background the default color of all auxiliary markers will be inverted from white to black If custom colors are used for these auxiliary drawings you must assign them for white and black backgrounds separately using Setup gt Hotkeys Menus Colors command Stipple Setup Stipple patterns for layers are selectable from stipple libraries After a stipple pattern is selected for a layer it is stored in project s technology and saved in technology files Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology File Stipple Pattern Libraries EXPERT allows the use of two kinds of stipples for the layer display
339. ft vector The third figure shows the layout created after clicking the mouse button at the head of the dash line Figure 8 4 Move Operation Property Bar Mode or Numeric Input Mode If the Numeric Input panel is visible once you have selected the item s to move the Numeric Input displays delta dx and dy of the shift vector These values can be typed in directly to input the coordinates of the shift vector Pressing Enter or clicking on the OK button will perform the actual copying 8 6 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 5 2 Rotate 90 Purpose The Edit Rotate 90 menu option will rotate the set of selected objects of the current cell by 90 degrees counterclockwise around the center of the minimal bounding box of the selected objects In addition the Setup Editor Viewer Editing form provides a self descriptive option Flip rotate single selected instance array with respect to its origin The Rotate 90 operation can be launched from the Edit gt Rotate 90 menu of from the Command bar icon The operation does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard and the selection state of the objects 8 5 3 Rotate Purpose The Edit Rotate menu option will rotate the set of selected objects of the current cell by any angle with respect to any point see Figure 8 5 Execution There are three ways to perform this operation by mouse actions using numeric input dialog or by xi command See Chapter 17 Expert I
340. g Recovery Log cccoocccccocccnconccncnnconononcnnnoncnnos 17 121 A Gaines wee iahelot ha Lanier vende tate 5 2 e O aa 2 2 O 5 2 APNO CPP A a A 2 8 Appliance e o 2 8 ADICON oie ceases 4 7 11 42 ADPIC Matias 2 8 Mili 2 1 2 6 E dstinchescctbiaerns calcentators enewracceuecoserent eeneeetind 2 1 array INSTANCE ias 2 1 anay POSION seviterirn coctel a 2 6 amay SION i cccseccinewensceanscmesGanin2oedicea N O eens oe 2 1 CULO DAM Selecta dese haces ectates tia ttvahatemesinacatnel TE 9 7 AUN MO sl aa 4 17 B A hace EEE a 4 6 Basic INONOMS corneri TAN 2 1 Basics of Usage in Expert ua ds 14 2 A a Ga 3 14 11 44 Bindkeys instead of mouse clicks cccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 ponding A aE i AA 2 1 DOK rese ae a S a E E tea ets 2 6 BOX SCICCHON sedes E E 7 4 breaking execution of commands ccccseseeeecteeeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 13 C COU aie E ce acia 2 1 cols aa Since ade teen eas oh cance 2 1 Cell Frame tna as 9 13 Cell INONMA mps iio land iasdl 4 21 cellinstante analisis 2 1 Cell Instance Selection ooccococonnnnccccocnnnoconncnnoncanencnnnons 7 7 Cell Management t2s22iveesotie ee 16 7 Cell Name Collision ooooccccococnoncoccononoconoconnonanonnnnos 4 16 CCICOMIGIN A E E E E E A A A eae E L E E E 2 3 SR tat tented E E E E Goonies etal 2 4 GIG CK DON Iliana 3 12 A rae EA E EN ETN 16 8 CNECK Ola adas 16 8 A a A 2 1 A A A 4 7 11 41 Simucad CIF A o seems teehee seeecee 2 8 A cece aia
341. ges the wire specific layout object attributes Format MODIFY WIRE lobject selected property layer layer_name net net_name pin width w luel endstyle Jointstyle Arguments endstyle predefined constants Sets the specified wire end style Wire end style is defined by the following predefined constants DEFAULT_END EXT_END FLUSH_END ROUND_JOINT jointstyle predefined constants Sets the specified wire joint style Wire joint style is defined by the following predefined constants DEE AULT JOINT BXI JOINT FELEL JOINT ROUND JOINT METER sJOTNT See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments MODIFY INSTANCE Changes the instance specific layout object attributes Format MODIFY INSTANCE lobject selected xpos value ypos value Property ll cell cell name lib 1ib_logname 17 74 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell scale value lyrotation val el mirror value net net_name pin conn connectivity ron value feol value xcol value ycol value xrow value yrow value Named Arguments cell cell_name type STRING The name of a cell no full cell name Replaces a cell instance object with the instance of the new cell lib lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library Replaces a cell instance object with the inst
342. gt display get_library_dirname gt d pro jects Disk file with current project is located in the directory d projects GET_LIBRARY_LOGNAME Returns logical name of the project by pathname Syntax lib_logname GET _LIBRARY_LOGNAME lib _pathname Parameters lib_pathname type STRING The name of the project file Return Value lib_logname type STRING The logical name of specified project file Returns NIL if project does not have assigned logical name Example gt display get_library_logname d mux4 eld dl Project d mux4 eld does not have assigned logical name GET_LIBRARY_PATHNAME Returns path name of the library by logical name Syntax lib_pathname GET_LIBRARY_PATHNAME lib_logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library If empty string is specified then path name of current project is returned Return Value Full pathname of specified library type STRING Returns NIL if library with specified logical name does not exist Example 1 gt display get_library_pathname gt d mux4 eld d mux4 eld is a disk file name of current project Example 2 gt display get_library_pathname A Pee ae Library with logical name A does not exist Simucad 17 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 17 4 Cell Commands and Procedures 17 4 1 Cell Commands CELL CLOSE Closes the current or all opened cell w
343. gt eip push arr colnum 0 rownum 0 Starts EIP session for element 0 0 of 1x4 instance array of cell mux1 17 16 Connectivity Commands NET_CREATE Creates a new net in the current cell Simucad 17 85 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Format NET_CREATE net_name internal external global type value Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net Named Arguments internal external global type value predefined switches and constants Switch internal is used for creating internal nets Internal nets are served for internal interconnections and not available for cell instance connectivity Switch external means that an external net is created External nets are used while creating cell instance connectivity Switch global means that a global net is created Global nets have not to be added to the each cell Once created global nets are available in the all cells One of the following predefined constants can be used to specify type of the net NT_INTERNAL NT_EXTERNAL NT_GLOBAL If neither the named argument type nor the predefined switch are not specified then an external net 1s created NET_DELETE Deletes the specified net from the current cell Format NET DELETE net_name Arguments net_name type STRING Name of the net to be deleted NET_ADD_OBJ Adds layout object to the specified net in the current cell If object is not specified then selected objects
344. h attribute in the target_cell_names is the Simucad 17 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual name of an existing cell type STRING The attribute value is the new name of this cell in the current project type STRING Example gt actells 4 invertver musl j gt mapTargetCells aset_create_cs map larger Cel ls mux lt muxl old gt mapTargetCells nand2 nand2_oldl gt mapTargetCells inverter inverter_oldl gt cell import mux4 gds aCells targetmap mapTargetCells Cells inverter and mux1 will be imported from project mux4 gds Cell nand2 from a specified project will also be copied because there are instances if nand2 in the cell mux1 Note that the cell import operation is always hierarchical Cells existing in the current project will be renamed according to named argument mapTargetCells Named Argument nolibcells libcells type BOOLEAN If libcells specified or assigned a value of true then CELL IMPORT will be performed with the whole cell hierarchy otherwise nolibcells or libcells false cells from linked libraries will be ignored CELL OPEN Opens cell view for the specified cell Format CELL OPEN cell name Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the required cell If the cell does not exist then a new cell is created and added to the project The CELL OPEN command without parameters displays the name of the current
345. hanges to the edited cell e saveas allows you to save changes to the new cell with the name defined by the named argument newname The instances of a new cell will replace the instances of the edited cell The edited cell will then be deleted e explode inserts the instances of the edited cell into its parent cell The edited cell will then be deleted e reject discards changes in the edited cell 17 84 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Example gt eip complete saveas newname nand2_1 Completes an editing in place session with saving edited cell with new name nand_2 EIP EXIT Terminates the EIP session Format EIP EXIT Example gt elp exit EIP POP Goes out one level in the EIP instance chain Format ELP POP Example gt elp pop EIP PUSH Selects a cell instance array to edit in place Format EIP PUSH instance colnum rownum Arguments instance type LAYOUTOBJECT An instance array object to be edited in place Named Arguments colnum type INTEGER rownum type INTEGER Named arguments colnum and rownum are used to choose a specific element of instance array to edit in place colnum is a number of column and rownum is a number of row in the specified instance array Default value for both named arguments is 0 Example gt arr array 0 0 cell mux1 col 4 row 1 xdeltacol 88 gt ydeltacol 0 xdeltarow 0 ydeltarow 64 find get
346. he PCell Parameters dialog see Figure 13 15 There are three fields for each parameter name data type and default value Parameter name is shown during instantiation of P cell in the Numerical input form Parameters names can be used in the graphical P cell rules also The following LISA Xi types are valid for P cell parameters Double Integer String and Boolean Default parameter values are used in the Numerical Input form as initial ones Press the button to add a new parameter The button deletes the selected parameter Use T and buttons to change parameters order PCell Parameters 2 x t 4 Coo IT IA o OUBLE oas NTecER os ee Figure 13 15 PCell Parameters Dialog Simucad 13 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 13 3 4 Graphical P cell Preface You can add some user defined LISA Xi code to the graphical P cell using the command PCell Preface For example you can define and initialize some internal variables for using in the P cell rules This code will be added to the automatically generated P cell code at the beginning ax tw width 0 6 cont_num floor width 0 21 lt 0 4 a Zt Figure 13 16 PCell Preface Dialog 13 3 5 Graphical P cell Compiling The PCell gt Compile command applies changes made by editing of graphical objects and control blocks P cell rules and preface script to the P cell stored in the EXPERT database Check warning and err
347. he Property Bar shows info for the highlighted objects If you click the Select highlighted objects button in Preselected Objects List dialog highlighted objects will become selected Select all found objects button makes all listed objects selected MER EE w ME m z preselected Objects List aux a objecte E E E ik H Layer Cel 180 as ESDPRO west highlighted objects PA Pl h a 7 SiS ao an Instance M1112 e Region PRENDRY o 4 y Wire MI ail ie ae a Y E x F 1 rr ai rr Figure 7 3 Preselection from List of Objects 7 5 Deselection Purpose Cancels selection state for objects in the current cell This operation may be invoked in various ways Execution 1 If selection by the mouse pointer and selection by box see previous sections this chapter is used one must to switch to Select Selection Modes Deselect menu mode as it was described in Sec tions 7 2 Select By Click Drag and 7 3 Box Selection In particular if you are in Select of Rese lect mode you may depress the Ctrl key and pick object for deselection 2 The Invert Selection command of the Select submenu may be used In this case all selected objects become deselected and vice versa 3 The Deselect All command of the Select submenu cancels the selected state of all objects of the current cell 4 Finally while in Reselection mode a left mouse click in the empty space of the layout will deselect all
348. he cell with the specified name or the current cell if cell name is omitted along with or without its hierarchy Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName The name of the cell to delete BOOL bHier TRUE Delete cell together with all subcells that will no longer be in use Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteCell Cel1_1 FALSE 18 5 10 Rename Cell BOOL ExpApiRenameCell LPCTSTR szTargetCellName LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Renames the cell with the specified name or the current cell if cell name is omitted to the Target cell name Parameters LPCTSTR szTargetCellName New cell name LPCTSTR szCellName Name of cell to rename Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiRenameCell New_Cell TELL 18 5 11 Save Cell BOOL ExpApiSaveCell LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Saves cell with specified name or current cell if cell name is omitted Simucad 18 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Name of cell to save Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSaveCell Cell_1 18 5 12 Save As Cell BOOL ExpApiSaveAsCell LPCTSTR szTargetCellName LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Saves the contents of the cell with the specified name or the current cell if cell name is omitted into a new cell with the Target nam
349. he default max number for wire vertices is used see the menu command Tools gt Cut by Vertices Count gt Cut by Vertices Count Setup Example tools cutbyvertex wires selected wirevertices 4 Cuts all selected wires in the active cell view into wires with a number of no more than 4 vertices TOOLS SPLIT Splits compound objects arrays P wires and multipaths into separate objects instances wires and boxes Format TOOLS SPLIT all arrays mpaths pwires selected projeet Arguments e all arrays mpaths pwires Specifies the type of objects to be split e all default means that arrays P wires and multipaths will be split e arrays is used to split regions array splitting mode rows columns all is defined by the menu command Tools Split Array Split Mode e mpaths is used to split maltipaths e pwires is used to split P wires e selected project Specifies the operation scope e selected default means that only objects will be split e project is used to split all specified objects in the current cell library regionvertices value type Integer Example tools split pwires selected Splits all selected P wires in the active cell view WIRING Performs wiring between specified source and target contacts Format wire WIRING source target rarea layer width space or WIRING source target rarea layer width space Arguments source type P
350. he following e Run your DRC script e Using the Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup menu command set all these new layers to be derived with dummy derivation statement that consists of a single semicolon character end of statement marker 12 36 Simucad Tools 12 15 Merge Two Wires With this tool you may merge two wires from the same layer You must select a couple of wires in advance When you execute this command the nearest vertices of those wires are connected If the wires have different parameters width end join style then the parameters of the first wire will be used for the resultant wire This command can work also for separated wires but in this case it may generate unexpected results shown as Figure 12 39 AA A ee AA eee et ee eee Y A A A ee ee gt Te cm cm e e ee ee eee ee me eee ee ele ae A ag ee ee ea eee 7 i PE Ae wel e ge ee ci e ll pa paia i ee eh i e ee oe e een Figure 12 39 Merge Two Wires Simucad 12 37 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 16 Various 12 16 1 Scratch Layers The Tools gt Scrath Layers submenu contains two commands e Clean Scratch Layers Delete cell primitives cell hierarchy or delete data from all scratch layers in whole project e Delete Scratch Layers from Technology 12 16 2 Pick Layer If you select Tools Pick Layer and click at a shape or text then the layer of this object becomes active so that you can draw in this layer or copy
351. henever possible In addition it replaces this clipped piece in the original cell by an instance of the newly created cell The relationship of Clip in to Clip out is similar to that of Create Cell in Place to Create Cell from the selected objects Simucad 12 31 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 11 Merge Selected Purpose To perform a union of primitive objects that are selected in the active cell The objects processed by this operation will be replaced by nonintersecting regions whose area equals the union of the original objects The operation does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard The action may be invoked from the Merge Selected command of the Tools submenu All of merged objects including wires rectangles and circles are converted to polygons Figure 12 33 Merge Selected Figure 12 33 illustrates how the layout looks before and after the Merge Selected operation The left picture contains three selected solid objects two boxes and one region The upper left box is not intersecting with other selected objects so it is not modified The right box dashed lines is not selected so 1t is not modified either The lower box and region are replaced by a new region covering their merged area 12 12 jResize Selected Purpose Expands or shrinks areas bounded by selected objects of the current layer of the current cell The operation shifts object boundaries inside shrink or outside exp
352. hierarchical blocks cells in the layout or subcircuits in the schematic of different kinds hierarchical designs GUARDIAN uses the Spice netlist format for comparison Spice netlists describe circuits at the device level G e in terms of transistors diodes resistors and capacitors with hierarchy represented in terms of subcircuits and their instances Fie Gell Edt ian Sahel H Hierarchy usu p Whim Help 8 x i GSH sBaag H E le a Ae x g SIP ARTIE E as ae fea ez 10 MR FI MA UM PE MP Lo Me Eh sinttesiowaseegizie seal cala ef a Erie lr e k Noa more amp ACO Gatas histeria Hades Hada Tips nu prg Top Don Z Bet Me aerat ie 7 hance Aleve Marii Th E Heilist Al FF Schematic F Neslist 1 v Heilin R F lyi F Netlist 2 rl Te Hew Previous sacond netlist Riop sci_org 41 hingiecl_org fi Rispisel_corq 53 Ringtsel_crg fd Raed erg GHU Riop sci_org PDD Rippis e cr M1 a 21 RipeDscl ora NIA HJEL NCH WHOS H DEL PCH FOS 01 GRR P00 Gao WET IN PARAMS LH 0 6U LP 0 60 VH 4 5U YP 3U Me WET YOD GND HET IHY PARAMS Lie 6U LP 0 6U WHed SU WE 3U 13 SET VOD GHD WETS IHY PARAES 18 0 60 1P 0 60 Ged 50 WP 3U 4 META YOR GND META IHV FARAHS Lief 60 Creo 6U Wied SU Wea AS METS WOOD GND FEACK IHY FARANS LW9O 60 L2 0 50 Wed 5U WP 30 SUBLET IBY A FOD VES Y Hl YA TSS WOS WH LelP Weir H2 Y A VDD VDD PCH L LH FW scm fiinda AH EM ISEH 161152 Sam rerik 253315
353. ialog is invoked by the execution of the menu commands File gt Page Setup File gt Print Preview and File gt Print It consists of three sheets to specify different classes of parameters Page Layout sheet Plotting Style sheet and Miscellaneous sheet which are described below 15 4 1 Page Layout Sheet This sheet is used to define the size of the plotted image in particular to split the drawing into several pages and to set drawing margins on the page Printer HP DeskJet 595Cze Setup Size of Drawing Fit into single page Scale Parameters i width f Page f mm on chip Height f Page JA Pa 1 em on paper cale Drawing Margins Into Pages 12 ils Faper total 403 2 132 4 mm Size on paper 032 132 4 mm Size on chip 102893 67 0215 um Density 0 506363 ummm Magnification 1974 567 Skip size on chip 0 5064 um Units Lett Bottom Right Top Title Left EME DM Title overlaps drawing Right EPZA Layer legend Font fAral Normal 6 El MT Cell info Color IS e Skip details less than f J mm Page overlap width fo men Figure 15 3 Page Setup Page Layout 15 4 Simucad Plotting Sizing The simplest option for sizing the image is Fit into Single Page If it is selected the layout visible on the screen fits onto a single sheet of paper Hint You may wish to set the Landscape option from the Printer Setup together with the Fit into Single Page option b
354. ibing implantation and diffusion the same model for etch is used see Figure 12 19 The available parameters and options for implantation and diffusion are 12 18 The Mask Material drop down list is used to define the mask layer of the implantation diffusion It means that the implantation diffusion will potentially be done in the area corresponding to the geometry of the mask layer The Patterned Layer field defines the list of materials where the implantation diffusion will be done It follows the same rules than for etching operation see ETCHING above The Thickness Depth parameter defines the depth of the implantation diffusion It will limit the depth of implantation diffusion to this value even if there are several overlapping materials which can be potentially implanted beyond this depth in regards to the Patterned Layer list Simucad Tools In other words the selective implantation allowed by the Patterned Layers can be limited in terms of depth by the Thickness Depth parameter If you want only a selective implant without influence of depth parameter set the Thickness Depth parameter to a high value e Undercut and Angle parameters can be used for simulating lateral effects that take place during high temperature diffusion see ETCHING above Note In the resulting Cross Sectional View window the sections of materials representing an IMPLANTATION DIFFUSION are displayed in stipple mode The stipple which is used is th
355. icate cell will be opened for editing Library List From this list you can select one or several libraries To select several of them hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on library names Cell List From this list you can select one or several cells To select several cells hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on cell names Filter This field helps to list only the cells whose names obey a filtering criterion A filter is a template for a cell name which may contain two special symbols and The stands for any text the stands for any single symbol The is not displayed but implicitly present at the end of every filter Simucad 4 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Examples e nv means that all cells with names containing nv will be listed env inverter nvid3 e p means that cells with name containing letter p will be listed pie ape up e m x means that all cell names with first m and third x will be shown mux1 mix e a r filters all names with the second letter a that contains r after it partran layerl To apply a filter type it and press the Tab or Enter key To remove a filter to see all cells clear the filter field and press the Tab or Enter key e All Cells radio button shows all cells from the GDSII file e Top cells only radio button shows only cells that are not instanced in any other cell e Cancel If this button is checked the Cell gt Copy operation is abandoned e OK or Apply
356. ick on each of these points in order with the left mouse button This procedure is similar to drawing a polyline between these points The length of this polyline defines the required distance The precise distance is shown both in the Status bar and at the end of the last segment At the same time the polyline can be graduated see details of the ruler setup in the Setup Editor Viewer Ruler panel described in Section 11 3 6 Ruler Page The Status bar shows also the angle between the two last segments in degrees To view the distance values directly on the ruler check on the Tools gt Measure Graduate Rulers setting in the menu The ruler is graduated with distance values in equal intervals Otherwise the Tools gt Measure gt Graduate Rulers setting checked off the value of the distance is shown only in the Distance field of the status bar The last segment of a polyline ruler is done by clicking the right mouse button For a ruler to exist after finishing the distance measurements the Tools gt Measure gt Preserve Rulers menu setting must be checked otherwise the ruler disappears from the screen after finishing the distance measurements The user can show hide the rulers on off the screen by checking on off the Tools Measure Show Rulers menu item The user can remove all existing rulers by clicking on the Tools gt Measure gt Remove All Rulers menu item Otherwise all created rulers will exist during the entire session of EXPE
357. ickness Depth value e Angle value e Undercut value e Planar option e Patterned Layers list DEPOSITION This operation is used to simulate metal deposition or substrate creation above the whole surface of the structure The available parameters and options to set for the deposition are e Mask Material name Defines the layer of the current technology which refers to this step of the process The geometry of the layer along the cross section does not matter for this step because a deposit is always done above the whole surface of the chip The deposit will be done along the whole cross section so that the layer can be empty or can contain some geometry e Planar option This option was implemented to simulate Chemical Mechanical Planarization which has emerged as the best method of achieving planarity in semiconductor wafers following 12 16 Simucad Tools such processes as deposition of dielectrics and metallization for lithography to work properly the wafer surface must be almost perfectly smooth If this option is checked the deposition will be planar If not the deposition will be conformal e Thickness Depth parameter the effect of this parameter will depend of the Planar option described above e If the deposition is conformal i e with a constant thickness on all the chip this parameter will simply define this thickness of the material in current measurement unit see Figure 12 17below e If the deposit
358. ies have a sign near their names To open the list of sub properties either click on sign or press right arrow key when the cursor is on such a property To close the list of sub properties either click sign or press left arrow when the cursor is on the top of the list Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor between properties There are several classes of properties e Labels which you cannot edit e Properties which allow you to type in some text Some of them accept only numeric values for example X and Y Coordinates e Properties which allow you to select from list of values for example Layer When you click on such a property a list of values appears You can also open the list of values by pressing the Enter key when the cursor is on such a property e Properties which have a predefined list of values also allow you to type in your own values for example Rotation Properties are edited in dialog boxes for example Vertices In such properties the button with label lt appears when they have focus If you press that button then the appropriate dialog will be opened Simucad 8 13 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Property Bar Selected Objects NetName o o Type Bok _As ls Asle Figure 8 12 As is attribute values for selected boxes Property Bar x Selected Objects 0000 Extend NetName oo Figure 8 13 Access to user
359. ighted white Otherwise only the object s border is highlighted 7 9 10 Select Newest Objects If the Setup Editor Viewer gt Editing Select Newest Objects option is on the most recently created or modified objects are selected in accordance with the actual Select Reselect mode 7 9 11 Selection Tool as Default If the SetupSetup Editor Viewer gt Editing Editor Viewer gt Editing Selection Tool as Default mode is on then whenever you exit from any other editing tool you are switched to the Select by Click Drag tool 7 9 12 Fat Preselection The Select gt Fat Preselection mode changes the appearance of the preselection marker Sometimes the selected edges for stretch operation are not clearly visible If this mode is on then selection for stretch is by fat lines as well 7 9 13 Layer Selectability Visibility Primitive objects may be selected only in layers that are both visible and selectable see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 4 3 Layer Wire Setup 7 9 14 Setup Hotkeys Menus Colors Color See Chapter 11 Setup for description how to select the color for selection and preselection markers 7 8 Simucad Chapter 8 Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 1 Editing Commands This chapter describes EXPERT commands from the Edit submenu with the exception of Create and Modify operations described in Chapters 5 Creating Layout Objects and 6 Modifying Layout Objects respectively
360. igure 10 3 EIP at a Depth of Two e The cell that corresponds to the clicked instance becomes the edited cell It may be edited in the same way as the active cell the difference being that you work within a specified instance of the edited cell seeing the whole layout as its surrounding The surrounding cannot be edited at the same time To do this you must apply the EIP gt Up oper ation see below to go higher in the hierarchy to the parent instances After editing parent instances use the EIP Enter into Subcell sequence to go back down e This operation changes the EIP chain now it becomes the nested chain of all instances that contain the current edited cell instance in other words the chain of all predecessors of the just entered instance in chip s hierarchy tree If the Edit in Place gt Dim or Edit in Place gt Hide settings were used the appearances of the edited cell and its surroundings differs as described below Figure 10 3 shows in a current cell called mux4 an EIP at a depth of two This EIP is the result of first entering into a mux1 instance which is the 0 0 th item of an instance array and then entering into an instance of inverter in this mux1 instance The surrounding is dimmed One may edit the inverter 10 4 Simucad Hierarchy Operations cell by all available tools The corresponding hierarchical tree window can be activated with the menu Hierarchy Explorer Project Tree 10 3 2 Direct Pick of Object in Hie
361. imucad 17 47 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Jereate Fina delete select reselect add deselect topolygon get Arguments X11 V11X21Y 25 Xnr Yn type SEQUENCE Sequence of vertices of the wire where each pair of numeric values x y is X and Y coordinates of i th vertex accordingly You may substitute any x y pair by a variable of POINT type see examples below Named Arguments width width type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the wire width distinction from default value for specified layer or active layer angle angle type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Additional parameter of the wire joint style attribute Sets the value of miter angle distinction from the default value for the specified layer or active layer layer layer_name type STRING See the description above on 17 40 Switches extend flushend roundend Specifies the wire end style distinction from the default value for specified layer or active layer eze Jont tilo il round Jota Zm Ler Specifies the wire joint style distinction from the default value for specified layer or active layer topolygon Specifies the object created or searched for that will be converted into a polygon See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for a description of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT i
362. in the Y direction and arbitrary displaces columns only in the X direction Note If anon orthogonal rotation angle is given an array cannot be created In addition there is the Split Array control group with two check boxes Split Rows and Split Columns If both boxes are checked the array will be split into separate instances If only the Split Rows box is checked the array will be split into row arrays If only the Split Columns box is checked the array will be split into column arrays Simucad 5 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 5 3 2 Instance of Parameterized Cell If you select a parameterized cell for instancing then the Numeric Input contains the list of parameters for corresponding cells Parameters are initialized with default values You can change value of any parameter in the list Parameters Library denmio_ mux r c mz E Name Postion A 61810 Y 40 8510 m N Transformations E eo Sting Poly wen Mirroring PRE Fo Mlaper_co String Contact 7 Jlayer_ce String Contact hai 1 0000 None Array Attributes Rows f oe hi Orthogonal Columns 1 Delta Rows A 0 0000 Y 1 3000 Delta Columns x fes Y i0000 Split Array Ir Rowe F Columns Hide Parameters Ok Cancel Figure 5 9 Parameterized Cell Instancing 5 8 Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 4 Primitive Object Creation Primitive objects shapes and texts are created in
363. indows Format CELL CLOSE current all Switches Current Fats e current default switch closes the current cell window e all closes all opened cell windows Example cell Close Current cell window is closed CELL CREATE Creates a new cell from the set of selected objects Format CELL CREATE cell name inplace Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of a new cell Switches Jinplace If specified then selected objects of the edited cell will be replaced by the instance of the new cell Example 1 gt Ce ll Creace cell new Creates a new cell cell_new from selected objects Example 2 gt cell create cell new inplace Replaces the selected objects by the instance of the new cell cell_new created from them CELL COPY Creates a copy of specified cells in a target library Format CELL COPY cell namek target_lib_logname sourcemap source_cell_names targetmap target_cell_names hierarchy nolibcells libcells true false 17 8 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Arguments cell name type SEQUENCE cell _name cell_namel cell _namen is a sequence of cells represented by names to be copied target_lib_logname type STRING Logical name of target library If library logical name is not specified then cells are copied to the current project Named Arguments sourcemap source_cell_names type ATTRIBUTE_SET Case
364. ing commands interactively it is necessary to switch the Command Line dock window on It can be done in several ways e from the menu command View gt Dock Windows gt Xi Command Line switch on by checking the corresponding line or e you may assign a keyboard shortcut from the menu command Setup Customize Keyboard to show hide the command line bar The visibility of control bars is under the category of Show Control Bars in the keyboard setup panel or e by the menu command Tools gt Xi Script gt Xi Command Line and by a user defined shortcut for it The history of all commands executed from the command line is in the drop down list which is opened by clicking the small button with the black triangle pointing down You may select commands from history and rerun them possibly after editing in the command line 17 22 2 Xi Script Panel The menu command Tools Xi Script gt Script Panel invokes the xi script editor Similar to the DRC script editor it loads saves creates edits and executes xi scripts Files with xi scripts have a xis extension Basically there are two categories of scripts Some of them define new EXPERT commands e g for parametric creation of cells The others directly execute some other editing actions Of course a script file may both define and execute commands but it is better to keep this distinction in mind After a new command is defined by running the corresponding xi script it
365. ing the corresponding box e The slope of the text line is set in degrees Note It is impossible to select a font number for texts However if a text object is read from a GDSII file its font number is preserved and may be written back into a GDSII file Otherwise the font number is set to 0 e The position of the anchor point e The size of average text character Normally text is created in the current layer but you may change the layer for the text Click OK in the Numeric Input in order to create text in the current position with current settings 5 6 Parametric Wire You can create a Pwire object using the EXPERT menu command Edit gt Create Object gt Parametric Wire or the Xi command PWIRE Once you selected the command the Numeric Input panel pops up This form is similar to the ordinary wire s Numeric input but has a couple of additional fields and buttons e Template allows you to select a template stored in the technology with predefined pwire parameters e Name is used to assign a unique name for the created pwire object If Name is not specified then a system defined unique name will be assigned 5 16 Simucad Creating Layout Objects e Subparts button opens the Subparts dialog panel which allows you to add remove or update the subparts of a pwire object see Figure 5 20 The input fields Layer Width End and Joint define attributes of the master wire Vertices for the master wire can be added by mouse clicking
366. ingle eld File name NewPrjl eld File type Expert Files eld Cancel Technology NS CAD_project Techfile def_0329_3_3V ten Select Zz Figure 4 3 File Selector for New Project Results The New Project command starts a new EXPERT project with the selected file name and technology e If the option Create new projects with default new cell in the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Editing panel is checked then the Open Cell s window opens showing you the new cell created By pressing OK the layout window opens showing the empty design plane for this cell e Otherwise the project will be created without a default cell You will then have to use Cell New to create a new cell in the project Note When a new s1d project is created the new cell created is in read write RAW mode by default 4 2 1 Technology File Selection Technology file selection is performed in the following cases e anew project is created e a project is imported from a file in foreign format GDSII CIF Applicon LEF DEF OASIS e EXPERT s project of type eld or sld is loaded with external technology file because the corresponding option is set in Setup gt Technology gt General For all these operations the Load Project window has a line Technology allowing you to specify the path of the technology file You may either type it or use the file browser button labeled by Select If you click the Select button the file
367. input of xi commands from the xi command line This menu command places opens the Xi Command Line dock window if it was hidden and places input focus of the keyboard in the edit field The most convenient use of this command is via a bindkey If the xi command line dock window is visible you may click the mouse inside its edit field to enable the input of xi commands For details about the commands executable from the xi command line see Chapter 15 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Log command shows Log dock window which displays the xi commands you use and the Expert responses during command execution depending on log filter specified on the Setup Editor Viewer gt Data Safety setup page The following filters are available prefix output code location script line only for xi script execution errors warnings commands user responce display output of LISA command DISPLAY The prefix identifies the type of output shown in the Log window There are five types of output codes of log information e K gt Error message e W gt Warning message e I gt Information message e 0 gt Output of LISA command DISPLAY 12 6 Simucad Tools 12 4 TNDL Netlist Driven Layout Purpose The command Tools Netlist Driven Layout offers an additional tool to assist you in the creation of layout EXPERT Netlist Driven Layout tool increases the productivity of layout design by automating cell generation and providing visual cues to
368. int gt layer METAL2 create get Creates the same multiwire as in Example 1 Each wire is presented by layout object wire GROUP CREATE Creates group from selected objects Format GROUP CREATE GROUP DESTROY Deletes selected object s group group members are not deleted from layout Format GROUP DESTROY all Switches a11 If specified all groups in the current cell will be destroyed selected group will be destroyed otherwise PWIRE Creates modifies deletes or destroys a complex Pwire object Format PWIRE vertices name pwire_name template pwire_template_name layer layername width value extend flushend roundend Efextsorat baller rou djoine miterijoiar Ffottset value fottsetcenter oftiserletec Yoffsetrignt Veneclwires fencilwires offsetwires offsetwires boxes thoxes Efereate fmodity delete spiit Arguments vertices type SEQUENCE Sequence of vertices of the master wire object Named Arguments 17 58 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e name pwire_name type STRING Specifies a unique name for the Pwire object If not presented the system defines a unique name and assigns it to the new object e template pwire_template_name type STRING Specifies the Pwire template stored in the technology as a basis for the Pwire object The Pwire template contains all necessary attributes for the Pwir
369. integrity and security throughout the design cycle t Design Rule Checks 1 Highly efficient and flexible on line and batch Design Rule Checker 2 DRC in selected area 3 Real Time DRC or DRC on the fly Real Time DRC watches while you are editing the design and reports violations immediately It runs as a separate process in multithreading mode and takes full advantage of multi CPU machines All modes of DRC impose no restrictions on type of geometry and complexity of layout Convenient visualization of errors is in both flat and hierarchical modes Project Tree The chip navigation tool Project Tree presents the layout s hierarchy in the form of a level by level expanded hierarchy tree of instances cells It gives easy to use ways for exploring complex hierarchical VLSI designs Project Tree allows fast loading of a required cell instanced at any level of the hierarchy marking arbitrary instances on the background of the whole chip and displaying selection and search 1 2 Simucad Introduction results The option Show all projects shows the hierarchy for all libraries activated in current project Project Tree is closely related with Edit in Place selection operations and Cell Map Hierarchy Manipulation EXPERT delivers an advanced environment and tools to support the methodology of hierarchical design and editing of VLSI layout These functions are provided by a number of specific Cell Hierarchy operations which make a user d
370. ion The size of the shift is defined by the Scrolling steps in pixels value of the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Viewing form see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 Editor Viewer Form The maximum value considered is 50 You may also use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars to move the visible window over the layout Finally you may use the Cell Map Window described in Section 9 6 Cell Map 9 3 4 Pan To Reference Point The Pan gt To Reference Point command pans to the temporary reference point if it is set even if it is inactive at the moment 9 3 5 Pan Autopan The Pan gt Autopan menu command acts as a toggle and turns on off the autopan mode If this mode is on and EXPERT is in any drawing mode object creation ruler zoom box etc then when the cursor comes close to the border of the layout window the layout scrolls automatically The autoscroll threshold how close the cursor must be to the border is 50 pixels The scroll step determines the distance the autoscroll will move the window once the threshold is reached Simucad 9 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 9 4 Zoom Zoom features allows you to increase or reduce the visible sizes of the cell layout in the window so that you may either investigate small details of the layout structure or overview its parts in general Several ways of zooming are provided by the View Zoom submenu Zoom Into Window Zoom Out of Window Zoom In Zoom O
371. ion is set as planar i e with a varying thickness along the cross section depending of the relief of last deposit the Thickness Depth parameter will define the distance from the top last planar deposit to the top of the planar deposit which is being defined the substrate is considered as the first planar deposit of the process description l Thickness Figure 12 17 Thickness Parameter for Deposit Step ETCHING Etch operation simulates the etching or patterning of a material layer The implementation of this process operation allows you to choose which layers will be potentially etched The available parameters and options for the etching step are the following e In the Mask Material drop down list choose the layer whose geometry will define the mask of etching It means that the etching will be potentially done under all geometries of the Mask Material layer In short this layer must represent the negative of the real mask used in chip fabrication see Figure 12 18 below e In the Patterned Layer drop down list choose which materials will be etched assuming that they are under Mask Material layer shapes e When selecting the empty field in this list the etching will be done on any material at the surface of the device structure in the current state of the process e When selecting the Edit field of this list the Csv Patterned Layers window will appear see Figure 12 18 In this window you are prompted to s
372. is executed the cell selector dialog appears showing the list of all cells with non saved changes You must select the cells you want to save and click the OK button The selected cells will be saved on a disk in eld format if the opened file is of eld type and in sld format if the file is of s1d type The remaining cells from this list will not be saved but the changes will not be lost and may be saved later 4 4 2 Save When you apply File gt Save command is applied to the lt PROJECT_NAME gt project it saves the actual state of the current project to the lt PROJECT_NAME gt eld file rewriting it in the directory from where the file was opened In addition any changes in writable libraries linked to the current project will be saved as well When the opened file is of s1d type The File gt Save command will have no effect if all cells are in read only mode R O If certain cells of the project are in read write mode R W or Check Out the File gt Save operation performs the equivalent of a Check In immediately followed be a Check Out operation for these cells This is invisible to the user but the state of the R W cells is now saved in the project 4 10 Simucad Project Cell Commands 4 4 3 Save As When the File gt Save As command is applied the file selector dialog appears The extension chosen from the File Type field defines the format of the ELD SLD GDSII OASIS CIF LEF DEF or Applicon file The name of the
373. is option is on then Project New command will create a new empty cell in the new project Always accept changes in the edited cell upon exit from EIP Under this option you exit from EIP without the saving confirmation dialog and changes during EIP are always accepted Right mouse button changes selection tool to move If this option is checked then the right mouse button click starts the Move command if an object is selected Allow L Shape Mode Input for Regions and Wires This option is used to disable the Over the Point Drawing mode see Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects Over the Point Drawing on page 5 5 for more information Use Property bar for Numeric Input This option is useful when you want to choose where to display information about shapes you are designing or modifying e If checking it you will have to activate the Property bar with the menu View gt Dock Windows gt Property Bar in order to see the parameters coordinates of a shape while designing or modifying it Simucad Setup e If not checking it the parameters of shapes during their creation will be displayed in a separate window called the Numeric Input Bar which can be activated with the menu Edit Numeric Input The Property Bar will be used only for the display of parameters of existing selected shapes The Numeric Input menu item will exist only if this option is checked You need to restart EXPERT after changing this option in order to act
374. is position a preselected segment is picked for stretch If the cursor points at several overlapping segments you can choose which of them you need to select deselect Hold down the Alt key and click the left mouse button several times Your preselection will change cyclically among the overlapped segments If you release the Alt key and click once more with mouse still then the preselected segment will be selected 8 10 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 7 2 Sample Run The Stretch operation is controlled by several settings To get a glimpse on how it works let s step through the following scenario 1 Draw a box 2 Ensure that following options are set e Edit gt Angle Mode gt Preserve Angles Mode is turned off e Edit Direction Snap Mode is set to None 3 Pick one side of the box by clicking on it One edge of the box should become selected 4 Grab the selected part by pressing the left mouse button and moving it around while holding mouse button You will see how the box is stretched 5 Turn on Edit gt Angle Mode Preserve Angles Mode option 6 Pick two adjacent edges of the box by clicking on one of its corners These edges should become selected 7 Grab the selected part and move it around by holding mouse button You will see another sort of stretching 8 7 3 Specification The behavior of the Stretch operation is controlled by the following modes e set selection options e enter the Stretch operati
375. is section 4 3 1 Open Command Purpose Use File gt 0Open command to load a project stored in an ELD SLD CIF Applicon LEF DEF GDSII or OASIS file using a technology file to define layer attributes 1f necessary Execution There are some differences whether you are loading a native eld or s1d project importing from a foreign format GDSII CIF Applicon or OASIS or loading a LEF DEF format They will be described in subsequent sections Selecting File gt 0Open and the following extended file browsing form for project file selection will appear Load Project Look in 13 N CAD_project Cross5 ect Pe fae ie Ti Te a Dir 11 22 2004 10 24404M Read write Dir 1141022004 2 33 40 PM Read write Dir 1171072004 2 56 28 PM Read write converter gds 6144 File 114102004 2 35 70 PM Read write File name Joonvertengds 00 File type GOS II Files gde sf tm stm db gdellerr Cancel Technology N CAD_project Techfle def_ 0329 3 3 ten Select T Output name N CAD_project CrossSect convertereld Select Options Zz Figure 4 4 Project Selection Form File type You can choose ELD SLD CIF Applicon LEF DEF GDSII or OASIS file type for the project file to be loaded Only files with the corresponding extension will be shown in the file list Simucad 4 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The allowable extensions for GDSII OASIS Applicon and CIF files are listed in this field
376. ith respect to it y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies horizontal axis for the reflection of the selected objects with respect to it Note Using both named arguments in the command MIRROR SELECTION is illegal Switches duplicate If specified then new objects will be created from selected ones and mirrored according to specified Axis Example 1 gt mirror selection x 4 Mirror with respect to vertical axis at x 4 Example 2 gt mirror selection y 7 Mirror with respect to horizontal axis at y 7 MOVE LAYER Moves the set of selected objects into the layer Format MOVE LAYER layer_name 17 66 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Arguments layer_name type STRING The name of a layer optional parameter if it is absent objects are moved into the active layer in the edited cell Example gt move layer Metal2 Selected objects are moved to layer Metal2 MOVE SELECTION Moves the set of selected objects of the edited cell Format MOVE SELECTION shift_x shift_y Arguments shift_x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Displacements in X direction shift y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Displacements in Y direction Example gt move selection 0 5 1 Moves the selected set by x 0 5 y 1 from the original position ORIGIN Sets a new origin for the current cell Format ORIGIN x y Arguments x type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE y type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE x y are the
377. itor Viewer gt General Note The number of decimals displayed by the Position and Distance fields can be set in the Setup Editor Viewer Viewing panel in the Decimals displayed field Simucad 12 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 2 2 Polyline Ruler Purpose Ruler determines the distance between two points possibly along a polygonal path In addition it reports the angle in degrees between its two last segments The dialog tab Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Ruler allows you to set the ruler s font color and the style of ruler marking Execution 12 4 To begin measuring the distance select the Tools gt Measure gt Ruler menu command The cursor assumes the Ruler shape shown in Figure 12 3 WASS Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help Measure 3 2 Ruler pap Xs 17500 0000 Ys 1700 0000 mm e 2I Script Pi Poinkiline Distance 5000 ee 15000 20000 5000 Netlist Driven Layout k Remove All Rulers 2 Cut By Line Remove Selected Rulers Cut By Line Modes Fl y Graduate Rulers Clip Gut w Preserve Rulers e Clip In e Show Rulers 42200 Gthach Texts Coordinate Axes E Detach Texts Origin 4000 Polygonize e B A Merge Selected 10000 Resize Selected 2 ne en ne enn nn nn ee en eee eee ener e ee rss Scale Selected i a a 4 Scale Whole Layout Figure 12 3 Rulers coordinate axes origin cross hairs To define the distance between several points you must cl
378. ivate it Simucad Flip rotate single selected instance array with respect to its origin This option acts for rotate 90 and flip operations If it is not checked the operation is done as usual with respect to the geometric center Last mouse click does not add a point to wire region When a wire region is created the right mouse click terminates the operation but does not add a point to the shape Convert circles ellipses to polygons immediately Upon drawing circles ellipses will be immediately converted to polygons according to the current settings from the Shapes panel of this setup Forbid creation of self intersecting shapes If this option is on then self intersecting shapes will be forbidden during creation modification If the option is off you will see the warning allowing you to accept such shapes Forbid creation of non orthogonal arrays If this option is on creation of non orthogonal arrays is forbidden only 1x1 array is allowed to be built A non orthogonal array is the one whose step in a row has a nonzero Y component or whose step in a column has nonzero X component Autorun Start xi script You may select the name of the xi script that automatically executes when you start EXPERT Typically it contains definitions of custom commands and definitions of EXPERT settings for your workspace Autorun End xi script You may select the name of the xi script that automatically executes when you exit EXPERT Typically it c
379. jects in the layout Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGetIgnorePrimitives 18 12 Edit Operations 18 12 1 Cut BOOL ExpApiCut Purpose Cuts selected cell objects to clipboard Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCut 18 12 2 Copy BOOL ExpApiCopv Purpose Copies selected cell objects to clipboard 18 52 Simucad Expert API Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCopy 18 12 3 Paste BOOL ExpApiPaste double dx double dy BOOL ExpApiPaste RCEAPoint pt Purpose Pastes current clipboard contents into new place with placement coordinates Parameters double dx double dy Placement coordinates RCEAPoint pt Placement coordinates Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiPaste 50 0 80 0 BOOL bResult ExpApiPaste CEAPoint 100 0 200 0 18 12 4 Move BOOL ExpApiMove double dx double dy BOOL ExpApiMove RCEAPoint pt Purpose Moves selected cell objects to new place shifted relatively to the initial position Parameters double dx double dy Placement coordinates RCEAPoint pt Placement coordinates Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiMove 50 0 80 0 BOOL bResult ExpApiMove CEAPoint 100 0 200 0 18 12 5 Duplicate BOOL Exp
380. l indicates the size that the current layout view will occupy in the next view of the window There are two ways of zooming out of a window The user may click at any two opposite corners of the required zoom out box Alternatively it is possible to define the zoom out box by drag mouse action Depress the left mouse button at one point drag the mouse to the second point and then release the button The current view will be relocated where the zoom out box was drawn Figure 9 11 shows the layout before and after the Zoom Out of Window operation Figure 9 11 Zoom Out of Window Simucad 9 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 9 4 5 Fixed Ratio Zoom In and Out Purpose The Zoom In and Zoom Out operations increase and decrease the resolution of the image inside the current window respectively The center point of the visible part of the image remains in place These operations permit you to accurately investigate or edit layout details located at the window center Zoom In or to see a wider neighborhood of the currently visible part of layout The resolution changing rate is pre defined which makes these operations easy to use From the other side it can be modified from the Setup Editor Viewer gt Viewing form Zoom Factor value See Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 3 Editor Viewer Form for more information Figure 9 12 shows the layout before and after the Zoom In operation Zoom Factor 2 Figu
381. l mode SFM_BOUNDARY SFM_SOLID SELECTINSTANCES get BOOLEAN Returns TRUE 1f instances are selectable returns FALSE otherwise SELECTINSTANCES put BOOLEAN Allows or disallows select ing instances et SELECTMODE g INTEGER predefined Returns current Select SM_SELECT SM_DESELECT SM_RESELECT 17 116 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell SELECTMODE INTEGER predefined Sets the Select Mode SFM_ BOUNDARY SFM_SOLID SELECTPRIMITIVES get BOOLEAN Returns TRUE if primi tives are selectable returns FALSE otherwise SELECTPRIMITIVES put BOOLEAN Allows or disallows select ing primitives Other components will be added in the order of their priority Example gt expert_setup lpe_derivedlayertech false gt expert setup lpe derivediavyerseript d dre Lest dsi The derived layers for HIPEX execution will be calculated using the DRC script d drc test dsf rather than current technology 17 21 Creating P cells command P cells in the EXPERT environment can be created either by using the P cell graphical user interface or by Xi script using LISA and Xi predefined commands and procedures Textual P cells are more suitable for creation of complex designs because of using powerful features of LISA Xi language that are impossible to generate automatically The Xi command DEFINE PCELL passes the definition of P cell script to the EXPERT data base in the form of pcell master DEFINE PCELL Define
382. las o o dis id 18 45 19 04 DESTO All GhOUDS tbn tias a OE 18 46 16 10 S lection OPENS uscar area a ibas 18 46 18 10 1 Select Newest socorrer oia a 18 46 18 102 SOC cr OO A E ones quel e e oo 18 46 1810S See nerds adi and ans ea 18 47 A no A A tebe 18 47 19103 Descent a e e eared ae tet 18 47 18 10 6 Invert Selection ii ia A A Gees 18 48 18107 A A ea eat a ie eeu se 18 48 13 10 09 OCIOCU OW BOK A aire a c Baad we Sides Gare eee ep asg eee wae war et yx ton ee Baa gered aoe 18 48 18 11 Selection MOGES vampira aa chanson a A Denson aaah AR 18 49 18 11 1 Set Select Mode borrar rra dl dida il 18 49 16 1122 Gel Select MOC sc costra rd tos BONER sl Rc Ai 18 49 18 11 353 lt CONCE MOS ra a A lA eh a 18 49 18 11 4 Get Concern Mode 0oooccococccoocc eee ee tenet eee e teen tennetaees 18 50 jo th ff foe 214 010 ae 0 iii tot or ea eee eee ee 18 50 Simucad Expert ExpertViews User s Manual 18 116 6 0 zs conosca en oscar odia ciel 18 51 TOs te 7 Zoe IGNORE cl wise cee a otk ate tsa doen Wee a O nal 4 nie Raat 18 51 18 11 8 Get Ignore INSIANCES se tiicnce ace ann dena ae ad aca lean AS 18 51 19 19 Serlgnore PMIMNIVES cia id siii 18 51 18 11 10 Get Ignore Primitives ecards AA dia 18 52 16 I2 Edit OPEraltiON S naaa it a aaa 18 52 ROU aaa ON 18 52 19122 CODY ro ia ad bis 18 52 A E oe ee ee ee 18 53 19 124 MONO sc baii eee ee eee ee eee er ee ee ooh de ee ee ai 18 53 18125 DUPICA errada AAN a 18 53 19 2o
383. le DEFAULT 3 PARAMETER length TYPE Double DEFAULT 1 PARAMETER layer _ndiff TYPE String DEFAULT Layerl PARAMETER layer poly TYPE String DEFAULT Layer2 PARAMETER layer_metl TYPE String DEFAULT Layer3 PARAMETER layer cont TYPE String DEFAULT Layer4 BODY BEGIN W width W_def 3 NGates gates NGates_def 1 L length L def lgj SizeX def 8 L default tran Size x SizeY_def 3 default ntran size y Met Poly dist 1 Distance between poly and metl Poly_Poly_dist 1 Distance between poly if NGates gt 1 cont Cont dist 1 Distance between contacts Cont_size ley h contact SLze Cont_NDiff_dist 0 5 Distance between contacts and ndiff Met_NDiff_offset 0 5 17 118 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Poly NDurt Orrseer Lis IF W LSS 2 THEN W 2 IF E LESS Loud THEN i Des LE AGAR G9 THEN E anes L offset L L def 2 T must be multiple by NGates W_ offset W SizeY def StretchR i Poly Poly us NGates 1I LE L dez StretchR 0 ade ds Ma layer layer_ndiff SizeX_ndiff SizeX def StretchkR PosX_ndiff SizeX def 2 L offset PosY ndiff W 2 box Posx naiff PosY nda Sizex ndriti Ww metal StTretcnMetCont SErECCHR Ml he der layer layer_metl SIZEX met SIZEOX def La Met NDI offset Met Poly dist E det 2 SizeY met W Met_NDiff_ offse
384. le contains individual cell and layer object statistics Use output layer remapping table The GDSII Output Setup dialog is shown in Figure 11 17 Simucad 11 35 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e GDS Output y lol x Files Dutput GOS file extension W Use output layer remapping table OB units f Use default OB units E Use user DB units Lise internal OB units DB units m DB units in user units Cells M cell name limit symbols Write top cells first subcells after parent cells M Conver cell names to uppercase Write library cells M Conver cell names to lowercase D Add library prefix to cell names Layers Write derlwed layers D Write scratch layers W Restrict layer numbers and datatypes Min layer number Min datatype Default Max layer number Max datatype Wires Regions Arrays Convert wires to regions Normalize arrays Cut large polyqonswires many vertices Positive array steps Max vertex count tor regions Default Max Vertex count for wires Hl Figure 11 17 GDSII Output Setup Dialog 11 5 1 Description of Particular Options GDSIl Input Panel GDSII file extension s The GDSII file extension field in the Input group inputs the list of possible extensions of GDSII files e g like this gds sf a list of file specifications are separated by a semicolon or asterisks This list is used in the File gt Open and File gt Import
385. leanCellHierarchySLayers Purpose Deletes data from all scratch layers of the current cell and of all its ancestor cells Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanCellHierarchySLayers 18 6 18 Clean the Whole Project in Scratch Layers BOOL ExpApiCleanWholeProjectSLayers Purpose Cleans Scratch Layers in the whole Project Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiCleanWholeProjectSLayers 18 6 19 Delete Scratch Layers in Technology BOOL ExpApiDeleteTechnologySLayers Purpose Deletes Scratch Layers from Technology Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiDeleteTechnologySLayers Simucad 18 27 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 7 Layout Objects 18 7 1 Get Object Specs void ExpApiGetObjectProperty HOBJECT hObject OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Gets Property of the specified Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle to Object OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Reference to Object Property Return None Example HOBJECT hObject some object OBJECT PROPERLTY Property ExpApiGetObjectProperty hObject Property 18 7 2 Add Object HOBJECT ExpApiAddObject OBJECT_PROPERTY amp Property Purpose Adds a new Object with specified property Parameters OBJECT_P
386. lease the button The Dock Window may also be resized while undocked Hint In the default layout the toolbars are docked to the screen border You may undock the toolbar by one of the two ways described above and place it to another location If you do not want a toolbar to be docked to any border of EXPERT S screen drag the toolbar until the outline of the dragged box becomes wider If the bar was dock on the side of the screen the direction of the outline box will also change from vertical to horizontal By releasing the right mouse button the screen s border will be free of the docked bar and the layout area will extended up to this border Hint Sometimes you may wish to sweep the toolbars under the carpet e make them only partially visible while the majority of a toolbar is being shifted beyond the computer screen border Toolbar locations are saved restored to from ecf files and application registry so that they are memorized between sessions of EXPERT As a result when EXPERT is loaded for the first time the toolbar positions may be strange sometimes You must place the toolbars properly and save the setup Simucad 3 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 3 1 3 Mouse Cursor Functions Mouse Buttons Most of the work with EXPERT is done via mouse The mouse is used to point to to click on and to drag 1 to operate on windows dialogs tool bars and menus 2 to operate on layout objects inside the windows The
387. lect Edit gt Direction Snap Modes or click the buttons at the Drawing Bar The following modes are available e None no restrictions on cursor movements e Diagonal cursor may move in vertical horizontal and diagonal directions from the starting point e Orthogonal e Vertical e Horizontal 5 2 Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 2 4 Region Modes When you create a new shape you can use it to modify existing ones by selecting one of the three Region Modes from the menu or from the Drawing Bar These modes are Normal Hole or Merge These modes are mutually exclusive En Numeric Input Tab ngle Mode Direction Snap Mode H E Normal ww Snap Cursor Eo Grid ral Merge Gravity Lm Hole Search Hole Selected Figure 5 3 Region Mode Submenu Normal mode simply draws a new shape Hole mode is for making holes and Merge mode is for merging shapes Figure 5 4 Creation of a Box Hole in Wire Simucad 5 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Hole Mode In this mode the new object is treated as a hole or as a cut in the existing ones in the active layer If the new object overlaps several old ones in the active layer it makes holes in all of them e Ifthe new object is completely inside an old one then a true hole is created In Figure 5 5 a new box creates a hole in a thick wire Note that in this case the wire is converted to region e Ifthe new object partially overlaps an older one then a
388. line of text Named Arguments height textheight type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets the height of a character If the argument is not present the default value from the registry will be used width textwidth Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets the width of character If the argument is not present the default value from the registry will be used slope slope Type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Sets the slope of the text line in degrees Default value for slope argument is 0 0 degree layer layer_name type STRING Simucad 17 45 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual See the description above on 17 40 attachto layoutobject Type LAYOUTOBJECT The layout object to which the text will be attached detachfrom layoutobject Type LAYOUTOBJECT The layout object from which the text will be detached and added to the current edited cell Switches Aboteromiett oottomeenter Bottomeigne middleleft middlecenter middleright EOPLEEFE f Eopesnter FEOPELOnE Defines text alignment style with respect to its origin srant Indicates that text will be slanted italic ie ena an aroyn ap Indicates that text will be mirrored with respect to the X axis polygonal It corresponds to the Polygonal text option of the Numeric Input panel for EXPERT S Edit gt Create Object gt Text command Combinations of switches polygonal and get polygonal and delete polygonal and attach are i
389. ll break segments of regions and wires in points where the line intersects them These points are called Jog Points When you have added some Jog Points use the Modify and Stretch tools to select parts of segments divided by Jog Points individually If you no longer need Jog Points you can select the Edit gt Remove All Jog Points menu command EXPERT also automatically deletes Jog Points when you no longer use the Modify or Stretch tools A common use of this operation is to split parallel buses of wires using 45 split lines In that way it is possible to simultaneously stretch all wires in the bus as shown in Figures 8 8 and 8 9 Figure 8 8 Example 1 Wire splitting 8 12 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations Figure 8 9 Example 1 Stretching of split wires It is possible to add edges to a polygon as shown in Figure 8 10 Figure 8 10 Example 2 Stretching of split wires 8 9 Inspecting Changing Object Properties When you select objects in layout view the Property Bar shows common properties of all selected objects of course you can select just one object and view properties of that particular object You can change any attribute and user defined property of objects and apply them by pressing the Ok button in the Property Bar You can navigate in the Property Bar either by using mouse clicking on property you wish to change or using arrow keys Some properties for example Position have sub properties Such propert
390. llegal for XI command text proportional Sets attributes proportional for polygonal texts If the text is not polygonal polygonal is not present then it does not have any meaning See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for descriptions of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 Sex 000 Expert height 075 widin 005 Creates the text Expert with specified attributes in the active layer Default slope is equal 0 default bottomleft align style is used Example 2 Sex 10 0 Expert height 0 5 Ww1dthA 0 5 slant smi rror layer INNOTE Creates the slanted and mirrored text in the layer INNOTE Example 3 gt text 0 0 Expert height 0 5 width 0 5 create select reselect Creates the text in the active layer and selects it Other objects are deselected Example 4 17 46 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell gt Eext 0 0 Expert height 05 wrdth 05 Jdeletes Searches for the object with specified attributes in the active layer and deletes Example 5 gt L6xt 0 0 Expert Jheight 0 5 width 0 5 gt property ihanne lT exe widens Oss Creates the object with specified properties in the active layer Note that the named argument text is not used for text object Example 6 SO le Te
391. lls See LISA LANGUAGE FOR INTERFACING SIMUCAD APPLICATIONS USER S MANUAL and Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell for syntax of the xi scripts necessary for creation of P cells 2 3 IC Layout Design Concepts 2 3 1 Design Plane A cell opened for editing in EXPERT is associated with the design plane endowed with the orthogonal coordinate system The coordinate origin of the design plane is the cell s origin In other words the cell origin is at point 0 0 in its design plane All objects of an opened cell are specified in terms of coordinates in the design plane For wires and regions coordinates are used to specify their vertices For boxes ellipses and cell instances coordinates are used to specify the position of their origin Any mouse position on a visible part of the design plane is also associated with a pair of coordinates in the design plane Coordinates are computed by EXPERT S internal functions You can enter them either by the mouse or from the keyboard using EXPERT input forms including EXPERT S command line input When a cell is instanced its origin is placed at the instance position and all objects of the cell are placed preserving their positions relative to cell origin Coordinates are visible and accessible for you in terms of selectable measurement units EXPERT gives you a choice of several common units and even allows you to define your own measurement unit For internal computations
392. lly it is applied after editing the layout or after changing the technology Reextraction Options This submenu tells you what to do if the project was changed You have the following options e Always Reextract e Never Reextract e Prompt for Reextraction Node Filling e Wireframe e Solid e Stipple e Select Stipple This command allows you to select the filling pattern for node highlighting during node probing search Recall that the color for node highlighting can be selected at the Setup Hotkeys Menus Colors Color form Note If layer type Selectable set to off objects from this layer are always drawn unfilled This is continent for layers as substrate or bulk Simucad 14 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 14 6 Calibre EXPERT can be used in conjunction with Calibre DRC and LVS verification tools You can launch verification from within EXPERT and then use EXPERT for highlighting errors Setup For setting up Calibre tools please refer to Mentor Graphics documentation EXPERT expects the MGC_HOME environment variable to be set and pointing to the location where Calibre is installed You can also use the environment variable MGC_CALIBRE_LAYOUT_SERVER to specify socket number which will be used for communication between EXPERT and Calibre tools By default EXPERT uses socket 9189 If it is not available EXPERT tries to open different ports When EXPERT successfully opens a socket it reports the socket nu
393. ls wa gt wa Ola va E rea hnos Nell Substrate gt Nell Substrate gt mi m 7 Ll m Metall 100 SS cm myo na Pi T i r J m Metal Oo ar Add Delete Up Down Figure 12 16 Cross Sectional Viewer Setup i Derived Layers The first field of the Cross Sectional Viewer setup is the Derived Layers radio button Indeed the derived layers can be useful in the process definition because several process steps are using masks which are created thanks to boolean operations on other masks This radio button allows you to choose the derived layers which will be taken into account for the Cross Section generation e If checking the Use Current Technology button the derived layers which are integrated to the current project technology will be taken into account e Ifchecking the Use DRC Script button the derived layers will be generated from a DRC script In this case you are expected to type the path of this DRC script in the text field or browse to it with Simucad 12 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual the browser button the syntax of DRC scripts and the DRC script panel functioning are explained in GUARDIAN USER S MANUAL Note In any case the derived layers must be in the technology of the current project As a matter of fact when using a layer of the technology for the process definition either a physical layer or a derived one it mus
394. lt P_Name gt eld or lt P_Name gt sld where P_Name is the name of the project before closing No Pressing this button abandons the modifications made after the latest save operation and closes the project Cancel Pressing this button cancels the Close operation You can save some or all changed cells by selecting File gt Save Cells or you can discard changes since the last save load in other cells by selecting Cell Discard Changes Figure 4 7 Expert Warning Box Simucad 4 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 4 6 Cell gt New Purpose Creates a new cell either in the current project or in any attached library Creating parameterized cells is described in Chapter 13 Parameterized Cells Execution Selecting Cell gt New will open the New Cell dialog as shown in Figure 4 8 Library List contains the name of the work project together with the list of all activated libraries The name of the work project is shown in angle brackets You have to select the target library and fill the New cell name field You can also click at an existing cell name in the Cell List to copy it into the New cell name field for editing Library List ES lt Mund gt N Expert oinverter lt Muxd gt Tamus lt Mund gt mun lt Mund gt Ananda lt Mund gt Top cells only f All cells e Open Now Cell Filter New cell name PE A Cell preview Show info _ Cancel o Amy E Figure 4 8
395. lysilicon and metal while other layers are conventional created for verification or annotation purposes Usually it is said that an object lies in a layer Layers have various user defined attributes such as name color GDSII number See Chapter 11 Setup Section Layer Color Setup for details EXPERT supports an unlimited number of layers If you however plan to export your design using GDSII stream format remember that many systems have restrictions on the allowable range of GDSII layer numbers and datatypes The old GDSII specification sets the allowable range 0 63 and modern systems allow the range to be set to at least 0 255 Primitives 2 4 The class of primitive objects in EXPERT is comprised of wires regions boxes and ellipses For convenience of shape creation there are two special classes of regions donuts and rolled regions Often primitives are called shapes We shall avoid the latter term in the manual because of a possible confusion the shape of a shape Primitives are characterized by the following e A primitive belongs entirely to a single layer e A primitive is not assembled from other layout objects When a cell is opened its own primitives can be directly created deleted or modified Formal definitions of primitives are given below e Region is a part of the design plane bounded by a closed polygonal line polyline with at least three vertices e Wire is a parameterized regi
396. m linked libraries will be included in the hierarchical cell operation With Hierarchy is on e Ifthe With Library Cells is not checked the subcells from linked libraries will be excluded in the hierarchical cell operation With Hierarchy is on Second step Simucad 4 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e If OK or Apply was selected the File Name Selection box appears titled Select Project file Select the type of export file from the drop down menu GDSII OASIS CIF Applicon Xi script ELD or SLD The File Name field is used to type in the file name extension is added automatically Alternatively an existing name may be selected with the extension from the list of files Click on it and it is copied into the File Name field You may edit it there or use as is Clicking the Save button saves the project into the specified file Clicking the Cancel button abandons the save operation If the name of the existing file is selected for saving a warning box appears with three options e Pressing the Yes button overwrites the existing file e Pressing the No button returns control to the Save As dialog box e Pressing the Cancel button abandon the save operation Results Saves the cells in the specified file All cells instanced in the saved one directly or recursively are saved into this file as well unless an option to avoid this is set as mentioned above If a cell that contains instances of parameterized cells is exp
397. mber to the log file Calibre DRC You have two options invoking Calibre DRC directly from EXPERT as a batch job or through Calibre Interactive To invoke Calibre DRC as batch job select the menu command Verification gt Calibre gt Batch DRC You will be prompted with the dialog shown in Figure 14 10 mixi Cell TOP_ALL ital Rules file E 7 Hierarcheal DRC OK Cancel Figure 14 10 Batch DRC parameters This dialog allows you to select the which cell and the rules file and mode that DRC will run To start verification enter all parameters and click the OK button When the DRC operation finishes EXPERT will automatically load DRC errors To run DRC through Calibre Interactive select the menu command Verification gt Calibre gt Run DRC You will be prompted with the Calibre Interactive panel where you can enter all DRC parameters and start a DRC operation After DRC finishes Calibre Interactive will invoke Calibre RVE Use it to browse DRC errors and highlight them in EXPERT Calibre LVS To run Calibre LVS verification select the menu command Verification gt Calibre gt Run LVS EXPERT will launch Calibre Interactive where you can enter all LVS parameters and start LVS verification After LVS finishes Calibre Interactive will invoke Calibre RVE Use it to browse LVS errors and highlight corresponding layout geometry For more information on using Calibre Interactive and RVE please refer to Mentor
398. ment cluster defines the scope where the scratch layers will be cleaned up e primitive means that primitive layout objects laying on the scratch layers of the current opened cell will be deleted e hierarchy cleans scratch layers in the current cell and scratch layers of its whole cell hierarchy e project cleans scratch layers in the all cells of the loaded cell library SCRATCH DELETE Removes the scratch layer definitions from technology Format CRATCH DELETE Arguments None 17 32 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell NEW LAYER Adds a new layer to the current technology Format NEW LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name type STRING Specifies the name of layer to be created Named Arguments GDSIInumber datatype Specifies the GDSII number and datatype respectively red green blue Numbers between 0 and 255 that specify the RGB value of the layer color Example gt new layer LayerErr GDSIInumber 63 datatype 0 Adds LayerErr with GDSII number 63 and datatype 0 DELETE LAYER Deletes the layer from technology All objects on specified layer in all cells will be deleted Operation cannot be undone Format DELETE LAYER layer_name Arguments layer_name type STRING Example gt delete layer LayerErr Deletes LayerErr layer RENAME LAYER Renames the layer Format RENAME LAYER old_layer_name new_layer_name Arguments old_layer_name type STRING Nam
399. mmand xi Editor XiScript3 o x File Edit Find Script Window 18 x IC ana SIF Koala aAa DAGE BO DEFINE PCELL ntran REPLACE PARAMETER length TYPE Double DEFAULT 0 4 PARAMETER width TYPE Double DEFAULT 0 8 BODY BEGIN END PCell Parameters 31x 3 Parameters Detault value DOUBLE gt DOUBLE l 04 cancel Z Na Figure 13 17 Textual P cell Creation You can create textual P cells from scratch in the Xi script editor using the predefined Xi command DEFINE PCELL Simucad 13 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 13 5 Conversion From Graphical to Textual P cell The PCell5Show Xi Script command is displayed as a Xi script for both graphical and textual P cells You can edit and apply changes only to textual P cells with the Seript gt Run command from the Xi Script Editor When you try run a script with a P cell definition and there is a graphical P cell with the same name in the current database a warning message will pop up see Figure 13 18 Expert 4 3 4 bt xl 3 Graphical peel ntran_g will be replaced by the textual pcell Layout editing will not be available Continue Yes No Figure 13 18 Graphical P cell Conversion Warning Once graphical P cell is converted to a textual one you will not be able edit the last one in the graphical way A conversion from textual to graphical format is not supported 13 12 Simucad Pa
400. mmand scripts Interface Script Files xis These files contain xi scripts EXPERT interface scripts Some other file types used by EXPERT such as log message files remapping files and so forth are described in the corresponding chapters 2 12 Simucad Chapter 3 User Interface 3 1 Expert Interface This chapter gives a general description of EXPERT S user interface When starting EXPERT an operating window the pull down menu and a set of functional and information bars will appear on the screen A sample layout of these elements is shown in Figure 3 1 Expert 4 2 3 build 990 05t999 S005T999_ST f loj x pad File Cell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries PCell Setup Window Help 8 x IDeal spaan agp A H ME Hew x 2360 1000 Y 1333 6000 fum zl E m Bil 124 HHH A Type Instance as Library lt 05t999 gt b Cell 50057999 Name E Position 0 0000 0 00 C2 Rotation 90 a Scale 1 0000 Jal Mirroring None a Rows Nu Columns 1 gt Orthogonal true Delta Rowsi aly Delta Col X Split Rows false Split Cols false ES Custom 0 properties x AS NS AY NY Plans v EJADS GIAWASE_D12 IBASEO0S5 H ZIBFIC EEN aia al H E GRINGS e EQNOBASE HE 04MA EJODRVI 1101990
401. mmands from the Align sub menu is in Table 1 and from Space Evenly in the Table 2 Table 1 Align Commands Aion Description Lefts Move selected object to the left until their left edges are on the same line Centers Move objects in horizontal directions until their centers has same X coordinate Rights Move objects to the right until their right edges are aligned to the same line Tops Tops Move Move objects up until their upper edges has same Y coordinate Move objects up until their upper edges has same Y coordinate until their upper edges has same Y coordinate Middles Move selected objects in vertical directions until their centers a on the same line Bottoms Move Move objects down until their bottom edges are aligned to the same line down until their bottom edges Move objects down until their bottom edges are aligned to the same line aligned to the same line 8 20 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations Table 2 Space Evenly Commands Distribute Description Across Move selected in horizontal directions until gaps between each two neighbor objects are the same Down Move objects in vertical directions until distances between any two consecu tive objects are the same Simucad 8 21 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual This page is intentionally left blank Simucad Chapter 9 Viewing the Layout 9 1 Layout Windows EXPERT provides a multiwindow working environment You can see and edit variou
402. n Setup menu command It has three columns The first column is for selection of a layer whose connectivity must be changed This column has two radiobuttons Connecting Layer and Layers In Connections Connectivity Layer Radiobutton is Selected In this case the layer selected from List1 is considered to be the connecting via layer List2 contains the layers connected through the given via List3 contains the layers not connected by the given one You may move layers between List2 and List3 by using the arrows located between them As an advanced option one layer may define several connectivity sets The combo box below Listi selects the number of the required connectivity set defined for the given connecting layer You must first click on a layer in List1 then select the set number from the combo box If only one set is defined for a connecting layer simply double click on it in List1 Attach label only This option should be checked if you want that only labels of layers in List2 are taken into account in the connectivity of layout objects In this case the shapes of layers of List2 will not be connected to the via layer Layers In Connection Radiobutton is Selected In this case for the layer selected in Listl you may assign the connectivity sets to which it must belong List2 contains all connectivity sets to which the selected layer belongs List3 contains the remaining connectivity sets You may add a layer to
403. n Use internal DB units current internal DB units 0 000lum 0 001um 0 0lum or 0 1um will be used The current internal DB units can be checked in menu Setup gt Editor Viewer Setup gt General On import the database unit and user unit values are stored in EXPERT S project file and are used for exporting this project back into GDSII format Restrict Layer Numbers and Datatypes It consists in the following fields e Restrict layer numbers and Datatypes box e min max layer number e min max datatype value e default values min 0 max 255 If the Restrict option is checked it is possible to input the maximum values of the layer number and the datatype allowable for output No layer with these parameters exceeding the assigned limits will be written into the output files When saving under GDSII format a project containing layers exceeding the limits a warning will be displayed with the list of involved layers If the Restrict option is not checked all layers will be written into the GDS file Export Layer Remapping Layer remapping tables provides the following capabilities e To export projects or cells into GDSII format using layer names and datatypes which are different from those used in the technology file e To save into GDSII file only selected layers e To merge several EXPERT layers into one GDSII layer on export The Export layer remapping table is a file consisting of lines in one of the following formats lt LayerName
404. n ignores the selected instances arrays e During the Paste into Layer operation all objects are inserted into the current layer regardless of their original layers 8 3 Delete Purpose The Edit Delete menu option deletes the set of selected objects of the current cell from the layout This operation may also be invoked from the Command bar It does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard 8 4 Position Cursor The Edit Position Cursor menu option allows you to position the cursor at given coordinates By this command you must input the required coordinates at the metric bar and then press the Enter key The cursor positions itself at the required coordinates If necessary the screen pans to this point Note Screen resolution must be sufficient for unambiguous transformation of the coordinates on chip into screen pixels otherwise the positioning will be approximate Note Use Tab Shift Tab to move the cursor from one coordinate to another 8 4 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations 8 5 Geometric Transformations 8 5 1 Edit Duplicate Edit Move The two commands Edit Duplicate Edit Move are very similar in their user interface Move will change the selected object s position Duplicate will create new objects After beginning to move objects you can rotate or flip objects Pressing the right mouse button will rotate object counter clockwise Holding the Shift button and pressing the right mouse button will
405. n of the next point depends on the current direction snap mode with respect to the prev_point point If this sequence is empty 1 e get_point_ex syntax is used the command works as get_point Return Value pt type POINT Coordinate values in current measurement units for the cursor position It takes into an account the active reference point Example gt orthogonal cursor movement mode selected gt pl point_create 0 0 POA Gee PONTE EOL GET_RECT Returns the rectangle defined by a mouse click at the two opposite corners in the current layout window Syntax r GET _RECT Parameters None Return Value r type RECT The components of the rectangle are in the current measurement units and take into account the active reference point If the Ese key is pressed during the operation the procedure returns NIL value Example gt r1l get_rect IS DOUBLE Validates the input string for conversion to variable of type DOUBLE Syntax ret IS DOUBLE string Parameters string type STRING Simucad 17 99 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual String to test Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if conversion is possible and FALSE otherwise Example 1 gt display is_double 3e40 gt IRUE Example 2 gt display is_double abc gt FALSE IS_ FLOAT Validates the input string for conversion to variable of type FLOAT Syntax ret IS_FLOAT string Parameters st
406. name gt eld files can be encrypted by means of an operation system to provide more security Note Encrypting and compressing of EXPERT eld files on fly can significantly reduce the speed of many EXPERT functions 16 6 Simucad Libraries and Version Control for a Multi User Design Environment t 16 5 Cell Management 16 5 1 Usage of Library Cells in Projects To use cells from a library you must do the following 1 If you want to use a shared library you don t have in your workspace you must add it e Run the Libraries Setup menu command e Click the Add button at the Library Setup panel Click the file browser button the one with three dots select the required library on your disk and click Open The fields of the Add Library panel is filled by default values You can change the logical name and library type or leave them as they are and click OK 2 Activate recently added libraries by clicking the Activate button Now if you open a cell browser of any EXPERT S editing commands you will see the new logical name in the library list and you can open cells from this library for various operations depending on library type and status of a cell 16 5 2 Cell Version Management The menu command Libraries Setup invokes a panel shown in Figure 16 16 4 x Library List un El E 05999 N Demo 05t999 eld Exclusive Mon Jan 17 10 05 42 2005 3051999 N Demo D5t999_l sld Shared es Mon Jan 17 10 18 51 005
407. names longer than 32 characters 2 When writing P cells into GDSII file new cells are constructed for individual P cell instances Cell names are constructed using P cell name and parameter values for the P cell instance in question The Pcell name will be as follow lt Library of the Pcell gt _ lt Pcell name gt _ lt list of parameter of the Pcell gt This is only if the Pcell name does not exceed the number of symbol specified in Cell name limit symbol using Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Output If it does exceed cell names will be constructed from the P cell name and a unique P cell instance index to conform to the number of symbol restriction for cell names If there are several P cell instances with the same set of parameters disregarding usual parameters of instances such as position and magnification then only one artificial cell is generated 3 You can also force the unique P cell instance index approach by selecting Encrypt pcell parameters from Setup gt GDS Input Output gt GDS Output 4 4 Saving Compressing the Project EXPERT has three commands for saving the projects Save Save As and Save Cells In addition the Compress command saves the project with garbage collection performed By these commands the edited project linked libraries or some cells from them are saved into ELD SLD CIF Applicon GDSII or OASIS format on disk 4 4 1 Save Cells When the File gt Save Cells command
408. nce point is activated the distance from the cursor position to the reference point is shown at the bottom right of the EXPERT S window Recall that the Angle of the current cursor from the reference point is also displayed 9 11 Various 9 11 1 Redraw The View gt Redraw command refreshes the image in the current window 9 11 2 Redraw Region The View Redraw Region command refreshes the image in the selected box 9 11 3 Cursor Crosshairs When the View gt Cursor Crosshairs setting is on the cursor is supplied with dashed crosshairs They help to align different objects in horizontal and vertical directions 9 11 4 Show Grid The View gt Show Grid menu command toggles on off the visibility of the grid in the layout screen This option is also accessible by Setup Editor Viewer Grid Setup option visible 9 11 5 Dock Windows The View Dock Windows menu command allows you to specify which dock windows to display Check uncheck the dock window in this list and see the immediate changes in the screen layout More on dock windows can be found in Chapter 3 User Interface Section 3 1 Expert Interface and in Chapter 11 Setup 9 11 6 Toolbars The View gt Toolbars menu command allows you to specify which toolbars to display Check uncheck the toolbar in this list and see the immediate changes in the screen layout More on toolbars can be found in Chapter 3 User Interface Section 3 1 Expert
409. nd False otherwise OUTSIDE_XIS Delays currently running xi script and switches to EXPERT The Tools gt Xi script gt Return command resumes xi script execution Syntax OUTSIDE _XIS Parameters None Return Value None POINT_INSIDE Tests whether the point is strictly inside of a layout object Strictly means the boundary is not inside Syntax ret POINT_INSIDE pt lobject Parameters pt type POINT Simucad 17 101 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Point to be examined lobject type LAYOUTOBJECT Layout object to be tested Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the point is inside the layout object and FALSE if otherwise The inside of an object is defined consistently only for box region floorplan block floorplan pad For wire and circle ellipse it depends on the current settings in Setup gt Technology gt General gt Shapes For cell instance array it is determined by position and bounding box the latter depends on the current contents of the placed subcell For floorplan pin in depends on the current setting for pin size For text label it depends on the current drawing implementation for text font and its size Example gt bl box 00 55 get gt display point inside pont zZ 2 DL POINT_TRANSFORM_GLOBAL Transforms the point to a global coordinate system concerning the local coordinate system of a cell in the edit in place mode If the EIP session is not initiated then th
410. nd Line Property Bar Libraries Project Tree Objects Info Layer Bar Windows Cell Map Cross Sectional View Cross Sections Nets and Numeric Input A brief description of some of them is presented below Metric Bar dock window Figure 3 6 contains the following items cursor position and measurement unit The Net Device Search Bar dock window allows you to type in a net or device name and find it in the layout window The Expert Log dock window displays all operations being performed during the EXPERT session Simucad User Interface ll a 8500 0000 Y 24500 0000 nm 0 001 um cursor position measurement unit Figure 3 6 Metric Bar e The XI Command line dock window Figure 3 7 inputs EXPERT S interface script commands to perform editing operations Xi Command Line E cell open mernm_48 box 130500 55500 56500 38000 layer Metall Aun Figure 3 7 Xl Command Line Bar e The Property Bar dock window Figure 3 8 allows you to see and edit the properties of selected geometries Property Bar xj Selected Objects Name CI II Rotation 0 Rows Number Columns Numbeq fH Deta Rows fL E Delta Columns fL Figure 3 8 Property Bar e The libraries status can easily be known by displaying the Libraries dock window You can view and modify the library for a given project through this Libraries window More specifically it is possible to add and remove libraries look at their pr
411. nds and Procedures 0ccc ec ee cece eect eee eee eee eee eee eee 17 70 17212 Modily ODE COMMANGS sico A A saw a oar Eber ed 17 72 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments 0 0 c cece eee cnet e eee eens 17 72 112 2 Modify Commands san Tasa 17 72 1413 TOOS COMMANA S vacias cota ibi a E or age EE 17 76 17 142 Hi rarehy COMMANGS 0 a a 17 83 17 15 Ealt in plaGe COMMANOS cuca a a danian A dl 17 84 17 16 Connectivity COMIMANGS a oscar oro dida 17 85 17 17 Verification Commands cuatri dt 17 87 17 18 Library User Management Commands and Procedures sssssannsnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnns 17 90 17 18 1 Library Setup Commands drakael 17 90 17 18 2 Library Management Procedures 0 cece cece cece aaan 17 92 17 18 3 Cell Management Commands criada saladas ead 17 93 17 19 MISCCIANCOUS iia bees E 17 94 17 20 EXPERT LISA Dala TYPOS vet eiriin doriarra a dan E dada 17 104 IA20ASROIN TT DO crasas celia ad vals Leia 17 104 17202 RECT A IO ered aca ack 17 105 1720 3 LA YOUTOBJECT IDE encia ai le added pe he eae le 17 106 17 20 4 SEARCHCRITERION Type 0 0 ce nent e eee tenet teen nes 17 109 11200 OBJECT CONTAINER TVG cara iio 17 110 17 20 0EXPERTLISA Data Type Procedures sti badd ardid daras dadas beds 17 110 1720 7 EXPERI SETUP TYP lt lt avveruseduhie sra rea 17 115 17 21 Creating P cells CoMo ad is 17 117 17 22 ACCESS to AFCOMMANOS ddr dls 17 120 14221 Gommana Line Mpu evi searr roren rE rl adas 17 120 17 2
412. newly created wires in the layer e Joint style describes the shape of wire segment joints e End style describes the shape of wire ends e Derivation rule describes how the layer is to be combined from other layers This rule is written in the DRC script language e Individual Grid Any layer may have individual grid settings If they are absent in the technology file they are taken from the grid setup Setup gt Technology gt Grid The following shows an example of layer definition GridParams MinGridStep 5000 SnapCursorstepx 1 SnapCursorstepy 1 SnapDepend 0 SnapCursorRatiox 0 SnapCursorRatioY 0 GridColor 2307200 0 GridType 1 AutomaticGridType UserVisualGridStepx 10 UserVisualGridStepy 10 SuperGridStepx 10 SuperGridStepY 10 e UseGridParams These parameters corresponds to the Individual grid switch in the Setup Technology Layer Wire Setup menu If its value is TRUE the parameters from GridParams section will be used for the grid on this layer O Simucad 2 9 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual e Layer connectivity Connectivity information is specified in the technology file as sets of layers connected by a connecting layer or a via layer The following shows an example of this format connect layerl vialayer connect layerl Layz2 lay3 vralayer connect layerl lay2 lay3 vialayer The connectivity list may consist of any number of l
413. nformation The following settings are stored in the technology file user definable technology ID string measurement units common grid setup layer definitions including default wire styles individual grid settings and derivation statements layer connectivity info see chapter 3 4 2 in Simucad s GUARDIAN USER S MANUAL physical parameters of layers device definitions see chapter 3 4 3 in Simucad s GUARDIAN USER S MANUAL There are several ways to create a technology file 1 4 Create the required settings from EXPERT S user interface described in this chapter and then save them selecting Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology File Import from Dracula s runset as described below This possibility is useful when you are converting Dracula DRC decks Import from foreign technology display definition files Setup Technology Import Technology Edit it manually using a text editor Generation of Technology File from Dracula DRC Runset You can create a technology file based on the INPUT_LAYER block of Dracula DRC deck This is done as follows In the DRC script panel menu Verification gt DRC gt DRC Script Panel open the DRC Import Setup window menu Setup DRC Import Setup Select the Generate new technology file option Load the Dracula DRC deck from the Import command menu File gt Import You are prompted to select a file name If the file name lt FName gt is selected three files
414. ng box e bb ypos box ysize is the y coordinate of the top side of the bounding box e bb xpos box xsize is the x coordinate of the right side of the bounding box GET_CELL_ OBJECT COUNT Returns the number of layout objects in the specified cell Syntax count GET CELL OBJECT_COUNT cell_name Parameters cell name type STRING The name of the cell Return Value count type INTEGER Number of layout objects in the cell ce11_name Example gt num get_cell_object_count gates INVERTER GET _CELL_ STATUS Returns TRUE if the specified status is set and FALSE is otherwise Syntax ret GET_CELL_ STATUS cell name status_flag Parameters cell name type STRING The name of the cell status tlag status_flag can be one of following predefined constants e CS_TOP the cell is a top level cell in the project s hierarchy e S_READONLY the cell is read only e g not checked out e CS_CHECKEDOUT the cell is from the shared library and checked out e CS MODIFIED the cell is modified but not saved e S_PARAMETERIZED the cell is a P cell Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the status is set and FALSE otherwise Example gt display get cell Status Mmanoz e TOR GET EDITED CELL NAME Returns the full name of the edited cell Simucad 17 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Syntax cell name GET EDITED CELL NAME Return Value cell name type STRING The name of the edited cell
415. ng by clicking the Stop Printing button When printing is finished the Print Status window displays the status of the last printed cell Simucad 15 11 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page intentionally left blank 15 12 Simucad Chapter 16 Libraries and Version Control for a Multi User Design Environment T 16 1 Overview This chapter describes the features of EXPERT that provide access to a common design database in a multiuser environment The following topics are covered e Library setup for a work project e Shared and non shared libraries e Shared cells management e User Access rights T 16 2 Libraries Library A file s in EXPERT S layout database eld s1d format that contains a number of layout cells possibly a complete hierarchical project There are two types of libraries supported by EXPERT e Non shared library This library consists of one eld file which contains all library cells e Shared library The library of this type consists of one lt library_name gt sld file and a lot of one per cell lt ce11_name gt eld files in a lt l1ibrary_name gt cl1 subdirectory Non shared library Libraries of this type can be opened in exclusive or read only mode Gaining exclusive access to such a library provides full control over its contents and you can view and modify cells from this library and use them in the project No one else can add delete or modify any cell of this library
416. ng the mouse button at the head of the dash line Simucad 8 5 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Property Bar Mode or Numeric Input Mode If the Numeric Input panel is visible once you have selected the item s to duplicate the Numeric Input displays delta dx and dy of the shift vector These values can be typed in directly to input the coordinates of the shift vector Pressing Enter or clicking on the OK button will perform the actual copying Move Purpose Moves the set of selected objects of the current cell to another position in the current cell shifted relatively to their initial position by a given vector This operation may also be invoked from the Design bar It does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard and the selection state of the objects Execution It is similar to that of the Duplicate operation After selecting this operation either from the menu or from the Design bar you must define the shift vector To do this first click on the tail and then on the head of the required shift vector The vector may be chosen anywhere in the layout at your convenience When the shift vector head is clicked the selected objects are shifted by this vector with respect to their initial positions Figure 8 4 demonstrates the stages of the Move operation The first picture shows three layout objects Two selected highlighted objects are to be moved into a new location The white dash line in the second figure shows the shi
417. ng you to set various options and parameters in EXPERT This same window can also be access by the Setup Setup command 8 12 Edit Submenu Operations 8 12 1 Stitch Wires The wire stitching tool allows you to easily change a layer of particular segments of wires It automatically creates appropriate contacts connecting these segments with other segments on different layers To activate this tool select the Edit Stitch Wires menu option Figure 8 17 Selected Wire Segment You can select wire segments by clicking on them or dragging the selection frame just like in the Stretch tool Then you can change the layer of selected segments by selecting a different layer in the Layer field in the Numeric Input panel or in the context menu which can be activated by clicking the right mouse button Stitch Wires Ed Layer metal Cancel metali e metal metals Figure 8 18 Changing the Layer of a Selected Segment Alternatively you can double click on selected wire segments and the layers will be changed in cycle Simucad 8 19 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Figure 8 19 Selected Segment Moved to Different Layer Note You need appropriate contacts to be defined in technology in order to use this tool 8 12 2 Align There are two groups of commands in the Edit menu to help align sets of objects Edit gt Align and Edit Space Evenly These commands affect the selected objects only A description of co
418. nly mode may be viewed and used in other projects by many users simultaneously however no one can modify them Simucad 16 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual t 16 3 Typical Scenarios for Library Usage There are several levels of sophistication of library usage e You can use non shared libraries with full access to all cells in all these libraries e You can use libraries with or without version control e Version control may be performed on a single computer or across the network by simultaneous access of multiple users 16 3 1 Non Shared Libraries Non shared library is a single lt library_name gt eld file which contains library technology and all library cells inside Non shared libraries can be opened in two modes e exclusive e read only The basic flow for the usage of such libraries is as follows 1 Create an ordinary project file in eld format Suppose its file name is mylib eld 2 Open your work project or start a new one Be sure that it uses the same technology as mylib eld 3 Set the mylib eld library as follows A Run Libraries Setup menu command B Click Add button at the Library Setup panel C Click the file browser button the one with three dots select mylib eld on your disk and click Open You will see that the logical name field of the Add Library panel will be filled by default value You can change the logical name or leave it as is and click OK D To use library cells in you
419. nstance of a cell instead of the full list of cell objects The top cell G e not instanced in any other cell of a typical complete IC design is the whole chip As a rule it contains instances of complex cells They in turn are made up of instances of smaller cells The leaf cells not containing instances represent simple circuit elements To expose the structure of nesting cells within each other use the hierarchy tree The Project Tree window used in Figure 2 1 is the tree of parent child relations for cell instances with children erouped by instanced cells Level 0 Top Cell Level 1 Cell A Cell B Instances A_1 A_2 A_n Instances B_1 B_2 Level 2 Cell C Cell A Instances C_1 C_2 Instances A_n A_n 1 Figure 2 1 Cell instance hierarchy outline There are no restrictions on the number of cells used for a project the number of instances of any cell at any level or for the depth of hierarchy 2 2 1 Dealing with Recursive Instancing The only essential and natural constraint for hierarchical design is the following Recursive instancing is forbidden This means that EXPERT will not allow you to put an instance of an ancestor of a cell into this cell and a cell cannot be instanced inside itself Cell B is called an ancestor of Cell C if an instance of B is present somewhere in the hierarchy tree of Cell C In particular this is the case if Cell B contains an instance of Cell C 2 2 Simucad Basic Notions
420. ntCellName Purpose Answers if Cell is ancestor of ParentCell Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Prospective ancestor cell LPCTSTR szParentCellName Parent cell name Return BOOL TRUE if ancestor FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApilsAncestorof Cell CellQ Simucad 18 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 18 6 Layers 18 6 1 Set Current Layer BOOL ExpApiSetCurrentLayer LPCTSTR szLayerName Purpose Makes specified Layer active Parameters LPCTSTR szLayerName Name of the layer Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetCurrentLayer Layer_1 18 6 2 Get Current Layer LPCTSTR ExpApiGetCurrentlayer Purpose Retrieves the name of the active Layer Parameters None Return LPCTSTR Name of active Layer Example LPCTSTR szName ExpApiGetCurrentLayer 18 6 3 Get Layer Number int ExpApiGetLayerNumber LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Gets the number of Layers that contain any data in the specified cell or the current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return int Number of Layers Example int nLayers ExpApiGetLayerNumber 18 22 Simucad Expert API 18 6 4 Get First Layer HLAYER ExpApiGetFirstLayer LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Returns handle to the first Layer with data in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omit
421. ntegrated circuits of varying complexity from transistors and logic gates to various functional blocks such as adder circuits and memory blocks The bounding box of a cell also called cell domain is the minimal rectangle with sides parallel to coordinate axes that contain all objects of a cell For an opened cell the bounding box appears as a dashed frame box if you select View gt Cell View gt Edited Cell Frame from EXPERT S menu Note Text does not increase the bounding box of a cell It is defined by geometric objects only An exception is if a cell contains only text then it defines the cell domain The placement of a cell within another cell is done by reference called cell instance Such an operation is called cell instancing When a cell is instanced in another one the latter one is called parent cell for the former one and the former one is called child cell for the latter one It is also said that a child cell is referenced in its parent cell Using cell instances avoids multiple copying of the same geometric data when you use a cell several times When we speak of instance position we mean the position of the origin of the instanced cell within the parent cell Often a cell is instanced within another one in a regular manner referred to as an array instance or simply array In an array a cell is placed repeatedly in such a way that the origins of the cell placements form a rectangular grid with fixed offsets in X and Y directi
422. nterface Scripts XI Shell for the xi script syntax of this command Rotation by Mouse e Click the left mouse button to define the center of rotation e Ifyou move the mouse slightly you will see the following e the outline of the selected objects rotated with respect to the initial position e the vector starting at the rotation center and ending at the current cursor position The vector defines the current angle of rotation with respect to the horizontal direction This angle is also shown in the Tool Rotate tab of the Property bar in the Rotation field EES Ogle 31 5 T ae Position a 5 8100 os 26 661 0 a Duplicate Ok Cancel Figure 8 5 Rotation by Any Angle e The second left mouse click defines the required angle of rotation Property Bar Mode or Numeric Input Mode If the Numeric Input panel is visible once you have selected the item s to rotate the Numeric Input displays a form which includes the Rotation angle This value may be typed in to input the required parameters of rotation shown in Figure 8 5 The Duplicate option in the Numeric Input panel of the Rotate command acts as follows e Ifthis option is true the Rotate command copies the set of selected objects Simucad 8 7 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual e If this option is false the Rotate command moves the set of selected objects Note 1 You may combine mouse clicks and Numeric Input For example yo
423. o other pins see Figure 12 25 the contact between them is presented Simucad 12 25 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual i E YEA RGA II WOU VG GOGH MOM GA j HAD AGA THAI A MMM MAAN f MEY GY EGE A LLL CIO oo ke i m fm SS S SV aks aX ok Sa N SS S N SS OS SES ala SN SS A RES DA h Figure 12 25 Automatic Instance Linking with External Connection 12 6 3 Manual Linking The command Tools gt Link Devices gt Link allows preliminary selected instances at least two instances should be selected of the same P cell to be linked into a chain Their P cells should have all necessary attributes for linking pins with specified linking directions and references to linking procedures The linking procedures must be defined before executing the Link command The linking directions for the selected instances are adjusted automatically by appropriate rotation For example if EXPERT Device Linker accepts two instances with pins connected to the same net but with invalid directions for linking then one of the instances not linked one is rotated to match the linking access direction Figure 12 26 shows transistors before first row and after linking second row Figure 12 26 Chain Instance Linking To unlink instances select a linked group by selecting any instance within a group and execute the Tools Link Devices gt Unlink command The EX
424. o polygon operation for wire objects e offgridwire switch means that the wire will be approximated by region using centerline and constant width e nooffgridwire switch means that no off grid vertices of the resulting region are allowed POLL aGradcareie ll GLTC rele e offgridCircle switch allows you to snap on the grid only circle ellipse centers and radii e nooffgridCircle means that each vertex of the resulting region will be snapped to the grid vtirstascenter l notirstascentes e firstascenter switch selects first vertex of approximating polygon with the same Y coordinate as the center of circle ellipse e firstvertical switch creates polygon with first vertex on the vertical side jervreumscribed inscribed e circumscribed switch specifies the approximation by circumscribed polygon e inscribed switch specifies the approximation by inscribed polygon jvertices angle 1 deflection e vertices switch means that approximation is defined by number of vertices the value is defined by named argument value e angle specifies that approximation is defined by angular distance between vertices of the resulting polygon the value is defined by named argument value e deflection switch means that maximal deflection of the polyline from curve does not exceed the prescribed value value is defined by named argument value Example 1 gt SETUP SHAPE oftoridwire ottgrriacirale Sets modes fo
425. o restrictions either on number of ULSI components or on type of geometrical limitations set for specific layouts EXPERT S original database allows efficient processing of ULSI without any restrictions on size density hierarchy complexity number of cells or geometry type The dimensions of processed layouts are limited only by the amount of disk space t Script Language A powerful script language in EXPERT consists of two main parts e LISA Language for Interfacing Simucad Applications LISA is a general purpose language that supports all main program flow controls and provides the means for defining custom commands e Xi scripts EXPERT Interface Scripts Xi scripts are an extension of the LISA by application specific commands of EXPERT They provide full control over layout objects and editing commands in EXPERT Xi scripts provide the following capabilities in EXPERT e autogeneration of layout objects e creation of shapes of any complexity e command line interface in EXPERT e custom editing commands e creation of parameterized cells e replayable activity logs e automation of routine activities project verification backup etc User and Library Management for Teamwork Shared Library projects provide robust and efficient concurrent access to common data by members of a design team Administrator s management of user access rights and library access types set through file system permissions ensures data
426. obal nets are displayed in green the Internal nets are shown in blue and the External nets are displayed in yellow The visibility of the flight lines can be switch on off by Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Show Nets 12 4 4 NDL Submenu The Netlist Driven Layout submenu contains many other useful features to assist you in the layout editing This subsection describes them in more detail The Tools gt Netlist Driven Layout gt Global Nets option is used to hide or show Global nets Global nets can have a lot of connections therefore turning its visibility off decreases the congestion of flight lines and simplifies design editing The Tools gt Netlist Driven Layout gt Shorted Nets Only option indicates the nets that are mistakenly connected together Figure 12 10 Shorted Nets are displayed in red 12 10 Simucad Tools Figure 12 10 Shorted Nets Only You can use Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Reextract Connectivity or Tools gt Netlist Driven Layout Unfinished Nets Only option to display nets that are not connected yet Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Closest Points Only option display the flight line to indicate the closest point between two ports to be connected The Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Show Pins option toggles the display of the pins The Tools Netlist Driven Layout gt Show Ports option toggles the display of the ports The ports show pin geometry inside a cell instance This is useful when the design is being edited
427. objects in the cell Simucad 7 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 7 6 Save Selected As Cell Purpose Save Selected gt As Cell creates a new cell from the set of selected layout objects and add it to the project This operation is the same as the Cell gt Create menu command Execution e Select a set of layout objects which you want to lump together into a new cell e Click on the menu command Select gt Save Selected gt As Cell The Cell Name Selection Form with the title Create Cell and the following fields appear New Cell Name You must type a name for the new cell into this field Initially this field contains a proposed default name It will be used if you do not enter another name List of Cells This is the list of all cell names existing in the project If you click on a name from this list it appears in the New Cell Name field and you may further edit it here to produce a new name Cancel Pressing this button abandons this operation OK Pressing this button after selecting the cell name completes the operation If the OK button was pressed two outcomes are possible e A message box The project already has such a cell name appears You must click the OK button of the message box and select another name e Create Cell dialog box closes The operation was performed successfully Results This operation does not change the active cell it only adds a new top level cell to the project If the
428. occoccococa eee eee eens 1 1 ele Advanced Capabilities iriaren ent iio la dodo 1 2 122 SUMMA OF CAUNCS osorno er coria ne ele eae ane ae 1 3 12 0 Layo t Database MIA pnl 1 5 Chapter 2 Basic NOUONS o cesaron rared rra isa dORASO oa 2 1 2 J Projects Cells LiDE S earan a a 2 1 2 Wal GelliINAMeCCSUICHON xx snc dia eeu aos a eek ae Ae ie tae ls pea ete E Dike rete 2 2 2 2 nlerarcnicali DESIGN uscar iria ieee oe 2 2 2 2 1 Dealing with Recursive Instancing 0 0 ccc cece cee cece tee eet eee eeteeenaes 2 2 2 2 2 Palamelenzed Cells atras ei as tate tala ti adas 2 3 2 3 IC Layout Design Concello 2 3 2 DES ME LING ati a a a a e a r a ae eee gee EE 2 3 2o 2 AV OUI A A O OI 2 4 2 3 3 User Defined PhODEMICS ui ewe bee teow rh eee Reet ee A Tee ees 2 6 24 EGHOr ACC SOMOS sarro otaiks Paleta 2 7 A A ae ee a aes 2 7 2 5 1 Expert Layout Database eld file o oooooocoooooocoronoor eee ee eens 2 7 2 5 2 Shared Expert Layout Database sld file 0 ccc cece eee een eens 2 8 253 ODSINE GOS ME sc vin dmceototde abaey rada tds ais 2 8 254 AIP MI GRIE 1 dive retin as hi aca O hare ee el eal SE ined acta tes 2 8 2 5 0 AODIICON ile ap IE pcia e dd ie ite ete ihe Le a ee ed ae as 2 8 29 0 OAS SINC Oa A hit neh ot ecm ee he eee eh Seats oe eae 2 8 257 LEE DER NECIE dE ica dl ote es cts lia Bad dbase 2 8 2 5 8 Technology MES CMS A ic DAS 2 8 207 Other Expert PIES erdi 5142 itredehtecdkitihbetg
429. ode only If this box is checked Guardian DRC will recognize hierarchical structure of any error and produce a complete hierarchical error report see detailed description in Section 2 4 2 2 Buttons of the GUARDIAN manual e Parallel DRC options e Parallel mode enabled check box to turn the mode on off e lt gt processors detected Indicator of the number of parallel threads available e Number of threads input field e Autoselect checkbox Their functionality correspond to Parallel_Threads DRC script command described in GUARDIAN manual Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 12 PARALLEL_THREADS statement GUI settings have precedence over the DRC script Parallel Threads statement Note The same panel as the DRC Script Run Setup can be accessed by menu Setup gt Current DRC script preferences of the DRC Script panel menu Verification gt DRC gt DRC script panel In this panel all options which are set are applied to current DRC script only and have precedence on options activated through the DRC Script Run Setup dialog Simucad 11 51 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual This page intentionally left blank 11 52 Simucad Chapter 12 Tools 12 1 Layout Tools This chapter describes tools to perform more advanced operations with layout see Figure 12 1 The list below shows the essential tools used in a layout Measure submenu provides means for measurement on layout Xi script submenu is for processing xi commands Cross
430. olbars can be customize for icon display mode and or their content View gt Toolbars gt Customize invokes the Preferences window show in Figure 3 5 You can specify the size of the icons if a text label is present or not or if a hint is displayed The content of each toolbar can be modified by selecting it in the list and pressing Customize El Preferences E A xj H Manage Preferences Toolbars E Application f Shortcuts oo Dock windows O Command Customize v Toolbars Drawing Colors O DAC Custom Menus O DAC error inspection e Editorviewer Setup Edit In Place H Technology Setup O Filling E Import Export Setup O Hierarchy DRC Setup O LPE H Cross Sectional Viewer Setup O NBL O Node Probing C RealTime DRC xi O Selection C Version Control Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Fi New project ey Load project H Save Separator Move 3 Redraw Move Down zr Zoom to fit E Zoom in El Zoom out ee 2 Ez a A Create text Tf Create wire ii 2 Cut by line Add gt E Ty Delete cell e DeleteRestore error lt Remove FH Describe errors Ol Detailed errar info 4 W Display large icons Iv Display text labels e Display hints Preview r Disana sl ind arrimar LJ Print 3 A New Open Save ee Zi Figure 3 5 Customize The different Dock Windows available are Metric Bar Net Device Search Bar Expert Log XI Comma
431. olyline This polyline will be a line along which the object s is are cut e Inthe message line the angle between two last segments is shown in percents and degrees This is useful for example when cutting a donut into segments Results All primitive layout objects that are subject to cutting according to the current cut mode and intersected by the polyline from boundary to boundary are cut into two or more parts e Pieces of the polyline being drawn outside the object s does not affect any of the objects e A hanging piece of polyline e if an end of the polyline is inside an object produces no cut see Figure 12 28 e Cut objects are converted into regions Simucad 12 27 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual m E ig E a e Figure 12 28 Cut by Line TY YY WI VIV Y y Figure 12 29 Cut Wires by Line 12 8 Cut by Vertices Count This section describes the Tools gt Cut by Vertices Count submenu commands The commands cut large regions by means of vertices count and or wires into smaller parts with a specified number of vertices It simplifies editing layout objects and optimizes the storing and handling of layout objects by the EXPERT database Cutting objects must comply with GDSII restrictions on vertices count for objects of wire and region types You can choose the following sets of objects for a cut operation e All selected wires and regions in the active cell view
432. om this list copies this name into the New Cell Name field You may further edit it to produce a new name e Cancel Abandons the creation of a new cell and returns to the End Editing dialog e OK Pressing this button after cell name selection completes the operation e Change Edited Cell Changes in the edited cell are applied to all its instances as if the cell were edited normally in its own window This is the default choice e Reject Changes The currently edited cell restores its layout to what it was before it was edited If the OK button was pressed two outcomes are possible e The message The project already has such a cell name appears You must click the OK button of the message box and repeat name selection e Choose New Name dialog box closes The operation was performed successfully End of Editing dialog box also closes Note If you edit an instance of an array and exit from EIP by using the option Save Instance As New Cell the array as a whole will be changed e its instanced cell will be changed 10 3 6 EIP Highlighting The following commands of the EIP submenu determines how the edited cell instance and the rest will visually differ under Edit in Place e Equalize No difference in appearance of the edited cell instance and the rest This command corresponds to the fifth button on the EIP toolbar e Dim The surroundings are dimmed with respect to the edited cell e Hide Only the edited c
433. om pop up menus Select Stretch and Other tools e Select Allows you to specify the custom pop up menu content when in selection mode e Stretch Allows you to specify the custom pop up menu content when in stretch mode e Other tools Allows you to specify the custom pop up menu content in all other modes Figure 3 14 illustrates the Custom Menus setup window in which a user is in the process of adding Ruler to the Other tools Custom menu Simucad User Interface dl Preferences Manage Preferences Custom Menus x l Application Shortcuts E 2 S Category Custom menu Separator Toolbars Tools Other tools New Menu Colors Commands Custom menu items i Custom Menus Editor iewers elo Measure By Click Drag Rename e encia Ruler Stretch i Viewing Point Line Distance Create Object P Editing Remove All Rulers Cell Instance Array ae Gravity Remove Selected Rulers Box j Data Safety Region Delete H Directories and Files Graduate Rulers wire iam Ruler Preserve Rulers Circle A his Show Rulers Ellipse Default s Technology Setup Donut o nen Coordinate Axes Text q Shapes Rolled Region pu Layer Setup A OOOO AA pu Grid Setup i A H Instance Grid Setup script Panel gt gt Redraw Command Line Direct pick i Layer Connection Setup i Device Setup l Import Export Setup Expert Log Cross Sectional Viewer GOS Input a gt GOS Input Output Netlist Driven Layo
434. ommand button Logical Name Path It is impossible to have the same logical name for two different files in the library setup No file can have two logical library names If for some reason you want such duplicates you must use two coples of the same file Logical names are case sensitive Status This column shows the current library status It can be one of Simucad Invalid Path for libraries whose path was not specified or is incorrect Exclusive for non shared libraries opened in exclusive mode Read Only for shared or non shared libraries opened in read only mode Shared for shared libraries opened in shared mode 16 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Read Only Status The Read Only status is displayed if the library is opened in read only mode For non shared libraries it means that you can not change library technology and cells inside For shared libraries it means that you can not change its technology To check if you can change a cell in the shared library check the status of the cell Active Any library must be activated before using Some libraries are activated automatically for instance when you open a project which contains cells from those libraries To activate a library manually press the Activate button in the Libraries Setup window To deactivate it click the Deactivate button You can not deactivate library if it is in use its cells are instanced in any opened project
435. on iqates mod 2 NEGO f Show object ifthe condition is true Hide object ifthe condition is true cancel Zi Figure 13 12 Conditional Inclusion Dialog Comment rule allows you to add a specified comment line to the group of objects defined by the control block when P cell script is compiled from the graphical P cell It will allow a more convenient editing of the P cell script if the current graphical P cell is converted to a textual one Use the Add gt Comment menu option in the PCell Rule dialog to activate the Comment form see Figure 13 13 ax Comment Contact Ze Figure 13 13 Comment Dialog Instance Parameters rule allows the assigning of parameters for child P cell instances in the current graphical P cell This P cell rule can be applied only to P cell instance objects Additional command Instance Parameters appear when you press the Add button in PCell Rules form when P cell instance is selected An Instance Parameters form see Figure 13 14 contains a list of names of all parameters of the instanced P cell and an Expression field for each parameter Simucad Parameterized Cells PCell Rules q x Type Rule Add Stretch Repetition Layer Conditional Inclusion Instance Parameters 2 x Instance Parameters Expression wiclth E Figure 13 14 Instance Parameters Dialog 13 3 3 Defining Graphical P cell Parameters The command PCell Parameters shows t
436. on Libraries Setup Window Help E und cz Eg a M E H ee 5 Red Cr NN E 5 o a i eri J Create Object H Modify Object ShiFE M de Stretch Shift 5 Add Jog Points Remove All Jog Points qe Set Origin Position Cursor Ctrl P 12 Numeric Input Tab zZ ngle Mode Direction Snap Mode H Region Mode ol Normal e Snap Cursor to Grid E Gravity Search Hole Selected Search At B NS Properties Expert Clipboard 4 Move lr H Duplicate C Ce Rotate wi Rotate 90 Mirroring Xo Delete Del l Preferences Figure 8 16 Region Mode In Normal mode each geometries is drawn independently from each other This mode is shown in the top right of Figure 8 16 where two rectangles overlapped each other and remain two different entities In Merge mode the same two overlapped rectangles merge to create a single geometry This single entity can be seen in the center right of Figure 8 16 The Hole mode is used when you want to create hole in geometry This mode is illustrated in the bottom of Figure 8 16 where the lower rectangle was modified using the Hole mode 8 18 Simucad Other Edit Submenu Operations The last Region mode available to you is Hole Selected This mode is similar to the Hole mode to the exception that it will act only on selected geometries Edit Preferences opens the Preferences window allowi
437. on in mouse mode e specify the stretch shift value by numeric input In addition the behavior of the Stretch operation is controlled by the following modes e Edit Direction Snap Mode e Edit gt Angle Mode gt Preserve Angles Mode e Select Selection Modes Selection Pick Modes for Movable Segments When you are picking selecting something with the Stretch tool it works similar to Select By Click Drag tool described in the Chapter 7 The difference is that Stretch tool can select individual parts of objects but both tools are controlled by the options grouped in the Select Selection Modes menu For explanation of options see Chapter 7 Selecting Layout Objects You can select deselect segments of regions wires for stretching by clicking on them Alternatively you can drag the selection frame and select parts of objects in that way Stretching Modes The stretch itself is controlled by Edit gt Angle Mode gt Preserve Angles Mode and Edit Direction Snap Mode The Preserve Angles Mode acts exactly in the same way as for the single object Edit gt Modify Object operation The Direction Snap Modes restrict the directions of the shift during stretch None No restriction Horizontal The Y shift value at the Stretch bar will be zero Vertical The X shift value at the Stretch bar will be zero Orthogonal Stretch shift may be either vertical or horizontal Either X shift or Y shift or both at the Stretch bar will be z
438. on technologies MOS field effect transistor is recognized as a shape in the layer that is produced by the overlapping of polysilicon and diffusion layers Such a layer is often just an artificial idealization which never exists in a real chip and serves for extraction purposes only Simucad 14 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Apart from device recognition layer a set of pin layers should be assigned to each kind of device The particular number of pin layers depends on the type of that device e g MOSFET has four pins while the resistor has two pins Each of the pin layers has to be listed in at least one of the connectivity sets See Chapter 3 User Interface Section 3 2 Command Execution for more details In addition to active devices and connectivity information GUARDIAN LPE also extracts device parameters such as length and width of MOSFET channel which have a major impact on device performance After the extraction is performed it is possible to search devices and nets in the layout as well as to recognize to which device net a given geometric shape belongs These functions are accessible from Verification Node Search and Verification gt Node Probing submenus and the corresponding toolbars of EXPERT GUARDIAN LPE reports electrical rule violations shorted nets and broken nets They may be inspected on the layout and promptly fixed After fixing electrical rule violations and re extraction of the netlist one
439. on that may be tentatively defined as thick line Technically a wire is constructed from a given polyline named centerline according to its parameters width W joint style and end style by the following procedure 1 W Stick is defined for every polyline segment to be a rectangle of width W and length L equal to the length of the segment It is placed in such a way that the midpoints of the two of its opposite sides of length L fit the endpoints of the given segment see Figure 2 2 2 E Plaster is generated for each endpoint of a wire to terminate it J Plaster is generated for each joint to fill the cracks Plasters are simple regions triangles quadrilaterals pentagons and disks defined around the aforementioned points in accordance to wire end and joint styles as shown in Figure 2 2 and Figure 2 3 3 Wire is created as a result of the union of W sticks and E and J plasters An example is shown in Figure 2 4 Simucad Basic Notions In addition in a 45 angle mode of drawing the wire boundary is fit to the minimal grid This is done by slightly increasing the width of diagonal sticks of a wire Notice that for a non 90 geometry it is impossible to have a constant width wire fit exactly to grid To cancel this grid fitting set the Off grid wire boundary allowed option in the Setup gt Technology gt General menu r Lara a Eii Polyline Stick E plasters Round Extend Flush Figure 2
440. on this message to display all items however this operation can take very long time While navigating the Project Tree press the right mouse button to display context popup menu This menu for instance allows you to refresh the tree open library setup windows and open one or more selected cells These commands are also available from the main menu category Hierarchy Explorer which is changed together with the current selected item in the Project Tree You can also open selected cells by double clicking the mouse on them x ao Name BA lt demo_mus gt iI Ananda EE mus Er 451 instances amp arrays in mux 2 Lal arap 179 1 25 3 cell musi col 4 row 1 xdeltacol 88 pdeltac c ig ellCon c My via c My Substrate w My P SD c a Poly c ly P Gate BF polygon 80 5 25 5 78 5 25 5 78 5 2 5 90 5 2 5 Mayer P Gate BF polygon 6 5 20 5 6 5 20 5 6 5 1 5 8 5 1 5 layer P Gate BF polygon 2 5 20 5 70 5 20 5 70 5 45 72 5 2 5 layer P Gate BF polygon 56 5 20 5 54 5 20 5 54 5 45 56 5 2 5 layer P Gate BF polygon 48 5 20 5 46 5 20 5 46 5 2 5 48 5 2 5 layer P Gate BF polygon 32 5 20 5 30 5 20 5 30 5 45 32 5 2 5 layer P Gate AEE polygon 245 20 5 22 5 20 5 225 25 24 5 2 5 Mayer P Gate BEF polygon 104 5 25 5 102 5 25 5 102 5 6 5 104 5 6 5 layer P Gate BF polygon 0 5 25 5 1 5 25
441. ons checks are performed against the remaining geometry of the current cell and the object itself e For a cell instance checks are performed against the geometry of the current cell and against the geometry of other instances Real time DRC does not report errors between segments that both belong to the same cell instance anywhere in its hierarchy Violations are marked by blinking double headed arrows If the cursor is placed at one of these markers a description of the error is given Real time DRC bar contains an Error Indicator which helps locate the errors if they are off screen The Error Indicator has nine fields 3x3 checkerboard The red blinking dot in the central field means that you have errors on screen A red blinking error in any of the remaining fields shows the direction when there are off screen DRC errors Hint If you have a red dot but see no error markers this means that your resolution is too low You must zoom in possibly several times until you see the error markers or until the error indicator shows you that there are errors off screen There is a switch to show hide error markers Disabling Real time DRC clears all collected error reports When layout view becomes inactive error reports in this view are also cleared 14 6 Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools 14 3 Guardian LPE Netlist Extractor GUARDIAN LPE is a fast and memory efficient tool for extracting Spice netlist from IC mask layou
442. ons create modify move duplicate rotate mirror or paste The following conditions must be satisfied for automatic linking e Turn On the Automatic Device Linking option Setup Editor Viewer Editing e Define the linking procedures by running corresponding xi scripts or include their definitions into start up xi script e Both instances must have same P cell master and set up for linking see set up procedure above e Overlap instance pins with the last ones connected to the same net e Make sure that pins have proper access direction and the same linking procedure Example p cell definition with added linking parameters DEFINE PCELL nmos REPLACE PARAMETER Width TYPE Integer DEFAULT 5 PARAMETER Length TYPE Double DEFAULT 1 0 PARAMETER LeftCont TYPE Boolean DEFAULT true PARAMETER RightCont TYPE Boolean DEFAULT true BODY BEGIN add linking parameters pwire _x _yl x y2 width _wwidth layer _metalLayer flushend net _s_net pin boxes attr_create PWA_LAYER _contlayer attr create PWA_WIDTH _contWidth attr create PWA_LENGTH _contWidth attr_create PWA_SPACE _cont2contSpace dcer Creare PWA_DISTRIBULLON BDIT MIN attr create PWA_BEGIN_ OFFSET _metalOverCont attr Create PWA END OFFSET 2 metalOverCont _lefttPin wire x y1 x y2 wudteh wwidth layer _metalLayer flushend find get if _leftPin NEQ N
443. ons called array steps or array deltas in X and Y directions respectively Elements of an array are identified by the pairs of indices in this grid In the following what is said about editing instances is also applicable to arrays unless stated otherwise The set of cells containing layout data for a particular circuit design such as the whole chip a functional device etc is called project or library EXPERT stores projects in files on a disk They are called project files or library files which are in the same format They are distinguished by typical usage When you load a file in EXPERT directly it is called a work project If the main purpose of a file 1s to store cells that are used in other projects then it is called a library All cells of a project must follow the same design rules and are supposed to be fabricated under the same technology EXPERT handles the following kinds of projects e A functionally complete set of cells This means that if one cell is referenced in another cell the latter cell contains an instance of the former one then the former cell is present in the project In other words all cell objects are inserted into the project database e Projects that refer to cells in library files There are two types of libraries exclusive and shared Cells from an exclusive library can be edited only by a single user at any moment Other users can view and use cells from an exclusive library while being edited by
444. ontains clean up and backup commands Polygonal font file You may select the name of the GDSII file that contains 45 angle fonts for creating polygonal texts An example of such file is polgfont gds found in the installation of EXPERT You can copy this file and create your own polygonal shapes for letters 11 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 3 4 Data Safety Page ye Data Safety Maximal aze of Unde step 20000 objects Backup Save oignal project upon loading C s bak file AutoS ave Interval min 0 Promet betore saving L Recovers nfo interval mn 0 Upon closing controled library Upon saving cell 0 Check mall changes Check m anrd out gt Leave al checked out 0 Leave checked out Prompt for checking in Prompt for checking in _ Prompt for cell saving upon closig its lest vandosw Actreky log File CADOCUME TADMINIMTLOLALS TTemphexperjourneles 2 L _ Beep old achviy logs W nte command line mput Onine log Prefix 2 Eiros Commands 2 Display e Location e Wamninas User response Figure 11 4 Data Safety Page Maximum size of Undo step N objects Sets the restriction on the number of objects created changed by a single operation copy delete etc to be written in the undo log If an operation handles more than the given number N of objects it cannot be undone You will see the corresponding warning Save original project upon loading If this box is
445. opens where lt File Name gt is the name of the ELD file entered in the File Name field of the file selector dialog If the option Use external technology file for eld format in the Setup gt Technology gt General menu is selected then the file selector dialog allows you to select the name of the technology file as in the case of loading from foreign file formats Otherwise technology data stored in the eld file will be applied 4 6 Simucad Project Cell Commands After loading the file the Cell Selection dialog described in Section 4 3 7 Cell Selection Dialog allows you to select a cell to be opened 4 3 4 Loading from the SLD format If the Open button is pressed using the SLD format selected a project with the file name lt File Name gt opens where lt File Name gt is the name of the SLD file entered in the File Name field of the file selector dialog If the option Use external technology file for eld format in the Setup gt Technology gt General menu is selected then the file selector dialog allows you to select the name of the technology file as in the case of loading from foreign file formats Otherwise technology data stored in the s1d file will be applied After opening the file the Cell Selection dialog described in Section 4 3 7 Cell Selection Dialog allows you to select a cell to be opened 4 3 5 Loading from a Foreign Format When a foreign GDSII Applicon CIF or OASIS format i
446. operties activate and deactivate a specific library for the current project and check in check out cell Chapter 15 will cover this section in more detail e The Project Tree dock window displays a view of the current project and its hierarchy It can be used to navigate through the project A double click on one cell from the list will invoke the layout window of this cell The icons at the top of the window allow you to view the Project Tree of the complete project the active cell only show the top level cell only and display or hide the geometries Simucad 3 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 3 6 The Objects Info dock window lists the Name Type and Location of the geometries under selection The Layer Bar dock window Figure 3 9 is used to specify the active layer layer used to create objects reordering of layers make them visible invisible and so forth see Section 11 2 1 Technology Settings for details about layer control Layer Bar F 45 NS AY Wy Plans INPUT CONNECT E Hetl_Text a Poly_ Text Met Text ae 555 Ss Substrate Bulk BulkConnect EA Figure 3 9 Layer Bar The Windows dock window shows the list of cell currently open You can cycle through the open window by selecting a new one in the list The organization of the window on the screen can also be modified through this interface window The Windows dock window is shown in the top right corner of Figure 3
447. or each primitive object creation command described below Named Arguments layer layer_name type STRING Specifies the layer where the object will be created deleted or searched for If the named argument layer is not present the object is created deleted or searched for in the active layer BOX Creates selects or deletes a box Format BOX xpos ypos xsize ysize layer layername property name value name value name value text text text text replace layoutobject net netname oreate Eind oelete select Wreselect add deselect Z EOPOLYJON Pin get Arguments xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e X coordinate of the left box corner ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e y coordinate of the left box corner xsize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e Specifies X size of box ysize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e Specifies Y size of box Named Arguments layer layer_name Type STRING See the description above on 17 40 Switches topolygon Specifies that object created or searched for will be converted into polygon See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for description of other named arguments and switches Return Value 17 40 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell An object representing the layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if the get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 gt DO
448. or ellipses with horizontal radius value greater than 0 5 Example 6 SY Crit Search criterion Create 0A SIZE Y Ue GI Creates a search criterion to find boxes with vertical size or ellipses with vertical radius value greater than 0 5 Table 17 19 Text Layout Object Attributes OA_POSX Object position X OA_POSY Object position Y OA_TALIGN Predefined Text alignment see predefined con stants on 17 74 Example 6 gt UX_ Crit Search criterion create OA TEXT met SUBSTR Creates a search criterion to find texts which contain substring met Simucad 17 113 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Example 7 gt th_crit search _ criterion _create OA_THEIGHT 1 GT Creates a search criterion to find texts with a height more than 1 Example 8 gt th crit search criterrom create OQOA TWIDTH 15 LT Creates a search criterion to find texts with a width that is less than 1 5 Example 9 Pus Crit search criterion create O0A TSLOPE 90 EQ Creates a search criterion to find texts with a slope of 90 degrees Example 10 gt ts_crit search_criterion_textalign OA_TALIGN TA_BOTTOMLEFT EQ Creates a search criterion to find texts with a bottom left alignment Table 17 20 Wire Layout Object Attributes OA_WEND Predefined Wire end style see predefined con stants on 17 74 OA_WJOINT Predefined Wire joint style see predefined con stants on 17 74 Example 11 gt we_crit search _c
449. or empty string if the cell list for the current project is requested see example Return Value cells type SEQUENCE Sequence of cell names in the specified library Example gt cells get _library_ cell Jist Gets the sequence of the cell names of the current project not including cells instanced from libraries GET_UNRESOLVED CELL LIST Gets the sequence of cell names for the library with specified logical name Syntax cells GET_INRESOLVED_CELL LIST lib_logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library or empty string if the cell list for the current project is requested see example Return Value cells type SEQUENCE Sequence of cell names in the specified library Example gt cells get_unresolved_cell_list mux4 Gets the sequence of the unresolved cell names at the project with logical name mux4 GET_LIBRARY_DIRNAME Returns the name of directory where the library with specified logical name is located Syntax lib_dirname GET _LIBRARY_DIRNAME lib_logname Parameters lib_logname type STRING The logical name of the library If empty string is specified then directory name of current project is returned Return Value The name of directory where project with specified logical name is located type STRING Returns NIL if library with specified logical name does not exist Example 1 17 6 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell
450. or messages are displayed in the Expert Output window to ensure that P cell generation was successful Check cell generated by P cell with various sets of parameters is in the PCell Viewer window command PCell gt View Pcells To apply changes made to P cell for all instanced P cell variations run the PCell Recalculate Instances command 13 10 Simucad Parameterized Cells 13 4 Creating Textual P cells 13 4 1 Textual P cell Creation Flow e Create a new textual P cell using the command Pcell New see Figure 13 17 with the option Textual Pcell checked An initial script of the new textual P cell can be exported from content of a regular cell by checking the option Compose of selected cell and selecting cell name in the Cell List control of the New Pcell dialog form e After specifying the cell name and pressing the OK button the PCell Parameters dialog pop ups allowing you to define the P cell parameters However you can add new or modify existing parameters at any time so you can click OK with no parameter definition The Xi script editor will be activated with a predefined skeleton for P cell definition e Edit textual P cell parameters and body Xi script manually e Run Xi script to create new or modify existing P cell e Test cells generated by P cell in the in the PCell Viewer window command PCell View Pcells To apply changes made to the P cell for all instanced P cell variations run the PCell Recalculate Instances co
451. orted into a foreign format GDSII each instance with a unique set of parameters produces a personal cell in the foreign file Its name is constructed from the name of the P cell and the values of actual parameters 4 13 1 Cell Export to GDSII Files For example if you decided to export in a GDSII format cells mux1 and nand2 from the tutorial example mux4 The resultant file would differ in content depending on the options selected If Multifile Export is NOT selected the file name chosen is used as is Let s assume that you chose mux as Filename e Ifthe With Hierarchy and Multifile Export options are left unchecked then EXPERT produces the file mux gds Only the selected cells are in the GDSII file mux1 and nand2 In this case as nand2 is an instance in mux1 the mux1 cell will display nand2 but not its inverter cell e If only With Hierarchy is checked then EXPERT produces the file mux gds The GDSII file contains the cells selected mux1 nand2 and the cells of the instances used at the top level inverter If Multifile Export is selected the file name chosen is used as the prefix Let s assume that you chose new as a prefix e If With Hierarchy and Multifile Export options are checked then EXPERT produces the files new muxl gds and new nand2 gds Both files contain the top level cells and the cell s of the instances used by the top level e If only Multifile Export is checked then EXPERT produces the file
452. os value ypos value property 17 72 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments MODIFY PRIMITIVE Changes the common attributes for primitive layout objects Format MODIFY PRIMITIVE lobject selected xpos value ypos value property layer layer_name net net_name pin See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments MODIFY BOX Changes the box specific layout object attributes Format MODIFY BOX lobject selected xpos value 4p ypos value property layer layer_name net net_name pin xsize value ysize value Named Arguments xsize value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of box horizontal size or ellipse horizontal radius Sets the new horizontal size if specified ysize value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE The value of box vertical size or ellipse vertical radius Sets the new vertical size if specified See Section 17 12 1 Common Arguments and Named Arguments for description of common arguments MODIFY TEXT Changes the text specific layout object attributes Format MODIFY TEXT lobject selected xpos value ypos value property layer layer_name net net_name pin text string height value width
453. os value ypos value xsize value ysize value Alaina value jselection yeer eeliwise whole Yarerarcha cal Ela log Arguments command type STRING Specifies DRC command It must end with a semicolon and be written in double quotes see the example Named Arguments xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE xsize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE ysize type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE xpos ypos xsize and ysize define the region to run the check by the coordinates of the lower left corner and the sizes of the box The command DRC SCRIPT without these arguments will run the check in the whole area of the current cell limit type INTEGER Sets limit on the number of reported errors 100 000 is default value Switches selectiom yeer eeliwise whole Cluster of switches that define the scope of the layout object that will be checked while running DRC e selection switch means that scope is a set of preliminary selected objects e cell switch means that cell instance objects will not be taken e cellwise switch means that all primitives from current cell and cells instanced directly or indirectly will be processed separately e whole switch that DRC will be executed on a flattened image of the current cell hierarchical tae Cluster of switches that define the mode of the error report log If selected then log
454. os ypos cell cellname OBJECT row value col value LAYOUT FLOORPLAN BLOCK ara or Voce Ve eS OBJECT Command Procedure Return type 17 40 17 41 17 43 17 45 17 47 17 49 17 51 17 56 LAYOUT 17 54 OBJEC L FLOORPLAN CHIP name value posx posy LAYOUT FLOORPLAN PAD xpos ypos name netname value 17 56 OBJECT LAYOUT xpos ypos name blockname value OBJECT netname value wire wires wire 17 57 17 56 17 124 Simucad Return type OBJECI CON TAINER SEQUENCE Simucad Expert Interface Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters Command Procedure COPY SELECTION DELETE SELECT LON DUPLICATE SELECTION Shiv x yshirt y repeat x repeat_y MIRROR SELECTION x value y value dupli cate EI EEN EOS EE FIND OBJECTS object_typel criteria i on guilty or agai el ee SEARCH object_type criteria Search rect 195 C oOSS is_selected is_visible MODIFY OBJECT lobject xpos value ypos value property MODIFY PRIMITIVE lobject layer MODIFY BOX lobject xsize ysize MODIFY TEXT Lo6bieet 2 texte y herghts width alignstyle slope 1 slant mirror MODIFY WIRE lobject width end style jointstyle MODIFY INSTANCE lobject xpos ypos value Mscale I 7rocation 17 p s N a No al mirror CONVERT POLYGON lobje
455. ows may be active and you can navigate across the layout shown in it and edit this layout Some of the windows may be partially visible but inactive and some invisible You must activate the window before working within it You can either pick the name of the required window in the list of the Window submenu or Windows dock windows or pick this window directly on the screen by mouse if it is partially visible or use the Ctrl F6 combination of keys to rotate through the window list You can close the current active window by selecting the Close operation of the Window submenu or by pressing the close icon in the Windows dock windows A visible window may be closed by clicking the X button in the top right corner of the window All opened windows may be closed by using the Close All operation of the Window submenu or by pressing the close all windows icon from the Windows dock windows The underline button located at the top right corner of a window permits you to minimize the window into an icon The icon is placed at the bottom of the EXPERT S working area but may later be dragged anywhere in this area More advanced window managing features are provided through the Cell Map Window environment described in Section 9 6 Cell Map of this chapter 9 1 2 Window Arrangements To simplify the management of opened windows the Window submenu and the Windows dock windows provide features that automatically arrange windows to suit you
456. ows you to generate a short log file containing only the list of input polygons and the processing time e The Scope radio buttons control the amount of cell shapes which will be taken into account in the DRC processing selected shapes or cell own shapes Note Built in DRC commands cannot be generated in hierarchical mode in other words the layers belonging to subcells of the active cell will not be taken into account When you need to generate layers or perform geometrical checks as if the layout was flat it is mandatory to write the corresponding commands in a DRC script and then to run this script with GUARDIAN DRC using the correct scope option see detailed description of the scope options in chapter 11 15 DRC script run setup and DRC syntax description in GUARDIAN USER S MANUAL chapter 2 3 e The Saving layout radio buttons allow you to save a project automatically or be prompted to save the project before launching a DRC command This can be useful in order to come back to the original project after having run the DRC command Instead of deleting by hand the generated layers use the Cell gt 5Discard changes menu to restore the original layout Simucad 11 49 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 11 DRC Script Run Setup DRC Script Run Setup dialog is used to set options controlling execution of entire GUARDIAN DRC scripts unlike the Built in DRC Command Setup dialog described above which deals only with interactive DRC comm
457. p Cross Sectional Viewer Setup i Cross Sectional Viewer Grid Setup Minimal grid Grid unit minimum grid step in nm 5 4 Equal grid step in X and Y Snap grid V Snap cursor X size Y size J Dependent on visual gid Step in grid units 2 2 Ratio 1 v Step in um 0 01 0 01 Ratio Y 1 1 Visual grid IV Visible Sample Current grid step X size Y size Step in arid units fi 00 fi 00 Step in um 0 5 0 5 TY Supergrid Preview Mode C Wireframe X size Y size Solid Step over visual grid fi 0 fi 0 C Stipple Step in um 5 5 J Automatic grid Color PA L E Grid Type Type Norm y size Y size Dotted Step in grid units 1000 1000 Solid Step in um 5 5 n lel 4 Figure 3 12 Grid Setup User Interface In the setup of Figure 3 12 all geometries added or modified will snap to a step grid of 0 0lum independently of the snap cursor box setting Chapter 11 Setup will describe in more details the different aspect of the grid setup Directional Snap Modes restrict movements of the cursor to specific sets of directions during creation and modification of objects To set the modes either use Edit gt Direction Snap Modes menu or press the buttons at the Drawing toolbar Directional Snap Mode specifies how the cursor moves between two consecutive mouse clicks with respect to the point set by the
458. p dialog is called either from the Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup menu or by clicking the right mouse button on a layer name within the Layer Bar In the latter case the layer under the cursor in Layer bar becomes selected with gray background in the Layer Setup and is available for modifications there Simucad 11 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Settings made in the Layer bar apply only to the window that is active at that time Settings made in Layer setup are valid for the whole project during the session and may be saved as described in Section 11 2 Managing Setups Layer Bar The Layer bar shown on the right side of Figure 11 5 allows you to show hide layers in the layout change their visibility order make them selectable nonselectable change the filling mode of a layer and set a layer to be active Some editing operations e g creation of shapes are performed only in the active layer The Layer bar contains two vertical colors name strip and color strip At the Layer bar the name of the active layer is written on the colored background Only one layer may be active at a time The active layer is always visible A layer is activated by clicking on its color strip Visible layer names appear in black non selectable layers have grayish names and those layer names that are invisible appear in white Layer Setup 5 NS AV ONU Default Order A O e AA Sample Number DataType Derived Scrat
459. parameter s values should be in the exact order of parameters declared in the parameterized pcell master Make sure that the types of parameters match If the named argument params is not present for a parametrized cell instance then the cell instance is placed with default parameter values parnames name names name type SEQUENCE The sequence of parameter names of the parameterized cell Pcell parameter s values defined by the named argument params has to be in order of the parameter s names parameter named name has the value param It is not necessary that the order and quantity of parameters defined by both params and parnames named arguments match those declared in the corresponding parameterized pcell master If some parameters are missing the default parameter values from the pcell master are used net netname type STRING Specifies the net to which this instance is added as single element The instance cell should not have any external nets Use named argument conn or connectivity creation commands see Section 17 16 Connectivity Commands for adding instance s connectivity on nets name instancename type STRING Assigns the name for the instance object The name should be unique to the cell where this instance is laid out conn connectivity type SEQUENCE Specifies how this instance connected to the current cell nets The information is in the form instance _cell net_name gt
460. pe STRING The name of the cell for copying operation new_cell_name type STRING The name of the new cell Example gt cell Savyeas aniverter ANTS CELL STATUS Sets or clears the read only cell status Format CELL STATUS cell name r JEW Arguments cell_name type STRING The name of the cell If the argument is not specified then status will be set for the current cell 17 14 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Switches Lea i aa The r switch sets read only cell status and the rw switch removes it Example gt cell status inverter r Sets read only status for cell inverter DEFINE PCELL Defines a new or redefines the existing EXPERT S PCell Format DEFINE PCELL pcell_name REPLACE PARAMETER parl_name PARAMETER parN_name BODY jwoeceLl body Arguments pcell_name type STRING is the name of the PCell It must contain the library logical name full cell name if applicable Switches REPLACE Specifies that the previous declaration of the PCell with this name will be superseded Subcommands PARAMETER Describes the parameters for the PCell Format PARAMETER parameter_name TYPE type DEFAULT value Arguments parameter_name type STRING is the name of the PCell parameter Named Arguments TYPE type Specifies the valid type that can be entered for PCell parameter INTEGER DOUBLE STRING BOOLEAN DEFAULT value Specified defa
461. performed successfully Results If the operation was successful the project changes as follows e The selected cell is renamed the cell with the old name does not exist from the moment the operation was completed All instances of this cell are replaced by instances of the renamed one everywhere in the current project and all activated libraries Warning If a library cell is renamed its instances will become unresolved in all other libraries that refer to it but are not activated for the current project at the moment of renaming 4 12 Importing Cells to Project Purpose Adds a cell or a project from file stored in ELD SLD CIF Applicon LEF DEF GDSII or OASIS file to the current project of type eld or sld Execution Click the menu command Cell gt Impor t The File Name Selection Form appears titled Select Project file It has the following fields and buttons e Files of type Choose the ELD SLD CIF Applicon LEF DEF GDSII or OASIS format of the file containing the cells to be loaded e File Name The name of the file containing the required cells must be entered into this field e Cancel Clicking this button abandons the Cell gt Import operation 4 18 Simucad Project Cell Commands e Open Clicking this button after entering a file name starts the actual import operation the selected file is being read and the list of its cells will appear in the Import Cell s dialog This dialog looks the same as Co
462. pes iis areata nt cence eee ida tal 18 22 15 01 UG MS TMA Y OM ada wo Sale sate cae ee ed ar rahe wae alee tee ces 18 22 16 0 2 Ge OUNEN LAV CT 25 2 6 65 b ame tata A thd eno tid ded as eee ek 18 22 18 6 3 Get Layer Number varada ia adas as 18 22 1864 GetFirst Layi idad Aras 18 23 18 6 5 Get NEXT LAVET deridderi a a de iai 18 23 18 6 6 Get Layer Name i 5 00 ne ated a neh annann n ennnen 18 23 18 6 7 Get Cell Layer NUMDO 30 10ds aes AS A A naka ee ee ah a a A 18 23 15 00 Ger Cell First Lay crrr a deena sd da eae 18 24 19 09 Ge CEI INGXUE AVON sarita dido 18 24 19 0 10 Gel Gell Layer NaMe tirada belive tat bade oa 18 24 18 6 11 Generate Derived Layer o 54 nit a Gane aie eeateenbe ded ss 18 25 18 6 12 Generate All Derived Lave scr dais ridad 18 25 18 6 13 Clean Cell Primitives in Derived Layers 0 cc cece cece eee eet e eee eee neees 18 25 18 6 14 Clean Cell Hierarchy in Derived Layers 0 0 ccc ccc cece cnet nee ene nnees 18 26 18 6 15 Clean Derived Layers in the Whole Project 0 0 cece cece eee e eee eee neees 18 26 18 6 16 Clean Cell Primitives in Scratch Layers 0 0 cc ccc cc crete eee tenet nen neees 18 26 18 6 17 Clean Cell Hierarchy in Scratch Layers 0 cece cece tenet eee eee nnees 18 27 18 6 18 Clean the Whole Project in Scratch Layers 0 0 cc ccc cece tee eee eee eee nenes 18 27 18 6 19 Delete Scratch Layers in Technology 0 0 c ccc cee eee tence teen en eeenenes 18 27
463. piece is cut off from the old one In Figure 5 5 a new wire cuts into old boxes and even splits one of them e Ifthe new object is completely outside of all older ones then nothing is created e Ifthe new object completely overlays an older object then the old one is deleted Figure 5 5 Wire Drawn in Hole Mode Hole Selected Mode In this mode the new object is treated as a hole or as a cut in the selected ones possibly in different layers Other than that this mode is similar to Hole mode Merge Mode If a new object is created in this mode and it intersects older ones then these objects are converted into regions and a merge union operation is performed with them see Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 New 45 mode Region is Merged with Old Wire 5 4 Simucad Creating Layout Objects Over the Point Drawing Over the Point Drawing is used to reduce the amount of clicks needed to create a polygon or wire In other words you only need to click the mouse button once to create two consecutive segments of an object The Over the Point Drawing mode works if either of two conditions are met e the Angle Mode is set to 90 deg and Direction Snap Mode is set to Diagonal or None e Direction Snap Mode is set to Orthogonal To use this mode set the Allow L Shape Mode input for regions and wires option in the Editor Viewer Setup Dialog Box Setup Editor Viewer Editing If the Vertical First option is used Edit gt Region Mode Ve
464. pples using layer plans Allow layers with the same GDSII numbers and datatypes Supresses warnings when layers with the same GDSII parameters are created If this option is NOT checked then operations Project gt New and Project gt Load that use a technology file with a pair of layers with the same GDSII numbers and datatypes will fail with the corresponding message A similar control is performed during technology creation modification using Setup Technology Layer Wire Setup This control prevents unintentional data change during export into the GDSII format Two or more EXPERT layers can be written into one GDSII layer If it is required to merge layers during GDSII export it is recommended to use a layer remapping table see Setup gt GDSIT Input Output Output 11 14 Simucad Setup 11 4 2 Shapes Page This panel is used for the setup of curved and off grid shapes of the layout It can be opened in the Preferences window menu Setup Editor Viewer by selecting the General page of the Technology setup group je Polygonal Curve Approximation This group allows you to select the precision with which ellipses donuts rings and arcs in the rolled region are approximated when converted into polygonal regions This group contains three radio buttons and a Value input field In all cases a curve is converted into an inscribed polygon e Vertex Count In this case the approximation is defined by the number of
465. py Cell s dialog described in Section 4 9 fCopying of Cells and shown in Figure 4 9 Using this dialog you can import cells from the selected file into the current project or any activated libraries in the same way as cell copying is performed In particular if cell name collision takes place between imported cells and the ones already present in the target project library a dialog opens to process name collisions which is described in Section 4 9 1 Cell Name Collision Resolving Dialog Note The list of all file names with their extensions existing in the current directory is displayed in the Select Project file window Double clicking on a name from this list starts the cell import process immediately with the current settings for cell import Single clicking on a name from this list copies it into the File Name Edit here to produce a new name 4 13 fExporting Cells Purpose Saving selected cells into the ELD SLD CIF Applicon xi script OASIS or GDSII file format on disk Execution The execution is perform in two steps e first specify which cell s need to be exported and the export options e then specify the type of export eld sld by selecting the file type of the resulting file First step e Click onto the Cell gt Export menu e The Cell Name Selection box appears titled Export Cell s with the following fields Library List and Cell List From the Library List select the library in which reside
466. r 10 General Library in the LISA user s manual GET_POINT Returns mouse position Syntax pt GET_POINT Parameters None Return Value pt type POINT Coordinate values in current measurement units for the cursor position It takes into an account the active reference point If it is called from xi script then it expects a mouse click in the layout If get_point is called rather than clicking the mouse hit the Esc key The function will return a NIL Remember that when get_point expects input of a point you can still use the following operations e viewing panning zooming e Ruler e Pick Layer e operations in the Layer bar If any other EXPERT s interactive operations are selected box creation stretch etc then NIL will be returned Example 1 gt pl get_point gt p2 get_point PO Cola Colby OZ pias KOZ AY Example 2 gt pseg PlOOP BEGLI gt p2 get_point SUL P2 EOL NIG then LEAVE LOOB gt seg_add_last pseg p2 gt END gt 1f pseq size GTR 2 then polygon seq GET_POINT_EX Returns the mouse position depending on the current direction snap mode 17 98 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Syntax pt GET_POINT _EX params Parameters params type SEQUENCE Sequence of parameters has the form params prev_point where prev_point type POINT Specifies the point on the current layout window The selectio
467. r approximation of wires and circles ellipses that allows offgrid geometry Example 2 gt SETUP SHAPE vertices value 20 Specifies that circles ellipses donuts and arcs of rolled regions will be approximated by polygons with 20 vertices UNITS Selects the measurement unit and the value for a Lambda unit Command UNITS without parameters displays the value of the current unit Format UNTTS unite stzel lam Jum mtb ymm i em hb inen i Jar 7 Lambaa Arguments unit_size type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Value of user defined Lambda unit in microns Switches ams um mill fmm fem ind 7m I lambda 17 26 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell The unit of measurement Example 1 gt units lambda 2 One user unit equals 2 um Example 2 gt units um Microns are set for measurements 17 6 4 XI Setup Commands NONSTOP MODE Sets nonstop mode for XI script execution Format NONSTOP MODE on off Switches Om il AQ on does not interrupt execution of the XI script on warnings messages If a message requires user s choice yes no etc the default option is assumed Example gt nonstop mode on QUIET MODE Sets quiet mode no warnings for XI commands execution Format QUIET MODE on off Switches fon of on does not display warnings messages during execution of the XI commands off works otherwise Example gt quiet mode on VIEW MODE
468. r ltda ds 8 8 O A A II 8 8 OF UNG COO narnia ai 8 9 8 6 1 Esc Key Interrupts Editing Operations 0 0 cet ro 8 9 B 6 2UNdOs oo ns ered e o e is aes 8 9 Oso WCCO iad sc oar en eeu en ee eric E a Gahan a Ed Sn ea ea eee A ata ete eue eae 8 9 8 7 Stretch Operator A os 8 10 A acca eae ae eee ar Rt Be Ta et 8 10 B12 oae RU 5 5 4 o er 4 005 apese 2 a ae rete bak Seen eed oot a teases 2d ecm eee 8 11 1 0 OPECHICAllON 20 vaveda Gacy reads ieee ceeds varo rial ler sa 8 11 0 6 JO POMS ea o Sa ee we ee ee nee ae ee eee 8 12 8 9 Inspecting Changing Object ProperticS 0ccc cece cece een eee ee eee essen ee eeeeeeneneee 8 13 8 10 Searching Layout ODICCtS iii teste ee St as ee bane tend AAA ea ae A a A 8 15 8 11 OMer Editing COMMANGS ica a aaa 8 18 8 12 Edit Submenu Operatoria 8 19 A a a oa don Sod a o dhe a tte Sates 8 19 A AN 8 20 Chapter 9 Viewing the Lay0Ut oococcccccccc eee eee eee eee eeeeaeeaes 9 1 9T Layout WV INGOWS 5 api Ee A E a geen emp eee 9 1 viii Simucad Table of Contents 9 1 1 Opening Closing WINdOWS 0c ccc cece ete et nett nett e eee e nett eeeennnees 9 1 9 1 2 VWINGOW Amando adds 9 1 9 2 FIA MODOS ia iaa 9 3 9 2 1 Individual Filling Modes for Layers ta0c0 0s0cadedveeatevious a e a 9 5 9 2 2 Individual Filling Modes for the Active Layer 0 0 ccc ccc cee eee teen eee nnees 9 5 93 Panning COMMANGS sists tame taria aaa Samet et aurea vid 9 6 Goel Pan TO targe PON 2 onc nett oie
469. r needs Simucad 9 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The Cascade operation in the Window submenu arranges windows in overlapping order Only the nearest window is visible only titles of other windows can be seen see Figure 9 1 The cascade operation can also be performed by pressing the corresponding icon in the Windows dock windows Figure 9 1 Cascade Method The Tile Tile Vertically and Tile Horizontally operations arrange windows to make them all fully visible see Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 and Figure 9 4 Pressing the corresponding icons in the Windows dock windows will also launch the desired Tile command Figure 9 2 Tile Method 9 2 Simucad Viewing the Layout Figure 9 4 Tile Horizontally Method 9 2 Filling Modes Shape layout objects region box circle ellipse wire may be drawn in three filling modes solid stipple and wireframe see Figure 9 5 The default filling mode of drawing may be selected either from the View gt Filling submenu or by buttons at the Filling toolbar Simucad 9 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Batt AAA AAA AAA eee eee ast SG SE a SS Na Ae AAA eee AAA Eee eee EEN AAA eee AAA AAA eee AAA HEN AAA eee AAA A A Se SA eS SS eS SD SE tatt EEE AAA eee IM AAA EEEE arses EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEE EE EEEE EEA EEEE a ae Se a SE SAS OS SAS AS AS eS SEAS SAE SBS SRE DAS SAE SRS SS DAS SAS Sa eS eS SRS eee eee Ae Ae A ee eee Ae A aD A SS EEE
470. r project you must activate it by the corresponding button Now if you open a cell browser of any EXPERT S editing command you will see mylib in the library list and you can open its cells 16 3 2 Shared Libraries Cell Version Control Version control is possible for libraries of the shared type The basic flow for the usage of shared libraries is as follows 1 Create an ordinary project file in s1d format Suppose its file name is mylib sld 2 Open your work project or start a new one Be sure that it uses the same technology as mylib sld 3 Set the mylib sld library as follows e Run Libraries Setup menu command e Click Add button at the Library Setup panel e Click the file browser button the one with three dots select mylib sld on your disk and click Open e To use library cells in your project you must activate it by the corresponding button Now if you open a cell browser of any EXPERT S editing command you will see mylib in the library list and you can open its cells 16 3 3 Shared Access to Projects in Read Only Mode If a designer opens an exclusive project for editing other designers can open this project in read only mode If the first designer performs a save operation the other designers are prompted to reload the project if they want to see the actual data 16 2 Simucad Libraries and Version Control for a Multi User Design Environment t 16 4 Project Library Management 16 4
471. r too so this macro Simucad 11 27 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual does not obey the above rule create only one derived layer per macro There are three solutions to this problem e You can split this macro into two individual ones The drawback of this method is the increase the size of the techno file and the number of layers displayed in the Layer bar e You can define the intermediary layer Tmp as invisible to the technology This is done by adding character at the beginning of its name This leads to the following macro AND Layerl Poly Layer2 N Act LayerR amp Tmp OR Layerl Substrate Layer2 amp Tmp LayerR N Gate e You can use the Logicform command which allows defining several logical operations in one single command see detailed syntax in Section 2 3 8 2 of the GUARDIAN manual In this example the macro would be LOogicrorm N Gate substrate or Poly and lt N AcL Derived Layer Generation When all the derived layers are defined you can generate them through the menu Tools gt Derived layers The detailed description of the available commands of derived layers management is in Chap 12 Section 12 12 Handling derived layers Note The derived layers are all generated in with a Flat scope in the current cell It means that EXPERT makes a flat copy of the current cell and uses it as input instead of the current cell All resulting derived layer objects are placed in the active cell Derived Gener
472. rameterized Cells 13 6 P cell Password Protection EXPERT can prevent unauthorized users from viewing and editing P cell script code To protect P cell in the current project check the Use Pcell password protection option on Data Safety page of Editor Viewer setup section of the Expert Preferences dialog Setup Editor Viewer The Pcell Password Protection see Figure 13 19 allows you to enter a password A password is case sensitive can be cup to 128 characters long and can contain any combination of letters numbers and symbols As you type the password the symbol is displayed for each character you type Password Contin Password a Note the password will be asked to show edit pcell script Remember that your password is case sensitive aa Figure 13 19 Pcell Password Protection Dialog To clear or change an existing P cell password click Change Password on the Data Safety page You will be asked for an existing and a new password see Figure 13 20 Leave the New Password and Confirm Password fields empty if you would like to remove the P cell password protection x Current Password New Password Contin Password Note the password will be asked to show edit pcell script Remember that your password is case sensitive aa Figure 13 20 Resetting Pcell Password To show and or edit a password protected P cell you need to provide correct password The Verify Pcell Password dialog will be
473. rarchy The Hierarchy EIP Direct Pick command allows you to pick an object for editing in place anywhere in the cell hierarchy To facilitate the choosing of the required object preselection highlighting is used When you click at a primitive object you will enter into the cell instance containing this object anywhere in the hierarchy for editing in place Direct Pick EIP obeys the settings Select gt Ignore instances and Select gt 1Ignore primitives The message line shows the cell name for the picked object 10 3 3 Up The Edit in Place gt Up command corresponds to the third button of the EIP toolbar This action is applicable only if the current edited cell is not the current active cell Otherwise the corresponding menu item and button will be inactive grayed Execution e Click on the Hierarchy Edit in Place gt Up menu or the corresponding EIP toolbar button Results e Ifthere are any changes in the edited cell the End Editing dialog appears questioning what to do with the changed cell instance It is described in Section 10 3 5 End Editing Dialog e The instance that contains the current edited cell instance becomes the new edited cell instance in other words it moves up the EIP chain in chip s hierarchy This action does not change the EIP chain The items on the buttons remain available for the Enter into Subcell operation If the Show in Place gt Dim or Show in Place gt Hide settings were used
474. raries are ASCII text files editing them manually is not recommended except for renaming the stipples and moving around blocks of stipple definitions as a whole Stipple Editor Operations The Stipple Editor dialog panel consists of the following controls In the Stipple manipulations part you can modify or create a stipple The Preview window shows layout samples for the current stipple The Bitmap window shows enlarged structure of bitmap as a grid of bit cells You can edit this structure by mouse clicks The color of a cell can be changed by a mouse click Preview window is updating immediately after any modification of bitmap structure The Rows and Columns drop down menus change the number of bitmap rows or columns allowed values are between 1 and 32 The Clear button sets to black all bits of the Bitmap window The Invert button inverts colors of current bitmap The Accept button stores modifications of the current bitmap The Reject button discards any changes of the current bitmap made since the last Accept operation The List manipulation part contains names and sample images of all stipples of the current library A blue rectangle around a stipple name marks the current stipple image which is shown in the Preview and Bitmap windows You can change the current stipple by key arrows scrolling the bar or mouse clicks Simucad The Copy button adds to the list of available bitmaps a copy of the current bitmap You mus
475. rary reference point is activated the positions are taken with respect to it and such positions are called relative 12 2 Simucad Tools The Metric bar indicates how to distinguish whether absolute or relative position is displayed by showing either X Y or RX RY In addition the Edit gt Position Cursor command uses the position locator to pan the layout to the point specified by its coordinates see Chapter 8 Other Edit Submenu Operations Section 8 4 Position Cursor Information about distances and angles are displayed in the Distance field of the status bar at the bottom of Expert window The Distance field is activated in the following cases e When the Ruler tool is used the measured distance between two points possibly along a polygonal line is shown in the Dist field In the case of a polygonal line the angle between the last two segments of the line is displayed in degrees in the Ang field e When a temporary reference point is activated the distance and the angle from it to cursor are shown The Position Locator and the Distance field show the values of the measurement unit set by you or assumed by default The Measurement Unit field shows this unit and its value in microns The Measurement Unit field is actually a drop down list that allows you to select the measurement unit You can set the measurement unit and the value in microns of Lambda custom unit by selecting Setup gt Ed
476. ration succeeds the project changes as follows e Anew cell is added to the project It is created from the selected objects of the active cell The origin of the new cell is defined as follows e Ifa reference point is active then the origin of the created cell is set to this reference point e In particular one must set the reference point to 0 0 and activate it if one wants the selected objects to have the same coordinates both in the old and new cell e If no reference point is active then the origin of the new cell is the lower left corner rounded down to the minimal grid e The coordinates of the objects in the new cell are obtained by subtraction of the coordinates of the new cell origin described above in the active cell from the selected object s coordinates in the active cell e The instance of the new cell is added to the active cell It is positioned at the lower left corner of the bounding box of the selected objects e The selected layout objects are deleted from the active cell e No objects remain selected in the active cell See also Cell gt Create Select gt Save Selected gt As Cell 10 5 Explode Selected Purpose Explode the selected instances and arrays in other words move the contents of selected instances arrays up one level of the cell hierarchy Execution e Select instances arrays to explode e Click on the menu command Hierarchy Explode Selected Results e The operation does not af
477. rays Use database unit from GDSII file Convert rounded or extended 1 point wires Skip GDSIT BOX data records Write box shaped BOUNDARY records as EXPERT boxes Convert Text Presentation from Older EXPERT Forced Line End and Join style Overrides PATHTYPE defined in the GDSII file for all layers Self intersection check for regions and wires Copy or move self intersecting polygons to error cells Non orthogonal arrays Copy or move non orthogonal arrays to error cells Write GDSII input log file GDSII input log file contains enhanced individual cell and layer object statistics Layer remapping Use text rescaling option in GDSII Input Output Resizes text to match the requirements of a foreign tool On GDSIl Output Output GDSII file extension for GDSII files Cell name limit max number of symbols Convert cell names into upper case matches GDSII strict standards Convert cell names to lower case Representation of arrays on output Convert wires to regions Options for writing cells from external libraries Write derived layers saves derived layers into GDSII file Write scratch layers saves scratch layers into GDSII file Use user defined DB units Use internal DB units Cut large polygons wires default Instructs you to cut polygons wires into smaller parts to match GDSII strict standard restriction on vertex count Restrict layer numbers and datatypes Write GDSII output log file GDSII output log fi
478. re 9 12 2x zoom in There are plus and minus buttons at the Command bar for zoom in out The default shortcuts are Gray plus and Gray minus keys at the numeric keypad of the keyboard 9 5 Mouse Wheel for Scrolling and Zooming e Ifno control keys depressed the mouse wheel scrolls the layout up and down e Ifthe Alt key is depressed the wheel scrolls left right e Ifthe Ctrl key is depressed the wheel zooms in out e Ifthe Shift key is additionally depressed the scroll factor is made 15 times more 9 6 Cell Map Cell Map window can be activated by selecting menu command View Dock Windows gt Cell Map This window performs following two functions e it shows the preview of current cell e it displays the frames which indicate the scrolling area of every opened window of this cell If there are several opened windows of current cell user can activate any of them by clicking on corresponding scrolling frame It is also possible to drag the scrolling frames by mouse and the referred window will be scrolled respectively Usually Cell Map window displays the currently opened cell but it can also display other cells for instance currently selected cell in Projects Tree or in any other tree or list of cells As any other docking window Cell Map window can be docked and undocked to available docking areas for user convenience The user can also resize it as required to satisfy his her current needs 9 10 Simucad Viewing the
479. re any changes in the edited cell Editing of the active cell is processed as usual End OF Editing muxi In Place Ed Explode Instance O Save Instance As New Cell O Reject Changes Figure 10 5 End Editing dialog box There are several ways of introducing the performed changes made into the design as shown by the radio buttons of the dialog box Execution e Select one of the following options by clicking the corresponding radio button e Explode Instance e Save Instance As New Cell e Change Edited Cell e Reject Changes The options are described in detail below e Pressing Cancel closes the dialog box and returns you back to whatever was being edited e If you press OK changes of the layout will proceed according to the selected option as described below 10 6 Simucad Hierarchy Operations End of Editing Options e Explode Instance The edited instance is exploded in its parent cell e Save Instance As New Cell Changes in the edited cell are applied only to the current instance EXPERT creates a new cell whose instance is the just edited instance Therefore the Cell Name Selection Form titled Choose New Name appears with the following fields e New Cell Name A name of the new cell must be entered into this field Initially this field contains the name of the edited cell slightly changed to make it unique e List of Cells The list of all cell names existing in the project Double clicking on a name fr
480. re efficient handling of growing data volumes and is designed to replace the current GDSII format OASIS is an efficient alternative to GDSII for post tape out data preparation flow processing The OASIS stream file format reduces file size 3 10 times smaller the GDSII for faster read write facilitates file transfer and data storage 2 5 7 LEF DEF file lef def A Library Exchange Format LEF file contains library information for a class of designs Library data includes layer via placement site type and macro cell definitions A Design Exchange Format DEF file contains the design specific information of a circuit and is a representation of the design at any point during the layout process LEF defines the elements of an IC process technology and associated library of cell models DEF defines the elements of an IC design relevant to physical layout including the netlist and design constraints LEF and DEF inputs are in ASCII form 2 5 8 Technology files tcn file The tcn file extension defines layers and some design parameters of IC layout It is used mainly when loading a project from foreign formats Files in eld format contain all necessary technology data However an external technology file can be used for eld files by selecting Setup gt Technology gt General gt Use external technology file for eld projects In future releases more parameters may be added to the technology file The technology file contains
481. re imported from a GDSII file they will be purged either during editing or saving operations Scratch Layers The Scratch layer flag is added to layer s properties in Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup to mark non drawing layers those intended to hold temporary data The corresponding parameter in the technology file is ScratchLayer TRUE FALSE Note In the Layer Bar if the cursor hovers over a scratch layer the Tool Tip text that describes the layer contains an s Edge Layers The Edge layers flag is included in the Layer Wire setup panel to mark layers containing line segments generated by DRC operations from boundaries of shapes on shape layers that contain polygonal shapes only Therefore an edge on an edge layer has inside and outside notions properly defined In a technology file the corresponding parameter is EdgeLayer TRUE FALSE Note In the Layer Bar if the cursor hovers over an edge layer the Tool Tip text that describes the layer contains an e Derived Layers A Derived Layer is a layer whose contents are produced by certain operations involving other layers In the current version there are three types of layer operations logical resizing and selection Layer Derivation is the process of definition of a layer in terms of other layers It may be performed either via Layer Setup dialog or by writing the corresponding commands into the technology file Layer G
482. ready exists appears This indicates that the project already has such cell name You must press OK and choose another name for the cell 2 Create new cell from selection dialog closes The operation was performed successfully Results If the operation was successful the new cell is added to the project and its layout window opens lt is created from the selected objects of the active cell The coordinates of the objects in the new cell are obtained as follows 1 The origin of the new cell is defined in terms of coordinates in the active cell as follows If a temporary reference point is active then the origin of the created cell is set to this reference point In particular you must set the reference point to 0 0 and activate it if you want the selected objects to have the same coordinates both in the old and new cell If no reference point is active then the origin of the new cell is the lower left corner rounded down to the minimal grid The coordinates of the new cell origin are subtracted from the selected object s coordinates in the active cell Note An instance of the new cell is NOT created in the active cell select Hierarchy gt Create Cell in Place for this The selected layout objects are NOT deleted from the active cell 4 14 Simucad Project Cell Commands 4 9 Copying of Cells Purpose To create duplicates of selected cells in the target library or current project Cell names are changed if
483. registry 17 22 SAVE EXPERT SETTINGS 17 23 SETUP GRID j ecommongrac Layer gra ky INSEAnNCOGTIG ee ae UNITS anit size 7mm zum fmt mo fom 7inch usm Il lambda NONSTOP MODE Pom FO E 17 27 17 23 17 25 17 26 17 122 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters selected active all 17 28 savewire nosavewire REGION MODE normal merge hole 17 29 holeall holeselected SELECT MODE fmroinstance instance noprimitive primitive reselect select dese Lect eross inside boundary solid STYLE WIRE width angle extend 17 35 flushend roundend ezt Jorne 1 Pili joint I round Joint 7miterjoint 2 Command Procedure Return type 17 29 LAYER_SET_VIEW_ATTRS layer_name attr_type flag 17 38 Simucad 17 123 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Table 17 22 Arguments Named Arguments Switches Parameters LAYOUIT BOX xXpos ypos xsize ysize OBJECT layer layername LAYOUT Boi PSE xcenter ycenter xradius yradius OBJECT layer layername LAYOUT POLYGON X Y 1X9 VQ XpVpi layer layer OBJECT namel ses LAYOUT TEXT xpos ypos string layer layername OBJECT ba LAYOUT WIRE X Y 1X9 VQ XpVpi layer layer OBJECT namel wo LAYOUL INSTANCE xpos ypos cell cellname OBJECT LAYOUT ARRAY xp
484. rent active cell is affected Example gt 06ll discard inverter CELL EXPORT Exports cells into the ELD XI script CIF Applicon or GDSII format on disk Format CELL EXPORT cell_name file_pathname multifile nolibcells libcells true false Arguments cell name type SEQUENCE cell_name cell_namel cell_namen is a sequence of cells represented by names to be exported file pathname type STRING The path name of an output file The format ELD XI script CIF Applicon or GDSII is defined according to the extension of the file pathname 17 10 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Named Argument nolibcells libcells type BOOLEAN If libcells is specified or assigned a value of true then CELL EXPORT with a hierarchy will be performed with the whole cell hierarchy otherwise nolibcells or libcells false cells from linked libraries will be ignored Switches Pin toe he The switch multifile means that specified cells will be exported to separate disk files This switch is applied for export cells to the ELD or GDSII formats only Examples Cell export inverter nandan muxl gdas multi le gt cell export inverter nand2 muxl gds gt cell export inverter muxl cif gt cell export inverter muxl xis CELL IMPORT Adds cells from another project stored in ELD GDSII or Applicon formats to the current proje
485. ression 0 5 conc Figure 13 7 Stretch Dialog Stretch rule changes the size and or position of layout objects Stretch direction is defined by the Direction list box control The following stretch directions can be assigned right left up down up right up left down right down left The value of the stretch can be defined by any valid LISA Xi expression Objects that are intersected by P cell control blocks are stretched and objects with their own stretch rules or objects included in control blocks are moved in the specified direction If the value of the stretch is negative then the stretch is performed in the opposite direction Simucad 13 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual ii D wy CL gi A m ct _ Figure 13 8 Stretch Example Direction right Expression L 0 6 e Repetition rule are to repeat objects in the specified directions Use the Add gt Repetition button in PCell Rule dialog to activate the Repetition form see Figure 13 9 Repetition 2 x Direction l right Er floor wv 0 5 2 5 Delta 25 ve AA EROTICO Col Delta Convert repeated instances to array Figure 13 9 Repetition Dialog The following repetition directions can be defined right left up down up right up left down right down left If you choose the up right up left down right down left directions the target objects will be created in the form of array see Figure 13 10 The number of
486. ring type STRING String to test Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if conversion is possible and FALSE otherwise Example 1 SOL splay Cus float 3 50 gt TRUE Example 2 gt display is float 3a gt FALSE IS_INTEGER Validates the input string for conversion to variable of type INTEGER Syntax ret IS_INTEGER string Parameters string type STRING String to test Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if conversion is possible and FALSE otherwise Example 1 17 100 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell gt display is_integer 3 gt TRUE Example 2 gt display is_integer 3 5 gt FALSE MESSAGE_BOX It is the Yes No dialog box with extended capabilities Syntax ret MESSAGE_BOX string params Parameters string type STRING Text string to be displayed Unlike YES_NO_DLG this text is displayed in a scrollable window and therefore has no limitation on the length of the message params type SEQUENCE The sequence of parameters that control the appearance title buttons return values etc of the message box In the current implementation message_box recognizes only the following cases empty parameter sequence In this case it produces an ordinary Yes No dialog 07 nonempty parameter sequence It produces a Yes No dialog with scrollable window for long messages Return Value ret type BOOLEAN True if the Yes button was clicked a
487. riterion_create OA_WEND EXT_END EQ Creates a search criterion to find wires with Extend end style Example 12 gt W J crit search_criterion_create OA_WJOINT ROUND_JOINT EQ Creates a search criterion to find wires with Round joint style Example 13 ww_crit search criterion create OA WWIDTH 0 3 EQ Creates a search criterion to find wires with a width of 0 3 Table 17 21 Instance Layout Object Attributes SORCELL CELL STRING OA_MIRROR Predefined A mirror status A pre defined constants on 17 75 17 114 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Table 17 21 Instance Layout Object Attributes OA ROTATION Instance rotation angle OA SCALE Instance scale factor Example 14 gt rot crit search criterion create OA ROTATION 90 EQ Creates a search criterion to find instances and arrays with rotations of 90 degrees Example 15 gt mit crit search criterion create OA MIRROR ME VERTICAL EQ Creates a search criterion to find instances and arrays with vertical mirroring Example 16 30 Crit search_criterion_create OA_SCALE 2 EQ Creates a search criterion to find instances and arrays with scale 2 Example 17 gt cell_crit search Criaveriom Create OA CEL inverter EQ Creates a search criterion to find instances and arrays of a cell inverter 17 20 7 EXPERT_SETUP Type Type object constant EXPERT_SETUP The EXPERT_SETUP data type represents the EXPER
488. rivation script for the current layer with all intermediate commands layers beginning from input non derived layers Accept derivation This command means that all changes in derivation of current layer will be checked for right syntax and derivation order and then temporarily stored as derivation of this layer If you made any changes in the layer derivation and did not use this command syntax checking for another layer will use the derivation of the previous layer without its changes Accept all derivations If several scripts of layer derivation have been opened this command applies accept derivation for all currently editing layers Note If you used Accept derivation or Accept all derivations commands but did not use Save to layer setup all changes will be discharge after you leave derivation setup menu Multiple Operations Macros One single derived layer can be created by a sequence of several operations The rule which must be respected in such a macro is to create only one derived layer per macro Here is an example of multiple operations macro AND Layerl Poly Layer2 N Act LayerR Tmp OR Layerl Substrate Layer2 Tmp LayerR N Gate In this sequence of two boolean operations the final generated derived layer is N Gate It is defined by logical AND between layers Poly and N Act and then by logical OR between layer Substrate and resulting layer of the first operation Tmp This layer is considered as a derived laye
489. rn HOBJECT hObject Handle to the next instance of Object or EA_INVALID_OBJECT Example HOBJECT hObject ExpApiGetNextInstObject Instance_1 Cell 1 18 7 14 Box HOBJECT ExpApiCreateBox double dSx double dSy double dEx double dEy LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateBox RCEAPoint ptPos RCEAPoint ptSize LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateBox RCEARect rtRect LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates a Box in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted 18 32 Simucad Parameters double dSx double dSy Initial position of Bottom Left corner RCEAPoint ptPos Initial position of Bottom Left corner double dEx double dEy width height RCEAPoint ptSize Width height RCEARect rtRect Initial position of Bottom Left corner width height LPCTSTR szLayerName name of the Layer Return HOBJECT Handle to the created box EA_INVALID_OBJECT if failed Example HOBJEC E HOBJect ExpApiCreateBox 0 0 100 100 Layer 1 18 7 15 Circle Expert API HOBJECT ExpApiCreateCircle double dSx double dSy double dRadius LPCTSTR szLayerName NULL HOBJECT ExpApiCreateCircle RCEAPoint ptCenter double dRadius szLayerName NULL Purpose Creates a Circle in specified Layer or current Layer if Layer name is omitted Parameters double dSx double dSy The center of Circle RCEAPoint ptCenter The center of Circle double dRadius Radius LPCTSTR szLayerN
490. rojeti RAE AO ROO E E 4 5 I0OIC albaneses 16 3 M a cunchovace sescuseehseeetreea siacaeceenest 12 2 measurement unit oo eee eec eee eeceseeseeeeseeseeeeeeueueeneaeeaeens 2 3 2 7 Merge mode scotland shatmeancades ideal 5 4 merge Mode td ioiei a ata ad wade 5 3 Meetic Balcaen AS 3 4 12 2 Minimal Gd tess Rect its ida eiii 2 7 Minimal Grid Grid Unit oooncccccconnnnccconnnnnonnononcnonanoss 11 30 Minor Operations rta aos 8 8 Modifying Layout Objects cascos ais 6 1 Most Recent Used Project List ooccccooccncconcnnooncnnnnnos 4 6 WOVE TO LAVET prinsi nieren O 7 7 MUlMEWINavIgator atissaia i 9 10 Simucad N TEE E A O aula eee 4 12 NOW DIOGO A 4 3 Node PIODING resena e ences 14 10 Normal Mode snoa eE E 5 3 NumericInput MOde cies csicnsscucescvesseccusveastecuraceedveterstencsvapednes 5 3 n mercalheld reinar a 3 12 O ONONO saneren e bone seu ceceeeesencac eae ctewsan tes 11 15 Open Cell scada 4 13 Other Edit Submenu Operations oocccccccocccnnccnoncnnonnnnnnnonnnos 8 1 A la a E TAE Ba at et ata 5 5 p Panning COMMANS aida 9 6 Parameterized Cell cccceececeeceececceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 2 3 5 8 Parent CO lh aras ia da 2 1 Paste MIO Layer at color ide 8 4 A culate settee eaten atest anes 2 3 5 8 A E 15 3 Ploter Sep e lO 15 2 PONDO ei a ea eeeoeetaast et adeans tensa nesscenee 15 1 OIE V DG oira a ei nate coe aes a ecueneheneeauneaesas 17 104 POSO GUISO oro ccc einer T ada 8 4 PRE
491. rom this submenu affect the results of selection or facilitate the selection process Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help Ez F By Click Orag S ke By Box By Object Type Newest Object i Active Layer gt All Deselect All Ctrl D Invert Selection Selection Modes Reselect MX Ignore Instances Select Ignore Primitives Deselect Preselect from List fia Inside Fat Preselection Tn Cross Sold Highlight By Boundary Save Selected gt nm By Solid ET O Figure 7 1 Selection Menu Some operations Modify Stretch require partial selection of shapes in other words separate vertices or segments or both This kind of selection is described together with the corresponding commands To avoid confusion all other kinds of selection are referred to as picking Selection is probably the most frequent editor operation Therefore Setup gt Editor Viewer Editing has an option Selection tool as default If this option is on then every time you exit from any other operation using Esc key you switch to the Selection tool Otherwise you would switch to the Void tool Most frequent selection commands and options are placed into the Selection Bar Recall that you can show hide control bars by selecting View gt Control Bars 7 2 Select By Click Drag Action 1 Select gt By Click Drag selects a layout object if you point to it and click the left mouse button EX
492. rrentCell Cell_1 18 5 2 Get Current Cell LPCTSTR ExpApiGetCurrentCell Purpose Retrieves the name of the active cell Parameters None Return LPCTSTR The name of the active cell 18 14 Simucad Expert API Example LPCTSTR szName ExpApiGetCurrentCell 18 5 3 Get Cell Number int ExpApiGetCellNumber LPCTSTR szLibName NULL Purpose Gets the number of cells in the specified Library or current Project if Library name is omitted or NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szLibName Logical library name or NULL Return int Total number of cells Example int nNum ExpApiGetCellNumber 18 5 4 Get First Cell HCELL ExpApiGetFirstCell LPCTSTR szLibName NULL Purpose Returns handle to the first cell in the specified Library or current Project if Library name is omitted or NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szLibName Logical library name Return HCELL Handle to the first cell Example HCELL hCell ExpApiGetFirstCell 18 5 5 Get Next Cell HCELL ExpApiGetNextCell LPCTSTR szLibName NULL Purpose Returns handle to the next cell in the specified Library or current Project if Library name is omitted or NULL Parameters LPCTSTR szLibName Logical library name Return HCELL Handle to the next cell or EA_INVALID_HANDLE if no cells left Simucad 18 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Example HCELL hCell ExpApiGetNextCell 18 5 6 Get Cell Name LPCT
493. rs are overlapping at these places for example after derived layers generation Therefore it can be useful to hide unused layers in order to avoid these white areas Warning Some plotters do not support color mixing in Direct output mode Miscellaneous plotting style settings e Show cell instance names When instances are drawn as frames e g in lazy view mode their cell names are written as well e Show cell instance origins Cell instance reference points are drawn as small markers e Decimals displayed The number of digits displayed after the decimal point in outputs e Zoom Factor The amount of zooming unzooming performed when you run View gt Zoom gt Zoom In or View gt Zoom gt Zoom Out menu commands press Gray Plus or Gray Minus on the keyboard or click the plus or minus buttons at the Command bar e Scrolling Steps in Pixels These two fields horizontal and vertical steps allow you to set the distance the screen scrolls when a scrolling arrow or a scrolling shortcut is pressed e Active layer filling mode one of four values may be selected wireframe solid stipple and no change This setting defines the filling mode of the active layer When the layer is activated its filling is controlled by this setting When the layer is deactivated its filling mode is restored to the previous one For example it is sometimes convenient to see all layers in wireframe and the active layer is always highlighted by being dr
494. rsion Control for a Multi User Design Environment Logical name 051999 Path N Demo 05t999_Leld a re Figure 16 3 Entering library parameters The default logical name is the file name without the path and the extension Now you may edit the logical name and type manually Delete Button Library Setup If you select a library by clicking at its logical name and then click the Delete button the library will be deleted from the library setup however you cannot delete a library from the setup if some of the cells from this library are used in the opened project You have to deactivate the library before deleting Properties Button Library Setup If you select a library by clicking at its logical name and then click the Properties button you may change library parameters however you cannot do this if some of the cells from this library are used in the opened project Activate Button Library Setup If you select a library by clicking at its logical name and then click the Activate button the library will be activated for the opened project This means that you may see this library in cell lists of various operations of EXPERT and hence you may use cells from this library in all editing operations If a project has instances of cells from another library two cases are possible 1 If this secondary library is present in the library setup and this library is defined correctly it is activated automatically when the
495. rt_setup selectboxmode SBM_INSIDE stretch select box rect_create 0 0 5 6 reselect Selects the segments laying inside specified box Example 2 Sireuch select box 0 0 10 10 Zlaysr ayer TIGO Pget point point_create 4 10 select Selects the segment of the specified box object STRETCH RUN Performs stretch operation Format STRETCH RUN shift_x shift_y Arguments shift_x type DOUBLE shift_x type DOUBLE Defines the stretch shift vector v shift_x shift_y Simucad 17 69 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual UNDO Performs one step of undo Format UNDO 17 11 Search Commands and Procedures FIND OBJECTS Looks for layout objects of specified types according to various criteria Format objs FIND OBJECTS obJ7ect type PEP LEer ce Fforrtepia IWwsearch tect rect lyvweross finside selected visible IAATLerarcny seq_output Arguments object_type predefined constants Specifies the type of object for search The following predefined constants are used to specify object type SEARCH ANY OBJECT all layout objects SEARCH_ANY_ SHAPE primitive layout objects SEARCH_BOX SEARCH ELLIPSE SEARCH_REGION SEARCH_WIRE SEARCH_TEXT SEARCH_INSTANCE including instance arrays SEARCH ARRAY If the argument object_type is not specified then a search for all objects SEARCH_ANY_OBJECT will be performed Named Arguments criteria criteria type SEQUENCE
496. rtcut key is Q Gt may be reassigned If there was a reference point active hitting Q deactivates it and the text at the Metric bar reads X O FN If there was no reference point hitting Q makes the reference point at the current cursor position The text at the Metric bar reads RX RY where R is for Relative Hint If you want to move a reference point hit the Q key twice with mouse cursor at the new position 9 10 2 Activate Reference Point The View gt Activate Reference Point menu command allows you to switch between the set temporary reference point and the origin as position reference e If the Activate Reference Point menu option is not checked the origin is the reference point and the text at the Metric bar reads X Y e Ifthe Activate Reference Point menu option is checked the cursor position is shown relative to the new reference point The text at the Metric bar reads RX RY where R is for Relative 9 10 3 Traveling Reference Point If the View gt Traveling Reference Point mode is on and the temporary reference point is activated then during creation of boxes wires and regions the reference point is always moved to the last clicked point Simucad 9 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 9 10 4 To Reference Point The View gt To Reference Point command moves the cursor to the reference point 9 10 5 Distance from Reference Point When a temporary refere
497. rter Replace existing cells rand Replace Replace All rand Rename cells Pret Auto Rename Sut New name inverter Inverter nand2 nand2 gt AAA select cells All Copied All Existing Collision The same name inverter used for inverter and inverter Discard Changes Check Cancel Figure 4 10 Cell Name Collision Resolving Form e Rename selected cells by appending a user defined suffix or prefix To do this type the suffix or prefix or both and click on Autorename button e Rename a selected cell by a typing the name in the New name field It will immediately appear in the New Cell Name column e Clicking the title of a column sorts the collision list in ascending or descending order by old or new name or by library name If you get lost during complex collision renaming click the Discard Changes button to restore the initial state of the dialog 4 10 Deleting Cells Purpose Delete cell s from the project library Execution Click onto the Cell5 Delete menu item The Cell Name Selection box appears with the Delete cell s title The Library List contains the list of all exclusive libraries linked to the work project including the current project You can select one cell or several cells to delete If a cell to be deleted is instanced in other cells a warning box appears stating that these instances will also be deleted With Hierarchy option If this option is o
498. rtical First the first segment of the L shape is vertical and the second one is horizontal If this option isn t used the first segment of the L shape is horizontal and the second one is vertical See Figure 5 7 i ee LEA He Orthogonal o Y Diagonal 3 E None E 20 deo Orthogonal w Diagonal AE None y i E 90 deg Orthogonal S Diagonal AE None wr nn iia e Vertical First Figure 5 7 Polygonal Creation in Over the Point Drawing Simucad 5 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 5 3 Cell Instance Array Creation 5 5 6 Cell instances and arrays are created by the same tool To create them select Edit gt Create Object gt Cell Instance Array or use the corresponding buttons from the Design Bar The Numeric Input panel will appear The cursor shape will change to the instancing cursor with the instance frame attached This frame has the dimensions of the domain of the instantiated cell The cursor position with respect to the instance frame indicates the reference point or origin of the activated cell Library denio_ mux gt A Name Celt nand2 ee IEEE lt demo_mus Position l an lt demo_mus x 54 5000 y 268 5000 CAmuxd demo mus lr Anand demo mus f Rotation Scale Mirroring E 1 0000 None Array Attributes R f a M e Orthogonal Columns Delta Rows g 0000 Y 58 0000 g Delta Columns i 2410000 Y
499. rwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiReplacelInstancesInProject Source_Cell Target_Cell 18 13 Support 18 13 1 File Name Selector LPTSTR ExpApiGetFileName LPCTSTR sFileName LPCTSTR lpszFilter NULL LPCTSTR lpszDefExt NULL BOOL bLoad TRUE Purpose Selects file name Memory allocated by the function should be finally freed Parameters LPCTSTR szFileName File name LPCTSTR lpszFilter Filter LPCTSTR lpszDefExt Default extension BOOL bLoad Flag TRUE calls the Load dialog FALSE calls the Save As dialog Return LPTSTR Path to selected file Example LPTSTR szFilePath ExpApiGetFileName Project_1 Expert Files Cael I eee Ty Melo TRUENI Simucad 18 57 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual if szFilePath free szFilePath 18 13 2 Update View void ExpApiUpdate Purpose Updates current contents of screen useful for Debug Parameters None Return None Example ExpApiUpdate j 18 13 3 Refresh View void ExpApiRefreshView CEARect cptRect EA_INITIAL RECT Purpose Refreshes current View in specified rectangle or all view if rectangle is omitted Parameters CEARect cptRect View rectangle to refresh Return None Example ExpApiRefreshView ExpApiRefreshView CEARect 10 0 10 0 100 0 100 0 18 13 4 Refresh Object void ExpApiRefreshObject HOBJECT hObject Purpose Refreshes specified Object Parameters HOBJECT Handle of Object to refresh Return
500. s CUSTOMENU_ITEM SetupItems CUSTOMENU_ITEM Setup amp Graph void amp SetupGraph CUSTOMENU_ITEM Setup amp Path void amp SetupPath CUSTOMENU_ITEM ShortPathItems CUSTOMENU_ITEM amp Setup Setupltems EA countof setupltems CUSTOMENU_ITEM amp RebuildGraph voild amp TestPrepareNetForShortSearch CUSTOMENU_ITEM amp BuildShortPath VOUr a TEest Bui LaShorte Path CUSTOMENU_ITEM amp DeleteShortPath void amp TestDeleteShortPath CUSTOMENU_ITEM amp ChangeDrawMode void amp TestChangeShortDrawMode static object created during loading library will insert menu items CCustomMenu cm_ShortPath 10 ShortPath ShortPathltems EA countof ShortPathltems 18 2 Access to Expert Settings 18 2 1 Save Settings into File BOOL ExpApiExportSettings LPCTSTR szFileName Purpose Saves the current EXPERT settings into a text file All settings are saved with the exception of Technology setup and Bind key setup which are saved into their own files Parameters LPCTSTR szFileName Setting file name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiExportSettings settings ecf 18 2 2 Load Settings from File BOOL ExpApilmportsettings LPCTSTR szFileName Purpose Loads current settings from the setting file Parameters LPCTSTR szFileName Setting file name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE
501. s Grag a LISA scripts xis xis j EDE Plain text txt e Ext NAExpertTestSuittapps Celet NAExpertTestSuitapps Celet gt ae LISA Script fles AS Look in a Scripts e 1 e Edy a changewirestyle xis laa file_sel_ex xis la pcel CVS la cmddre xis a find_left_bottom xis la pcel la 17divide xis la cmdeip xis laa form_create xis la pcel E 4 16creat xis la cmdfloorplan xis la hier_search xis la pcel a 417creat xis a cmdobjcomps xis limp 1 xis a pcel la aset xis E cmdobjcreate xis load_pcell_prj xis la pcel E box_info xis E cmdproject xis la loadeld xis laa pr ie laa box_info_2 xis la cmdsetpars xis laa m 17x100c xis pri box_info_3 xis a compare xis la make_holes xis rour gt bug_form_long_string xis compare_test xis a multiuiser xis sear a calc_time xis a comparecells xis a multiuser 1 xis la sear Ln 2 Col68 sa cellcopy xis a compproj xis la multiuser2 xis a set la cellcopy_ xis la compproj_test xis la multiuserend xis la set sa cellimp xis laa delete xis laa ntran xis la spir My Network LA k File name Scripts Files oftype LISA scripts xis Cancel 4 Figure 17 3 File Dialog with Extended Capabilities Simucad 17 97 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual GET_ENVIRONMENT_STRING Retrieves the value of the specified variable from the environment block Note This command is obsolete Use the command GETENV see Chapte
502. s Parameters params type SEQUENCE Sequence of file dialog attributes has the form params title openfile def_ext where title type STRING Title of the file dialog 17 96 init_dir file _filters Cancel E Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell openfile type BOOLEAN If TRUE then Open file dialog is created Save as file dialog otherwise def_ext type STRING The default file name extension This extension will be automatically added to the file name if you do not type an extension init_dir type STRING The path name of the initial directory file filters type SEQUENCE A sequence of string pairs in the form description file types that describe files to be opened or saved see the example Return Value fname type STRING The string with the file pathname Example gt display file_selector_ex LISA Script files true xis de test scrtpts 1 LESA Seriprs ds AIRES Plain text EXE Creates an Open file dialog box for LISA Scripts files with extension xis or txt in the directory d test scripts and displays the selected file name see Figure 17 17 3 Xi Editor A Scripts file_sel_ex xis rt 0 x File Edit Find Script Window 15 x IG amp E ZO ll a OBST gt BO B display xl file_selector_ex LISA Script files true xis d Script
503. s Select one of the four items of the drop down menu default solid wireframe or stipple by the left mouse button The default filling mode means that the setting will be taken from the current common setting View gt Filling submenu The last three columns contain check marks indicating that a particular property is applicable to the corresponding layer e You may check on off the layers properties individually Changes will be applied instantaneously when closing the Layer plan panel e You may change all layer properties of a column by clicking on the top of the column For example if you click on Include the whole column becomes highlighted Then click at any checkbox in order to change the characteristics for all layers in one shot e You may change the property of a group of layers by clicking on the right side of the check box of several layers in the desired column holding the Shift key depressed Then you can check uncheck the box of one of the selected layers the property will be changed for the whole group of layers The Layer Plan panel contains a Plan List option You can add delete or rename plans in it Also you can select any plan from the list to be used This list can be accessed directly from the Layer bar 11 18 Simucad Setup When clicking the black arrow button on the right side of the Plans button a drop down list of plans appears and then any of them can be selected with the cursor The Plan List on the
504. s new muxl gds and new nand2 gds Both files contain one cell with only the top level geometries Note If the With Hierarchy option is left unchecked then only the selected cells will be written in the GDSII file If these cells contain references to some other cells they will be unresolved in the resulting GDSIl file This option is useful for splitting a project into several libraries 4 13 2 Cell Export to Xi Script Files The menu command Cell gt Export can be used to export in Xi Script file format When this operation is performed EXPERT writes two files e A Xi Script file with the definition of the cell selected for export 4 20 Simucad Project Cell Commands e A technology file saved from the current project You may see the name of this ten file used in the first line of the exported xi script as a parameter to the command project new 4 14 Saving Discarding Forbidding Cell Changes The following commands from cell submenu handle changes in cells Cell gt Save Cell Save Cell As Cell gt Discard Changes Cell gt Read Only See also e File gt Save File gt Save As File gt Save Cells e Edit gt Undo Edit gt Redo e Commands from Chapter 16 Libraries and Version Control for a Multi User Design Environment 4 14 1 Save The Cell gt Save command saves all changes in the current cell into the corresponding project library file 4 14 2 Save As The Cell Save Cell As command writ
505. s A A A ees Dee 18 6 18 2 14 Set GDSII Setup Data 000 A eee dade bo tas 18 6 18245 GEVGDS il Sep Dala arc oot te wae bei eee eee pta io rece 18 7 18 2 10 Set CIF Setup Dala ansia ia 18 7 182 1A Get Gir Sep Dad is a aa aa a ete ees 18 7 18 2 18 Set Applicon Setup Dala o iodo taeiiaieina betet os inaa a a a 18 8 18 2 19 Get Applicon Setup Data voii conta oi sveed eusoy Yeas is 18 8 103 PEO Oda ai 18 8 AO A E 18 8 19 3 2 NOW PIO Po a da ed 18 9 A Lodd A AN 18 9 18 34 Close Proje ista e a da 18 10 O A A 18 10 18 3 6 Save Project As Another File oo oooocooooccorncorno eee tenet ne eens 18 10 13 3272 COMICS PrO E tn rd ia tia o ote 18 11 16 4 TEeCMOII a A A 18 11 18 4 1 Get the Number of Technology Layers ooooooocococcccoccn eee eee tenets 18 11 18 42 GetFirst Technology PAVE cit retardo es ren eee 18 11 18 4 3 Get Next Technology Layer 0 cc ccc ccc eect cent eee t nett eeenenanes 18 11 18 4 4 Get Technology Layer Name ccc cece tenet nee ene e tent enanes 18 12 18 4 5 Set Technology Layer siait nad evita dd o Sue PON bok end ee Ad 18 12 18 4 6 Get Technology Layer Specification 0 ccc cece cette tent e nee eee enna 18 13 19 47 Add Technology LAV Ol id 24 sabia ia era roda le et dow bar Sd aed aa awd ge el Add 18 13 18 4 8 Delete Technology Layer 0 0 ccc cee eee nett ete eee een ene enes 18 13 18 4 9 Get Technology Layer Handle nunnan ccc cee cece ete t eee ten
506. s User s Manual Distance from Point to Line cccccecseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 12 5 Distance from Reference Point cccccseecceecsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 12 6 OG ee yee ic te tecnicos nocd lcd aida atadas 2 6 5 12 drawing Options sirosis setters a i 5 2 BI E E E EEE AANE EEA EEA T ARR 14 2 DRAE sa 14 5 DRC Script Execution Setup ccccoooccnccccocconocconcnononanononoos 11 50 DAG Schl RUI a ye eels eo eee celica 14 2 DFOD GOWN DUTIOM assi iaast 3 12 DROD COWINIST rara ii 3 12 DUI a orev a errr mene anne etre 8 5 E A E Pac eel ences dace 2 12 Edit DOK A se e e a E ena meee enn oer tt ome 3 12 A a a asta cnnwsstvodeents 10 3 a A E ENE EE E A E ee eles 10 3 eld ME sorses ener e a nee etter 2 7 IPSS MOQION enus a a emanates 2 6 A a a a 2 4 EXCIUSIVG Dra is rns sss a aa a 16 1 OXCIUSIVE ID aria tia 2 1 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell oocoocooconccccccocncnconno 17 1 Id tiara 10 8 EXPONO CEE sereia ainas iaa ii 4 19 external technology file ocooonccccooconnnncococonnoncanoncnnnos 4 6 F il inte EE EEEE AEE PPE ENEE A ERE E E E EE EEAS 9 3 Filling Modes for Layers occ avd 9 5 Filling Modes for the Active Layer sccccccssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 5 A ace a a E 9 11 ane Misu a ea at catia aac 10 9 Floorplan Mode orina air ica 9 13 G A oer E eee nee mene an ey ne eee 4 7 A A arte EL 2 8 GD SIO SEUD ieee a 11 35 Geometric Transformations ccccssseeccceeseeee
507. s a P cell master Format DEFINE PCELL pcell_name REPLACE PARAMETER param_name TYPE type DEFAULT value a BODY BEGIN pcell_script END Arguments pcell_ name type STRING The name of P cell master If you want to create or redefine P cell in the activated library then full cell name should be used Switches REPLACE Specifies that P cell with specified name will be redefined if last one already exists If the switch is not specified while a P cell with this name exists then a warning message is displayed and redefinition has not occurred PARAMETER Subcommand Describes the parameters for P cell definition Format PARAMETER param_name TYPE type DEFAULT value Simucad 17 117 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Arguments pcell_name type STRING The name of P cell parameter Named Arguments TYPE type type TYPE Specifies the valid types that can be entered for the parameter The following types are valid for P cell parameters INTEGER DOUBLE BOOLEAN STRING DEFAULT value Specifies the default parameter value Type of value should coincide with type specified by named argument type BODY Subcommand Provides the implementation for the P cell Format BODY BEGIN pcell script END Arguments pcell_name Any LISA expression or block that defines the P cell s implementation Example DEFINE PCELL ntran REPLACE PARAMETER gates TYPE Integer DEFAULT 1 PARAMETER width TYPE Doub
508. s chosen for loading a project technology selection is required because such files contain insufficient technology information See Section 4 2 1 Technology File Selection for more information Eld and Sla files store technology data inside themselves In addition because of format incompatibilities you must specify certain options for translating data The Options button at the file selector dialog box is used to invoke the setup dialogs for import from foreign formats as is described in the corresponding sections of Chapter 11 Setup For example settings for import from GDSII format are described in Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 5 GDSII I O Setup These options may also be preset by the commands from the Setup submenu corresponding to the foreign file type for example Setup gt GDSIT Input Output 4 3 6 Loading from LEF or DEF Format When opening a file of LEF or DEF format the technology selection is optional If the Technology field is left empty the information within the LEF or DEF file will be used The Output Name field is required If no output name is specified a file with the filename of the LEF or DEF file being open will be created with a eld extension You can specify an output name of type ELD or SLD If you choose the LEF format file after loading the LEF file EXPERT will open and load the DEF file with same name if exists 4 3 7 Cell Selection Dialog The Cell selection dialog contains
509. s parts of the layout through their own windows This chapter describes how to open arrange and close layout windows as well as how to navigate inside a layout window 9 1 1 Opening Closing Windows A layout window in EXPERT is opened to view a cell You may open several cells in their own windows as well as several windows for the same cell Below is a summary of commands that may open close layout windows Detailed descriptions may be found in the corresponding sections of the manual The New command of the File submenu closes the current project Gf any after the name for the new project being created has been specified If the current project was modified you will be asked to save the changes The Open command of the File submenu closes the current project Gf any after you specify the name of the previously created project to open If the current project was modified you will be asked to save the changes The project to open may be of EXPERT S eld format s1d format as well as from GDSII Applicon CIF LEF or DEF format The New command of the Cell submenu creates a new empty cell The Open command of the Cell submenu opens an existing cell Some operations that may create cells have the Open now option so that a created cell is immediately opened The list of opened layout windows identified by their cell names can be found in the Window submenu or by View gt Dock Windows gt Windows Only one of these wind
510. s the key combination you want to assign for this command e g lt Ctrl Shift F3 gt e click the Assign button The name of this key will be added to the Current Keys list Others Commands of the Shortcuts Panel e You may remove a shortcut by select its command and its key in the Current keys list and then click the Remove button e You may restore default shortcuts of EXPERT see paragraph below e You may assign several shortcuts to one command by repeating the shortcut assignment many times Shortcut Setting File Shortcut settings are saved in a file with the extension ekb using the Setup Shortcuts Save Shortcuts menu command The mnemonics for ekb is Expert s KeyBoard Shortcut settings are loaded from a file with the extension ekb using the Setup Shortcuts Load Shortcuts menu command Shortcuts Information The Setup gt Shortcuts gt Shortcuts Info command shows a panel with the list of all shortcuts assigned to the keyboard The shortcut panel has the Save button that saves the hotkey list into a text file 11 44 Simucad Setup Reset Commands The Setup Shortcuts Default Shortcuts command must be used when you want to restore the default shortcuts of the EXPERT installation directory for the current session The Setup gt Shortcuts gt Clean Shortcuts command must be used to delete all shortcuts in the current EXPERT session 11 9 2 Toolbars Panel The Toolbars panel allows to enable
511. s will be modified These parameters may help to preserve symmetries distances and other shape properties To closest node The off grid point will be shifted to the closest grid point North East The off grid point will be shifted to the closest grid point so that both coordinates increase Outwards Inwards The off grid point will be shifted to the closest grid point in the direction outwards or inwards with respect to the specified reference point Save squares In this mode the sides of square boxes will be kept equal Save 45 Angles in multiples of up to 45 degrees will be preserved To save a 45 geometry there is an option Cut spikes If this option is on sometimes 45 corners are cut to a small extent to place the snap on grid with minimal change of area If this option is off one of the adjacent sides is shifted Hint It is possible to set the reference point by mouse If you set a temporary reference point default shortcut Q and leave the scaling center to be 0 0 then scaling will be performed with respect to the temporary reference point Simucad 12 35 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 14 Handling Derived Layers Normally a derived layer is recalculated when you activate it by clicking on its color strip in the Layer bar The following commands from the Tools Derived Layers submenu handle recalculation of derived layers Freeze Derived Layers blocks their recalculation during their activation
512. sGeneralSetup Reference to a General Setup structure Return None Example GENERAL SETUP sGeneralSetup ExpApiGetSetupGeneral sGeneralSetup sGeneralSetup someField some value ExpApisetSetupGeneral sGeneralSetup 18 2 11 Get General Setup Data void ExpApiGetSetupGeneral GENERAL _SETUP amp sGeneralSetup Purpose Gets EXPERT S General Setup data Parameters GENERAL _SETUP amp sGeneralSetup Reference to a General Setup structure Simucad 18 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Return None Example GENERAL SETUP sGeneralSetup ExpApiGetSetupGeneral sGeneralSetup 18 2 12 Set Technology Setup Data void ExpApiSetSetupTechnology const TECHNOLOGY_SETUP amp sTechSetup Purpose Sets EXPERT S Technology Setup data Parameters TECHNOLOGY_SETUP amp sTechSetup Reference to a Technology Setup structure Return None Example TECHNOLOGY_SETUP sTechSetup ExpApiGetSetupTechnology sTechSetup sTechSetup someField some value ExpApisSetSetupTechnology sTechSetup 18 2 13 Get Technology Setup Data void ExpApiGetSetupTechnology TECHNOLOGY_SETUP amp sTechSetup Purpose Gets EXPERT S Technology Setup data Parameters TECHNOLOGY_SETUP amp sTechSetup Reference to a Technology Setup structure Return None Example TECHNOLOGY_SETUP sTechSetup ExpApiGetSetupTechnology sTechSetup 18 2 14 Set GDSII Setup Data void ExpApiSetSetupGDS
513. sabling Real time DRC clears it of all previous error reports e Show Error Flags menu item allows you to make errors reported by Real time DRC visible invisible e Show Critical Zone menu item is only available if the Show Error Flags menu item is checked It allows you to make critical zones visible invisible and helps to resolve DRC violations according to rules defined by DRC scripts see Figure 14 5 e Check in Area menu command allows you to perform a special version of DRC In Area command This command works almost the same way as the DRC in Area command The only difference is in the scope of the check as described in Real time DRC Reports on page 14 6 The Real time DRC bar provides quick access to Real time DRC Setup and Real time DRC menu commands Real time DRC Bar can be made visible by checking the corresponding box in the menu command View gt Toolbars gt Real time DRC To use Real time DRC you should first e run Real time DRC Setup e enable Real time DRC Simucad 14 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e Enable EZ Show error flags LL Iv Show critical zone LA LLL LL LL IL y Show error ID Check in area Release license Figure 14 5 Real time DRC Bar Error Flags and Critical Zones Real time DRC Reports When creation modification of an object is finished Real time DRC performs checks with this object The scope of checks is defined as follows e For primitive objects boxes wires regi
514. se the current EXPERT setting is applied This setting is recommended when a wafer scale layout is loaded from a GDSII file In the case when the option is not checked the input GDSII file will be converted to the DB unit value which is specified in the menu Setup gt Editor Viewer gt General in the field Database unit for new imported projects See Section 11 3 1 General Page for more details Convert Text Presentation from Older Expert In very old versions of EXPERT the default alignment of the text with respect to its origin reference point was the lower left corner while the default of GDSII format is the upper left corner Now it is possible to select text alignment in the numeric input for text creation modification There are three vertical and three horizontal alignments nine choices total If you need to read a GDSII file written by an old version of EXPERT use the setting Convert text presentation the previous version of EXPERT found in the Setup gt GDS Input Output Setup gt GDS Input menu Import Layer Remapping Import layer remapping table works in a similar way as export layer remapping table see below GDSII Input Output Panel Text Rescaling If the Use text rescaling option is OFF text size in microns equals Magnification Factor value GDSII record type 27 MAG If omitted a magnification of 1 is assumed Text rescaling value allows text size adjustment when transferring GDSII files between differ
515. selector dialog will appear allowing you to browse for the required technology file If the pathname of the technology file is shown the file browser opens the directory of this technology file Otherwise the directory of the application default technology file is opened If no specified technology file is found EXPERT prompts you to either repeat the selection or proceed without technology In the latter case if you are importing loading an existing IC layout some default technology will be generated based on the layers present in the file You may save this generated technology by selecting the menu command Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology File 4 4 Simucad Project Cell Commands If you successfully starts a project the technology name is stored in the configuration settings and saved between loads and sessions The specified technology file is loaded before opening the project If a critical error occurs during the loading of the technology file EXPERT returns back to the project file selector dialog If noncritical errors occur during the reading of a technology file the corresponding warning messages will appear Note The OS File dialog button calls native file dialog for Operation System and allows some additional actions such as Rename Delete and Set Properties for files 4 3 Loading Project A project can be loaded in many ways the actual loading operation is described in the corresponding subsections of th
516. sensitive EXPERT s cell names are case sensitive attribute sets are used to set new names for copied cells It is needed for example to resolve collision between names of copied cells and cells existing in the target project The name of each attribute in the source_cell_names is a name of copied cell type STRING The attributed value is a name of this cell in the target project type STRING Note Full cell name included logical name of library should be used for the original cell and only the cell name without the logical name of the library should be used for a new cell name in the target project targetmap target_cell_names type ATTRIBUTE_SET Case sensitive EXPERT s cell names are case sensitive attribute sets are used to set new names for the cells in the target project It is needed for example to resolve collision between names of copied cells and cells existing in the target project The name of each attribute in the target_cell_names isa name of an existing cell type STRING The attributed value is a new name of this cell in the target project type STRING Note Cell names without a library logical name should be used for both cell names Named Argument nolibcells libcells type BOOLEAN If libcells is specified or assigned a value of true then CELL COPY with a hierarchy will be performed with the whole cell hierarchy otherwise nolibcells or libcells false cells from linked libraries will
517. side the second object is eliminated by merged internal boundaries and merged boundaries of the third object have created a hole Figure 12 35 Resize Operations Oversize Figure 12 36 demonstrates transformations made by the Undersize operation Note the first and the second objects are divided into two pieces The hole inside the third rectangle is increased The hole inside the fourth has become more than the object itself so the object has disappeared Simucad 12 33 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Nothing Figure 12 36 Resize Operation Undersize 12 13 Technology Migration 12 13 1 Scale Selected and Scale Whole Layout The set of selected objects or the whole layout of the edited cell is rescaled according to a number of parameters specifying the scaling factor amount of scaling center and options of scaling as shown in Figure 12 37 Scale Selected scaling Type acaling Center Scale Dimensions A coordinate fo C Scale Placement Y coordinate fo f Scale both Placement and Dimensions Scaling Factor fas Origin of primitive le at CN A a Cocot DE Gre amp Bounding box point closest to scaline center Figure 12 37 Parameters of Scaling Operations The meaning of most parameters is evident If Scale Dimensions or Scale Placement types are selected it is necessary to specify individual scaling reference points origins for
518. someone else Cells from a shared library may be checked out for editing and changes must be checked in to be visible to other designers Simucad 2 1 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual 2 1 1 Cell Name Restriction Non shared EXPERT databases eld are case sensitive in connection with cell naming but shared sld is not case sensitive under the Windows platform You can combine letters and numbers in any order The following special characters are illegal for using in cell names lt gt To comply with GDSII cell naming convention and specifically with runningthe GUARDIAN DRC and HIPEX extraction tools from inside the EXPERT application the following symbols are recommended to use in the cell names 1 9 a z A Z _ and S 2 2 Hierarchical IC Design EXPERT makes it possible to decompose a complex circuit layout into smaller parts using the cell instancing approach With EXPERT all cells already included in a project can be edited and instanced in other cells copied or deleted New cells can be created and imported from other projects or instanced from libraries Decomposition into cells simplifies the design of a chip You do not need to correct the layout in all repeated parts because any changes done in a cell automatically affects all of its instances On the other hand hierarchical design is a way to reduce memory requirements Only name and placement parameters are stored for each i
519. sor movement e Modes for object creation normal merge hole and hole selected e The DRC and DRC error inspection toolbars allow the user to invoke the DRC Script Panel load the DRC errors browse through the error select the error marks type and get detailed information on each error e The Real time DRC toolbar when enabled displays the location of the error being flagged by the Real Time DRC script e The Filling toolbar shows and assigns filling modes for drawing the regions e The Hierarchy toolbar allows you to select the view of the layout lazy flat and the arrays display mode full perimeter outlook e The Node Probing toolbar provides access to all node probing feature after an extraction has been performed e The Selection toolbar shows and assigns selection modes of object and the display mode of the current selected items e The Version Control toolbar allows you to Check in and Check out cells of a Shared Layout Data format SLD project It also allows cell management function as New Delete and Rename cell e The NDL toolbar allows you to show flight lines highlight certain types of net and show the pin flag when you are working with the Netlist Driven Layout NDL feature Simucad 3 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 3 4 The LPE toolbar allows you to specify the LPE setup to invoke the desired parameter extraction and to display the different netlist extracted hierarchical flat All the to
520. specified reference point by the named arguments refpointx and refpointy savesquare If specified save45 Preserves angles up to 45 degrees cutspikes Allows you to save 45 degree geometry selected If specified then only selected objects will be shifted to the grid point the whole layout will be shifted otherwise TOOLS CUTBYVERTEX Cuts large polygon and wires by means of vertices count into smaller ones with a specified number of vertices Format TOOLS CUTBYVERTEX all regions wires selected project regionvertices value wirevertices value Arguments e all regions wires Specifies the type of objects to be cut e all default means that wires and regions will be cut e regions is used to cut regions e wires is used to cut wiress e selected project Specifies the operation scope e selected default means that only selected polygons and or wires will be cut e project is used to cut all polygons and or wires in the current cell library 17 80 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e regionvertices value type Integer Specifies the number of vertices for cut regions If the argument is not present the default max number of wire vertices is used see the menu command Tools gt Cut by Vertices Count gt Cut by Vertices Count Setup e wirevertices value type Integer Specifies the number of vertices for cut wires If the argument is not present t
521. spect to the screen Supergrid Supergrid nodes are marked by small crosses The Supergrid step is given in terms of the visual erid step It may be switched on off Grid Characteristics The grid may have the following characteristics e The Dotted grid is represented by dots at the grid nodes e For a Solid grid all grid lines are drawn e Supergrid and Visual grid may be set to be either visible or invisible e Grid step may be set to automatic or manual In the latter case you can input the grid step size in current units e Ifthe grid is automatic you can select its density by choosing Automatic grid type to be one of normal dense or sparse e You may select the grid s color by clicking the Color button The same color palette tool as for layer setup is used e Snap Visual and Supergrid steps in X and Y directions may be set separately e Any change in the Grid Setup can be previewed in the Preview Mode area of the Grid Setup dialog Simucad 11 31 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 4 7 Pwire Templates This page is to add remove or modify Pwire templates in the technology section of the EXPERT database see Figure 11 14 The Pwire template is stored in the technology with a unique name and used for quick creation of Pwire objects see Section 5 6 Parametric Wire Pwire Templates PwireTempl1 METALL flash Eeen OLD 2 PwireTempl 2 METAI Fush Extend 100 FwireTempl 3 METAL Ra 1 Flush Ra
522. st is not a derived layer By checking this box you are declaring this layer to be a derived layer Note that there is some danger in this action When setup is complete all current contents if any of the layer will be lost at the first generation of derived layers Therefore you are asked first to confirm your intention to set the selected layer to be a derived one After confirmation the Derivation button becomes active allowing you to specify the required derivation parameters see below If the Derived layer box is checked it indicates that the current layer in the layer list is a derived layer Unchecking this box to stop derivation of the layer and turns it into an ordinary layer All current contents of that layer the result of the last layer generation remain unchanged and may be edited in the regular way after layer setup is complete You should confirm your intention to stop layer derivation because it results in the loss of all its derivation parameters including the derivation macro see Section Layer Derivation Editor for details The Derivation button invokes the Layer Derivation Editor dialog from the Layer Setup dialog allowing you to control existing properties of derived layers Gif any without defining new ones If this button is pressed while the current layer in the layer list is derived the Layer Derivation Editor dialog is displayed on the screen with derivation parameters of that selected layer Layer
523. super grid step over the visual grid sgridstepy value type INTEGER Specifies the super grid step over the visual grid along Y direction if different from X direction color r g b type SEQUENCE Sequence of numbers between 0 and 255 that specifies the RGB value of the grid color Switches fcommongrid layergrid instancegrid e commongrid switch means that default grid settings will be modified e layergrid switch means that grid settings will be applied to the particular layer with the name specified by argument layer e instancegrid switch means that grid settings will be applied to the cell instance array placement equalxy noequalxy e equalxy switch means that grid step is equal along X and Y directions e noequalxy switch means that grid step along X direction is different from grid step along Y direction 17 24 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell snap nosnap e snap switch means that cursor movement will be limited by snap grid nodes controlled by named arguments snapstepx and snapstepy e nosnap switch means that snap grid mode is OFF snapdependvisible nosnapdependvisible e snapdependvisible switch means that snap grid size is dependable from visual grid size e nosnapdependvisible switch means that snap grid size is defined by correspond named arguments snapstepx and snapstepy visible invisible e visible and invisible switches make grid nodes visible and
524. t 2 box PosX ndiff Met _NDiff offset PosY ndiff Met NDiff offset SizeX met SizeY met box PosxX ndiff Met _NDiff offset StretchMetCont PosY ndiff Met NDiff offset SizeX_met SizeY_met contacts layer layer cont stzeYX all contes S1zeY met Cont NDIE dist Zi nNCOnLS T bLoor Sre all conts y Cont size Cont Cont Arst rest S176 all contes Cont Size Cone Cont dist ICONESS nconts nConts tloor rest 7 Cont Size Posx cont Posx nalff Met_NDiff_offset Cont NDirt dist PosY cont W 2 Met _NDiff offset Cont _NDiff dist sizeY all conts n onts Cont size Cont cont dist Cone Cont cist 2 Simucad iCont 1 LOOP BEGIN IF Cont GIR MCONES THEN LEAVE LOOP Box POSx cont Post Conti Cont Size Cont Size Dox POSxX cont StretchMebcCont Posy cont Cont s1ze Cont size BOS cont Posy conl Cont size Cont Cont dist 17 119 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Icont Icone Ts END l poly layer layer_poly POsY poly BOS ndiri Poy NDITI Orrser SizeY Poly NW E Poly NDIE Ot Ese 2 PosX_poly L 2 iGate 1 LOOP BEGIN IF iGate GTR NGates THEN LEAVE LOOP box Posx poly Posy polyy p L SrZzeY oly PosX_poly PosX_poly L Poly _Poly_dist iGate iGate 1 END END 17 22 Access to Xi commands 17 22 1 Command Line Input To input Xi script edit
525. t running on PC Windows NT platform If a free license for GUARDIAN LPE is available its functions are accessed from the Verification Netlist Extraction submenu of the EXPERT layout processor GUARDIAN LPE extracts devices MOSFETs BJTs diodes resistors etc and connectivity information from the layout and produces the circuit description in Spice netlist format The extracted netlist of the designed chip can further be compared with the netlist produced by the schematic of the design by GUARDIAN LVS layout versus schematic LVS comparison tool Also GUARDIAN LPE can call Hipex RC to generate another SPICE netlist including parasitic resistances and capacitances The extracted netlist can be used within a circuit simulator such as SMARTSPICE to evaluate the effect by those parasitic RC Layout Database Technology Information Guardian LPE SPICE netlist Including parasitic RC Figure 14 6 Flow chart of Netlist Extraction and the Post Processes extracted SPICE netlist Device recognition is the process of identifying devices to insert their instances into the netlist representing the extracted version of the circuit Each instance of any device is recognized by the existence of a separate shape on a specific layer This layer will be referred to as a device recognition layer or simply recognition layer It is common to use boolean and or select operations to create such a layer for each device For instance for the most comm
526. t Angle Mode Preserve Angles Mode the ends of the picked side slide along the two neighboring sides so that its length varies while its adjacent angles do not This mode always works for 45 90 degree mode e Otherwise the picked side translates freely so that its length does not change while the two adjacent sides stretch contract freely This mode only works for All angle mode Preserve Angle mode on off Figure 6 2 Side Drag Modes Some object s attributes cannot be changed using the mouse for example Layer For such attributes you should use the Property Bar or Numeric Input Attributes of different types of objects were described in the Chapter 5 Creating Layout Objects You can use the Modify tool in combination with other tools For example if you want to add a new vertex to a polygon or new joint to wire you can use Add Jog Points tool For more information about these tools see Chapter 8 Other Edit Submenu Operations Simucad Chapter 7 Selecting Layout Objects 7 1 Layout Objects You may often need to copy move delete or do something else with several layout objects In this case you must mark select objects to be processed simultaneously The selected objects are highlighted in the layout This chapter describes operations that permit you to select deselect sets of whole objects in the edited cell To invoke these operations use the Select submenu see Figure 7 1 Several settings f
527. t an item from the Commands list In fact you may select a whole group of commands that correspond to a branch from the main menu For example if you select Expert Clipboard from the Edit menu in the Commands list the following submenu will be added to the custom menu e Cut e Copy e Paste e Paste into layer At the same time it is possible to add the commands Cut Copy etc individually e In the Custom menu drop down list select one of the three available custom menus where you want to add an item e Select e Stretch e System i e all other cursor modes than select mode and stretch mode For example if you add an item to the Select custom menu the item will only appear in the custom menu when the cursor is in select mode Simucad 11 47 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual In the Custom menu items list select the existing item below the place where you want to add the desired item When you need to change the place of the new item in the list select it and use the Up and Down buttons to move it Click the gt gt button to move the selected item to the custom menu You may add separators between groups of commands in the custom menu by clicking the Separator button Add a custom submenu to Custom Menus It is possible to add an existing submenu to the Custom Menu see the description above You can also create custom submenus in any of the three available custom menus You can add any combination of items
528. t be selected from a drop down list This list only displays the layers of the current technology Fabrication Sequence The second field of the Cross Sectional Viewer setup is the Fabrication Sequence table It allows you to define one by one all the steps of the process beginning with the bottom of the chip substrate to the top Here are the available commands which can be performed on a selected process step a process step can be selected by clicking on its number e Add In order to add a process step you must first select the step above the place where you want to add a process step Then click the Add button A new step is added in the table you can then set the parameters of this step Each step is numbered automatically when adding it e Delete In order to delete a step first select it then click the Delete button e Up and Down In order to change the place of a step in the fabrication sequence Up and Down buttons should be used Process Operations A process step is defined first by the operation it consists in You can find below the detailed description of the process operations and the meaning of required parameters to define There are four different kinds of process operations which are available e DEPOSITION e ETCHING e IMPLANTATION DIFFUSION e OXIDATION For each operation some parameters or all of them must be defined among the following list depending of the chosen operation e Mask Material name e Th
529. t enter the name of the newly created bitmap The New button adds to the list of available bitmaps an empty bitmap You must enter the name of the newly created bitmap 11 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The Delete button removes the current bitmap out of the list of available bitmaps You are asked to confirm the operation The Import button adds to the list of available bitmaps a copy of the bitmap contained at another library of stipples This button invokes the File Selection dialog box to point out the library file and a stipple selection dialog to select a stipple defined at this library The Merge button adds to the list of available bitmaps all bitmaps contained in another stipple library You are prompted to point out what library file is to be merged The File operations window contains the name of the active stipple library The Clear button creates an empty list of available bitmaps It helps you to create a new stipple library The Load button invokes the file selection dialog box to point out the new stipple library to be activated instead of the current library The Save as button invokes a file creation dialog box which allows you to save modifications made in the current library as well as save them into a new library file The Apply to technology button instantaneously spreads to the Layer wire setup panel a change of stipple which has been done in the Stipple Editor Usage in Project The Stipple Edi
530. t will open automatically You can close it and reopen it using the menu Pcell gt Show Xi Script 4 7 2 Descend The Cell Descend command is used to open the cell for a cell instance array that you see in the layout window When the cell instance array is selected you can choose Cell gt Descend to open the selected item in another window This feature can best be used if a keyboard shortcut is assigned to it When the item 1s selected pressing the corresponding keyboard shortcut will descend in to the cell array 4 7 3 Ascend The Cell Ascend command opens the cell from which the Descend command was activated to open current cell All cells are remembered so you can repeatedly make the Descend command and return back 4 7 4 Possible Problems 1 The layout of the cell apparently does not fill the whole window The most probable reason is an erratic object away from the main layout It can easily be detected as follows e Select the normal part of the layout by box drawn as tight to the normal layout as possible e Invert selection by the corresponding option from Select menu e See the number of selected objects by selecting Cell Info command e You might wish to look at these anomalous objects using Edit gt Search command with the option Search among selected If you check the box Zoom to object the layout window will display the selected objects e Delete the selected objects 2 You cannot se
531. tained if the ellipse circle is converted to polygon with the current settings vertex count fitting to grid etc Note The Select gt Fat Preselection mode make the appearance of the preselected object more visible Note If several objects are laying under the current cursor position holdingthe ALT key will help choose the desired object Simucad 7 3 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 7 3 Box Selection Purpose Selection deselection of layout objects that are either completely inside or intersect the selection box depending on Inside or Cross settings in the Select gt Selection Modes submenu Execution This action is initiated in two ways 1 By the Select gt By Box command or by the corresponding button from the Design bar Once you have invoked this command you may perform box selection several times until you switch to another command or to the Void tool The selection box is specified by clicking the mouse at any pair of its opposite corners 2 If you are in the Select gt By Click Drag operation you may select by box as well The selection box is drawn by a press drag release action You must press the left mouse button at the first corner of the required selection box drag the cursor into the opposite corner and then release the button The set of objects to be affected by box selection depends on the current setting of Selection Mode e If Select gt Selection Modes gt Inside mode is on the objects that fit
532. tches are used in all object creation commands Named Arguments parent_cell type STRING Specifies the name of the cell in which a search for the object with the specified attributes will be performed Not valid if the switch create from the named argument cluster create find delete is specified Note when the named argument parent_cell is used objects attributes should be in the local coordinates of specified parent cell 17 38 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell property name value Names Value gt neame value Liyoe SEQUENCE e name value name value namen valuen is a sequence of user defined properties e lt namei valuei gt is a property definition text text text textn Type SEQUENCE The sequence of texts to be attached Each text is represented by a sequence of text attributes text x y string hel gnt width slope slLant align mirror See TEXT on page 17 45 for explanation of each attribute and see MODIFY TEXT on page 17 73 for predefined text align style constants replace layoutobject type LAYOUTOBJECT The layout object to be replaced by this object net net_name type STRING Specifies the net to which the created object will be added Switches create find delete e create switch means that the new object will be added to cell e find switch means that the object will be searched for e delete switch means that the
533. ted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HLAYER Handle to the first data Layer in the cell Example HLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetFirstlayer Cell_1 18 6 5 Get Next Layer HLAYER ExpApiGetNextLayer LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Returns handle to the next Layer in specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return HLAYER Handle to the next data Layer in the cell or EA INVALID_HANDLE if nothing left Example HLAYER hLayer ExpApiGetNextLayer Cell_1 18 6 6 Get Layer Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetLayerName HLAYER hlLayer Purpose Returns Layer s name by Layer s handle Parameters HLAYER hLayer Layer handle Return LPCTSTR The name of Layer Example HLAYER hLayer some data LPCTSTR szLayer ExpApiGetLayerName hLayer 18 6 7 Get Cell Layer Number int ExpApiGetCellLayerNumber LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Simucad 18 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Purpose Retrieves number of cell instance array layers in the specified cell or current cell if cell name is omitted Parameters LPCTSTR szCellName Cell name Return int Number of Cell Layers in the cell Example int nNum ExpApiGetCellLayerNumber 18 6 8 Get Cell First Layer HCLAYER ExpApiGetFirstCellLayer LPCTSTR szCellName NULL Purpose Returns handle of the first Cell Layer in specified cell or current cell if cell
534. ters LPCTSTR szLibLogName Library logical name LPCTSTR szLibPathName Library file pathname Simucad Expert API 18 61 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetLogName library1 testlibraryl eld 18 16 2 Get Logical Name By File Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetLogNameByFileName LPCTSTR szLibPathName Purpose Gets Library logical name by specified Library path Parameters LPCTSTR szLibPathName Library path Return LPCTSTR Library logical name Example LPCTSTR szLibLogName ExpApiGetLogNameByFileName testlibraryl eld 18 16 3 Get File Name By Logical Name LPCTSTR ExpApiGetFileNameByLogName LPCTSTR szLibLogName Purpose Gets Library path by specified Library logical name Parameters LPCTSTR szLibLogName Library logical name Return LPCTSTR Library path Example LPCTSTR szLibPathName ExpApiGetFileNameByLogName libraryl 18 16 4 Activate Library BOOL ExpApiLibActivate LPCTSTR szLibLogName Purpose Activates Library with specified logical name Parameters LPCTSTR szLibLogName Library logical name Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise 18 62 Simucad Expert API Example BOOL bResult ExpApilibActivate libraryl1 18 16 5 Deactivate Library BOOL ExpApiLibDeactivate LPCTSTR szLibLogName Purpose Deactivates Library with specified logical name
535. the EXPERT XI script commands LISA language can be found in Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Note When defining the cut line on the layout the cursor is snap mode sensitive It means that you can activate any mode in the menu Edit Direction Snap Mode in order to choose the direction of the cut line Horizontal Vertical No Direction To remove a Cross Sectional view e Select it in the Cross Segments list of the Cross Sections window e Click on the red button of the Cross Sections window Simucad 12 21 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Cross Sections Visualization When generating a cross section it appears in the Cross Sectional View window see Figure 12 22 Cross Sectional iew eo xl Pb FY we Sl mw 4 e M Last Operation Etching Mask Nothletal2 Figure 12 22 Cross Sectional View Window Several features are available in this window in order to easier the visualization 12 22 Coordinate axes are implemented in order to check the distances The graduations unit follows the setup of the metric bar of EXPERT e The vertical axis corresponds to the depth in the chip Its origin corresponds to the top of the first deposit substrate e The horizontal axis corresponds to the distances along the cut line Its origin is set at the start point of the cut line Zoom Four buttons are available for the zoom functions fit to Cross Sectional view zoom in zoom out and zoom into windo
536. the Windows clipboard You can cut or copy objects into it and then paste them into the required position of the current cell as well as into other cells Note EXPERT clipboard is not the same as the Windows clipboard In particular you cannot paste data from EXPERT S clipboard into other Windows applications and vice versa 8 2 1 Cut Purpose The Edit gt Expert Clipboard Cut menu option transfers the selected objects of the current cell onto the clipboard Every object pasted onto the clipboard is accompanied by information about its layer and position relative to the group frame where the group frame is the minimal rectangle enclosing the selected objects The Cut operation replaces the previous contents of the Expert clipboard by the currently selected objects This operation may also be invoked from the Command bar 8 2 2 Copy Purpose The Edit gt Expert Clipboard Copy menu option copies the selected objects of the current cell onto the Expert clipboard Every copied object is accompanied by information about its layer and position relative to the group frame where group frame is the minimal rectangle enclosing the selected objects The Copy operation replaces the previous contents of the Expert clipboard by the currently selected objects This operation may also be invoked from the Command bar See also Edit Duplicate command for copying data within the same window 8 2 3 Paste Purpose The Edit Expert Clipboard
537. the appearances of the edited cell and the surrounding differs as described below Hame E Emea EE med E E inverter E nand2 cH My Contact m My Metal m My hetaz m My nwel 65M Poy E Mi WellCon B 511 instances amp arrays in mud E aray 00 cel must fecal 4 fro 1 Figure 10 4 EIP gt Up applied to layout from Figure 10 3 Simucad 10 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 10 3 4 Exit Purpose The Edit in Place gt Exit command corresponds to the fourth button of the EIP toolbar It terminates the EIP session Execution e Click on the menu command Hierarchy Edit in Place Exit or the corresponding EIP toolbar button t Results e Ifthe edited cell is not the active cell and if there are any changes in the edited cell then the End Editing dialog appears questioning what to do with the changed cell instance It is described in Section 10 3 5 End Editing Dialog e Ifthere are no changes the EIP session is ended e Pressing Cancel in the End Editing dialog box returns you to the EIP session e Pressing OK confirms the selected changes see Section 10 3 5 End Editing Dialog of the chip layout and the EIP session is ended e At the end of the EIP session the EIP chain is reset 10 3 5 End Editing Dialog Processing of all EIP commands Enter into Subcell Up Direct pick Exit etc begins from this dialog Figure 10 5 if the edited cell is not the active cell and there a
538. the boxes is fixed and equal to the Space parameter value Remaining space after the last placed box if there is one is left empty If you chose even distribution then unused space is evenly distributed between placed boxes and actual space between boxes is in the range space value lt actual space lt space value box length The Offset and Justification parameters are used to place boxes with offset from the master wire see Table 2 Simucad 5 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 5 20 Table 2 Offset path separation C CO CS Box center on master wire centerline Shift left separation value 1s distance between box center and master wire centerline Shift right separation value is distance between box center and master wire centerline Left edge master wire coincide with right edge of box Shift left separation value is distance between left edge of master wire and right edge of box Shift right separation value is distance between left edge of master wire and right edge of box Right edge master wire coincide with left edge of box Shift right separation value is distance between right edge of master wire and left edge of box Shift left separation value is distance between right edge of master wire and left edge of box Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 7 Contact The Edit gt Create Object gt Contact menu option activates the contact generating tool The tool has two
539. the current project as an ASCII technology file with menu Setup gt Technology gt Save Technology file This means that you can generate cross sections on any layout if you loaded the layout with the technology file which is correctly set up for the Cross Sectional Viewer Simucad 12 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual The other way of implementing the process description is to set the parameters by hand in the technology file for each layer corresponding to a process operation see the description of the complete syntax of EXPERT technology file in Section 2 5 8 Technology files tcn file This must be done by following the syntax of the example below Material MaterialName VIA Thickness 0 Processing DesignLayer TRUE ProcessingStep 15 Operation 2 StepCoverage 0 Undercut 0 Angle 100 Planar FALSE PatternedLayerName CVD2 In the technology file the operation name is defined with a number thanks to the following code e 1 Deposit e 2 Etching e 3 Implantation e 4 Diffusion or no process operation e 5 Oxidation Note In order to specify that a layer of the technology is not involved in any process step set the ProcessingStep value to 1 Note The parameter St epcoverage Is unused in the current implementation of the Cross Sectional Viewer The parameter DesignLayer can be left as it is by default 12 5 3 Using the Cross Sectional Viewer Cross Sectional
540. the database unit is used Its value can be selected in Setup Editor Viewer gt General Note Since the coordinates are represented internally as integer values there are limitations on the range of allowable coordinates For example if the database unit is equal to 0 1nm this leads to the following restriction for machines with 32 bit integer arithmetic The maximum absolute value allowable for coordinates is 50 000 um 1 e 5 cm If this value is exceeded the drawing will look strange due to wrapping integer numbers across their maximum Simucad 2 3 Expert amp ExpertViews User s Manual Therefore if you need to process larger layouts e g wafer scale designs select the larger database unit in Setup gt Editor Viewer gt General You can also use the Use database unit from GDSII file option of the GDSII I O setup Note In the current version of Expert the work project and all libraries linked to it must have the same database unit Otherwise the result will be meaningless and EXPERT will issue warnings 2 3 2 Layout Objects An IC layout is designed in EXPERT in terms of primitives which are actual shapes and cell instances arrays Additionally texts are used for annotation purposes Primitives and texts are said to be created in layers Layers Layer is an attribute of any primitive geometrical object created with EXPERT Some of the layers are of physical or technological meaning for example layers of po
541. the description of the variable to be initialized Initial values define the data type and input field type INTEGER DOUBLE STRING and BOOLEAN data types are allowed Use tab separated string for the drop down selection list form_params type SEQUENCE Sequence containing parameters of the dialog input form Currently only one parameter the title of the entry form dialog is used Return Value var_params type SEQUENCE Values of variables Example This example creates the entry form with title test input form with specified initial values see Figure 17 17 1 The sequence vars contains initialized variables 17 94 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Xi Editor N ExpertTestSuit apps Celebrity ExpertTestSuit Scripts form_cr Fie Edit Find Script Window 60980 5 85 ROA IAXAA eeano sl hello string value se Leds double value s53 5 integer value s4 FALSE boolean value s5 Red Green Blue drop down value ss sl 52 SJ S so SSL eee ARMUT SO test input form ax vars form_create ss ssl string value ha ee double value E integer value f boolean value D drop down value Red ds E Figure 17 1 Calling Create Form Window from Xi script FILE EXISTS Returns True if the file or directory exists and False otherwise Syntax ret FILE_EXISTS pathname Parameter pathname type STRING File or directory path name
542. the ellipse in the active layer selects it and deselects the other objects 17 42 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Example 4 gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 delete Searches for the object with specified attributes in the active layer and deletes it Example 5 gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 foropert y 4 namel LO hame2 20 E text 11070 texti n 05 Usos 0 Talse TA BOTTOMEBE TS Cruel ADLER EA as Oise Osor Oy EROS PA VOPR LEE False Creates an object with specified properties and attached texts in the active layer Example 6 gt old_ellipse ellipse 0 0 4 5 create get gt ellipse 0 0 5 5 replace old_ellipse The first command creates ellipse and returns one type LAYOUTOBJECT The second command replaces this object with the new one Example 7 gt ellipse 0 0 4 5 create topolygon select add Creates the ellipse converts it to a polygon and selects the last one Selection status of other objects is not changed POLYGON Creates selects or deletes a polygonal region Format POLYGON LXVI VNS layer layername property name value name gt value name value text text text text replace layoutobject net netname foreate find delete select Yreselect Fada sdeselect AESPOLVOR pin get Arguments Xir ip hoe Yoran Y LEY DS SEQUENCE Sequence of vertices of the polygon where each pair of numeric values
543. the following e File format version number Modifying the Version field manually is not recommended It indicates the version of the FORMAT of the technology file e ID string to identify a particular issue of the technology file 2 8 Simucad Basic Notions The TechnologyID field of the technology file allows you to annotate the technology For example you can input the name of the technology and its revision number It may be an arbitrary text with no length restrictions The default value of this field is TechnologyID Non named technology ver 0 0 You can input or modify it by selecting Setup gt Technology gt General menu or by editing the technology file using a text editor e Step of the minimal grid positive integer value in nanometers e Name of measurement unit EXPERT recognizes the following units nm um mm cm m mil inch Lambda and the last name for a user defined unit e Unit value in micrometers if user defined unit Lambda is used This field specifies the value of the user defined measurement unit Lambda It gives the value of Lambda in nanometers The default value for UnitValue is 100 nm Layer parameters for each layer consist of the following e Layer name e Layer color definition color name or RGB value or both e Stipple pattern name e GDS2 number e GDS2 data type e CIF name e Wire parameters describes the shape of wires in the layer e Width is the default width value for
544. the following fields Library List contains the name of the work project and the logical names of all libraries attached linked to this project The name of the work project is shown in angle brackets If you click on a name from the Library List it is highlighted to indicate that it is selected You may select one or several names from library list to see their cells in the Cell List Cell List contains names of cells called structures in GDSII format present or visible in the file If you click on a name from this list it is highlighted to indicate that it is selected The following controls help in cell selection e The Filter field helps to list only the cells whose names obey a filtering criterion A filter is a template for a cell name which may contain two special symbols and The asterisk stands for any text and the question mark stands for any single symbol The asterisk is not displayed but implicitly present at the end of every filter Simucad 4 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Open Cell s E als Library List Cell List All Hone Name Link_int_AX gt MD PecoanDEM A clk_retry Link_int Ars i seis tion ee MLCAD_proiectLitr ck sync preteen o tlds P pcells Ed prp pcells Yan Pl pcells Ed nprir pcells npn pcells Tr Fi pcells edr HY F pcells EA poly_res F pcells pa via12 pcells EA via23 pcells f Top level cells only All cells Cell Filter Cell previe
545. the option is on 9 7 6 Hierarchy Depth of Display It is possible to restrict the number of hierarchy levels shown on the screen The View gt Cell View Hierarchy Depth submenu allows you to specify the deepest of hierarchy levels whose primitives are displayed Lazy view corresponds to zero depth There are seventeen possible values for depth However you can go beyond them by using the Increase Decrease depth commands The View gt Cell View Increase Depth and View gt Cell View Decrease Depth commands are changed by the display level set by the command Depth or Lazy These commands are most convenient when executed by shortcuts Clicking the shortcut several times changes depth by several levels When cell instance inside are not shown Lazy View or other views of limited hierarchy display depth the cell name is written within the instance s frame Option Setup Editor Viewer gt Viewing Draw layout for at most lt N gt hierarchy levels sets the number of hierarchy levels drawn starting from the deepest level set by the above commands 9 7 7 Activate Layout View The View gt Cell View Active Layout View command allows you to activate the layout window while working in the numeric input mode This command is best used if assigned to a shortcut Note Another important view of cells is the Xi Script of parameterized cells The Xi Script of a Pcell currently active in the layout window can be display using the command Cell
546. the popup menu and the subcircuit selected will open in the layout window If the subcircuit is non existent in your standard cell or P cell you will be asked to create this layout cell By pressing OK to this message the automatic cell generation will take place Netlist Rover xj MODA project NDLAlatchl net a Open E Y Create E Co MPL Figure 12 8 Create Open Popup Once the Create option is selected the Cell View window displays the geometry of the created layout Figure 12 9 Note If the selected subcircuit is hierarchical and the underlying instances are not calculated yet they will be laid out as well Simucad 12 9 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Figure 12 9 Initial Placement 12 4 3 Layout Editing Once the automatic placement is completed you can start editing the layout To assist you in this step EXPERT features a user friendly interface for editing the generated design layout To simplify the design wiring operation electrical connectivity can be highlighted as displayed in Figure 12 9 You can reorganize the initial placement of the instances and cells generated and the connectivity will update accordingly These highlighted lines are called flight lines The purpose of these lines is to link the pins that belong to the same net and therefore should be electrically connected in the current cell There are three different types of flight lines Global nets Internal nets and External nets The Gl
547. this library but cannot add delete or modify any cells inside e Change right means that you have full access to the library and its cells and can add new cells and delete modify any existing cells For Shared Library e No access right means the same as for non shared library it can not be opened at all e Read Only access right means that you can open this library but cannot change the technology data of this library e Change right means that you can open the library and modify it s technology Note Read Only access right of shared library does not affect to cells inside it You can have Read Only access right for library and Change access right for all or some cells inside These cells can be edited without any restrictions For Shared Cells e No access right means that you cannot open or delete the cell e Read Only right means that you can open the cell in read only mode but cannot edit or delete it e Change right means that you can open edit and delete this cell To create new cells in library you must have file creation permissions in lt library_name gt cll directory Please contact your system administrator to assign correct access rights for libraries Some operation systems have more access right options they are also supported by EXPERT Non shared library lt library_name gt eld file shared library lt library_name gt sld file and shared cell lt cell_
548. this option is on the layers not defined in the specified map file will be skipped 11 42 Simucad Setup 11 8 OASIS I O Setup EXPERT may read write Oasis files for projects Project Load and Project Save As and cells Cell gt Export Cell gt Import Various options may be set for the export import of Oasis files from the OASIS Input Output panel which can be displayed in the Preferences window menu Setup Editor Viewer then choose OASIS Input Output in the Import Export Setup group OASIS File Extensions This field in the Input group inputs the list of possible extensions of OASIS files as shown by the following example Oas7 Oasis which is a list of file specifications separated by a semicolon This list is used in the Project gt Load and Cell Import dialogs to filter the file list in the File Browser The extension which is used for output is the first extension of the list of extensions Conversion Log You may write all events during the OASIS file conversion into a log file To do this check the option Write log file and specify a file extension for the log file Output Options Validate Scheme From the drop down list you can choose to generate data of validation of the translation from EXPERT format to OASIS format these data are stored in the last 4 bytes of the file e No scheme item means that no validation of the translation will be done e CRC82 validation In this case a
549. tion is useful if the project has cells with the same names from different libraries Loading GDSII files with Missing Cells Unresolved Cell References To restore library references after saving a project file with the Write library cells option OFF you must do the following e Read the saved GDSII file as usual A message appears warning you that there are unresolved cell references e Go to into the Libraries gt Setup menu command and activate the libraries with the required cells If necessary add the required libraries to the setup 11 38 Simucad Setup Note Cell references will be resolved in the same order the libraries were activated If a cell is unresolved and a cell with the same name exists in two libraries to be activated then the cell will be taken from the library which was activated first Database Units on Export to GDSII format Three variants of settings are possible e Use default DB Units e Use user DB Units e Use internal DB Units If the Use default DB units button is checked the database unit DB unit of the output GDSII file will be set to 0 00lum automatically it corresponds to Cadence default value If the Use user DB Units button is checked settings of GDSII Output setup allows you to change the value of the UNITS record of GDSII file format database unit and user unit on export to GDSII Then it is necessary to fill the two activated fields DB units and DB units in user units With the optio
550. tion may be repeated 12 30 Simucad Tools Results In Figure 12 32 an instance of NewCe113 with some surrounding is cut from TopCel1l CZAR a AY A SW E uN proof GO OOO OA E OO SEUS Y PUE Pa i sae S TEREI I RERE 010550 2653 A a a la 1 raea i Ry ieee ee ee rae jee H EELEE EEEE ELENE Bla all Elle be re ie Se rs Pet AE ee eee PFI etd SS A A A A A A A E SSS a ARER AREN AREY ARAY ARAN ARENY RORY GATE CEY EEY GERRY ARETY AEEY AAY AERE EEP 5 TA DEPE AAE HERY ATE a FARR BREY GARY R ERAY ARENY ARY UREN ARENY ARARE GERE GERE SRE BERE AERE ER EA oo ram amr Tram 1 O F ar ar e 1 SS am a aY mr n Figure 12 32 Results of Clip In All objects regions wires instances etc that fall completely into the clip box are put into the new cell just as they are e If some instances from an array fall completely into the clip box they constitute a subarray and it is put into the new cell e For regions wires and boxes that are cut by the clip box only pieces that fall into the clip box are converted into regions and put into the new cell e If an instance or an array entry is split by the clip box it is exploded and its elements are clipped out recursively A Clip in operation is similar to a Clip out operation It creates a new cell from all geometry selected by the clip box preserving cell hierarchy in the clipped piece of layout w
551. to be display These two menu commands are also easily accessible by pressing the right mouse button when the cursor point is at the light gray area located at the edge of the EXPERT window Showing hiding the most useful toolbars may be performed by keyboard shortcuts They are assigned by the Setup gt Hotkeys Menus menu command section Application gt Shortcut By selecting the Categories View and the Commands Toolbars gt Command you can assign a shortcut which can later be used to toggle the display of the toolbar Command see Chapter 11 Setup for shortcut customization The Dock Windows are resizable both in height and in width To resize the dock window you must do the following e position your cursor at the edge of the windows to resize and slowly move your cursor it until it changes from its current view to the a sliding cursor e press the left mouse button and drag left right or up down to the desired position then release the button All Dock Windows and toolbars can be undocked from the screen border and moved to a different position To change their position you must do the following e position your cursor in the area free of controls thin areas at the edge with a gray double line see top of Figure 3 4 and wait for the cursor to change from its current view to a cross arrow cursor e double click the right mouse button to undock the window or press the left mouse button drag to the desired location and then re
552. to the width of wires of which the contact is created but the contact cell might contain several rows and columns of box objects in the contact layer To create such a cell you define how many rows and columns you need and what the gap between rows and columns will be When you entered all parameters place the mouse cursor wherever you want the contact to be placed and click left mouse button Alternatively you can enter the coordinates of the new contact in the Numeric input panel and press OK to create contact 5 22 Simucad Creating Layout Objects 5 8 Bus Use the Bus tool to route several wires simultaneously Essentially it works just like the Wire tool except instead of single wires multiple parallel wires are created Y coad Dx oy aoii 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 2 45000 0 0000 45000 0 0000 Mukipath Hew Vertex Delete Vertex Cancel Figure 5 26 Bus Once you selected the menu command Edit gt Create Object gt Bus the Numeric input panel pops up This form is similar to the ordinary wire s Numeric input but it allows you to specify few additional parameters e Number of wires that will be routed e Horizontal and vertical spacing between wires e Alignment of wires or how wires lie relatively to line that defines path Figure 5 27 Bus Routed Through Two Layers Simucad 5 23 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Just as with the regular wire Bus coul
553. tomatically centered on the material they are pointing to whatever the zoom is Ruler The ruler tool is available in the Cross Sectional View window and can be activated exactly in the same way for the layout The corresponding hotkey can also be used to activate this Simucad Tools ruler In order to delete rulers after having done the measurements only the command menu Tools gt Measure gt Remove all rulers can be used E File Cell Edit View Select Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Pcell Setup Window Help las NS AV NV 24 40 15 ie Figure 12 23 Cross Sectional Viewer Example 12 6 Device Linking The EXPERT Device Linker is a tool that allows you to automatically connect and align two instances devices with pins connected to the same net In the current implementation only the instances of the same parameterized cell masters can be linked 12 6 1 Linking Setup To set up P cells for linking add the following components see Section 17 20 3 LAYOUTOBJECT Type for the pin objects linking access direction component 1inkdir and reference to the user defined linking procedure component 1inkcallback For example _pin box 0 0 5 5 Layer Met1 pin net S create get pin linkdir DLD LEFT _pin linkcallback mos linker The following constants DLD_LEFT DLD_RIGHT DLD_TOP DLD_BOTTOM are predefined to set up linking access direction Only pins with opposite directions can be
554. toolbar Load DRG Errors Runs Stared Delete 1 1 RingOsc1_ore Whole hierarchy No 15 26 28 11 05 04 15 26 33 11 05 04 1 demo3 dsf 1 RingOscl_org Whole hierarchy No 14 43 38 1110 04 14 43 43 1110 04 1 demo3dsf Delete All Export Import Checks Select All TP Atidth LT 3 0000 WELL 1 1 1 Width spacing lt 10 lambda Delete Show Al A Display color Errors and Celle dh Rinedsct org 1 erroria List View Tree Wie Details Load In Place Close Figure 14 4 DRC Load Error Dialog Reapply Last Script Selecting Verification gt DRC gt Reapply Last Script allows you to start the last loaded script without entering in DRC Script Panel This command is useful when you would like to start the last script without changing any settings for the current script DRC in Area Selecting Verification gt DRC gt DRC in Area allows you to run a DRC script for a specific part of an IC layout rather than the whole layout After starting this command you should mark a rectangular area on the IC layout area The DRC Script Panel will then open and you will have to load or create a DRC script and click the Run button This script will be run only for the IC layout of the marked area 14 4 Simucad Integrated Layout Verification Tools 14 2 2 Real time DRC Summary Real time DRC is a powerful feature of EXPERT that checks geometrical design rules during construction in other words on the fly Rules for
555. tor dialog panel can be closed by hitting the Esc key or by clicking the Close button If you did load a new stipple library or rename the current library via the Save as operation you are prompted to confirm that the last loaded library will be used with the project in the future The last library name used is saved in the configuration file ecf so in fact there are two ways to change the stipple library from Setup gt Technology gt Layer Wire Setup Stipples Edit command or by loading a custom ecf file After closing the dialog panel you are returned to the stipple selection scenario Wire Setup Every layer may have its own default settings for wires created in it The dialog shown in Figure 11 11 allows you to input the necessary parameters as described in Chapter 2 Basic Notions Primitives on page 2 4 It is invoked by clicking the Wire Style button of the Layer setup 11 24 Wire Style Layer name Metall Erd Style Sye Sample 5 Extend Flush O Round Join Style Extend Weeirame C Fill O Round O Mies Wire Widths Figure 11 11 Wire Style Setup Dialog Simucad Setup Zero Width Wires Sometimes it is necessary to make marks in the layout e g mark centerlines alignment etc by lines in other words by one dimensional objects In EXPERT it is recommended that wires of zero width be used Boxes and polygons of zero thickness are not allowed Even if they a
556. ts um and e Current database unit um The size of the internal measurement unit for a newly created eld file and for an existing loaded eld file respectively Since all coordinates in EXPERT are internally represented as integers the value of this parameter affects e precision of data representation e maximal size of the layout You may select four values from the drop down list 0 0001um 0 001um 0 0lum and 0 1um The first value 0 0001um corresponds to the database unit of some older versions of EXPERT If you want to use a new value of the database unit you must change it before loading from GDSII or other external formats or after loading from EXPERT s ELD format Warning When you change this value in an open project all coordinate values will be recalculated in the current project It has two effects This recalculation may take a noticeable amount of time for large projects If there were libraries linked to the project they may become invalid if they have an old value of database unit In the current version of EXPERT the current project and all its libraries must have the same value of the database unit e Measurement unit The unit of measurement may be selected from the drop down list It can be one of um nm mm cm m mil inch and Lambda custom unit of measurement If Lambda unit is selected you have the option of setting its value in microns in the Measurement unit in um field it is activated
557. tween the centers of contact columns see Figure 11 16 Justification sets the origin of a contact array Note If basic parameters are modified then all instances of the contact are recalculated If default values of user s parameters are modified then each default parameter in all instances is updated and recalculated if needed 11 4 9 Instance Grid When instantiating a cell or an array of cell in Expert with command Edit gt Create Object gt Create Instance Array the cell instance positioning is performed according to the default snap grid set by the Grid Setup panel If you want to have an instance position according to a different snap grid you should activate the menu Setup gt Technology gt Instance Grid Setup You will see the standard grid setup panel described in Section Grid Setup Panel In this window you can change the grid characteristics so that they will be activated when placing a cell on the layout 11 34 Simucad Setup 11 5 GDSII I O Setup Setup gt GDSIT Input Output or Setup gt Setup gt GDSIT Setup gt GDSIT Input GDSII Output provide the following settings On GDSII Input GDSII file extension s Filters file lists in file browser Ignore layer undefined in technology Skips layers not defined in the technology file Ignore DATATYPE Sets DATATYPE value to 0 effectively merging layers with the same GDSII number but with different datatype values Ignore magnification for cell instances ar
558. u can replace layer style without changing the technology file This is done as follows e load a project e set your favorite color and stipple patterns e open the Layer Plan panel by clicking the Plan button in the Layer bar e open the Layer Plan panel either from menu View gt Layer View gt Layer Plan or clicking the Plan button in the Layer bar e add a new plan named e g my_style 1 e save it In this example by default it will be saved in a file my_style 1 elp From now on if you load a project with a compatible technology i e with the same layer names you may load the my_style 1 elp layer plan to set your layer style Note When a layer plan is loaded it does not change the appearance of the layers not listed in it Default FULL __ and DATA__ Layer Plans When a project is loaded EXPERT automatically creates layer plans with the names FULL _ and DATA _ FULL_ layer plan shows all layers present in the technology DATA __ layer plan shows only layers that contain geometry in the current cell These layer plans are automatically updated when you open a cell or select one of these plans from the layer plan drop down list in the Layer bar Layer Setup Dialog The Layer Setup dialog contains the list of layer names in default order specified by the technology file You can access this panel in two ways Simucad 11 19 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual e With the menu Setup gt Technology gt Layer
559. u may click the center of the rotation by mouse then hit the Tab key to jump into the Numeric Input dialog and input the numeric value for the rotation angle Note 2 Rotation of cell arrays by a non orthogonal angle is disallowed 8 5 4 Mirroring Operations Purpose To perform mirror reflection of the selected objects in the edited cell There are two simplified mirroring operations vertical and horizontal flip Edit Mirroring Vertical Flip operation reflects the objects with respect to the horizontal axis Edit Mirroring Horizontal Flip reflects the objects with respect to the vertical axis By default the mirroring axis goes through the center of the minimal bounding box of the selected objects In addition the Setup gt Editor Viewer gt Editing form provides a self descriptive option Flip rotate single selected instance array with respect to its origin Figure 8 6 shows the two selected highlighted objects before and after mirroring The illustration in the center shows a Vertical flip of the left illustration The Horizontal flip is presented in the illustration to the right The operation does not change the contents of the EXPERT clipboard and the selected state of objects Figure 8 6 Horizontal and vertical flips 8 5 5 Set Origin The menu command Edit gt Set Origin allows you to select a new origin for the current cell by clicking on the mouse at the required point 8 8 Simucad Other Edit Submenu
560. uded not included into the layer list of the Layer bar Simucad 11 17 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Note You can easily filter alphabetically which layers will be included in the Layer bar thanks to the text field at the bottom of the Layer bar Typing one or several characters in his field will display only the layer names beginning with these characters or containing these characters The last feature is useful when you have too many layers and you are tired of scrolling up and down the layer list If you click on the Plans button in the layer bar the Layer Plan panel appears as shown in Figure 11 7 The Layer Plan panel can also be opened with menu View gt Layer View Layer Plan gt Setup Each particular combination of visibility selectability inclusion may be assigned a name and added to a drop down list of Layer Plans This makes it easy to switch between different layer plans In the Layer Plan panel shown in Figure 11 7 a five column table is used for the list of the layer names Layer name Filling Include Visible and Selectable Layer Plan electable 20 Plan mame FULL_ DATA Metal _Casrent F az Filing mode Es e Ea E Es Ea Cs Cs E Es Cs Cs Cs EE Es Es a a i Perene a a vi ii m a I ii a a I ii a a I i a I ii a I e Figure 11 7 Layer Plan Using the second column you may set individual filling modes for layer
561. ult value for PCell parameter BODY Provides the implementation of EXPERT S PCell Format DO body Arguments body Simucad 17 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual A block that defines the PCell s implementation Example DEFINE PCELL square REPLACE PARAMETER posx TYPE DOUBLE DEFAULT 0 0 PARAMETER posy TYPE DOUBLE DEFAULT 0 0 PARAMETER size TYPE DOUBLE DEFAULT 5 0 BODY BEGIN box posx posy size size box posx posy size 2 size 2 END 17 4 2 Cell Procedures CELL EXISTS Returns TRUE if specified cell exists and FALSE if otherwise Syntax ret CELL_EXISTS cell mame Parameters cell_name type STRING The name of the cell Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the cell exists and FALSE if otherwise Example display cell_exists nand2 GET_CELL_BBOX Calculates the bounding box of the cell Syntax bbox GET_ CELL BBOX cell_ name Parameter cell_name type STRING The name of the cell Return Value bbox type RECT The bounding box of the cell with the name cel1_name Example gt bb get_cell bbox gates NAND2 Calculates the bounding box of the cell NAND2 from the library with the logical name gates and places it into the variable bb where 17 16 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell e b ypos is the y coordinate of the lower side of the bounding box e bb xpos is the x coordinate of the left side of the boundi
562. un e bindkey keyboard shortcut custom menu and custom colors setup e autosave setup e viewing and editing options setups Window Help Editor viewer um len Technology General Cross sectional views Layer VireSetup GDS Input Output SH ee CIF Input Output pee Connection Setup Device Setup Applicon Input Output DRE Script Save Technology File Import Technology DRC Guard Hotkeys Menus Colors Hotkey Info Save Shortcuts Load Shortcuts Fix Setup Export Setup Import Setup Save Setup Restore Setup Restore Defaults Figure 11 1 Expert Setup Submenu All the panels which can be accessed with the Setup menu are gathered in the same window the Preferences window In addition a number of operations have their own modes to be set up before execution These modes are found in the corresponding menus Simucad 11 1 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 11 2 Managing Setups In EXPERT all settings may be roughly divided into two main groups technology settings and editor viewer preferences 11 2 1 Technology Settings Technology settings are inherently related to the design itself They are stored in the corresponding technology file with a tcn extension and in the project file itself if it is in EXPERT S internal format eld See Chapter 2 Basic Notions Section 2 5 8 Technology files ten file for more i
563. urrent project Example 2 NW gt cell new mux inverter Creates cell inverter1 in the library with logical name mux CELL PRINT Plots the visible part of the layouts using the current plotting parameters Plotting parameters can be exported to the EXPERT settings file Setup gt Export Setup Using XI command IMPORT EXPERT SETTINGS you may print the current layout with particular plotting parameters Format CELL PRINT Example gt c61L1l print CELL RENAME Renames the specified cell Format CELL RENAME old_cell name new_cell name Arguments Simucad 17 13 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual old_cell_name type STRING The name of cell new_cell_ name type STRING The new name of cell Example yr Ws gt rename cell inverter invi CELL SAVE Saves the listed cells Format CELL SAVE cell_name Arguments cell_name type SEQUENCE cell_name cell_namel cell_namen is a sequence of cells to be saved If the command has no arguments then the current cell is saved Example gt cell save inverter nand2 3 Cells inverter and nand2 is saved CELL SAVEAS Creates a copy of the cell and adds the new copied cell to the project Discards all changes in the source cell Used to save last modifications of the specified cell to a new one and restore the original content Format CELL SAVEAS cell_name new_cell_name Arguments cell_name ty
564. ustom is specified refpointx type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE refpointy type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Note Named arguments refpointx and refpointy are used only for shifting modes specified by switches inwards or outwards Use for outwards and inwards switches Switches sna Minimal rstual custom Simucad 17 79 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Cluster of switches to specify the grid If no switches in the cluster are specified the snap switch is used 2 cc e snap minimal and visual define snap minimal and visual grids correspondingly e custom switch means that grid is defined by named arguments stepx stepy shifxy and shifty nearest northeast outwards inwards Cluster of switches to specify shifting direction for the off grid points If no switches in the cluster is specified the nearest switch is used e nearest switch means that offgrid points will be shifted to the closest grid point e northeast switch means that offgrid points will be shifted to the grid point with both coordinate increase e outwards switch means that offgrid points will be shifted to the closest grid point in the direction outwards with respect to a specified reference point by the named arguments refpointx and refpointy e inwards switch means that offgrid points will be shifted to the closest grid point in the direction inwards with respect to a
565. ut i GOS Output Nets A E CIF Input Reestract Connectivity z CIF Input Outpuat O z CIF Output Show Mets Applicon Input Global Nets Shorted Nets Only Unfinished Nets Only Closest Points Only H Applicon Output 2 OASIS Input Output DRC Setup H Built in DAC command setup show Pins DAC script run setup Show Ports Cross Sectional Viewer Setup Update Nets i Cross Sectional viewer Netlist Panel Load Netlist El Description Ruler Figure 3 14 Custom Menu Setup For more information about pop up menus see Chapter 11 Setup Section 11 9 Shortcut Custom Menu Custom Color Setups 3 4 4 Simple Custom Submenu There is a simple way to add custom commands to EXPERT s menu You can add menu items that execute xi commands or procedures For more information about these commands and procedures see Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell To do this define a file named custom mnu with the syntax described below into EXPERT s executable directory and start or restart EXPERT Below is an example of the custom mnu file To find this file select the Simucad Example Expert folder of the CELEBRITY installation 10 gt amp Debug amp BOox box U 0 100 100 Zoom Get amp point get_point gt EXC amp Wordpad spawn C WinNT notepad exe nowait Simucad 3 15 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Wordpad amp 2 spawn C WinNT notepad exe amp
566. ut Zoom To Fit and Zoom Selected In addition an easy control over the visible area is provided by the Cell Map Window 9 4 1 Zoom to Fit Purpose Shows the whole layout of the active cell Figure 9 9 demonstrates the contents of the active window before and after the Zoom To Fit operation Figure 9 9 Zoom to Fit 9 4 2 Zoom Selected Purpose The menu command View Zoom Selected zooms from the current window to the selected objects in the edited cell Remember that during EIP the edited cell is different from the current cell 9 4 3 Zoom Into Window Purpose Replaces the image of the current window with the part of the layout located inside the selected box area There are two ways of zooming to a window First you may click at any two opposite corners of the required zoom box Alternatively it is possible to define the zoom box by drag mouse action Depress the left mouse button at one point drag the mouse to the second point then release the button The center of the new image window is located at the center of the chosen box and its resolution is magnified so that the drawn zoom box covers the whole window Figure 9 10 demonstrates the Zoom Into Window operation 9 8 Simucad Viewing the Layout Figure 9 10 Zoom In to Window 9 4 4 Zoom Out of Window Purpose Replaces the image of the current window with a zoomed out version The box drawn with the use of the Zoom Out of Window too
567. ut gt Load Netlist submenu to load the desired netlist A window titled Choose netlist file will open allowing you to make your selection of netlist Simucad 12 7 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual After the selection is completed if you press Open a netlist panel window titled Netlist Editor path of the netlist file will open This window can also be open by Tools gt Netlist Driven Layout Netlist Panel The Netlist panel see Figure 12 7 can be divided in three windows e The Netlist Rover window which help you browse through the netlist hierarchy e The Windows window which list the netlist window currently opened e The Netlist window displaying the loaded netlist is illustrated in the center of Figure 12 7 Netlist Editor N gt CAD project NDL latchi net e O x File Edit Find Window _ x IG 4 amp 18 xi EE a Scholar Spice Netlist Generator Windows gt E amy a E ry Th EN ER 5 CALATCH a Section name SCHLR C3 C a ES ieee Section timestamp 16 53 06 00 NACAD project NDL Match net Er E MNL Structdef name TRANS I 11 Structdef attribute BUS EXPANDED El E MPL MODEL HNL NHOS 3 5 MODEL MPL PHOS tl SUBCKT LATCH IN INB F Sm A miN MP11 14 INBE 2 Y SS MNL 1 0 250 W 0 70 M 1 F fall HP9 z2_Y IN 1_A YDD MPL L 0 250 W 1 60 M 1 E MNL HFS EX IN 1_A YSS MHL 1L 0 250 W 0 70 H 1 S i HF7 1 4 INE X VDD MPL L 0 25U W 1 60 M 1 ae HZ 1 Y YSS VOD 2 Y INVE PARA
568. ved layers of the current opened cell will be deleted e hierarchy cleans derived layers in the current cell and derived layers of its whole cell hierarchy e project cleans derived layers in the all cells of the loaded cell library DERIVED GENERATE Generates derived layers Format DERIVED GENERATE active all primitives cellwise flat layer Switches active all e active default switch means that the active derived layer will be generated e all invokes derivation of all derived layers described in the current technology Simucad 17 31 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual DERIVED LAYER Prevents recalculating derived layers after the last one is activated Format DERIVED LAYER freeze true false Argument freeze true false type BOOLEAN If specified or freeze true then the derived layer is not calculated upon activation otherwise the derived layer will be recalculated LAYERPLAN LOAD Loads layer plans from a specified disk file Note Layer plan should be compatible with current technology Format LAYERPLAN LOAD pathname Arguments pathname Type STRING Specifies the name of a disk file that contains EXPERT layer plans Example gt layerplan load d temp asa elp SCRATCH CLEAN Cleans the scratch layers in the specified cell scope Format SCRATCH CLEAN primitives hierarchy project Switches Joramitaves hrerarchy oro ec Argu
569. volved in DRC scripts They are described in Section Scratch Layers and Section Edge Layers Individual Grid If this box is checked individual grid settings will be used for this layer Grid Setup This button invokes the standard grid setup dialog described in Section 11 4 6 Grid Setup with the only difference being that the selected grid settings will be applied to the layer in question only Restrictions for Layer Names Layer names cannot use those characters that are forbidden in file names The additional list of restrictions is e Layer name length must be at most 255 characters e The following characters are forbidden in layer names e All non printable characters with codes 0 31 and above 126 7 e Space character e The first character cannot be amp it is reserved for marking temporary layers in the DRC script language Layer Color Setup To change layer color click the Color button The Select color panel appears see Figure 11 9 Either predefined colors may be selected or a new one of your own may be constructed Select color CONEA colors some ATT E EE Hue 240 Bed 0 mT et Sat 255 Greer 0 mmm est Wat 255 Blue 255 Define Custom Colors gt gt Alpha channel 255 Figure 11 9 Select Color Panel Color Panel Color panel is used both for creation and selection of a layer s color Layer Color Selection This color setup panel invoked
570. w Show info _ Cancel o awy E Figure 4 5 Cell open dialog box Examples e nv means that all cells with names containing nv will be listed env inverter nvid3 e p means that cells with name containing letter p will be listed pie ape up e m x means that all cell names with first m and third x will be shown mux1 mix e a r filters all names with the second letter a that contains r after it partran layerl To apply a filter type it and press the Tab or Enter key To remove a filter to see all cells clear the filter field and press the Tab or Enter key e All Cells radio button shows all cells from the Project file e Top level cells only radio button shows only cells that are not instanced in any other cell e Cancel If this button is clicked no layout windows will be opened after loading a file e OK If this button is clicked the selected cell will be opened in a layout window If you type the Enter key in a cell dialog 1t behaves as follows e Ifthe filter field is being edited the caret cursor is in this field the specified filter is applied and the corresponding cell name list is displayed e Otherwise the selected cell is opened as if the OK button has been clicked Every time Open Cell dialog is called it uses a recently set up cell name filter and All cells Top level only group choice that are preserved during the session Optionally cell selection dialog may contain the c
571. w These functions can be used with the hotkeys which are active in EXPERT for the corresponding functions of zoom on the layout Step by step view The Cross Sectional Viewer has a feature that allows you to view the actual individual fabrication processes one step at a time and in the exact sequence that they occur There are four blue arrows buttons managing this step by step view in the Cross Sectional View window e First Operation and Complete Sequence buttons will respectively display the cross section state after the first operation and after the last operation of the fabrication sequence e Previous Operation and Next Operation buttons allow seeing respectively the cross section before the current step view and after the next process step of the fabrication sequence The current process step is described on the right side of the step by step buttons thanks to the Material name and the Operation name of the last processed operation Update Cross Sectional view It can be useful to update a cross section regards to some changes in the layout or in the process parameters By clicking the Update button green arrow in the Cross Sectional View window you will regenerate the selected cross section without having to redraw the cut line Show Hide material labels This button is just at the right of the Run button It can be used to display or hide pop up labels containing the name of each material of the cross section These labels are au
572. wes A AAA ws 9 15 9 10 1 Toggle Reference Point ais aia iria ee 9 15 9 10 2 Activate Reference PO Mt o oooooccccoooccorn e ete eee n etn ete eens 9 15 9 10 3 Traveling Reference Point aia a A eka at ata 9 15 9 10 4 TO Reference PONI ais pd A peewee es da 9 16 9 10 5 Distance from Reference Point 0 cc ccc ccc eee tenet nee e etn eens 9 16 SM WAN LESS coa a o ana ona een aes 9 16 A A na a A A ET 9 16 OA ie ROGraW REJON ss pican e a ia Wie Dr e ue eee 9 16 90 GUISO GIOSSMANG tase seda olaaa FE 9 16 Side SNOW Md td as ee 9 16 9 TLO DOCK WINDOWS 2220 tes nied boned head asidero 9 16 O11 OF TOODA A viene Po adabeteerwneriwoed ayes dade vor sees RT 9 16 Simucad IX Expert ExpertViews User s Manual Chapter 10 Hierarchy Operations raid 10 1 10 1 Hierarchy MON ciar ab 10 1 10 2 Hierarchy Navigator Project Tree 0oooocococccccron o 10 1 10 2 1 Project Mee de AI a 10 1 10235 Edt IMPA Enn ri AAA 10 3 103 1 Enter into SUDOCl cnt aire asirio ias lid 10 3 10 3 2 Direct Pick of Object in Hierarchy cir A A A ad 10 5 VOTO Ura aea EC 0 gn RA 10 5 103 4 EX 20 rnae nn o LE 10 6 10 30 52 End GING DIU eet duis a bie een wate a E 10 6 1030 EIP GMC td A ocd Gace be ieee ane a weet eee 10 7 10 4 Create Cell IN PlaC sonia iaa Gamat 10 7 10 6 Explode Selec ents ase sienna ee AAA een ee A ees 10 8 10 6 Explode Allo aura tinh oan ainia lanar daa 10 8 1d AA A 10 9 10 8 Replacing Cell Instances ai A A A
573. when an interaction with the user is necessary When all required parameters are specified as a rule the OK button is pressed to apply these parameters and to close the dialog to force the program to accept parameters without exiting the dialog box the Apply button is pressed if it exists The Cancel button is pressed to exit the dialog box without applying parameter changes The parameters may be input using the following dialog controls e Edit boxes are for parameters that you type in as arbitrary strings for example cell names A special case is when only numerical values are acceptable Such controls are referred to as numerical fields e Drop down lists are used when text parameters have a predefined set of values The Drop down button marked by a small black triangle pointing down when pressed displays the selection list You can substitute the current value of a parameter for another one by clicking with the left mouse button on a value from the list e Radio buttons are convenient when a small list of mutually exclusive choices is available To make a selection click the mouse on the circle located near each value of the parameter all of them are presented on the screen The circle near the chosen item is filled You can only switch on one circle from the radio button group at a time e Check boxes are used when there are a small set of not mutually exclusive choices All these values are presented inside the dialog box a
574. wing process by simply pressing the new icon It is useful when the layout is very large and you are drawing with many details 3 2 2 Running Previous Command Selecting Tools gt Previous Tool menu command switches EXPERT into the previous editing tool 3 3 Entering and Exiting Expert To run EXPERT you must select the command from Windows Start menu or by shortcuts created during the installation of Simucad s CELEBRITY TOOLS Start gt Programs gt Simucad gt Expert or double click on the EXPERT icon on the Windows desktop panel to run the most recent installed version of EXPERT Start gt Programs gt Simucad gt Versions gt allows you to run any previous version of EXPERT You may run several copies of an application on the same computer using one Simucad s license To use this type of license a special license file named extended floating license is required If using a Unix or Linux environment EXPERT can be launch by typing expert in the following directory lt inmetalldi gt bin You can exit EXPERT in a number of ways e Hit Alt F4 on the keyboard while EXPERT S window is active e On the Windows task bar click right mouse button at EXPERT S icon and select Close from the pop up menu Linux users can exit in a similar fashion e Choose EXPERT S menu command File gt Exit from the pull down menu e Press the X mark at the top right corner of EXPERT S main window e Not to say about killing EXPERT by the Applic
575. wire 0 0 1070 10 5 5 5 7itushenc mibverjoine ereate topolydgon Creates the wire and converts it to a polygon 17 8 3 Instance Object Creation INSTANCE Creates selects or deletes an instance of a cell Format INSTANCE xpos ypos cell cellname scale value rotate value params value parnames value property name value name value name value ftext text text text replace layoutobject net netname name instancename conn connectivity LAnorizontal vertical create find delete Simucad 17 49 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual select reselect add deselect pin get Arguments xpos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e X coordinate of the instance position ypos type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE e y coordinate of the instance position Named Arguments cell cellname type STRING Specifies the cell for instancing If the named argument cell is not present then the instancing of the cell is assigned by cell activate command scale value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Allows changing of the size of the cell instance Default value is 1 rotate value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the rotation angle Defaut value is 0 params param param gt param type SEQUENCE The sequence of parameter values for a parameterized cell If the named parameter parnames is not present then the
576. wise NIL Example gt contact Ml P 2 5 width 1 length 1 Creates the new instance of contact M1_P in the position 2 5 with width 1 and length 1 17 8 5 Floorplan Object Creation FLOORPLAN CHIP Sets chip attributes Format FLOORPLAN CHIP name value posx value posy value sizex value sizey value ffixsi izex nofixs izex fixsizey nofixsizey ratiox value ratioy value PELXratio notixratio 17 54 Simucad Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell minarea value maxarea value fixarea nofixarea blockbordespacing value pinsizex value pinsizey value blockspacing value padsizex value padsizey value Named Arguments name value type STRING Specifies the name of the chip posx valuel type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the X coordinate of the chip position posy value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the Y coordinate of the chip position sizex value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the horizontal chip size sizey value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies the vertical chip size ratiox value ratioy value type INTEGER Specifies the aspect ratio of horizontal and vertical chip size minarea value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies minimal value for chip area maxarea value type INTEGER FLOAT DOUBLE Specifies maximal value for chip
577. ws you to set the ruler font color and the style of ruler marking Font and color may be selected from the resources provided by the OS e Font Fonts are changed for all rulers while all other parameters can be applied either to new rulers only or to the existing ones e Color Color may be chosen for every ruler e Graduate rulers If this option is on the ruler may be set to one of three graduation options available e Auto It corresponds to the old way of graduation The ruler is subdivided to make grades readable e Fixed Step Specify any fixed graduation step in current measurement units e Semidecimal A variant of auto where the marked grades are multiples of 5 multiplied by a degree of 10 Examples 0 21 0 215 0 22 0 225 0 23 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 e Endmarks only Display the total length of ruler segments e Apply to all rulers Allows you to set up the same ruler style for all rulers existing at this moment 11 3 7 Infix Page This page is to set infix mode for some editor commands that normally would require the input of two or more points by mouse click e Ruler Infix mode e Zoom Infix mode e Box Infix mode In this mode if a command is started by its bindkey then the first input point is taken at the mouse position at the moment of hitting the bindkey without mouse click This way the operation requires one mouse click less If the command is started from menu then you still need to
578. x Figure 13 5 iad Rules Dialog de P cell par sed hi n you place instance of P cell and define default values for them ing the PCe ee ameters command e Compile graphical P cell PCell gt Compile to produce P cell Parameterized Cells e Test a graphical P cell by placing P cell instances with different parameter values or using the PCell gt 5PCell View command The last one shows a dialog form with a list of calculated cell a corresponding to a specific set of parameter values see Figure 13 6 You can add a new set of parameter values or remove the selected calculated cell if the last one is not instanced PCell lt graphpcell gt ntrar Parameters r 1 a 1 3 1 Figure 13 6 PCell Viewer 13 3 2 Defining Graphical P cell Rules Automatic generation of a P cell from graphical P cell is performed on the basis of the predefined P cell rules P cell rules can be assigned both for a P cell control block and for primitive or instance objects If a P cell rule is defined for a control block then all layout objects that are included in or intersected by the control block will be affected by a specified P cell rule The following types of predefined P cell rules can be specified for graphical P cell objects in PCell Rules dialog panel e Stretch defines a p cell rule for stretching objects Use the Add Stretch button in PCell Rule Dialog to activate Stretch form see Figure ax Direction deuel l right Exp
579. x double dSy SELECT_BOOL_MODE selMode SBM_SELECT_LAST BOOL ExpApiSelectByBox RCEAPoint ptStart RCEAPoint ptEnd selMode SBM SELECT LAST BOOL ExpApiSelectByBox RCEARect rtRect SELECT _BOOL_ MODE selMode SBM_SELECT_LAST Purpose Selects all Objects by the specified box region Parameters double dSx double dSy Start point of Selection region double dEx double dEy End point of Selection region RCEAPoint ptStart Start point of Selection region RCEAPoint ptEnd End point of Selection region RCEARect rtRect Start and end points of Selection region 18 48 double dEx double dEy SELECT_BOOL_MODE Simucad Expert API SELECT _BOOL_MODE selMode Selection mode or current mode if it is omitted Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectByBox 0 0 0 0 100 0 100 0 18 11 Selection Modes 18 11 1 Set Select Mode BOOL ExpApiSetSelectMode SELECT_BOOL_MODE Mode Purpose Sets the selection mode Parameters SELECT_BOOL_MODE Mode SBM_SELECT_SELECT The picked objects are added to the selected set SBM_SELECT_RESELECT The previously selected objects are deselected and the picked objects become selected SBM_SELECT_DESELECT The picked objects are removed from the selected set Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSetSelectMode SBM_SELECT_RESELECT 18 11 2 Get Select Mode SELECT_BO
580. x y is X and Y coordinates of i th vertex accordingly You may substitute any x y pair by variable of POINT type see examples below Named Arguments layer layer_name type STRING See the description above on 17 40 Simucad 17 43 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual See Section 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches for a description of other named arguments and switches Return Value An object representing layout object type LAYOUTOBJECT if get switch is used otherwise NIL Example 1 gt vl_x 0 gt vl_y 0 2polygqon via x savy gt AO Art 2rAr Lt DA or POLYgOn UU O Al Zea pe ea or gt pt point_create 2 2 gt polygon 0 0 4 0 4 2 pt 2 4 0 4 Creates the same polygon in the active layer Example 2 polyaor 10 0 450 Apar Ll 2y Sa O player Pony Creates a polygon in the layer POLY Example 3 gt polygon 0 0 4 0 4 2 2 2 2 4 0 4 select Searches for the object with specified parameters and selects or deselects according to object select mode defined by select mode command or Select gt Selection Modes setting Example 4 gt polygon 10 0 4 0 Ay Lp 2Ze2e Ed 074 Create select Fada Creates the object in the active layer and selects 1t selection status of other objects is not changed Example 5 gt polygon 0 0 4 0 4 2 2 2 2 4 0 4 delete Deletes the object with specified attributes in the active layer if it exists Example 6 gt polygon 0 0 4 U it
581. xpApiGroupsCreate 18 9 2 Remake Groups BOOL ExpApiGroupsRemake Purpose Destroys selected groups and creates new group from selected objects Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGroupsRemake 18 9 3 Destroy Groups BOOL ExpApiGroupsDestroy Purpose Destroys selected groups Parameters None Simucad 18 45 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGroupsDestroy 18 9 4 Destroy All Groups BOOL ExpApiGroupsDestroyAll Purpose Destroys all groups Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiGroupsDestroyAll 18 10 Selection Operations 18 10 1 Select Newest BOOL ExpApiSelectNewest Purpose Selects object s created by the last editing operation Parameters None Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise Example BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectNewest 18 10 2 Select Object BOOL ExpApiSelectObject HOBJECT hObject Purpose Selects Object Parameters HOBJECT hObject Handle of Object to select Return BOOL TRUE if successful FALSE otherwise 18 46 Simucad Expert API Example HOBJECT hObject some object BOOL bResult ExpApiSelectObject hObject 18 10 3 Select Layer BOOL ExpApiSelectlayer LPCTSTR szLay
582. xt text 0 0 Expert height 0 5 width 0 5 7ereate det gt text 0 0 EXPERT_LISA height 0 5 width 0 5 slant slope 90 gt replace old_text The first command creates text and returns one type LAYOUTOBJECT The second command replaces this object by the new text Example 7 Sod POX O O 5 5 fereate 79et 3 gt text 0 0 EXPERT LISA height 0 5 width 0 5 topleft Pattacato ol The first command creates the box The second command attaches the text EXPERT LISA to this layout object b1 Example 8 De ADOS DD frvexse 1 40 0 Tt text IT Ory Der Os false TA BOLLOMLEF LD truek create get gt text 0 0 text1 height 0 5 width 0 5 topleft jactachtirom p23 The first command creates the box with attached text The second command detaches this text from this layout object b2 WIRE Creates selects or deletes a wire By default wire attributes are defined by the corresponding layer You can change wire attributes using named arguments and switches The STYLE WIRE command is used for redefinition of the default wire attributes of the active layer Format WIRE kee Vip ho poy sr ae a width width angle angle layer layername property name value name gt value name value text text text text replace layoutobject extend flushend roundend fext joint ftaibijorine F rounajolnat mMitcer S
583. y Format EXTRACT CONNECTIVITY Example gt extract connectivity This xi command is useful as a preparation for node probing for large layouts NODE_PICK Picks a node for further operations Syntax ret NODE_PICK pt layer_name Parameters pt type POINT Specifies a point inside of the probed object layer_name type STRING Simucad 17 89 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual Specifies the layer of the probed object If the empty string is specified then the probed object is assumed to be in the current layer Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the pick node succeeded and FALSE otherwise NODE _PICK_BY NAME Picks a node by its name Syntax ret NODE PICK BY NAME node_name Parameter e node_name type String Specifies the name of node to be picked Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the pick was succeeded and FALSE otherwise NODE_GET_NAME Returns the name of the picked node Syntax node_ name NODE_GET_NAME Return Value node_name type STRING Name of the picked node If no nodes picked then NIL returned NODE_COPY Copies picked node to the new cell Syntax ret NODE COPY cell name Parameters cell name type STRING Specifies cell name where selected node will be placed Return Value ret type BOOLEAN TRUE if the operation succeeded and FALSE otherwise e g if cel1_name already exists 17 18 Library User Management Commands and Procedures
584. yer Metall LeftyBott 10 0000 2 5000 4 140 0000 P 78 0000 Size W 4 0000 H 35 0000 5el OJO Hier 0 0 R W OMB Silvaco 2005 y Figure 3 11 Cross Section Feature The Window Title on the top of the EXPERT window shows the project name and the name of the cell opened in the active layout window These names are shown in the following formats Expert PROJECT_NAME CELL_NAME for ordinary work with an opened cell and Expert PROJECT_NAME CELL_NAME_0 CELL_NAME_N for Edit in Place mode see Section 10 3 Edit in Place where CELL_NAME_0 CELL NAME _N is the ordered list of cell names that constitute the Edit in Place chain of nested cells A Message Line at the bottom of EXPERT S screen provides messages and tips during an EXPERT session Simucad User Interface 3 1 2 Toolbars and Dock Windows EXPERT S default screen layout with many toolbars or dock windows around is sometimes inconvenient the user may desire more area for layout plane You may switch them on off by the menu command View gt Toolbars and View Dock Windows respectively It shows the list of check boxes corresponding to the different toolbars and dock windows You may check uncheck the specific item in this list and see the immediate changes in the screen layout In both of these sub menus there is the option Customize which if selected opens the setup panel allowing you to check which dock windows and toolbars you would like
585. yer two identification numbers which are the layer number also called GDSIT number and the Datatype number In the layer list click the layer name whose settings you want to change This name appears in the bottom Name field and the layer number and datatype appear in the GDSII parameters field Several restrictions are checked when entering layer name and parameters e Ifa duplicate name is entered you will be prompted to repeat input e Ifyou enter a GDSII number or a datatype out of the default 0 255 range you will be warned and allowed to change your mind e If you enter 2 layers with same GDSII number and Datatype you will be prompted to change at least one of the parameters in order to differentiate the two layers Note this check depends of the option allow layers with same GDSI numbers and datatype described in Section 11 4 Layer order The order of the layers in the Layer Setup panel is the technology order It can be changed by moving the layer up or down in the list thanks to the corresponding buttons of the Order field The new order will be saved with the project Layer suppression You may delete the selected layer by pressing the Delete button 11 20 Simucad Setup Derived layer This field concerns the layers which are defined with boolean operations between existing layers This feature is described in Section Derived Layers Scratch layers Edge layers This characteristic concerns the layers which are in
586. you try to pick a segment and move the cursor you will see that segments close to the cursor are highlighted like for the preselection At the same time the distance from the point to the highlighted segment is displayed at the end of the ruler When you see the required segment highlighted click the mouse second time to finish the measurement After that an ordinary ruler will be drawn starting from the point and orthogonal to the segment see Figure 12 4 Figure 12 4 Examples of Point to line Distance Simucad 12 5 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual 12 2 7 Distance from Reference Point When a temporary reference point is activated from the submenu View by Activate Reference Point or Toggle Reference Point commands the distance and the angle from the cursor position to the reference point are shown in the Dist and Ang fields of the Status bar 12 3 Xi Script Submenu Only a brief description of the commands in this submenu are given here The commands are described in detail in Chapter 17 Expert Interface Scripts XI Shell Section 17 22 Access to Xi commands Tools Hierarchy Verification Libraries Setup Window Help Measure sE HE ew HE a AA Script Panel Netist Driven Layout E xo xiCommand Line amp Log 2 Cut By Line Cut By Line Modes Figure 12 5 Xi script Submenu Script Panel command invokes the Xi Editor for editing and running xi scripts Xi Command Line enables the
587. ype INTEGER GDSII number of the specified layer Example gt num get_GDSII_number Met1 Gets the GDSII number of the layer Met 1 GET_GDSII_DATATYPE Returns GDSII data type of the specified layer Syntax EDSIT d GET GDSTL DATATYPE layer name Parameter Simucad 17 37 Expert and ExpertViews User s Manual layer_name type STRING Name of the layer Return Value GDSII_dt type INTEGER GDSII data type of the specified layer Example gt GDSII_dt get_GDSII_datatype Met1 Gets the GDSII datatype of the layer Met 1 LAYER _SET_VIEW_ATTRS Sets or clears the layer attribute Syntax LAYER_SET_VIEW_ATTRS layer_name attr_type flag Parameters layer_name type STRING Name of the layer If layer_name is an empty string then the specified attribute is set for all layers attr_type predefined constants Can be one of LVA VLOSIBLE Sers layer Visibility LVA_SELECTABLE sets layer selectability flag type BOOLEAN TRUE to set the attribute or FALSE to clear the attribute Example gt layer_set_view_attrs Met1 LVA_SELECTABLE FALSE Makes the layer Met 1 unselectable 17 8 Commands for Creating Objects Note Objects are created in the edited cell and primitives are created in the active layer see CELL OPEN and LAYER commands in Section 17 6 Setup Commands 17 8 1 Common Named Arguments and Switches These named arguments and swi

Expert ExpertViews

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents